JP6912130B1 - Game table - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game table having a characteristic as a directing means with respect to a game table such as a ball game machine (pachinko machine) and a rotating body game machine (slot machine). SOLUTION: After the electric support state (a time saving state) that shifts after the end of the big hit is started, the a time saving state is displayed when the result of the variation display of the special symbol of 100 times of loss is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit. Is finished. The play time shifts when the number of times the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of alignment is displayed is 750 times without becoming a big hit after the jackpot game ends and the probability shifts to the low probability state. After the play time is started, the play time ends when the result of the variation display of the special symbol of 950 times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit. The play time does not start from the end of the play time until it becomes a big hit. a The effect executed in the time saving state and the effect executed during the play time are different. [Selection diagram] FIG. 25

Description

The present invention relates to a game table represented by a ball game machine (pachinko machine) and a rotating body game machine (slot machine).

In pachinko machines and other game consoles, obstacles that change the direction in which the game ball falls, and a winning opening, starting opening, and variable winning opening where the game ball can win are provided in the game area of the game board. It is common. When a game ball wins a prize, the player is given a privilege such as paying out the prize ball (see, for example, Patent Document 1 and the like).

In addition, such amusement machines are known to be equipped with directing means.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2008-20302

However, in the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the production means.

In view of the above circumstances, it is an object of the present invention to provide a game table having a feature in the production means.

The game console of the present invention that solves the above object is
A symbol display means that can execute variable display of special symbols,
A game control means that can control the game state,
A production means that can perform multiple productions,
It is a game table equipped with
The game control means is a means that can be controlled into a low probability state and a high probability state.
The high-probability state is a state in which the probability that the result of the variation display of the special symbol becomes a big hit is higher than that of the low-probability state.
The game control means is a means capable of starting the first time saving state.
The game control means is a means capable of starting a second time saving state.
The first time saving state is a time saving state that may be started when the jackpot game ends and shifts to the low probability state.
When the result of the variation display of the special symbol of the fourth number of times off is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit after the first time saving state is started, the first time saving state ends.
The second time-saving state is the number of times that the result of the variation display of the special symbol that is out of the way is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the big hit game is completed and the state shifts to the low probability state (hereinafter, "fitting"). It is a time-saving state that may shift when the number of times is the first number.
When the result of the variation display of the special symbol of the second number of times off is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit after the start of the second time saving state, the second time saving state ends.
From the end of the second time saving state to the big hit, the second time saving state is not started.
The effect executed in the first time saving state and the effect executed in the second time saving state are different.
It is characterized by that.

According to the game console of the present invention, it is possible to realize a game console having a feature in the production means.

It is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine according to this embodiment as seen from the front side (player side). It is a rear view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back side. (A) is a schematic front view of the game board viewed from the front side (player side), and (b) is an enlarged view of various lamps mounted on the main control lamp board arranged on the game board. It is a representation figure. It is a figure explaining the structure of the variable winning apparatus. It is a functional block diagram of a pachinko machine. An example of a display symbol of a pachinko machine, (a) shows an example of a stop display symbol of special figure 1, (b) shows an example of a stop display symbol of special figure 2, and (c) shows an example of a stop display symbol of special figure 2. An example of a decorative symbol is shown, and FIG. 3D is a diagram showing an example of a stop display symbol of a normal drawing. Main control unit It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the timer interrupt process of a main control part. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the table for determining whether or not the normal figure is correct, (b) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the table for determining whether or not the special figures 1 and 2 are correct, and (c) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the table for determining whether or not the result is correct. It is a figure which shows an example of the contents of the distribution table for special figure determination, (d) is a figure explaining the specification of the play time (b time reduction state). It is a flowchart which shows the process flow in the 1st sub-control unit of a pachinko machine, (a) is the flowchart of the 1st sub-control unit main processing, and (b) is the 1st sub-control unit command reception interrupt processing. It is a flowchart, and (c) is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process flow in the 1st sub-control unit of a pachinko machine, (a) is the flowchart of the 1st sub-control unit main processing, and (b) is the 1st sub-control unit command reception interrupt processing. It is a flowchart, and (c) is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt processing. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a specific configuration of the accessory ratio / setting display, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of a specific configuration of the DIP switch board. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the special figure look-ahead processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the look-ahead result storage part for special figure 1 and special figure 2. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the setting suggestion execution lottery table at the time of the first big hit end effect, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the setting suggestion effect selection table at the time of the first big hit end effect. (C) is a figure which shows an example of the contents of the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table at the end of play time. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the setting suggestion ball selection table before the play time, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the setting suggestion ball selection table after the play time. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the out-of-order variation pattern table, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the jackpot variation pattern table. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect which concerns on the decorative symbol variation display centering on the decorative symbol display device of the pachinko machine of this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 18 step by step. It is a figure which shows an example of the production in a big hit game centering on a decorative pattern display device step by step. It is a figure explaining an example of the display of the information about the play time at the time of power-on. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 21 step by step. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect to affect the decorative symbol variation display after the end of a normal big hit game centering on a decorative symbol display device step by step. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect to affect the decorative symbol variation display in a revival mode centering on a decorative symbol display device step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 21 step by step. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect which concerns on the decorative symbol variation display in a sudden time saving state centering on a decorative symbol display device step by step. It is a figure which shows one example of the effect which concerns on the decorative symbol variation display in the case of suddenly shifting to play time in a time saving state centering on a decorative symbol display device. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect to affect the decorative symbol variation display in the case of suddenly winning in a short time in the symbol variation display of the number of fittings which shifts to the play time centered on the decorative symbol display device. It is a figure which shows an example of setting suggestion effect in the jackpot game end effect centering on a decorative symbol display device. It is a figure which shows an example of setting suggestion effect centering on a decorative pattern display device. It is a figure which shows an example of the production including the notification which shifts to the play time centering on a decorative symbol display device step by step. It is a figure which shows an example of the production including the notification which shifts to the play time centering on a decorative symbol display device step by step. It is a figure which shows one example of the look-ahead notice effect executed in the pachinko machine which concerns on this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows an example of the production including the notification which shifts to the play time centering on a decorative symbol display device step by step. It is a figure which shows one example of the look-ahead notice effect executed in the pachinko machine which concerns on this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows stepwise an example of the production of the mini-game executed in the pachinko machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows one example of the advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine which concerns on this embodiment step by step. It is a front view of the enclosed type pachinko machine to which this invention is applied. It is an external perspective view of the slot machine applicable to this invention as seen from the front side (player side). It is a figure which shows the game table by the modification of this invention, (a) shows the casino machine 2000, (b) shows the mobile phone 3000 which has the storage part which stores the electronic data which realizes this invention. (D) shows a portable game machine 4000 provided with a storage unit for storing electronic data that realizes the present invention, and (d) is a household provided with a storage unit for storing electronic data that realizes the present invention. The video game machine 5000 for use is shown, and (e) shows a data server 6000 that stores electronic data that realizes the present invention. It is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine according to this embodiment as seen from the front side (player side). It is a rear view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back side. (A) is a schematic front view of the game board viewed from the front side (player side), and (b) is an enlarged view of various lamps mounted on the main control lamp board arranged on the game board. It is a representation figure. It is a functional block diagram of a pachinko machine. As an example of the display symbol of the pachinko machine, (a) shows an example of the stop display symbol of the special symbol 1, (b) shows an example of the stop display symbol of the special symbol 2, and (c) shows an example of the decorative symbol. An example is shown, and FIG. 1D is a diagram showing an example of a stop display symbol of a normal symbol. Main control unit It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the timer interrupt process of a main control part. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the table for determining whether or not the normal figure is correct, (b) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the table for determining whether or not the special figures 1 and 2 are correct, and (c) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the table for determining whether or not the special figure is correct. It is a figure which shows an example of the contents of the distribution table. It is a flowchart which shows the process flow in the 1st sub-control unit of a pachinko machine, (a) is the flowchart of the 1st sub-control unit main processing, and (b) is the 1st sub-control unit command reception interrupt processing. It is a flowchart, and (c) is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process flow in the 2nd sub-control unit of a pachinko machine, (a) is the flowchart of the 2nd sub-control unit main processing, and (b) is the 2nd sub-control unit command reception interrupt processing. It is a flowchart, (c) is a flowchart of a second sub-control unit timer interrupt process, and (d) is a flowchart of a second sub-control unit image control process. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a specific configuration of the accessory ratio / setting display, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of a specific configuration of the DIP switch board. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 41 step by step. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the hold icon displayed in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 41. It is a figure which shows the decorative body which the 2nd effect movable body 8 has. It is a figure which shows one example of the effect which the display mode of a variable icon and the display mode of the background in the display of a reach title are related step by step. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect which an animation is displayed on a sub liquid crystal display device step by step by a zone effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect which super reach is performed step by step which the display mode of a hold icon and the light emission mode of a star-shaped effect lamp 206 are related. It is a figure which shows one example of the effect which the display mode of the hold icon and the display mode of the decorative body included in the 2nd effect movable body 8 are related step by step. FIG. 5 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of an effect similar to the effect in which the second effect movable body 8 shown in FIG. 58 operates. (A) is a diagram showing the title background color determination table of the reach, (b) is a diagram showing the emission color determination table of the light emitting unit 71, and (c) is a diagram showing the kimono color determination table of the lord. .. It is an external perspective view of the slot machine to which this invention is applied seen from the front side (player side). It is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment as seen from the front side (player side). It is a rear view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the back side. It is a schematic front view which looked at the game board 200 from the front side (the player side). It is a functional block diagram of the pachinko machine 100. An example of the display symbol of the pachinko machine 100, (a) shows an example of the stop display symbol of the special symbol 1, (b) shows an example of the stop display symbol of the special symbol 2, and (c) is a decoration. An example of a symbol is shown, and (d) is a diagram showing an example of a stop display symbol of a normal symbol. Main control unit It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the timer interrupt process of a main control part. It is a flowchart which shows the process flow in the 1st sub-control unit 400 of a pachinko machine 100, (a) is the flowchart of the 1st sub-control unit main processing, and (b) is the 1st sub-control unit command reception interrupt. It is a flowchart of the process, and (c) is the flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the 1st sub-control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the process flow in the 2nd sub-control unit 500 of a pachinko machine 100, (a) is the flowchart of the 2nd sub-control unit main processing, and (b) is the 2nd sub-control unit command reception interrupt. It is the flowchart of the process, (c) is the flowchart of the 2nd sub-control unit timer interrupt process, and (d) is the flowchart of the 2nd sub-control unit image control process. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a specific configuration of the accessory ratio / setting display, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of a specific configuration of the DIP switch board. (A) is a table summarizing the types of jackpots and the game state after the jackpot game, and (b) is a diagram showing the game flow of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 62. It is a figure which shows the example stepwise which the time-saving game state ends and shifts to the non-time-saving game state from a little before the end of the time-saving game state. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 73 step by step. It is a figure which shows the example which the period length of a pull-back period is different from the example shown in FIG. 74 step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 75 step by step. It is a figure which shows the example in the case where there is no pullback period step by step. (A) is a diagram showing a list of songs that can be selected when a predetermined condition is not satisfied, and (b) is a diagram showing a list of songs that are selected when a predetermined condition is satisfied. It is a figure which shows the list of music which is selected after the predetermined condition is satisfied even once. It is the figure which showed the example different from the example shown in FIG. 73 step by step, which continues from FIG. 73 (h). It is a figure which shows the example in which the first hold icon h21 among the hold icons of special figure 2 at the time when the symbol variation display of the last special figure which can maintain a time saving game state is finished, is a gold display mode. It is a figure which shows the example of operating the operation key unit 190 step by step in the state which the music selection display MC is displayed. It is a figure which shows the example of operating the operation key unit 190 step by step during a big hit game started without satisfying a predetermined condition. It is an external perspective view of the slot machine applicable to this invention as seen from the front side (player side).

Hereinafter, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 40, a game table to which the present invention can be applied (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine and a rotating game machine such as a slot machine 100) will be described in detail. As a general rule, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 1 to 40 are used only for the explanations using FIGS. 1 to 40, and even when overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, FIGS. In the description using FIG. 40, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 1 to 40 are prioritized.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. The figure is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side).

The pachinko machine 100 is a game table on which a player can obtain a profit when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and launches an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door with a ball storage plate 108, and the like. The device 110 and the game board 200 are provided on the front surface (player side) thereof.

The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertically rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (island equipment or the like) provided in a game machine installation shop.

The main body 104 is a door member provided inside the outer frame 102, having a locking function, and rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112 as a base body of a vertically rectangular gaming machine. .. Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space portion 114 inside. A clerk at a store (game store) in which the pachinko machine 100 is installed can open and close the main body 104, and is provided with a main body opening sensor 1041 for detecting that the main body 104 has been opened.

The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104, which is the front side of the pachinko machine 100, via a hinge portion 112 so as to have a locking function and can be opened and closed. Is a door member having an opening 116. A clerk at a game store can also open and close the front frame door 106, and a front frame door sensor 1061 for detecting that the front frame door 106 has been opened is also provided. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin in the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A space in which the game area 124 is provided is divided between the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. In this embodiment, a lamp whose light source is an LED is also referred to as a lamp.

The door 108 with a ball storage plate is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a locking function and to be opened and closed. The door 108 with a ball storage plate is opened by pushing an opening lever 1081 that can be operated with the front frame door 106 open. Further, a door sensor 1082 with a ball storage plate that detects that the door 108 with a ball storage plate has been opened is also provided. The door 108 with a ball storage plate is an upper plate 126 that can store a plurality of game balls (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “balls”) and is provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110. , The lower plate 128 that stores the game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, the ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the operation of the player, and the player's A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to the game ball collection container (commonly known as a dollar box) by operation, and a game board that guides the game balls to the launching device 110 by the operation of the player. A ball launch handle 134 that launches into the game area 124, an effect button 136 that changes the effect mode of various effect devices by the operation of the player, and a chance button lamp that is built into the effect button 136 and causes the effect button 136 to emit light. 138, a ball lending operation button 140 for instructing the card unit (CR unit) installed in the game store to lend a ball, and a return operation button 142 for instructing the card unit to return the player's balance. It is provided with a ball lending display unit 144 that displays the balance of the player and the state of the card unit. Further, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is provided with a lower plate full tank detection sensor (not shown) that detects that the lower plate 128 is full due to the game ball. Further, the operation key unit 190 is also provided.

The launching device 110 is attached below the main body 104, and has a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching mallet 148 that hits the game ball with the tip of the launching rod 146. , Equipped with. While the ball launching handle 134 is continuously launched by the player, the launching device 110 launches the game ball into the game area 124 of the game board every predetermined firing period (for example, 0.6 seconds). It fires at the target and corresponds to an example of a firing means.

The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 by using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104. Note that the specific configuration of the game area 124 is not shown in FIG. 1, and the specific configuration is shown in FIG.

FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 1 as viewed from the back side.

The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, and is located at a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls and below the ball tank 150, at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 for guiding the ball falling through the formed communication hole to the payout device 152 located on the right side of the back surface is arranged.

The payout device 152 is composed of a tubular member, and includes a payout motor (not shown), a sprocket, and a payout sensor inside the payout device 152. The payout device 152 is removable, and when mounted at a predetermined position, it connects to the downstream end of the tank rail 154.

The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor, and temporarily retains the game ball that has flowed down into the payout device 152 after passing through the tank rail 154, and drives the payout motor to rotate by a predetermined angle. As a result, the temporarily stagnant game balls are sent out one by one below the payout device 152. That is, the payout device 152 is a kind of ball feeding device that applies a driving force to the game ball and conveys the game ball.

The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is passing, either a high or low signal is passed, and when the game ball is not passing. The signal of either high or low is output to the payout control unit 600 (see FIG. 5). The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor is configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) and reach the upper plate 126 arranged on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 is provided with a predetermined value. Based on the condition being satisfied, the player is given (paid out) an amount of game value (game ball) according to the grant condition by this configuration.

On the left side of the drawing of the payout device 152, there is a main board case 158 for accommodating the main board 156 constituting the main control unit 300 (see FIG. 5) that performs control processing of the entire game, and processing information generated by the main control unit 300. Based on the processing information generated by the first sub-board case 162 and the first sub-control unit 400 that house the first sub-board 160 constituting the first sub-control unit 400 (see FIG. 5) that performs control processing related to the effect. A second sub-board case 166 that houses a second sub-board 164 that constitutes a second sub-control unit 500 (see FIG. 5) that performs control processing related to the effect, and a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to payout of game balls (see FIG. 5). A payout board case 172 for accommodating a payout board 170 including an error release switch 168 that constitutes (see FIG. 5) and cancels an error by an operation of a game clerk, and a launch control unit 630 that performs control processing related to launching a game ball (FIG. 5). A power switch that constitutes a launch board case 176 that houses the launch board 174 that constitutes (see), a power control unit 660 that supplies power to various electrical game devices (see FIG. 5), and turns the power on and off by the operation of a game clerk. A power supply board case 184 that houses a power supply board 182 including a 178 and a RAM clear switch 180 that outputs a RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300 by being operated when the power is turned on, and a signal between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit. The CR interface unit 186 for transmitting and receiving the above is arranged.

Further, in the present embodiment, the setting change key 192, the setting change button 194, and the accessory ratio / setting display 196 are provided on the main board 156. In the present embodiment, when the setting change key 192 is operated on the condition that the RAM clear switch 180 is pressed when the power is turned on, the setting change mode can be set to at least one of a plurality of settings having different jackpot probabilities. Can be migrated to. In the setting change mode, the current setting is displayed on the accessory ratio / setting display 196, and the clerk can change the setting by pressing the setting change button 194 while checking this. Even if the RAM clear switch 180 is not pressed when the power is turned on, the setting may be changed when the setting change key 192 is operated when the power is turned on.

The accessory ratio / setting display 196 is a 7-segment LED board mounted on the main board 156 and arranged inside the main board case 158, and is attached in a manner visible to the clerk. As shown in FIG. 12A, the accessory ratio / setting display 196 has two-digit 7-segment LEDs arranged one above the other and a one-digit seven-segment LED modularized on the right side. The accessory ratio monitor is an indicator for notifying the accessory ratio (YH) and the continuous accessory ratio (RY), and the setting monitor is a monitor for confirming the current setting. The accessory ratio / setting display 196 is composed of, for example, a single-color LED of red, but may be capable of emitting light in three colors of red, green, and orange, or may be a full-color LED. At least a part of the accessory ratio / setting display 196 may be provided on the game board 200, for example, so that the player can see it.

Further, in the present embodiment, the DIP switch board 198 is arranged on the back surface of the first sub-board case 162. Details of the DIP switch board 198 will be described later.

FIG. 3A is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. Here, the arrows d2 and d3 indicate the directions in which the pachinko machine 100 is fixed at the installation location. The arrow d2 indicates the width direction (sometimes referred to as the left-right direction) of the pachinko machine 100, and the left hand may be referred to as the left and the right hand may be referred to as the right in front view. The arrow d3 indicates the height direction (sometimes referred to as the vertical direction) of the pachinko machine 100, and the higher one may be referred to as the upper one and the lower one may be referred to as the lower one. Although not shown in FIG. 3, in the depth direction (sometimes referred to as the front-rear direction) of the pachinko machine 100, the front side may be referred to as the front side or the front side, and the back side may be referred to as the back side or the rear side.

The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 by using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104.

Various structures can be adopted for the mounting structure of the game board 200 to the main body 104. For example, the front left side portion 200a of the game board 200 is inserted into the front view left side (hinge portion 112 side) of the main body 104, and here. It is possible to adopt a structure in which the game board 200 is rotated around the center of rotation and the right side portion 200b of the game board 200 is pressed against the main body 104 to be set. Such a structure can improve workability. In some cases.

The game board 200 is a unit in which various parts are attached to a plate-shaped main body 201. The main body 201 is made of resin, for example, and its surface (front surface) constitutes a decorative surface on which a character or the like of the pachinko machine 100 is displayed. The decorative surface may be formed, for example, by pasting a sheet on which a character of the pachinko machine 100 or the like is printed. A vibration sensor SR3 is arranged at the lower right of the main body 201. When it is detected by the vibration sensor SR3, error processing (for example, notification by an image or sound, game stop that makes it impossible to continue the game, etc.) can be performed. The vibration sensor SR3 may be another fraud detection sensor such as a magnetic sensor.

The outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are arranged on the game board 200 to form a game area 124 in which the game ball can roll. A part of the outer rail 202 is formed by a rail member 209 that can be attached to and detached from the main body 104. Of the game area 124, the area between the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 forms a guide area 201a for guiding the launched game ball.

An area other than the game area 124 of the game board 200 may be referred to as a non-game area. The gaming area 124 and the non-gaming area can be distinguished from each other with the outer rail 202 as a boundary. Further, the area inside the area through which the game ball passes with the firing intensity of the game ball maximized can be called at least the game area 124. The game area 124 may include an area through which the game ball does not pass due to the presence of the effect device or the like in the game area 124. The game area 124 may be referred to as a flow-down area at the point where the game ball flows down during the game, and the non-game area may be referred to as a non-flow-down area at the point where the game ball does not flow down during the game except for maintenance and accidents. The entire area of the game area 124 may be referred to as a flow-down area, but an area in which the game ball does not flow down due to the presence of an effect device or the like may be referred to as a non-flow-down area.

A decorative symbol display device 208 is arranged at substantially the center of the game area 124. A main control lamp board 254 is provided below the game area 124, and as shown in FIG. 3 (b), a normal symbol display device 210 and a first special symbol are placed on the main control lamp board 254. Display device 212, 2nd special symbol display device 214, normal symbol holding lamp 216, 1st special symbol holding lamp 218, 2nd special symbol holding lamp 220, high accuracy middle lamp RK, electric support middle lamp An RD, a right-handed lamp RM, and a round display lamp RR are arranged. Hereinafter, a normal symbol may be referred to as a "normal symbol" and a special symbol may be referred to as a "special symbol".

The decorative design display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for the decorative design and the effect, and is configured by a liquid crystal display device (LCD: Liquid Crystal Display) in the present embodiment. The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas of a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a and the middle symbol display area 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Further, the positions and sizes of the display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, and 208d can be freely changed in the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative pattern display device 208, it may be configured to be able to display various effects and various game information even if it is not a liquid crystal display device. For example, a dot matrix display device may be used. , 7-segment display device, organic EL (ElectroLuminessence) display device, reel (drum) type display device, leaf type display device, plasma display, and other display devices including a projector may be adopted.

The normal figure display device 210 is a display device for displaying a normal figure, and is composed of two LEDs in the present embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying special figures, and are composed of two LEDs in the present embodiment.

The normal figure holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of holding normal figure variable games (details will be described later), and in the present embodiment, the normal figure variable games are held up to a predetermined number (for example, four). It is possible to do. The first special figure holding lamp 218 is a lamp for indicating the number of special figure changing games held, and in this embodiment, holding up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of special figure changing games. It is possible. Further, the second special symbol holding lamp 220 is a lamp for indicating the number of special figure changing games being held, and in the present embodiment, the special figure changing games are held up to a predetermined number (for example, four). It is possible.

Further, the high-probability middle lamp RK is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high-probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur, or that the game state is in a high-probability state. The electric support medium lamp RD is a lamp for indicating that the variation display time of a normal symbol is shortened and the blade member 232a of the electric tulip, which will be described later, is in an electric support state where it is easy to open for a long time. The right-handed indicator lamp RM is a lamp for indicating that the player is in a jackpot game state, a probability change state, and an electric support state, and is in a state where the player can obtain the benefit by hitting the right side. The round display lamp RR is a lamp for indicating the number of rounds in the big hit game related to the big hit when the big hit is made.

Around the decorative symbol display device 208, predetermined ball entrances, for example, general winning openings 226a and 226b, a normal drawing starting opening 228, a first special drawing starting opening 230, and a jackpot generation gate 252 are arranged. Further, a variable winning device 2340 is provided in the lower right portion of the game area 124.

One or a plurality of general winning openings 226a and 226b are provided at appropriate locations in the game area 124. Here, the general winning opening arranged on the left side of the game area 124 is referred to as a general winning opening 226a, and the general winning opening arranged in the variable winning device 2340 is referred to as a general winning opening 226b. When a ball enters the general winning openings 226a and 226b, a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects it, and assuming that the general winning openings 226a and 226b have won a prize, the payout device 152 is driven to drive a predetermined number (for example, 4 pieces). Is discharged to the upper plate 126 as a prize ball. The balls discharged to the upper plate 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and with these configurations, the prize balls are paid out to the player based on the winning. In the present embodiment, when a plurality of general winning openings are provided, different ball detection sensors may be used to detect the winning balls, or each of the plurality of general winning openings may be entered. The ball passages that guide the ball game balls may be merged and detected by one common ball detection sensor. Further, when a plurality of general winning openings are provided on the right side of the game area 124, the ball passages for guiding the entered game balls may be merged and detected by one common ball detection sensor. However, they may be detected by different sphere detection sensors. The balls that have entered the general winning openings 226a and 226b are guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

The normal drawing start port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124, and in the present embodiment, the right side of the game board 200. One is arranged in. Unlike the balls that have entered the general winning openings 226a and 226b, the balls that have passed through the starting port 228 are not discharged to the game island side, but when they are entered, a predetermined number (for example, one) The prize ball may be paid out, and the entered game ball may be guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and discharged to the game island side. When the predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the normal drawing start port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts the normal drawing variation game by the normal drawing display device 210.

In the present embodiment, the first special figure start port 230 is arranged at the lower center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the starting port 230 of the first special figure, the payout device 152, which will be described later, is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 4) of balls are used as prize balls on the upper plate 126. At the same time as discharging, the special figure variation game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. The ball that has entered the first special figure start port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. In the case of the present embodiment, due to the arrangement of the first special figure starting port 230, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the first special figure starting port 230 when hitting to the right. Then, in the present embodiment, the specification is such that the variation display of the special figure 2 is started in preference to the special figure 1 (a pachinko machine having such a specification may be called a "special 2 priority variable machine" or the like). Has been done. The first special figure starting port 230 is one of the starting regions, and corresponds to an example of a fixed starting region in which its own size does not change.

The second special figure start port 232 is composed of an electric tulip (electric chew), and only one is arranged below the first special figure start port 230, and a blade member 232a that can be opened and closed to the left and right is provided. While the 232a is closed, it is impossible for the ball to enter the ball, and when the game is won and the normal figure display device 210 stops and displays the hit symbol, the blade member 232a has a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. Open and close. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the start port 232 of the second special figure, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, one) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as a prize ball. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure start port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. In the case of the present embodiment, due to the arrangement of the normal drawing start port 228 (by a game nail (not shown)), it is difficult for the game ball to enter the normal drawing start port 228 when hitting to the left. .. Therefore, in principle, the player does not win the game of changing the normal figure during left-handed hitting, and therefore, in principle, the blade member 232a does not open or close. On the other hand, in the case of hitting to the right, since the game ball can be expected to enter the normal drawing start port 228, the blade member 232a may open and close by winning the normal drawing variable game. That is, it can be said that there is almost no possibility of winning the second special figure starting port 232 during the left-handed hit, but there is a possibility of winning the second special figure starting port 232 during the right-handed hit.

Next, the configuration of the variable winning device 2340 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of the variable winning device 2340. In FIG. 4, the decorative member 2340b is transparently shown in order to easily explain the internal structure of the variable winning device 2340.

The variable winning device 2340 is provided with, for example, a flat plate-shaped mounting base 2340a for mounting on the front surface of the game board 200, and a decorative member 2340b mounted on the front surface of the mounting base 2340a at a predetermined interval. There is.

The mounting base 2340a has a rectangular opening substantially in the center near the upper end, and a plate-shaped first door member 2341a is mounted so as to cover the opening. The lower end side of the first door member 2341a is pivotally supported by the mounting base 2340a, and the first door member 2341a can be opened and closed forward by driving a solenoid (not shown) mounted on the rear side of the mounting base 2340a. This solenoid is included in the various solenoids 332 described above, and is driven by the drive circuit 334. In the present embodiment, the first variable winning opening 234a is configured as described above. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the first variable winning opening 234a, a predetermined number (for example, eight) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The ball that has entered the first variable winning opening 234a is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

Further, a second variable winning opening 235a is formed between the mounting base 2340a and the decorative member 2340b as described below.

As shown in FIG. 4, the decorative member 2340b has a wall surface having a bottom surface 2340c, an upper surface 2340d, and a side surface 2340e erected rearward from the back surface of the plate surface 2340f. In the decorative member 2340b, a first rolling region SP1 and a second rolling region SP2 on which the game ball can roll are formed by the wall surface, and the open portion behind the first rolling region SP1 is closed by the front surface of the mounting base 2340a.

The first rolling region SP1 is open upward, and a plate-shaped shutter member 2351a is provided so as to cover the open portion so as to be able to advance and retreat in the depth direction with respect to the mounting base 2340a. The shutter member 2351a is slightly downwardly inclined toward the front and is inclined from right to left, and is configured to be displaceable by driving a solenoid. This solenoid is included in the various solenoids 332 described above, and is driven by a drive circuit 334 (see FIG. 5). That is, in the present embodiment, when the shutter member 2351a is in the state of advancing forward (closed state) with respect to the mounting base 2340a, the first rolling region SP1 is blocked, and the first of the game balls. When the entry into the rolling region SP1 is blocked and the game is retracted backward (open state), the first rolling region SP1 is opened and the game ball enters the first rolling region SP1. Entry is allowed. Further, in the present embodiment, a plurality of ribs 2340i are projected rearward at substantially equal intervals so as to face the shutter member 2351a on the back surface of the decorative member 2340b, and the shutter member is closed. The game ball is decelerated by colliding with the game ball rolling on the 2351a, and the residence time of the game ball on the shutter member 2351a is increased. In the present embodiment, since it is configured in this way, a plurality of game balls mainly staying mainly on the shutter member 2351a can be secondly changed at the same time by opening the shutter member 2351a for a short time (for example, 0.06 seconds). It may be possible to enter the ball into the winning opening 235a. Further, in the present embodiment, since the shutter member 2351a is on the back surface of the decorative member 2340b, the shutter member 2351a is difficult for the player to see.

A winning count switch SW1 for detecting the passage of a game ball is arranged at a position connecting the first rolling region SP1 and the second rolling region SP2, and enters the first rolling region SP1. When the game ball rolls on the bottom surface 2340c and is guided to the left, it passes through the winning count switch SW1. The winning count switch SW1 is included in the various sensors 320 described above, and is configured so that a detection signal is input to the sensor circuit 322. In the present embodiment, when the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 detects the passage of the game ball through the winning count switch SW1, it detects the winning of the second variable winning opening 235a and the number based on the winning (for example, 15). ) To pay out the prize ball. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls that can be obtained by winning the second variable winning opening 235a is larger than the number of prize balls that can be obtained by winning the first variable winning opening 234a, so that various playability is provided. You may be able to. The number of prize balls that can be obtained when the game ball wins in the first variable winning opening 234a and the number of prize balls that can be obtained when the game ball wins in the second variable winning opening 235a may be the same.

The game ball that has passed through the winning count switch SW1 is guided to the second rolling region SP2. The second rolling region SP2 is configured to be guided by the general passage 2340h and discharged downward. A discharge ball detection switch SW3 is arranged in the general passage 2340h, and the game ball guided by the general passage 2340h is configured to pass through the discharge ball detection switch SW3. The discharge ball detection switch SW3 is included in the various sensors 320 described above, and is configured so that the detection signal is input to the sensor circuit 322. In the present embodiment, when the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 detects the passage of the game ball through the discharge ball detection switch SW3, it detects that the game ball has passed through the general passage 2340h.

In the present embodiment, by configuring as described above, for example, the number of passages of the game ball of the winning count switch SW1 and the number of passages of the ejection ball detection switch SW3 are used to enter the game ball into the second variable winning opening 235a. By monitoring outs, it may be possible to monitor fraudulent winnings. Examples of fraudulent acts include acts using a ball with a thread or a game ball (so-called deca ball) having a size larger than the regulation.

Further, in the game area 124, a plurality of disk-shaped ball striking direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails are arranged, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, any winning opening or starting opening is provided. There is also an out port 240 for guiding the ball that did not win a prize to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

In this pachinko machine 100, the player supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the player's operation handle, and drives the launch rod and the launch rod. It is launched into the game area 124 by passing through the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 by the launching mallet. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 flows downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail, or the like, and the winning openings (general winning openings 226a, 226b, first variable winning openings 234a, 2nd variable winning opening 235a) or starting port (1st special drawing starting port 230, 2nd special drawing starting port 232), or without winning any winning opening or starting opening, or normal drawing start The out port 240 is reached only by passing through the port 228. Further, in the present embodiment, a discharge ball receiving port (not shown) for receiving all the game balls discharged from the game board 200 is formed at the lower side of the space 114 of the main body 104 so as to open upward. An out-ball detection sensor SWout that detects the passage of a game ball received at the discharge ball receiving port is provided at a predetermined position on the main body 104. The out-ball detection sensor SWout may be provided on the game board 200 side. In the present embodiment, all the game balls discharged from the game board 200 (including the game balls discharged from the out port 240 and the game balls winning in various winning openings) are accepted by the discharge ball receiving port. Although it is configured to be discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 100 via a predetermined discharge passage, only the game balls discharged from the out port 240 may pass through the out ball detection sensor SWout.

Further, the effect device 2 is arranged in the upper part of the game area 124, the effect device 3 is arranged in the lower part, and the effect device 4 is arranged on the left side and the right side, respectively. Behind each effect device 4, an effect device 5 described later is arranged. In the case of this embodiment, these are supported by the main body 104.

Further, in the present embodiment, both the first variable winning opening 234a and the second variable winning opening 235a prevent the game ball from entering in the closed state, but the winning may be possible, and at least from the open state. However, it suffices if it is difficult for the game ball to enter.

Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The figure shows a functional block diagram of the control unit. The control units of the pachinko machine 100 are roughly classified into a main control unit 300 that controls a central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter, simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. The first sub-control unit 400 that performs control, the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the commands transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and the main control unit 300 according to the commands transmitted by the main control unit 300. It is configured to include a payout control unit 600 that controls the payout of the game ball, a launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of the game ball, and a power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supply to the pachinko machine 100. There is.

First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing a control program and various data, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a time. A counter timer 312 for measuring the number of times, etc., a WDT314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing, and a random number value generation circuit (counter circuit) 318 (assuming that this circuit has two counters built-in). Is installed. Other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this point is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock. Further, the random number value generation circuit 318 is used as a hardware random number counter that fluctuates a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time a clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 316a is received. Although the random number value generation circuit 318 is built in the basic circuit 302, it may be connected to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the basic circuit 302 receives signals output from a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball passing through each start port, a winning port, and a variable winning port, and various sensors 320 including a lower plate full tank sensor. Then, the sensor circuit 322 for outputting the amplification result and the comparison result with the reference voltage to the CPU 304, the random number value generation circuit 318, etc. in the basic circuit 302, and a predetermined symbol display device, for example, the first special figure display device 212 or the first 2. A drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the special figure display device 214, a drive circuit 326 for performing display control of a predetermined symbol display device, for example, a normal figure display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example, To control the display of the normal figure hold lamp 216, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, the special figure 2 hold lamp 220, the high-accuracy middle lamp RK, the electric support middle lamp RD, the right-handed lamp RM, the round display lamp RR, etc.) The drive means for driving the drive circuit 330 and a predetermined movable member, for example, the blade member 232a of the second special figure start port 232 as an ordinary electric accessory, and the door of the first variable winning opening 234a as a special electric accessory. A drive circuit 334 for controlling various solenoids 332 including a drive means for driving the shutter member 2351a of the member 2341a and the second variable winning opening 235a is connected. In this example, the crystal oscillator 316a and the random number value generation circuit 318 are separately provided, but the crystal oscillator 316a may be included in the random number value generation circuit 318.

When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that the ball has won the first special figure start port 230, the sensor circuit 322 sends a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the random number value generation circuit 318 in the basic circuit 302. Output. Upon receiving this signal, the random number value generation circuit 318 latches the value at that timing of the counter corresponding to the first special figure start port 230, and the latched value is the built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the special figure 1. Remember in. Further, when the random number value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the ball has won the second special figure start port 232, the value at that timing of the counter corresponding to the second special figure start port 232 is similarly set. Latch and store the latched value in the built-in counter value storage register corresponding to FIG.

Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 passes through the information output circuit 336 and an external terminal board (not shown) to an external hall computer (not shown). The game information (for example, the game state) of the pachinko machine 100 is output to the information input circuit 350 provided in the above.

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300, and the voltage monitoring circuit 338 provides the voltage value of the power supply. Is less than a predetermined value (9V in this example), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on, and the CPU 304 is provided from the start signal output circuit 340. When the start signal is input, the game control is started (the main process of the main control unit, which will be described later, is started).

Further, the main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600, respectively. 1 Communication with the sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is possible. The information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 is unidirectional communication, and the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 is bidirectional communication. The main control unit 300 is configured so that signals such as commands can be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400, but the first sub control unit 400 is configured so that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted to the main control unit 300. is doing. However, the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 may be configured to be performed by two-way communication. Further, the payout control unit 600 is configured so that a signal such as a command can be transmitted to the main control unit 300, but is configured so that a signal such as a command cannot be transmitted from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300. May be good.

Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that mainly controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. It is equipped with a serial communication control circuit 424. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. Further, a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various effect data is connected to the basic circuit 402. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs. Further, the ROM 406 may be provided in the basic circuit 402. The serial communication control circuit 424 connects the game board lamp drive circuit 440 for controlling the game board lamp 442 and the game board frame lamp drive circuit 450 for controlling the game board frame lamp 452. Then, lighting control is performed by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 440 and the game underframe lamp drive circuit 450.

Further, the basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC (S-ROM) 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and the amplifier), a drive circuit 422 for controlling the drive of the effect devices 2 to 5, and a sensor circuit. The 428 and the volume switch 163 for adjusting the volume output from the speaker 120 are connected. The sensor circuit 428 receives detection signals from various movable body sensors 430 that detect the current positions of the effect devices 2 to 5 and the like, and button sensors 426 that detect the pressing of various buttons constituting the effect buttons 136 and the operation key unit 190. Output to the basic circuit 402.

Next, the second sub-control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives a control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. ing. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a memory 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 512 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. A VDP (video display processor) that reads out image data or the like stored in ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518, and displays the image on the decorative symbol display device 208. It is equipped with 516. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. Further, a ROM 506 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for displaying an image, and the like are stored is connected to the basic circuit 502. In the present embodiment, the memory 508 is used as the temporary storage area, and the memory 508 is composed of a recording medium (for example, EEPROM, flash memory, etc.) capable of holding the storage state even when the power supply is cut off. Thereby, for example, the information for displaying the display related to the jackpot history can be retained even when the main control unit 300 is initialized or the setting is changed. A RAM whose stored information volatilizes when the power is cut off may be used.

Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and a prize ball or a ball rental ball based on a control signal output by the payout sensor 604. Detects whether or not the payout of is completed. Further, the payout control unit 600 communicates with the card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606. In addition, the payout control unit 600 pays out prize ball information indicating that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls has been paid out and a predetermined number (for example, 25) of loan balls. The ball rental information or the like indicating that is output to the information input circuit 350 via an external terminal board (not shown). Further, a frame sensor 605 is connected to the payout control unit 600. The frame sensor 605 includes a main body opening sensor 1044 that detects that the main body 104 has been opened, a front frame door sensor 1061 that detects that the front frame door 106 has been opened, and the like, and includes the main body 104 and the front frame door. When the 106 is open, these sensors detect it and output an open signal. When the payout control unit 600 outputs the release signal from the frame sensor 605, the payout control unit 600 outputs the door opening information to the main control unit 300.

The launch control unit 630 is an operation of the ball launch handle 134 by the player, which is output by a control signal output by the payout control unit 600 to instruct launch permission or stop, and a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134. Control of the launch solenoid 632 that drives the launch rod 146 and the launch mallet 148, and control of the ball feed device 634 that supplies the ball from the upper plate 126 to the launch device 110 based on the control signal that indicates the launch intensity according to the amount. I do.

The power supply control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and converts each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the payout device 152, and the like. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 is a power storage circuit (for example, 10 days) for supplying power to a predetermined component (for example, RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the power supply from the outside is cut off. , Capacitor). In this embodiment, the power supply control unit 660 supplies power to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub-control unit 500 with a predetermined voltage, and the payout control unit 600 launches the main control unit 300 and the second sub-control unit 500. Although the control unit 630 is supplied with the power supply of the predetermined voltage, the power supply of the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device through another power supply path.

Next, using FIGS. 6A to 6D, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the normal figure display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of special drawings and general drawings to be used will be explained.

The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first start port sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that the ball has entered the special figure 1 start port 230, and the ball enters the special figure 2 start port 232. The special figure 2 variable game is started on condition that the second start port sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that the ball has been hit. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the first special figure display device 212 blinks some of the eight lamps (for example, the first lower lamp from the left). "Variation display" (special figure fluctuation game) is performed. Further, when the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special figure display device 214 blinks a part of the eight lamps (for example, the first lower lamp from the left). 2 variable display ”(special figure variable game) is performed. Then, when the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special figure display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 2. After that, the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of the special figure 2. Hereinafter, the variation display from the start of this "variation display of the special figure 1 or 2" to the stop display of the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1 or 2 may be referred to as the variation display of the special figure. The variable display of this special figure may be continuously performed multiple times.

FIG. 6A shows an example of the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1. In FIG. 6A, six types of special figures, "special figure A" to "special figure F", are shown. In FIG. 6A, a white portion in the figure indicates a lamp that is turned off, and a black portion indicates a lamp that is turned on.

In the present embodiment, four types of jackpot symbols (“special figure A” to “special figure D”) are prepared as stop symbol modes of the special figure. "Special figure A" is a 5-round (R) normal jackpot symbol, and when "special figure A" is stopped and displayed, the first variable winning opening 234a shifts to a jackpot game state in which it opens in all rounds, and the jackpot After the game is completed, the control state becomes the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state (hereinafter, may be referred to as “a time saving state”). In addition, "special figure B" is a 5R probability variable big hit symbol, and when "special figure B" is stopped and displayed, the second variable winning opening 235a shifts to a big hit game state in which it opens in all rounds, and the big hit game ends. After that, the control state becomes the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state. In addition, "special figure C" is a 10R probability variation big hit symbol, and when "special figure C" is stopped and displayed, the second variable winning opening 235a shifts to the big hit game state in which it opens in all rounds, and the big hit game ends. After that, the control state becomes the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state. In addition, "special figure D" is a 2R probability variable big hit symbol, and when "special figure D" is stopped and displayed, the second variable winning opening 235a shifts to a big hit game state in which it opens in all rounds, and the big hit game ends. After that, the control state becomes a special figure high probability normal figure low probability state (hereinafter, may be referred to as a "latent state"). The opening time of the second variable winning opening 235a in the case of a big hit of "Special Figure D" is as short as 0.2 seconds per 1R, and it is a big hit that cannot be expected to come out. In the present embodiment, four types of jackpot symbols are prepared, but it goes without saying that one type may be prepared, or two types, three types, or five or more types of jackpot symbols may be prepared. .. In addition, a small hit symbol may be prepared.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, whether or not it is a big hit in the special figure variable game is determined by a lottery of hardware random numbers, and whether it is a normal big hit or a probabilistic big hit is decided by a lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the normal jackpot and the probability variation jackpot is whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (probability variation jackpot) or low (normal jackpot) in the next special figure fluctuation game. Hereinafter, the state in which the probability of winning this jackpot is high is referred to as a special figure high probability state (hereinafter, may be referred to as "special figure probability change" or simply "probability change"), and the state in which the probability is low is referred to as a special figure. It is called a low probability state. In addition, after the jackpot game is completed, the time may be shortened (electric support state). Here, the electric support state is a predetermined state in which the player's advantage is higher than that of the non-electric support state by shortening the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure fluctuation game to the start of the next big hit. It refers to the state. The time saving will be described in detail later, but the time saving state is referred to as a normal figure high probability state (hereinafter, may be referred to as “normal figure probability change”), and the state not in the normal time saving state is referred to as a normal figure low probability state. Strictly speaking, the "electric support state" is a state related to a normal figure, and the "time saving state" is a state related to a special figure or a state related to a normal figure and a special figure. A time saving flag is prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, and when the time saving flag is set to ON, it is in the electric support state and is in the normal high probability state. In the high-probability state of the normal figure, it is easier to win the variable game of the normal figure than in the low-probability state of the normal figure (probability change of the normal figure). For example, the winning probability of the normal-figure variable game is 0/100 (that is, it is always out of order) in the normal-figure low-probability state (non-electric support state), whereas the normal-figure high-probability state (electric support state). ) Increases to 100/100 (that is, it always hits). In addition, the fluctuation time of the normal map fluctuation game is shorter in the electric support state than in the non-electric support state (normal map variation and shortness). For example, in the non-electric support state, the fluctuation time of the normal figure variation game of 10 seconds is shortened to 2 seconds in the electric support state. Further, in the electric support state, the opening time in one opening of the blade member 232a of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 tends to be longer than in the non-electric support state (extension of the electric chew opening period). For example, in the non-electric support state, the electric chew opening period of 0.5 seconds is extended to 2 seconds in the electric support state. Further, in the electric support state, the blade member 232a is more likely to open than in the non-electric support state (the number of times the electric chew is opened increases). For example, the blade member 232a, which opens only once in the non-electric support state for each winning of the normal drawing start port 228, opens twice in the electric support state (opens for 2 seconds, closes for 1 second, and closes for 2 seconds again). Open). By extending the electric chew opening period and increasing the number of times the electric chew is opened, the probability of entering the special figure 2 starting port 232 increases. The time saving flag is set to off during the jackpot game. Therefore, the non-electric support state is maintained during the jackpot game. Further, in the present embodiment, in the electric support state (time saving state), the probability change of the normal figure, the change of the normal figure, the extension of the opening period of the electric chew, and the increase of the number of times of opening the electric chew are all performed. If any one of them is performed, the player's advantage will be high, and the electric support state (time saving state) may be set. Alternatively, if either the extension of the electric chew opening period or the increase in the number of times of opening the electric chew is performed, which increases the probability of entering the starting port 232 of the special figure 2, the electric support state (time saving state) may be set. In the non-electric support state, it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the special figure 2 starting port 232 than in the electric support state. As described above, the special figure 2 starting port 232 changes into a winning difficult state in which the game ball is difficult to enter and a winning easy state in which the game ball is easy to enter. The entrance of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is in a state where it is easy to win a prize for a longer period of time in the electric support state than in the non-electric support state. In the present embodiment, when "special figure A" is stopped and displayed, the electric support state (a time saving state) is maintained for 100 times of the special figure variable game after the end of the big hit game to be performed thereafter, and 101 At the second time, it shifts to the non-electric support state (normal figure low probability state). On the other hand, when a big hit without electric support (for example, "Special Figure D") is won, the state does not shift to the electric support state after the big hit game is completed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the "special figure A" is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state after the big hit game is completed. Further, when "special figure B" or "special figure C" is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state after the big hit game is completed. Further, when the "special figure D" is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes the special figure high probability normal figure low probability state after the big hit game is completed.

Further, in the present embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a sudden time saving symbol that shifts to the electric support state without shifting to the big hit. "Special figure E" is a sudden time saving symbol. In the present embodiment, when "special figure E" is displayed and the state shifts to the electric support state (hereinafter, may be referred to as "c time saving state"), the electric support state is changed while the special figure variation game is performed 30 times. It is maintained, and at the 31st time, it shifts to the non-electric support state (normal figure low probability state). In the present embodiment, when the "special figure E" is stopped and displayed in the electric support state, the c time is shortened regardless of the game state before the symbol is stopped. However, in the electric support state, the "special figure E" is displayed. When "Fig. E" is stopped and displayed, the game state before the symbol stop may be continued without shifting to the c time saving state. Further, a plurality of types of sudden time saving symbols may be prepared, and the number of times of symbol variation display in which the electric support state is maintained may differ depending on the symbol. For example, some of the plurality of types of sudden time saving symbols may be displayed. The number of times (for example, 1200 times, etc.) may be larger than the number of times (950 times) of the symbol variation display in which the play time is maintained.

Further, in the present embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a lost symbol. "Special figure F" is a lost pattern.

FIG. 6B shows an example of the stop symbol mode of the special figure 2. In FIG. 6B, five types of special figures from "special figure a" to "special figure e" are shown, and three types of special figures are jackpot symbols ("special figure a" to "special figure a" to "special figure". Figure c "). "Special figure a" is a 5R normal jackpot symbol, and when "special figure a" is stopped and displayed, the first variable winning opening 234a shifts to a jackpot game state in which it opens in all rounds, and the jackpot game ends. After that, the control state becomes the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state. In the present embodiment, when the "special figure a" is stopped and displayed, the electric support state (a time reduction) is maintained while the special figure variable game is performed 100 times after the jackpot game to be performed thereafter, and the 101st time. It shifts to the non-electric support state (normally low probability state). It should be noted that the number of symbol variation displays in the electric support state in which the jackpot shifts in the special figure 1 and the number of symbol variation displays in the electric support state in which the jackpot shifts in the special figure 2 may be different. Set so that the number of symbol fluctuation displays in the electric support state is larger when the big hit is made in Fig. 2 and the state is changed to the electric support state than when the big hit is made in FIG. 1 and the state is changed to the electric support state. It may be set to be small. In addition, "special figure b" is a 5R probability variable big hit symbol, and when "special figure b" is stopped and displayed, the second variable winning opening 235a shifts to a big hit game state in which it opens in all rounds, and the big hit game ends. After that, the control state becomes the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state. Further, the "special figure c" is a 10R probability variation big hit symbol, and when the "special figure c" is stopped and displayed, the second variable winning opening 235a shifts to the big hit game state in which it opens in all rounds, and the big hit game is started. After the end, the control state becomes the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state.

Further, in the present embodiment, in addition to the big hit symbol, one type of stop symbol (“special symbol d”) is prepared as a small hit symbol. When a small hit is made with the "special figure d", the shutter member 2351a of the second variable winning opening 235a opens for 0.06 seconds 12 times after the symbol is stopped. That is, if a small hit is made with the "special figure d", many game balls can easily enter the second variable winning opening 235a, and a large number of balls can be obtained. The opening time and the number of times of opening the shutter member 2351a can be set as appropriate. Further, there may be two or more types of small hit symbols. Further, in the small hit game, when a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) enters the second variable winning opening 235a, or when a predetermined amount of game value (predetermined number of balls) is acquired, the small hit game is performed. The hit game is completed, and the shutter member 2351a is not opened after that. During the small hit game, it shifts to the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. The small hit is a hit in which the control state does not change before and after the small hit game, and after the small hit game ends, the control state returns to the control state before the start of the small hit game.

In the present embodiment, as described above, since the machine is a simultaneous variable machine, there may be a situation in which the special figure 1 is displaying the fluctuation when the special figure 2 becomes a small hit and the game shifts to the small hit game. .. In this case, when a small hit occurs in Special Figure 2, the variation display of Special Figure 1 is interrupted, and when the small hit game related to the small hit ends, the variation display of Special Figure 1 is restarted. In addition, when the special figure 1 becomes a big hit and shifts to the big hit game, the special figure 2 is in a variable display, or when the special figure 2 becomes a big hit and shifts to the big hit game, the special figure 1 changes and displays. In this case, if one special figure becomes a big hit, the variable display of the other special figure is forcibly terminated, the result of the variable display is discarded, and the result of the deviation is displayed. It will be.

Further, in the present embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a lost symbol. "Special figure e" is a lost pattern.

FIG. 6C shows an example of a decorative pattern. There are 10 types of decorative patterns of the present embodiment, "decoration 1" to "decoration 10". The first starting port sensor has detected that the ball has entered the special drawing 1 starting port 230 or the special drawing 2 starting port 232, that is, the ball has entered the special drawing 1 starting port 230, or the special drawing 2 Each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, provided that the second start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the start port 232. "Decoration 1"-> "Decoration 2"-> "Decoration 3"-> ... "Decoration 9"-> "Decoration 10"-> "Decoration 1"-> ... "Variable display of symbols" may be performed. That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 variablely displays the decorative symbol separately from the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214. Then, the stop symbol mode, which is a combination of decorative symbols, is stopped and displayed. In the present embodiment, the variation of the special figure 1 is performed in the non-electric support state (the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state or the special figure high probability normal figure low probability state) in which the special figure 1 is mainly displayed as a fluctuation. In the electric support state (special figure low probability normal figure high probability state or special figure high probability normal figure high probability state) in which the decorative pattern is variablely displayed according to the display and the special figure 2 is mainly variable display, the special figure is special. The variable display of the decorative symbol is performed in accordance with the variable display of FIG. On the other hand, in the non-electric support state, even if the variation display of the special figure 2 is performed, the variation display of the decorative symbol is not performed, and the symbol variation display is performed only on the fourth symbol and the second special symbol display device 214, which will be described later. In the electric support state, even if the variation display of the special figure 1 is performed, the variation display of the decorative symbol is not performed, and the symbol variation display is performed only on the fourth symbol and the first special symbol display device 212.

When the 1st special figure display device 212 or the 2nd special figure display device 214 notifies a 5R normal jackpot, a 5R probability variation jackpot, or a 10R probability variation jackpot, the same even-numbered decorative symbols are displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The combination of three decorative symbols (for example, "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2", "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4", etc.) is stopped and displayed. Further, when the 1st special figure display device 212 or the 2nd special figure display device 214 notifies the 5R probability variation jackpot or the 10R probability variation jackpot, "Decoration 3-Decoration 3-Decoration 3" is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. And a combination of decorative symbols in which three decorative symbols of the same odd number other than "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" are arranged (for example, "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1" and "decoration 5-decoration 5-" Decorative 5 "etc.) is stopped and displayed. When the 10R probability variation jackpot is confirmed and notified by the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214, "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" or "decoration 7-" is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. "Decoration 7-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Further, when the sudden time saving symbol of "special figure E" is notified, "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. In addition, when notifying any of the 2R probability variation big hit symbol of "special figure D", the small hit symbol of "special figure d", and the lost symbol of "special figure F" or "special figure e", the symbol display area On 208a to 208c, combinations of decorative symbols (for example, loose stitches) other than the combinations of decorative symbols described so far are stopped and displayed.

Hereinafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display from the start of this "variable display of the decorative symbol" to the stop display of the stop symbol mode of the decorative symbol is the variable display of the decorative symbol (in the case of "decorative symbol variable display"). There is also.). The variable display of the decorative symbol is performed by being controlled by the second sub-control unit 500.

FIG. 6D shows an example of the stop symbol mode of the normal drawing. There are two types of stop display modes of the normal figure of the present embodiment: a hit symbol "Public figure A" and a missed symbol "Public figure B". Based on the fact that the gate sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that the ball has passed through the normal figure start port 228, the normal figure display device 210 alternately lights two LEDs arranged one above the other. Perform "variable display" (normal map variable game). Then, after the fluctuation time has elapsed, one of the hit symbols "Fu-zu A" and the out-of-order symbol "Fu-zu B" is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 6D, the white portion in the figure indicates the location of the lamp to be turned off, and the black portion indicates the location of the lamp to be turned on.

Hereinafter, the display from the start of this "variation display of the normal map" to the stop display of the stop symbol mode of the normal map may be referred to as the variable display of the normal map.

<Main control unit main processing>
Next, with reference to FIG. 7, the main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 5 will be described. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main processing of the main control unit.

The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 5 stores a special figure random value, a special figure round determination random value, a special figure electric support determination random value, a special symbol symbol determination random value, and the like. Further, the RAM 308 is provided with a random number counter that generates these various random number values. Further, the RAM 308 stores the number of reserved special figures, the random value of winning special figures, the results of various determinations (lottery), and the like. Hereinafter, the area for storing the reserved number of the special figure in the RAM 308 may be referred to as the reserved number storage area for the special figure. Furthermore, in the RAM 308, the start information for the special figure divided into the maximum number of areas (4 each in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 in this example) in which the start of the winning / failing judgment (lottery) can be suspended. A storage unit is prepared, and a random value storage area for a general drawing is also prepared. As will be described later, in the start information storage unit for the special figure, a plurality of types of start information are set as one set, and these start information are stored in each set in the winning order (holding order) for each area.

As described above, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 5 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which the start signal is input reset-starts by reset interrupt and executes the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 7 according to the control program stored in the ROM 306 in advance.

In step S101, the initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, the stack initial value is set (temporarily set) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, the interrupt mask is set, the I / O 310 is initialized, the initial settings of various variables stored in the RAM 308 are set, and the WDT314 is set. Allow the operation of and set the initial value. In this embodiment, the WDT 314 is set to a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms as an initial value.

In step S103, the value of the counter of WDT314 is cleared, and the time measurement by WDT314 is restarted.

In step S105, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage value of the power supply supplied by the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 via the second sub control unit 500 by the voltage monitoring circuit 338. Monitors whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output when is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment). Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects the power interruption), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect the power interruption), the step returns to step S103. Proceed to S107. Even if the predetermined value (9V) is not reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

In step S107, the initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process of setting a numerical value for setting a cycle for executing the timer interrupt process of the main control unit, which will be described later, in the timer circuit 312 in the timer circuit 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, etc.) A process for outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub-control unit 400), a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

In step S109, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before the power is cut off (before the power is cut off), and when the state before the power is cut off is not returned (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is initialized). ) Proceeds to the processing after step S113 in order to execute the initialization processing.

If it is not determined that the state before the power failure is restored (step S109; No), the cause is whether the RAM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board 182 shown in FIG. 2 is operated by a clerk of a game store or the like. Whether or not it is determined (step S113). That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear signal transmitted when the RAM clear switch 180 is operated is ON (indicating that the operation has been performed). When it is determined that the RAM clear signal is ON (step S113; Yes), it is determined whether or not the setting change key 192 is operated to the ON side (step S115), and the setting change key 192 is operated to the ON side. If it is determined that the case is true (step S115; Yes), the setting change process is executed (step S117).

When the setting change process is executed, the 7-segment corresponding to the setting monitor on the accessory ratio / setting display 196 blinks indicating "1", indicating that the setting can be changed. In this state, each time the setting change button 194 is pressed, the 7-segment of the setting monitor is incremented, and the setting change button 194 is pressed while the 7-segment corresponding to the setting monitor indicates "6". Then, it returns to "1". In the present embodiment, at least one of settings 1 to 6 having different jackpot probabilities can be selected, and the setting is made by operating the setting change key 192 to the OFF side after changing to the desired setting. Is confirmed. At this time, the setting value displayed on the setting monitor is deleted. After that, after the setting is confirmed, the set value can be redisplayed on the setting monitor for a certain period of time (for example, 5 seconds) by operating the setting change button 194. In the present embodiment, the set value is displayed on the setting monitor of the accessory ratio / setting display 196, but for example, it may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 or notified by voice output. good. Further, in the present embodiment, the 6-step setting of the settings 1 to 6 is set, but the setting may be other than the 6-step setting, or the setting may not be changed. Further, in the present embodiment, the initial value of the setting displayed on the setting monitor is set to "1", but the setting value before the power is cut off is retained and the retained setting value is displayed. May be good.

Further, in step S113, when it is not determined that the RAM clear signal is ON (step S113; No), or when it is not determined in step S115 that the setting change key 192 is operated to the ON side (step S113; No). Step S115; No), the process proceeds to step S119 without executing the setting change process of step S117.

In step S119, the initialization process is executed so as to bring the basic circuit 302 into the initial state (step S119). Here, when the RAM clear signal is ON, the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and when the power status information is not information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 (for example,). A checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in (all areas) to a register having a 1-byte structure whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0). Is determined (whether the checksum result is normal or not), and when the checksum result is other than a specific value (for example, 0) (when the checksum result is abnormal). Executes the initialization process to bring the pachinko machine 100 into the initial state. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition is set, the stack initial value is set in the stack pointer (this setting), and all the storage areas of the RAM 308 are initialized. In the present embodiment, the set value set in the setting change process (step S117) is retained even when the initialization is performed. Further, here, a normal return command and a setting command indicating the setting selected in step S117 are set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S119) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and is the same as the power recovery command described later in step S233 of the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300. , Is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. Further, in the present embodiment, when the initialization process is executed, a part of the storage area of the RAM 308 may be maintained in the state before the power failure without being initialized. For example, a big hit. Regarding the number of start times (TS) and the flags related to the execution of the play time (b time reduction state) described later, the specifications may not be cleared even if the settings are changed (including retyping the same settings). Further, even when the ram is not cleared, only predetermined data such as a flag related to the execution of the number of big hit start times (TS) and the play time (b time reduction state) may be cleared. In this case, the predetermined data may be arbitrarily cleared or may be forcibly cleared.

In step S121, after setting the interrupt prohibition, the basic random number initial value update process is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, two initial value generation random number counters for generating the initial values of the normal figure winning random number counter and the special figure random number value counter are updated. For example, assuming that the numerical range that can be taken as the normal figure winning random number value is 0 to 99, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the general figure winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 100, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are updated in the same manner. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S121 except during the timer interrupt process that starts at a predetermined cycle.

On the other hand, in step S111, the power recovery process is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 is read at the time of power interruption, and the stack pointer is reset (this setting). Further, when the power is cut off, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 is read, reset to each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. After that, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the stack pointer and the register after the resetting, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power is turned off. That is, the process is restarted from the instruction following the instruction (predetermined in step S121) that was performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power failure. Further, the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 2 is provided with a transmission information storage area. In this step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the state has returned to the state when the power was turned off, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, which will be described later.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the timer interrupt process of the main control unit.

The main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 5 includes a timer circuit 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (once every 4 ms in the present embodiment), and the main control is triggered by the timer interrupt signal. Part timer interrupt processing is started at a predetermined cycle.

In step S201, the timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

In step S203, the WDT314 is periodically (this) so that the count value of the WDT314 does not exceed the initial setting value (32.8 ms in the present embodiment) and the WDT interrupt does not occur (so as not to detect an abnormality in the process). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every about 2 ms, which is the cycle of interrupting the main control unit timer.

In step S205, the input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update process, detection signals of various sensors 320 shown in FIG. 5, including various ball detection sensors, are input via the input port of the I / O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals, and various types are sent to the RAM 308. It is stored in the signal state storage area provided separately for each sensor 320. Taking the detection signal of the ball detection sensor as an example, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected in the timer interrupt processing (about 4 ms before) two times before is stored in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor. Read from the previous detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308, store this information in the detection signal storage area before the previous two times divided in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor, and perform the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before). ), The information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor is read out from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor, and this information is read out from the above-mentioned previous detection signal storage area. Remember in. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-mentioned detection signal storage area this time.

Further, in step S205, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned two-time detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared, and each of them is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor of the above matches the winning determination pattern information. While one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor, this main control unit timer interrupt process, which repeats activation at a very short interval of about 2 ms, is activated several times. Therefore, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S205 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the above-mentioned two-time detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal two times before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection and noise of the ball detection sensor, if the detection signal is stored twice in succession after no detection signal, it is determined that a prize has been won. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 5 stores prize determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no detection signal two times before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time). In this step S205, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is the predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, there is no detection signal two times before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time. When it matches with the general winning opening 226a, 226b, the first variable winning opening 234a, the second variable winning opening 235a, the first special drawing start opening 230 and the second special drawing starting opening 232. It is determined that the ball has entered the ball, or that the starting port 228 or the jackpot generation gate 252 has passed. That is, it is determined that the winning openings 234a, 235a, 226a, 226b and the starting openings 230, 232, 228, and 252 have been awarded. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three times in the first special figure start port sensor that detects the entry of the ball into the first special figure start port 230 matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the first It is determined that the special figure start port 230 has won a prize, that is, the game medium passing through the predetermined area has been detected, and the processing associated with the subsequent winning of the first special figure start port 230 is performed, but the detection for the past three times is performed. If the information on the presence or absence of the signal does not match the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the process branches to the subsequent processing without performing the processing associated with the subsequent winning of the first special figure start port 230. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores the winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal two times before, no detection signal last time, and no detection signal this time). After it is determined that there has been a prize once, it is not determined that there was a prize until the information on the presence or absence of the detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the prize judgment clear pattern information, and the prize judgment is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information.

In step S207 and step S209, the basic random number initial value update process and the basic random number update process are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S121 is updated, and then the normal figure winning random number value and the normal figure winning random number value used by the main control unit 300 are used. The random number counter for generating each special figure random number value is updated. For example, assuming that the numerical range that can be taken as the normal figure winning random number value is 0 to 99, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the general figure winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 100, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has gone around as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a winning random number value that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 99, and the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as the initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for generating the winning random number value, and the general figure is used. The initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to set it in the random number counter for generating the winning random value and to determine that the random number counter for generating the winning random value has made one round next. I will do it. In addition to the above-mentioned initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the winning random number of the normal figure has made one round next, it is determined that the random number counter for generating the special figure random number has made one round. The RAM 308 is provided with an initial value storage area for this purpose.

In step S211 the effect random number update process is performed. In this effect random number update process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number value used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

In step S213, the timer update process is performed. In this timer update process, a symbol is displayed on the normal symbol display symbol update timer, the first special symbol display device 212, and the second special symbol display device 214 for measuring the time for displaying the symbol on the normal symbol display device 210 in a fluctuating / stopped manner. Various types including a special symbol display symbol update timer for timing the fluctuation / stop display time, a timer for timing a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined open time, a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, etc. Update the timer.

In step S215, the winning opening counter update process is performed. In this winning opening counter update process, when there is a prize in the winning openings 234a, 235a, 226a, 226b and the starting openings 230, 232, the number of winning balls provided in the RAM 308 for each winning opening or for each starting opening is stored. The value of the area is read, 1 is added, and the original prize ball number storage area is set.

Further, in step S217, the winning prize acceptance process is performed. In the prize reception process, if a predetermined condition is satisfied, a plurality of types of start information are acquired. The plurality of types of start information acquired here are stored as one set of start information in a vacant area of the start information storage unit provided in the RAM 308 according to the winning order (holding order).

In step S219, which is executed following step S217, the payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information to be output to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. 5 are composed of 1 byte, and the strobe information (when on, it indicates that the data is set) and the bit 6 are set in bit 7. Power-on information (when on, indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4 to 5 this time processing type for encryption (0 to 3), and bits 0 to 3 encrypted. The number of payout requests after chemical processing is shown.

In step S221, the normal map state update process is performed. This normal map state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal map state. For example, in the normal figure state update process in the middle of the normal figure fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned normal figure display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the two LEDs constituting the normal symbol display device 210 are turned on and off alternately. Drive control is performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a variable display of the normal map (normal map variable game).

In addition, in the normal figure state update process at the timing when the normal figure fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the normal figure display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), when the hit flag is on, the hit symbol is displayed. The lighting / extinguishing drive control of the two LEDs constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is performed so as to be a mode, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured so as to display a lost symbol. Controls the lighting and extinguishing of the two LEDs. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings not only in the normal figure state update process but also in various processes. Here, the lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and a setting indicating that the normal drawing stop display is in progress is performed in the setting area. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines one of the hit symbol (normal symbol A shown in FIG. 6 (d)) and the lost symbol (normal symbol B shown in FIG. 6 (d)). Display. After that, for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the normal figure stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display. With this setting, the confirmed and displayed symbol is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the normal map variation game is notified to the player.

If the result of the normal map fluctuation game is a hit, the normal map hit flag is turned on, as will be described later. When this normal figure hit flag is on, in the normal figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the normal figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 The blade member 232a is open to the solenoid (332) for opening / closing the blade member 232a of the second special figure start port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds) while setting the normal drawing operation in the setting area. In addition to outputting the signal held in the RAM 308, information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the blade opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

Further, in the normal drawing state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the blade member has a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 msec). A signal for holding the blade member 232a in the closed state is output to the solenoid (332) for driving the opening / closing of the 232a, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

Further, in the normal figure state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the setting area of the RAM 308 is set to be inactive. do. Further, if the result of the normal map fluctuation game is a loss, the normal map loss flag is turned on as described later. When this normal figure loss flag is on, even in the normal figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the value of the normal figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). Set the setting area of the RAM 308 to be inactive. In the normal map state update process when the normal map is not operating, the process proceeds to the next step S223 without doing anything.

In step S223, the drawing-related lottery process is performed. In this normal figure-related lottery process, the normal figure variable game and the open / closed control of the second special figure start port 232 are not performed (the state of the normal figure is not operating), and the normal figure variable game is held. When the number is 1 or more, it is determined whether the result of the normal figure fluctuation game is won or not won by the random number lottery based on the normal figure winning random number value stored in the above-mentioned random number value storage area. If the winning is determined, the hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. In case of unsuccessful, set the hit flag to off. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, the value of a predetermined random number counter is acquired as the normal figure timer random number value, and based on the acquired normal figure timer random number value, the normal figure display device 210 is used from among a plurality of fluctuation times. One time for variable display of the figure is selected, and this variable display time is stored in the normal figure fluctuation time storage area provided in the RAM 308 as the normal figure fluctuation display time. It should be noted that the number of reserved normal figure variable games is stored in the normal figure reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and each time a hit determination is made, the number of reserved normal figure variable games is calculated. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is stored again in this reserved number storage area. Also, the random value used for the hit judgment is deleted.

Subsequently, the special figure look-ahead process (step S224) is executed. In the special figure pre-reading process, the main control unit 300 pre-reads the increased start information in each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, predetermines the stop symbol and the fluctuation time before the hit / fail determination process, and predetermines. The result (special figure look-ahead result) is stored in the look-ahead result storage unit in the RAM 308. The details of the special figure look-ahead processing will be described later.

Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In this special figure 2 state update process, one of the following plurality of processes is performed according to the state of special figure 2.

For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), a predetermined one of the eight LEDs constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is specified. The lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed by repeating the lighting / extinguishing of the LED. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variable game). Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and then the process is terminated. If the number of time reductions stored in the time reduction storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of time reductions.

Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as a 10R jackpot flag, a 5R jackpot flag, a 2R jackpot flag, a small hit flag, a missed flag, a special figure probability fluctuation flag, and a normal figure probability fluctuation flag. .. These flags are set on or off based on the determined stop symbol in the special figure 2 related lottery process described later. In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation display time elapses (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), for example, the 10R jackpot flag is on, and the special figure When the probability fluctuation flag is on and the timer probability fluctuation flag is off, the special figure c and 5R jackpot flags shown in Fig. 6 (b) are on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, and the timer probability fluctuation flag is also on. In the case, the special figure b, 5R jackpot flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure a, and the small hit flag is on, the special figure d, loss. When the flag is on, the special figure e and the LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 are controlled to turn on / off so as to be in each mode, and the special figure 2 stop display is being displayed in the setting area of the RAM 308. Make settings to indicate that. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 has a 10R probability variable big hit symbol (special figure c), a 5R probability variable big hit symbol (special figure b), a 5R normal big hit symbol (special symbol a), and a small hit symbol (special figure a). The final display of any one of the symbol d) and the lost symbol (special symbol e) is performed. In the present embodiment, the special 2 priority variable machine is described as an example, but it may be applied to a simultaneous variable machine in which special figures 1 and 2 simultaneously change and display, and in this case, the pachinko machine 100 , The fluctuation display of the special figure 1 may be performed during the fluctuation display of the special figure 2, but if the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing when the fluctuation display time of the special figure 2 elapses, the special figure 1 Regardless of the lottery result, the lottery result is discarded in the special figure 1 at the timing of the jackpot symbol display of the special figure 2, and the out-of-order symbol is stopped and displayed. In addition, when the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is performed during the fluctuation display of the special figure 2, even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing when the fluctuation display time of the special figure 2 elapses, the special figure 2 is also displayed. At the timing of displaying the small hit symbol, the lottery result of the special figure 1 may be discarded and the out-of-order symbol may be stopped and displayed.

After that, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. With this setting, the confirmed display of the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. Further, if the number of time reductions stored in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 0 and the time reduction flag is on, the time reduction flag is turned off. Furthermore, the time saving flag is turned off even during the big hit game (during the special game state).

Further, in FIG. 2, a symbol for additionally storing predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and the variable display is stopped. The special figure 2 identification information indicating that the information is present is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in the command data described later, and then the process is terminated.

Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit standby state is set in order to wait for the passing of the game ball to the big hit generation gate 252. In the present embodiment, no big hit is generated and no expiration date is set from the time when the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed with the big hit symbol until the game ball passes through the big hit generation gate 252. If the game ball does not pass through the jackpot generation gate 252 by the time when a predetermined period (for example, 5 minutes or the like) elapses after the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the jackpot may be extinguished. Further, if the big hit generation gate 252 is not provided and the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2, the big hit may be generated.

When the game ball passes through the jackpot generation gate 252, the jackpot flag is turned on. When the jackpot flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process, the special figure 2 is set to the setting area of the RAM 308, and a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208. In order to wait for a period of time during which the image for notifying the player to start is displayed, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined opening period (for example, 29 seconds) , Or the door member 2341a of the first variable winning opening 234a (until the winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected in the first variable winning opening 234a or the second variable winning opening 235a) (second variable winning opening). A signal for holding the door member 2341a (shutter member 2351a) in the open state is output to a solenoid (a part of various solenoids 332) for driving the opening / closing of the shutter member 2351a of 235a, and the door opening time management provided in the RAM 308 is managed. Set the information indicating the open period in the storage area of the timer. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the large winning opening opening setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) The door member 2341a (shutter member 2351a) is closed to the solenoid (a part of various solenoids 332) for opening / closing the door member 2341a of the first variable winning opening 234a (the shutter member 2351a of the second variable winning opening 235a). The signal to be held is output, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the large winning opening closing setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process in which the opening / closing control of the door member is repeated a predetermined number of times (10 rounds or 5 rounds in this example embodiment) and started at the end timing, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds) That is, in order to set to wait for a period during which the image for notifying the player that the jackpot by the decorative symbol display device 208 is finished is displayed, the effect standby is performed in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Set the information indicating the period. In the present embodiment, if the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on and the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is set to on, the probability change flag and the time saving flag provided in the RAM 308 are turned on at the same time as the end of this big hit game. If the figure probability fluctuation flag is off and the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is set to on, the time reduction number of times (for example, 100 times) is set in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and the time reduction provided in the RAM 308 is set. Turn on the flag.

The term "time reduction" as used herein means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player because the time from the end of the jackpot in the special figure variable game to the start of the next jackpot is shortened. When the time saving flag is set to on, it is in the high probability state of the normal map (probability change of the normal map). In the high-probability state of the normal figure, the probability of winning in the variable game of the normal figure is higher than in the low-probability state of the normal figure. In addition, the fluctuation time of the normal-figure variable game is shorter in the normal-figure high-probability state than in the normal-figure low-probability state (normal-figure variation). Further, in the high-probability state of the normal drawing, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 tends to be longer than in the low-probability state of the normal drawing (electric chew opening). In addition, in the high-probability state of the normal drawing, the pair of blade members 232a are more likely to open than in the low-probability state of the normal drawing. The state in which any of these normal figure probability change, normal figure change short, and electric chew spread is set is called the electric support (starting mouth winning support by electric tulip) state.

Further, as described above, the time saving flag is set to off during the big hit game (during the special game state). Therefore, during the jackpot game, the low probability state of the normal figure is maintained. This is because if the probability is high during the big hit game, a predetermined number of game balls are entered into the first variable winning opening 234a (second variable winning opening 235a) during the big hit game. Fig. 2 There is a problem that many game balls enter the start port 232 and the number of game balls that can be acquired during the big hit (the number of balls to be ejected) increases, which increases the gambling property. It is for solving. In the present embodiment, since the number of prize balls for winning the special figure 2 starting port 232 is "1", the number of balls to be ejected during the big hit game does not substantially increase, and therefore during the big hit game. You may also leave the time saving flag on.

Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end effect period ends (the timing when the value of the effect standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 does not operate in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set inside.

Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of order, the out-of-order flag is turned on. When this off flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 non-operating is set. In the special figure 2 state update process in the case where the special figure 2 is not operating, the process proceeds to the next step S227 without doing anything.

Subsequently, the special figure state update process (special figure 1 state update process) for the special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In this special figure 1 state update process, one of the following plurality of processes is performed according to the state of special figure 1.

For example, in the special figure 1 state update process in the middle of the special figure 1 fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned special figure 1 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), a predetermined one of the eight LEDs constituting the special figure 1 display device 212 is specified. The lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed by repeating the lighting / extinguishing of the LED. By performing this control, the special figure 1 display device 212 performs the variable display of the special figure 1 (special figure 1 variable game). Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and then the process is terminated. If the number of time reductions stored in the time reduction storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of time reductions.

Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as a 10R jackpot flag, a 5R jackpot flag, a 2R jackpot flag, a c time reduction transition flag, a missed flag, a special figure probability fluctuation flag, and a normal figure probability fluctuation flag. There is. These flags are set on or off based on the determined stop symbol in the special figure 1 related lottery process described later. In the special figure 1 state update process that starts at the timing when the special figure 1 variation display time elapses (the timing when the value of the special figure 1 display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), for example, the 10R jackpot flag is on, and the special figure When the probability fluctuation flag is on, when the timer probability fluctuation flag is also on, the special figure C and 5R jackpot flags are on, when the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, and when the timer probability fluctuation flag is also on, special figure B, When the 5R jackpot flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, and the timer probability fluctuation flag is also on, the special figure A and 2R jackpot flags are on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, and the timer probability fluctuation flag is off. In the case of, the special figure D and c time reduction transition flags are on, the special figure E is on when the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, and the special figure F is on when the loss flag is on. , The lighting / extinguishing drive control of the LEDs constituting the special figure 1 display device 212 is performed, and the setting area of the RAM 308 is set to indicate that the special figure 1 stop display is in progress. By performing this control, the special figure 1 display device 212 has a 5R normal jackpot symbol (special figure A), a 5R probability variable jackpot symbol (special figure B), a 10R probability variable jackpot symbol (special figure C), and a 2R probability variable jackpot symbol (special figure C). A definite display of any one of the special figure D), the sudden time saving symbol (special figure E), and the lost symbol (special figure F) is performed. In the present embodiment, when the time saving symbol (special figure E) is suddenly displayed, the time saving flag is turned on, the predetermined number of times (30 times) is set in the time saving number of times, and the state shifts to the time saving state (c time saving state). do.

In the above explanation, the special figure 2 variable game having a high advantage is started with priority over the special figure 1 variable game having a low advantage, and the hold of the special figure 2 is digested with priority over the hold of the special figure 1. The special figure 2 priority fluctuation is taken as an example, but the special figure 1 variable game having a low advantage is started with priority over the special figure 2 variable game having a high advantage, and the reservation of the special figure 1 is held in the special figure 2. It may be a special figure 1 priority change that is digested in preference to a hold. In addition, without giving priority to either the high-advantageous special figure 2 variable game or the low-advantage special figure 1 variable game, the special figure variable game related to the holding of each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is started and won a prize. It may be a variation in the starting opening winning order that starts in order. In the change in the starting order winning order, the maximum number of holds is eight regardless of the special figures 1 and 2, so it is compared with the priority change in which the maximum number of holds is 4 in each of the special figures 1 and 2. Then, it may be possible to raise the upper limit of the number of holds.

Further, in the above description, it is assumed that the lottery process and the variable game regarding the holding of the other special figure are not performed according to the state of one special figure, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the above-mentioned special figure state update By performing the processing and the special drawing-related lottery processing independently for each of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2, a plurality of special figures may be configured to be changed at the same time (simultaneous variable machine). Further, when a plurality of special figures are changed at the same time in this way, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a plurality of areas for displaying the lottery results of each special figure, or the lottery results of each special figure are displayed. A plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided to display the lottery results separately, or the display of 1 may be configured to display the lottery results of a plurality of special figures. Further, it may be a simultaneous variable machine in which the special figure 1 variable game and the special figure 2 variable game are performed at the same time. In the pachinko machine, which is a simultaneous fluctuation machine, the fluctuation display of the special figure 2 may be performed during the fluctuation display of the special figure 1, but the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing when the fluctuation display time of the special figure 1 elapses. In that case, regardless of the lottery result of the special figure 2, the lottery result is discarded in the special figure 2 at the timing of the jackpot symbol display of the special figure 1, and the out-of-order symbol is stopped and displayed. In addition, when the lost symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing when the variable display time of the special figure 1 has elapsed, the lost symbol is displayed at the timing of the lost symbol of the special figure 2 regardless of the lottery result of the special figure 2. The lottery result may be discarded and the lost symbol may be stopped and displayed. In addition, when the fluctuation display of the special figure 2 is performed during the fluctuation display of the special figure 1, the lottery result of the special figure 1 is discarded and lost at the timing when the fluctuation display time of the special figure 2 elapses. The symbol may be stopped and displayed.

After that, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 1 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. With this setting, the confirmed display of the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is notified to the player. Further, if the number of time reductions stored in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 0 and the time reduction flag is on, the time reduction flag is turned off. Furthermore, the time saving flag is turned off even during the big hit game (during the special game state).

Further, in the present embodiment, as will be described in detail later, the special figure variation display (sometimes referred to as a special prize inter-prize start (TS)) from the end of the big hit to the special figure low probability state to the big hit. The number of times is counted, and when the number of times reaches a predetermined number of times (750 times), the time saving flag is turned on, the predetermined number of times (950 times) is set in the time saving number of times, and the time saving state (b time saving state or "play time"" In some cases, move to.).

Further, in FIG. 1, a symbol for additionally storing predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and the variable display is stopped. The special figure 1 identification information indicating that the information is present is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in the command data described later, and then the process is terminated.

Further, if the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit, a big hit standby state is set in order to wait for the passing of the game ball to the big hit generation gate 252. In the present embodiment, no big hit is generated and no expiration date is set from the time when the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed with the big hit symbol until the game ball passes through the big hit generation gate 252. If the game ball does not pass through the jackpot generation gate 252 by the time when a predetermined period (for example, 5 minutes or the like) elapses after the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the jackpot may be extinguished. Further, if the big hit generation gate 252 is not provided and the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1, the big hit may be generated.

When the game ball passes through the jackpot generation gate 252, the jackpot flag is turned on. When the jackpot flag is on, the RAM 308 is set in the special figure 1 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 1 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). In order to set the area to be in operation of the special figure 1 and to wait for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period of displaying an image notifying the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started. In the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308, information indicating the winning effect period is set. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 1 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 1 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined opening period (for example, 29 seconds) , Or the first variable winning opening 234a (second variable winning opening 235a) until the winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected in the first variable winning opening 234a (second variable winning opening 235a). A signal for holding the door member 2341a (shutter member 2351a) in the open state is output to a solenoid (a part of various solenoids 332) for driving the opening / closing of the door member 2341a (shutter member 2351a), and the door is opened provided in the RAM 308. Set the information indicating the open period in the storage area of the time management timer. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the large winning opening opening setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 1 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) 1st variable winning opening 234a The door member 2341a (shutter member 2351a) is held in a closed state by a solenoid (a part of various solenoids 332) for opening / closing the door member 2341a (shutter member 2351a) of the 2nd variable winning opening 235a. The signal indicating the closing period is output, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the large winning opening closing setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 1 state update process in which the opening / closing control of the door member is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 rounds, 5 rounds or 2 rounds) and started at the end timing, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds) That is, in order to set to wait for a period during which the image for notifying the player that the jackpot by the decorative symbol display device 208 is finished is displayed, the effect standby is performed in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Set the information indicating the period. In the present embodiment, if the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on and the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is set to on, the probability change flag and the time saving flag provided in the RAM 308 are turned on at the same time as the end of this big hit game. If the figure probability fluctuation flag is off and the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is set to on, the time reduction number of times (for example, 100 times) is set in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and the time reduction provided in the RAM 308 is set. If the flag is turned on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on and the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is set to off, the probability variation flag provided in the RAM 308 is turned on.

Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 1 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end effect period ends (the timing when the value of the effect standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 1 does not operate in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set inside.

Further, if the result of the special figure 1 variable game is suddenly shortened, the c time shortened transition flag is turned on. When this c time reduction transition flag is on, the special figure 1 state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 1 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0) Then, in the setting area of the RAM 308, the non-operating state of Special Figure 1 is set. At this time, the time saving number of times (for example, 30 times) is set in the time saving number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and the time saving flag provided in the RAM 308 is turned on.

Further, if the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order, the out-of-order flag is turned on. When this off flag is on, even in the special figure 1 state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 1 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). In the setting area of the RAM 308, the non-operating state of Special Figure 1 is set. In the special figure 1 state update process in the case where the special figure 1 is not operating, the process proceeds to the next step S229 without doing anything.

When the special figure state update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, the special figure-related lottery process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed this time. Here, too, the special figure-related lottery process for the special figure 2 (special figure 2 related lottery process) is performed first (step S229), and then the special figure-related lottery process for the special figure 1 (special figure 1 related lottery process). ) (Step S231). In the special figure 2 related lottery process, the variable game of special figure 2 is not performed, the state of special figure 2 is inactive, neither the big hit game of special figure 1 nor special figure 2 is in progress, and the lottery process is suspended. It is executed using the earliest special figure 2 winning random value and the special figure 2 random value in the special figure 2 random value storage area on the condition that the number of special figure 2 variable games is 1 or more. .. In the lottery process related to the special figure 1, neither the variable game of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 is performed, the states of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are inactive, and the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are inactive. Special Figure 1 random number value storage, provided that the number of special Figure 2 variable games is not reserved and the number of reserved Special Figure 1 variable games is 1 or more, which is not in any of the jackpot games. It is executed using the earliest special figure 1 winning random value and the special figure 1 random value in the area.

The notification of the result of the hit / miss determination of the special figure variation game by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and in the present embodiment, in the probabilistic change state and the time saving state, the special figure 2 starting port 232 is notified. The notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the above is given priority over the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the special figure 1 starting port 230. The notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the above is prioritized over the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the special figure 2 starting port 232.

In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process in step S229, the main control unit 300 starts the special figure 2 start information (special figure 2 start information) from the earliest (most previously stored) holding position in the special figure 2 random value storage area. (Fig. 2 Winning random number value and special figure 2 set of random value) is acquired, and ROM 306 is based on the acquired special figure 2 winning random value in the start information and the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag in RAM 308. The hit / fail judgment table stored in is used to determine whether to make a big hit, a small hit, or a miss (hit / fail judgment). Next, the main control unit 300 uses the special figure determination table stored in the ROM 306 based on the special figure 2 random value in the acquired special figure 2 start information and the determined hit / fail determination result, etc. The symbol to be stopped and displayed after the fluctuation display (stop symbol) is determined. Next, the main control unit 300 is stored in the ROM 306 based on, for example, the determined hit / fail determination result, the stop symbol, the number of special figures 2 held at the time of the hit / fail determination, the acquired random number value for determining the special figure fluctuation time, and the like. The variation display time (timer number) of the special figure 2 is determined using various tables.

After extracting the earliest special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, the main control unit 300 erases the earliest special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, and at the same time, the special figure 2 start information is deleted from the special figure 2 random value storage area. FIG. 2 Special figure 2 of the reserved number storage area The reserved number is subtracted by 1. At this time, the special figure 2 start information extracted from the special figure 2 random value storage area is stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above determination is made based on the special figure 2 start information stored in this temporary area. You may do so.

After the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) as described above, the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) is performed in the same manner. The order of the special figure 1 related lottery process and the special figure 2 related lottery process may be reversed.

In the above description, the special figure 2 is configured to be prioritized over the special figure 1 in the above-mentioned special figure state update process and the special figure-related lottery process, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the special figure 1 and the special figure are not limited to this. By performing each of the two independently, a plurality of special figures may be configured to be changed at the same time.

In step S233 following step S231, the command setting transmission process is performed. In this command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of, for example, 16 bits, the bits 15 are strobe information (when it is on, it indicates that data is set), and the bits 11 to 14 are. Command type (In this example, basic command, winning opening winning command, out ball command, launch position command, special figure fluctuation start command, special figure fluctuation stop command, special figure hit start command, special figure hit end command, big prize Open mouth command, jackpot round number specification command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, look-ahead result information command, setting command, and other command type-identifiable information), bits 0 to 10 are command data (predetermined corresponding to the command type) Information).

Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off in the above-mentioned command transmission process. If the command type is the special figure fluctuation start command, the command data includes information indicating various big hit flags, small hit flags, c time reduction transition flags, missed flags, timer numbers selected in the special figure related lottery process, and the like. In addition, in the present embodiment, when the special figure variation start command is set, the stop symbol information that can specify the stop symbol is included. In the case of the special figure fluctuation stop command, the values of various jackpot flags, small hit flags, c time reduction transition flags, missed flags, etc. are included, and in the case of the command to specify the number of jackpot rounds, the number of jackpot rounds, etc. are included. .. When the command type indicates a basic command, the command data includes device information, whether or not the special figure 1 starting port 230 has been won, whether or not the special figure 2 starting port 232 has been won, and whether or not the first variable winning opening 234a has been won. Includes presence / absence, presence / absence of winning in the second variable winning opening 235a, and the like. In the case of the look-ahead result information command, the command data includes information such as the types of special figures 1 and 2, the number of look-aheads stored in the look-ahead number storage area, and the stop symbol stored in the look-ahead result storage unit. If it is a setting command, it includes setting information and so on.

Further, in the above-mentioned rotation start setting transmission process, various big hit flags, small hit flags, c time reduction shift flags, missed flag values, special figure 1 related lottery process and special figure 2 stored in the RAM 308 are stored in the command data. Set information indicating the timer number selected in the related lottery process, the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games, and the like. In the above-described rotation stop setting transmission process, information indicating the values of various big hit flags, small hit flags, c time reduction transition flags, and missed flags stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data.

In the above-mentioned prize-winning effect setting transmission process, the command data includes the effect control information stored in the RAM 308 and output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the prize-winning effect period, and the reserved special figure. 1 Variable game or special figure 2 Set information indicating the number of variable games. In the above-mentioned end effect setting transmission process, the command data includes the effect control information stored in the RAM 308 and output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, and the reserved special figure. 1 Variable game or special figure 2 Set information indicating the number of variable games. In the above-mentioned large winning opening opening setting transmission process, information indicating the number of jackpot rounds stored in the RAM 308, the number of special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games held, and the like are set in the command data. In the above-mentioned large winning opening closing setting transmission process, information indicating the number of jackpot rounds stored in the RAM 308, the number of special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games held, and the like are set in the command data.

Further, in this step S233, the general command special figure hold increase process is also performed. In this general command special figure hold increase processing, special figure identification information (information indicating special figure 1 or special figure 2) and notice information (advance notice information, false notice information) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308 in the command data. Either advance notice information or no advance notice information) is set.

The first sub-control unit 400 can determine the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300 depending on the command type included in the received output schedule information, and is included in the output schedule information. It becomes possible to determine the effect control content based on the information of the command data.

In step S235 following step S233, the external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350, which is separate from the pachinko machine 100, via the information output circuit 336.

In step S237 following step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read out, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a lower plate full tank error is monitored. .. When a front frame door opening error or a lower plate full tank error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the lower plate full tank error. Set. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 and the variable winning opening 234, and the normal drawing display device 210 and the special drawing 1 display device 212 are controlled via the drive circuits 324, 326 and 330. , The display data to be output to the special figure 2 display device 214, various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the payout control unit 600 via the output port of the I / O 310.

In step S239 following step S237, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, the timer interrupt end process is performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, and the like, and then the main control unit main processing shown in FIG. 7 is performed. Return to. On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the state at the time of power interruption at the time of power recovery is saved as recovery data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and power interruption processing such as initialization of the input / output port is performed. After that, the HALT state is reached.

Next, it is used in the general drawing-related lottery process (step S223), the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229), and the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) in the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. The determination table will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 9A is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the table for determining whether or not the normal figure is correct, and FIG. 9B is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the table for determining whether or not the special figures 1 and 2 are correct. Yes, FIG. 9 (c) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the special drawing determination sorting table, and FIG. 9 (d) is a diagram for explaining the specifications of the idle time (b time reduction state).

The normal figure hit / miss determination table shown in FIG. 9A is a normal figure hit / miss determination table used at the time of the normal figure hit / miss determination. This table is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. As shown in FIG. 9A, when this hit / fail determination table is used, there is no hit value in the low probability state of the normal figure, that is, the probability of hit is 0%, and the normal figure is shown in the normal figure. In the high probability state, the range in which random numbers can be taken is 0 to 99, and the winning value is 0 to 99. That is, the probability of winning is 100/100 (that is, 100%). In addition, in the low probability state of the normal figure (when the time reduction is not activated), the hit may be made with a certain probability (for example, 1%), and in the high probability state of the normal figure (when the time reduction is activated), it is constant. The probability of (for example, 1%) may be different.

The special figure 1 and 2 hit / fail determination table shown in FIG. 9 (b) is a table referred to when the hit / fail judgment of the special figures 1 and 2 is performed, and which of the settings 1 to 6 is used. Select the record to be referenced depending on whether it is in the special figure low probability state or the special figure high probability state. This table is also stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

In the special figure low probability state of setting 1, the big hit is selected with a probability of 218/65536 (about 1/300) as a result of the winning / failing judgment of the big hit lottery of special figure 1 and special figure 2, and in the special figure high probability state, the big hit is selected. As a result of the winning / failing determination of the big hit lottery of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2, the big hit is selected with a probability of 2185/65536 (about 1/30).

In the special figure low probability state of setting 2, the big hit is selected with a probability of 226/65536 (about 1/290) as a result of the winning / failing judgment of the big hit lottery of special figure 1 and special figure 2, and in the special figure high probability state, the big hit is selected. As a result of the winning / failing determination of the big hit lottery of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2, the big hit is selected with a probability of 2260/65536 (about / 29).

In the special figure low probability state of setting 3, the big hit is selected with a probability of 234/65536 (about 1/280) as a result of the winning / failing judgment of the big hit lottery of special figure 1 and special figure 2, and in the special figure high probability state, the big hit is selected. As a result of the winning / failing determination of the big hit lottery of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2, the big hit is selected with a probability of 2341/65536 (about / 28).

In the special figure low probability state of setting 4, the big hit is selected with a probability of 243/65536 (about 1/270) as a result of the winning / failing judgment of the big hit lottery of special figure 1 and special figure 2, and in the special figure high probability state, the big hit is selected. As a result of the winning / failing determination of the big hit lottery of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2, the big hit is selected with a probability of 2427/65536 (about / 27).

In the special figure low probability state of setting 5, the big hit is selected with a probability of 252/65536 (about 1/260) as a result of the winning / failing judgment of the big hit lottery of special figures 1 and 2, and in the special figure high probability state, the big hit is selected. As a result of the winning / failing determination of the big hit lottery of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2, the big hit is selected with a probability of 2521/65536 (about / 26).

In the special figure low probability state of setting 6, the big hit is selected with a probability of 262/65536 (about 1/250) as a result of the winning / failing judgment of the big hit lottery of special figures 1 and 2, and in the special figure high probability state, the big hit is selected. As a result of the winning / failing determination of the big hit lottery of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2, the big hit is selected with a probability (about / 25) of 2621/65536.

Further, regardless of any of the settings 1 to 6, and regardless of whether the special figure is in the high probability state or the special figure low probability state, the small hit is selected as the result of the winning / failing judgment of the big hit lottery in the special figure 1. As a result of the winning / failing determination of the big hit lottery of Special Figure 2, the small hit is selected with a probability of 1966/65536 (about 3/100). It should be noted that the small hit may be generated in the special figure 1. Moreover, the probability of a small hit may be made different for each setting.

Further, regardless of any of the settings 1 to 6, and regardless of whether the special figure is in the high probability state or the special figure low probability state, the result of the jackpot lottery determination in Special Figure 1 is 164/65536. Suddenly, the time reduction (c time reduction) is selected with a probability (about 1/400). On the other hand, regardless of any of the settings 1 to 6, and regardless of whether the special figure is in the high probability state or the special figure low probability state, the time reduction is suddenly selected as a result of the winning / failing judgment of the big hit lottery in special figure 2. Will not be done. It should be noted that the time may be shortened suddenly in the special figure 2. Further, the probability of sudden time reduction may be made different for each setting.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in any of the settings 1 to 6, the jackpot probability in the special figure high probability state is set to be higher than the jackpot probability in the special figure low probability state. Further, in the present embodiment, the jackpot probability differs depending on the setting, and the higher the setting, the easier the jackpot is, and the lower the setting, the more difficult the jackpot is.

FIG. 9C shows an example of a distribution table for determining a special figure, and as described above, a stop symbol is determined based on the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 or 2 is correct or not. This table is also stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. In this special figure determination distribution table, a random number range corresponding to the stop symbol mode of the special figure (see FIGS. 6 (a) and 6 (b)) is defined for each hit / fail determination result.

First, if the result of the special figure 1 hit / fail judgment is a big hit, any one of "special figure A" to "special figure D" is selected. As described above, "Special Figure A" is a 5R normal jackpot opened by the first variable winning opening 234a, and "Special Figure B" is a 5R probability variable jackpot opened by the second variable winning opening 235a. "Special Figure C" is a 10R probability variation jackpot opened by the second variable winning opening 235a, and "Special Figure D" is a 2R latent probability variation jackpot opened by the second variable winning opening 235a for a short time. Regardless of the setting, each selection rate has a probability of 40/100 for "Special Figure A", a probability of 50/100 for "Special Figure B", and a probability of 5/100 for "Special Figure C". , "Special figure D" has a probability of 5/100.

Next, if the result of the special figure 2 hit / fail determination is a big hit, any one of "special figure a" to "special figure c" is selected. As described above, "special figure a" is a 5R normal jackpot opened by the first variable winning opening 234a, and "special figure b" is a 5R probability variable jackpot opened by the second variable winning opening 235a. "Special figure c" is a 10R probability variation jackpot opened by the second variable winning opening 235a. Each selection rate is 40/100 for "special figure a", 10/100 for "special figure b", and 50/100 for "special figure c" regardless of the setting.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the case of the big hit in the special figure 2 is easier to shift to the big hit game with a large number of balls than the case of the big hit in the special figure 1, and the big hit in the special figure 2 is advantageous. Therefore, for example, it may be possible to raise the expectation that a big hit will occur during the execution of the play time or during the sudden reduction in time. Further, in the present embodiment, it can be said that there are more big hits in the case of the big hit in the special figure 2 than in the case of the big hit in the special figure 1 to shift to the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state.

FIG. 9D illustrates the specifications of the play time (b time reduction). The play time shifts to the special figure low probability state after the end of the big hit game, and then shifts without becoming a big hit when the symbol variation display is continuously performed 750 times without becoming a big hit. Is. In the present embodiment, for example, if the play time transition condition is satisfied during the execution of the c time reduction state described above, the play time shifts to the play time regardless of the remaining number of fluctuations in the c time reduction state. After all the remaining number of fluctuations have been executed, the play time may be entered. In the present embodiment, once the play time is started and ended, the play time is not shifted to the play time again until the big hit is reached again. In this case, if the time saving symbol is suddenly displayed in the special figure 1 after the end of the play time, the c time saving state is started.

Next, the processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described. FIG. 10A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. First, in step S301 of FIG. 10A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step S301. In this initialization process, the initial setting of the input / output port, the initialization process of the storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

In step S303 following step S301, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305. .. In step S305, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S307 following step S305, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 determines whether or not a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

In step S309 following step S307, the effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S307, processing such as reading the production data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when the production data needs to be updated, the production data is updated.

In step S311 following step S309, the chance button control process is performed. In the chance button control process, the operation of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 190 is detected, and the effect data updated in step S309 is converted into the effect data according to the operation of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 190 according to the detection result. Perform the process to change to.

In step S313 following step S311, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control process, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

In step S315 following step S313, the lamp control process is performed. In the lamp control process, if there is a command to various lamps 442,452 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the game board lamp drive circuit 440 and the game underframe lamp drive circuit 450. do.

In step S317 following step S315, the movable body control process is performed. For example, if there is an instruction to the effect devices 2 to 5 in the effect data read in step S309, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 422.

In step S319 following step S317, information transmission processing is performed. In the information transmission process, if there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S309, a setting is made to output this control command. Then, the process returns to step S303.

FIG. 10B is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit command reception interrupt processing (strobe interrupt processing) executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal from the main control unit 300. In step S331 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

FIG. 10C is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined with this timer interrupt as an opportunity. Execute in the cycle of. In step S341 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 of the first sub-control unit main process and stored in the original timer variable storage area. do. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

In step S343 following step S341, the control command is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 set in the information transmission process (step S319) of the first sub-control unit main process, and the random value value for other effects is updated. And so on.

Next, the processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described. FIG. 11A is a flowchart of the main process executed by a CPU (not shown) of the second sub-control unit 500. First, in step S401 of FIG. 11A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step S401. In this initialization process, initial setting of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in RAM (not shown), and the like are performed.

In step S403 following step S401, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S405. .. In step S405, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S407 following step S405, command processing is performed. The CPU of the second sub-control unit 500 determines whether or not a command has been received from the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S409 following step S407, the effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S407, processing such as reading the effect data (effect data by the decorative symbol display device 208) corresponding to this command from the ROM (not shown) is performed to update the effect data. If is necessary, the effect data is updated.

In step S411 following step S409, image control processing is performed. In the image control process, if there is an instruction to VDP516 in the effect data read in step S409, this instruction is output to VDP516 (details will be described later). Then, the process returns to step S403.

FIG. 11B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process executed by the CPU of the second sub-control unit 500. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub-control unit 500 detects a strobe signal from the first sub-control unit 400. In step S431 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM.

FIG. 11C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process executed by the CPU of the second sub-control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined with this timer interrupt as an opportunity. Execute in the cycle of. In step S441 of the timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM described in step S403 of the second sub-control unit main process and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S403, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S443, which is next to step S441, other effects such as updating the random value for effect are performed.

FIG. 11D is a flowchart of the image control process in step S411 of the second sub-control unit main process. In step S451, a transfer instruction for image data (movie data and texture data described later) is given. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the designation of the drawing area of the frame buffer 1 and the frame buffer 2 of the VRAM 518. As a result, the one-frame image stored in the frame buffer not designated in the drawing area is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, the CPU 504 sets the ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 506), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 518), and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 516 based on the position information table, and then the image from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518. Set the command to instruct the start of data transfer. The VDP 516 transfers the image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on the instruction set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 516 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

In step S453 next to step S451, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from VDP516 is input, and if the transfer end interrupt signal is input (step S453: Yes), the process proceeds to step S455. If not (step S453: No), it waits for the transfer end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S455, parameters are set based on the effect scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the frame buffer 1 or 2 of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S451, the CPU 504 information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis of the VRAM 518, image size). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), etc.) are instructed to VDP516. The VDP 516 sets parameters according to the attributes based on the instructions stored in the attribute registers.

In step S457 following step S455, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to the instruction of the CPU 504.

In step S459 following step S457, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 516 is input based on the end of drawing the image, and if the generation end interrupt signal is input (step S459: Yes), The process proceeds to step S461, and if not (step S459: No), the process waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S461, the scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images are generated is incremented (+1) to end the process.

Next, a specific configuration of the accessory ratio / setting display 196 and the DIP switch board 198 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 12A is a diagram showing an example of a specific configuration of the accessory ratio / setting display 196, and FIG. 12B is a diagram showing an example of a specific configuration of the DIP switch board 198. Is.

As described above, the accessory ratio / setting display 196 is configured to include the accessory ratio monitor and the setting monitor, and the accessory ratio monitor includes the continuous accessory ratio (RY) and the accessory ratio (the accessory ratio (RY)). YH) is displayed, and the setting monitor is displaying the current setting value.

Here, the continuous bonus ratio is due to the operation of the bonus when the bonus is continuously operated among the number of game balls (that is, safe balls) to be acquired (that is, the first in the jackpot game). It refers to the ratio of the number of game balls acquired by opening the variable winning opening 234a and the second variable winning opening 235a and winning a prize. The ratio of the number of game balls acquired by winning the first variable winning opening 234a and the second variable winning opening 235a to the number of out balls may be used. The bonus ratio is the number of game balls (that is, safe balls) to be acquired due to the operation of the bonus (that is, the special figure start opening 232, the first variable winning opening 234a, and the second variable winning opening). It refers to the ratio of the number of game balls obtained by opening the 235a and winning a prize. A game acquired by winning the first variable winning opening 234a, the second variable winning opening 235a, the first special drawing starting opening 230, the second special drawing starting opening 232, and the general winning opening 226a, 226b with respect to the number of out balls. It may be a ratio of the number of spheres.

In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the continuous accessory ratio exceeds 60% as a result of calculating the continuous accessory ratio, the double-digit 7-segment LED displaying the continuous accessory ratio is blinked and then displayed. Outputs a security signal (RY). Here, the security signal (RY) is an error signal output when the continuous accessory ratio exceeds 60%, and is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336. It may be output from a test terminal that can be mounted on the main board 156. As a result, the type application test for the gaming machine may be smoothly performed.

In addition, as a result of calculating the accessory ratio, if it is determined that the accessory ratio exceeds 70%, the double-digit 7-segment LED displaying the accessory ratio is blinked, and then the security signal (YH) is displayed. ) Is output. Here, the security signal (YH) is an error signal output when the accessory ratio exceeds 70%, and is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

In the present embodiment, when the continuous accessory ratio or the accessory ratio exceeds the upper limit of the normal value, the predetermined 7-segment LED is blinked, but for example, the emission color is changed. May be good.

As shown in FIG. 12B, eight DIP switches are arranged on the DIP switch board 198. Each DIP switch is connected to the first sub-board 160, and the position of each DIP switch can be read when the power is turned on to change the appearance probability of the effect. The appearance rate, the rush rate of the production mode, and the like can be set.

FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the special figure look-ahead process (step S224) of the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. In the special figure pre-reading process, the main control unit 300 pre-reads the increased start information in each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, predetermines the stop symbol before the hit / miss determination process, and predetermines the stop symbol (special figure pre-reading process). The pre-reading result) is stored in the pre-reading result storage unit (see FIGS. 14A to 14C) in the RAM 308.

Here, in the RAM 308, the number of the special figure 1 look-ahead result stored in the special figure 1 look-ahead result storage unit and the special figure 1 look-ahead result storage unit for storing the special figure 1 look-ahead result is stored in the special figure. A special figure 1 pre-reading number storage area for storing as one pre-reading number is provided. In this example, the look-ahead result storage unit for special figure 1 can store up to four look-ahead results. In the special figure 1 look-ahead result storage unit, every time the number of special figure 1 look-ahead decreases by one, the data of the special figure 1 look-ahead result having the highest rank (first) is deleted, and the remaining special figure 1 look-ahead result is deleted. It is processed so that the rank of the data of is moved up by one. Further, each time the number of special figure 1 look-aheads increases by one, new special figure 1 look-ahead result data is written in the next rank after the special figure 1 look-ahead result data having the lowest (last) rank.

Further, in the RAM 308, the number of the special figure 2 look-ahead results stored in the special figure 2 look-ahead result storage unit for storing the special figure 2 look-ahead result and the special figure 2 look-ahead result storage unit is stored in the special figure 2 look-ahead result. A special figure 2 look-ahead number storage area for storing as a number is provided. In this example, the look-ahead result storage unit for special figure 2 can store up to four look-ahead results. In the special figure 2 look-ahead result storage unit, every time the number of special figure 2 look-aheads decreases by one, the data of the special figure 2 look-ahead result having the highest rank is deleted, and the rank of the remaining special figure 2 look-ahead result data is deleted. Is processed so as to be carried up by one. Further, each time the number of special figure 2 look-aheads increases by one, new special figure 2 look-ahead result data is written in the next rank after the special figure 2 look-ahead result data having the lowest rank.

In the special figure look-ahead process, the main control unit 300 first determines whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 is increasing (step S501). The determination as to whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 is increasing is stored in, for example, the special figure 2 hold number stored in the special figure 2 hold number storage area and the special figure 2 look-ahead number storage area. Special figure 2 Perform by comparing with the number of look-aheads. When the special figure 2 hold number is larger than the special figure 2 look-ahead number, the main control unit 300 determines that the start information of the special figure 2 is increasing, and the special figure 2 hold number is the special figure 2 look-ahead number. If they are equal, it is determined that the start information of the special figure 2 has not increased. If it is determined that the start information of the special figure 2 is increasing, the process proceeds to step S503, and if it is determined that the start information of the special figure 2 is not increasing, the process proceeds to step S507.

In step S503, the increased special figure 2 start information (a set of the special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random value value) is displayed before the winning / failing determination processing in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229). Fig. 2 Read ahead from the random number value storage area. Then, using the pre-read special figure 2 start information, for example, the hit / fail judgment table and the special figure determination table used at the time of the hit / fail judgment, the stop symbol of the special figure 2 variable game related to the start information is selected by the special figure 2 related lottery. A pre-determination is made prior to the pass / fail determination process in the process (step S229). It should be noted that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of winning / failing determination.

In step S505 following step S503, the stop symbol information as the special figure 2 look-ahead result obtained in the preliminary determination is stored in the earliest free area of the special figure 2 look-ahead result storage unit in the RAM 308. After that, the process proceeds to step S507.

In step S507, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the start information of the special figure 1 is increasing. Whether or not the start information of the special figure 1 is increasing is determined by, for example, the special figure 1 hold number stored in the special figure 1 hold number storage area and the special figure 1 look-ahead number storage as in the special figure 2. This is performed by comparing with the special figure 1 look-ahead number stored in the area. If it is determined that the start information of the special figure 1 is increasing, the process proceeds to step S509, and if it is determined that the start information of the special figure 1 is not increasing, the special figure look-ahead process is terminated and the main control unit. Return to timer interrupt processing.

In step S509, it is determined whether or not the non-electric support is in progress based on various flags in the RAM 308. If it is determined that the non-electric support is in progress, the process proceeds to step S511, and if it is determined that the non-electric support is in progress (in the electric support (high probability state in the normal figure)), the process proceeds to step S515. In this example, it is determined whether or not the non-electric support is in progress, but it may be determined whether or not the execution condition of the special figure 1 look-ahead advance notice is satisfied. For example, the execution conditions of the special figure 1 look-ahead advance notice include conditions such as the existence of a hold that is a big hit and the fact that the big hit game is not in progress, in addition to the fact that the non-electric support is in progress.

In step S511, the increased special figure 1 start information (a set of the special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random number value) is displayed before the winning / failing determination processing in the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231). Fig. 1 Read ahead from the random number value storage area. Then, using the pre-read special figure 1 start information, for example, the hit / fail judgment table and the special figure determination table used at the time of the hit / fail judgment, the stop symbol of the special figure 1 variable game related to the start information is selected by the special figure 1 related lottery. A pre-determination is made prior to the pass / fail determination process in the process (step S231). It should be noted that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of winning / failing determination.

In step S513 following step S511, the stop symbol information as the special figure 1 look-ahead result obtained in the preliminary determination is stored in the earliest free area of the special figure 1 look-ahead result storage unit in the RAM 308. After that, the special figure look-ahead processing is terminated and the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt processing.

In step S515, the increased special figure 1 start information is not pre-read, and the “undetermined” information indicating that the start information is not pre-read is stored in the RAM 308 as the pre-reading result result for special figure 1 in place of the stop symbol information. Store in the first free space of the department. After that, the special figure look-ahead processing is terminated and the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt processing.

In the present embodiment, only the increased start information is pre-read and pre-determined, but all the start information may be pre-read and pre-determined. Further, in the command setting transmission process (step S233) described above, only the pre-reading result of the increased start information may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, or the pre-reading result storage for the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 may be stored. All the look-ahead results in the unit may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

Further, in the flowchart shown in FIG. 13, the look-ahead is always executed for the increased start information of the special figure 2 and the look-ahead is always executed for the increased start information of the special figure 1 except during the electric support. However, it may be decided by lottery whether or not to pre-read the increased start information of the special figures 1 and 2. Alternatively, the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the pre-reading result from the main control unit 300 may decide, for example, whether or not to execute the pre-reading notification for each hold by lottery. In addition, regardless of the game state (for example, whether or not non-electric support is in progress), when the start information increases, the look-ahead is always executed and the look-ahead result is stored in the look-ahead result storage unit, and the look-ahead is stored. The result may be configured to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 may be configured to determine whether or not to execute the lottery and the effect using the look-ahead result.

FIG. 14 illustrates a state in which the look-ahead result information and the like are stored in the look-ahead result storage unit in the RAM 308. FIG. 14A shows an example of a state in which the special figure 1 look-ahead result information is stored in the special figure 1 look-ahead result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 14A, the look-ahead result storage unit for special figure 1 has, for example, the same number of storage areas (four in the present embodiment) as the number of holdable numbers of the special figure 1 variable game. .. Each storage area is associated with the hold order (hold 1 to hold 4) of the special figure 1 random value storage area. The stop symbol information of the special figure 1 is stored in each of the storage areas. In the example shown in FIG. 14A, "special figure E" (off) is stored in the storage area "hold 1" as stop symbol information, and "special figure B" is stored in the storage area "hold 2" as stop symbol information. "(5R probability variation jackpot) is stored, and" undetermined "information is stored in the storage areas" hold 3 "and" hold 4 "instead of the stop symbol information.

FIG. 14B shows an example of a state in which the special figure 2 look-ahead result information is stored in the special figure 2 look-ahead result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 14B, the look-ahead result storage unit for special figure 2 has, for example, the same number of storage areas (four in the present embodiment) as the number of holdable numbers of the special figure 2 variable game. .. Each storage area is associated with the hold order (hold 1 to hold 4) of the special figure 2 random value storage area. The stop symbol information of the special figure 2 is stored in each of the storage areas. In the example shown in FIG. 14B, the stop symbol information is not stored in the storage areas "hold 1" to "hold 4". In FIG. 14B, the state in which the stop symbol information is not stored in the storage area is described as “none”.

FIG. 14C shows an example of the look-ahead result storage unit for special figure 1 in the electric support. As shown in FIG. 14 (c), "undetermined" information is stored in the storage area "hold 1" instead of the stop symbol information. Neither the stop symbol information nor the "undetermined" information is stored in the storage areas "hold 2" to "hold 4".

In the present embodiment, in addition to the above-mentioned stop symbol information, the hit / fail judgment result, the variable timer number (variable time), the timer group described later, and the like are preliminarily determined, and the information is stored in the pre-reading result storage unit, and the pre-reading result is stored. It can be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 as information.

Next, various lottery tables used for executing the setting suggestion will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 to 16. Here, FIG. 15A is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the setting suggestion execution lottery table at the time of the first big hit end effect, and FIG. 15B is a diagram showing the contents of the setting suggestion effect selection table at the time of the first big hit end effect. It is a figure which shows an example, and FIG. 3C is a figure which shows an example of the contents of the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table at the end of play time. Further, FIG. 16A is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the setting suggestion ball selection table before the play time, and FIG. 16B is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the setting suggestion ball selection table after the play time. It is a figure.

The setting suggestion execution lottery table at the time of the first big hit end production shown in FIG. 15A shows the big hit (first big hit) in the normal game state (including b time saving state and c time saving state). It is a table for deciding whether or not to execute the effect (see FIG. 29) suggesting the setting in the ending effect executed when the game ends. In this table, the execution probability of the suggestion effect differs depending on the selected setting and the execution status of the play time (b time reduction state).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15A, in setting 1, the setting suggestion effect is not executed before the start of the play time and during the play time, and the setting suggestion effect is always executed after the play time ends. .. Further, in setting 2, the setting suggestion effect is not executed before the start of the play time, the setting suggestion effect is executed with a probability of 1/8 during the play time, and the setting suggestion effect is always executed after the play time ends. .. Further, in setting 3, the setting suggestion effect is not executed before the start of the play time, the setting suggestion effect is executed with a probability of 1/6 during the play time, and the setting suggestion effect is always executed after the play time ends. .. Further, in setting 4, the setting suggestion effect is executed with a probability of 1/16 before the start of the play time, the setting suggestion effect is executed with a probability of 1/6 during the play time, and the setting suggestion effect is executed after the play time ends. Is always executed. Further, in setting 5, the setting suggestion effect is executed with a probability of 1/18 before the start of the play time, the setting suggestion effect is executed with a probability of 1/3 during the play time, and the setting suggestion effect is executed after the play time ends. Is always executed. Further, in setting 6, the setting suggestion effect is executed with a probability of 1/20 before the start of the play time, the setting suggestion effect is executed with a probability of 1/2 during the play time, and the setting suggestion effect is executed after the play time ends. Is always executed.

The setting suggestion effect selection table at the time of the first jackpot end effect shown in FIG. 15 (b) is a table referred to when it is determined to execute the setting suggestion effect by the table of FIG. 15 (a), and a plurality of tables are referred to by this table. The character that appears from the character is selected.

Specifically, there are characters "Chappy", "Grandfather", "Sabohani", "Copanda", "Bancho", and "Miss Machiko" as the characters that appear, and the appearance rate differs depending on the setting. As shown in FIG. 15B, the character of "Chappy" suggests that the setting is odd, the character of "Grandfather" suggests that the setting is even, and the character of "Sabohani" is set. Suggests that is 2 or more, the character of "Copanda" suggests that the setting is 4 or more, and the character of "Bancho" suggests that the setting is 5 or more, "Miss Machiko" Character suggests that setting 6 is rich.

As for the appearance rate, in setting 1, the character of "Chappy" always appears. In setting 2, the character of "grandfather" appears with a probability of 50/100, and the character of "sabohani" appears with a probability of 50/100. In setting 3, the character of "Chappy" appears with a probability of 50/100, and the character of "Sabohani" appears with a probability of 50/100. In setting 4, the character of "grandfather" appears with a probability of 30/100, the character of "Sabohani" appears with a probability of 50/100, and the character of "Copanda" appears with a probability of 20/100. In setting 5, the character of "Chappy" appears with a probability of 30/100, the character of "Sabohani" appears with a probability of 20/100, the character of "Copanda" appears with a probability of 40/100, and " The character "Bancho" appears with a probability of 10/100. In setting 6, the character of "old man" appears with a probability of 30/100, the character of "Sabohani" appears with a probability of 10/100, the character of "Copanda" appears with a probability of 30/100, and " The character "Bancho" appears with a probability of 15/100, and the character "Mr. Machiko" appears with a probability of 15/100.

Whether or not the lottery table for executing the setting suggestion effect at the end of the play time shown in FIG. 15C executes the setting suggestion effect (see FIG. 25 (w')) at the end of the symbol variation display at which the play time ends. It is a table used to determine. In this table, the execution probability of the suggestion effect differs depending on the selected setting.

As shown in FIG. 15C, the setting suggestion effect is not executed in the settings 1 to 3, the setting suggestion effect is executed with a probability of 1/6 in the setting 4, and is executed with a probability of 1/3 in the setting 5. In setting 6, it is executed with a probability of 1/2.

In the setting suggestion ball selection table shown in FIGS. 16A and 16B, a star-shaped ball appears as a setting suggestion effect in the non-electric support state (normal figure low probability state). It is executed every 100G after the end, but it is a table for selecting which ball appears, and the pre-play time / setting suggestion ball selection table shown in FIG. The table is referred to before the play time, and the post-play time / setting suggestion ball selection table shown in FIG. 6B is a table that is referred to after the play time ends and before the jackpot occurs.

Specifically, before the transition of the play time, white balls always appear in the settings 1 to 3. In setting 4, a white ball appears with a probability of 90/100, and a blue ball appears with a probability of 10/100. In setting 5, a white ball appears with a probability of 90/100, a blue ball appears with a probability of 5/100, a green ball appears with a probability of 4/100, and a red ball appears with a probability of 1/100. In setting 6, a white ball appears with a probability of 90/100, a blue ball appears with a probability of 3/100, a green ball appears with a probability of 3/100, a red ball appears with a probability of 2/100, and 2 / A rainbow ball appears with a probability of 100.

Further, after the end of the play time, in setting 1, a white ball appears with a probability of 75/100, a blue ball appears with a probability of 20/100, and a green ball appears with a probability of 5/100. In setting 2, a white ball appears with a probability of 45/100, a blue ball appears with a probability of 50/100, and a green ball appears with a probability of 5/100. In setting 3, a white ball appears with a probability of 40/100, a blue ball appears with a probability of 40/100, and a green ball appears with a probability of 20/100. In setting 4, a white ball appears with a probability of 19/100, a blue ball appears with a probability of 30/100, a green ball appears with a probability of 25/100, a red ball appears with a probability of 25/100, and 1 /. A rainbow ball appears with a probability of 100. In setting 5, a white ball appears with a probability of 5/100, a blue ball appears with a probability of 20/100, a green ball appears with a probability of 20/100, and a red ball appears with a probability of 50/100, 5 / A rainbow ball appears with a probability of 100. In setting 6, white balls do not appear, blue balls appear with a probability of 20/100, green balls appear with a probability of 30/100, red balls appear with a probability of 30/100, and a rainbow with a probability of 20/100. A ball appears.

FIG. 17 shows, for example, the most in the special figure 1 random value storage area (special figure 2 random value storage area) in the special figure-related lottery process (step S229, step S231) of the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. This is a fluctuation pattern table used when determining a fluctuation pattern using the above-mentioned special figure 1 (special figure 2) winning random number value and special figure 1 (special figure 2) random value.

FIG. 17A is an out-of-order variation pattern table used when the result of the jackpot determination is out-of-order, and the selection rate differs depending on the gaming state.

Specifically, in the normal game state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state), no reach loss is selected with a probability of 15/16, normal reach loss is selected with a probability of 3/64, and SP reach loss is selected. It is selected with a probability of 1/64. In the present embodiment, the same table as in the normal game state is used and the fluctuation pattern is selected even in the latent probability change state. Further, in the present embodiment, in the normal game state, the mode shifts to the revival mode, which is one of the effect modes, in the period from the end of the time saving state to the display of the symbol variation 10 times. In the resurrection mode, the loss without reach is selected with a probability of 1/2, and in the resurrection mode, the loss is selected with a probability of 1/2. This outlier in the revival mode is an outlier without reach, but it is set as a variation pattern that gives the player a feeling of expectation for a big hit.

In addition, in the probability change state (special figure high probability normal figure high probability state), the time saving loss is selected with a probability of 14/16, the time saving normal reach loss is selected with a probability of 1/32, and the time saving SP reach loss is 3 /. It is selected with a probability of 32. Further, in the a time saving state, the time saving loss is selected with a probability of 15/16, the time saving normal reach loss is selected with a probability of 3/64, and the time saving SP reach loss is selected with a probability of 1/64. Further, in the b time saving state, the time saving loss is selected with a probability of 15/16, the time saving normal reach loss is selected with a probability of 3/64, and the time saving SP reach loss is selected with a probability of 1/64. Further, in the c time saving state, the time saving loss is selected with a probability of 15/16, the time saving normal reach loss is selected with a probability of 1/32, and the time saving SP reach loss is selected with a probability of 1/32.

FIG. 17B is a jackpot variation pattern table used when the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, and the selection rate differs depending on the gaming state.

Specifically, in the normal game state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state), the normal reach jackpot is selected with a probability of 1/16, and the SP reach jackpot is selected with a probability of 15/16. In the present embodiment, the same table as in the normal game state is used and the fluctuation pattern is selected even in the latent probability change state. Also, in the resurrection mode, the SP reach jackpot is always selected.

Further, in the probability variation state (special figure high probability normal figure high probability state), the time saving normal reach jackpot is selected with a probability of 1/4, and the time saving SP reach jackpot is selected with a probability of 3/4. Further, in the a time saving state, the time saving normal reach jackpot is selected with a probability of 3/8, and the time saving SP reach jackpot is selected with a probability of 5/8. Further, in the b time saving state, the time saving normal reach jackpot is selected with a probability of 3/8, and the time saving SP reach jackpot is selected with a probability of 5/8. Further, in the c time saving state, the time saving SP reach jackpot is always selected.

The execution probability set above, the selection rate of the effect, and the selection rate of the fluctuation pattern are not limited to those set above, and can be set as appropriate. Further, the variable pattern table to be used after the big hit game may be selected according to the big hit symbol.

Next, a specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

FIG. 18 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of an effect centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment.

FIG. 18 shows the decorative symbol display device 208. The first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal symbol display device 210, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, the special figure 2 hold lamp 220, and the normal figure hold lamp 216 are not shown. ing.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 18A, the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 1-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Although the background here is hidden, the default background image described later is displayed. Also in the following description, when the background is hidden, the default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. In addition, various background images different from the default background image (for example, a background image depending on the mode) may be displayed. In addition, a mini symbol is displayed in the upper left of the display area, and variable display and stop display are performed according to the decorative symbol displayed in the center of the display screen.

The decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 in the upper right corner. The fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 is an area for notifying whether or not the symbol is changing (or the symbol is stopped) and notifying the number of holds, and the hold of special figure 1 is on the upper left of the display area. A number display area is provided, and a reserved number display area shown in Special FIG. 2 is provided at the lower left. Further, a symbol changing notification area of special figure 1 is provided in the upper right of the display area, and a symbol changing notification area of special drawing 2 is provided in the lower right. In addition, a notification area during symbol change of the general map and a hold number display area of the general map may be further provided. The numerical value shown in the hold number display area of the special figure 1 is consistent with the hold number shown in the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, and the numerical value shown in the hold number display area of the special figure 2 is the hold lamp 220 of the special figure 2. Consistent with the number of holds indicated by. Further, in the symbol changing notification area of special figure 1, while the symbol of special figure 1 is stopped, for example, if it is a big hit, it is stopped and displayed as "○", and if it is a small hit, it is displayed as "△". If the time is suddenly shortened, the stop is displayed with "☆", and if the time is off, the stop is displayed with "x". Further, during the symbol variation display of the special figure 1, the display of "-" blinks, and it may be possible to recognize that the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is being performed. The display in the symbol changing display area of Special Figure 2 is the same as the display in the symbol changing display area of Special Figure 1, and this is a display mode corresponding to the symbol changing display and the stop display of Special Figure 2. Changes. By changing the display mode, lighting mode, and blinking mode of the fourth symbol, or by changing the display mode of the numerical value displayed in the hold number display area, a pre-reading notice and a notice regarding the running symbol change display can be given. You may go.

Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a variable icon display area 280 at the lower center of the effect display area 208d.

Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 18 is a normal game state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state). The decorative symbol display device 208 in the normal game state is provided with the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 on the left side of the variable icon display area 280. In the decorative symbol display device 208 in the normal game state, the designation of the hold icon display area of the special figure 2 is omitted, but the hold icon display area of the special figure 2 may be provided.

In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of holdings in Special Figure 1 is represented by the number of lights of the holding lamp 218 in Special Figure 1 and the numerical value shown in the holding number display area in Special Figure 1, as well as the number of holding icons in Special Figure 1, and is represented by the number of holding icons in Special Figure 2. The number of holdings is represented by the number of lights of the holding lamp 220 of the special figure 2 and the numerical value shown in the holding number display area of the special figure 2. It should be noted that it may also be represented by the number of hold icons in Special Figure 2. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning prize) may be referred to as a first hold icon, the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon, and so on. In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the hold icons are displayed side by side, and the hold icon on the right side has the older hold icon.

In FIG. 18A, two hold icons h11 and h12 of special figure 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of special figure 1, and the hold icons h11 and h12 of these two special figures 1 are both displayed. , It is displayed in the default display mode (round, non-patterned and white display mode). That is, the default hold icon of the special figure 1 is a round hold icon. In addition, in FIG. 18A, in order to make it easy to understand that the four hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the hold icons that are not actually displayed are also shown by dotted lines. ..

On the other hand, no hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area of the special figure 2. As described above, since the control state (gaming state) shown in FIG. 18 is a non-electric support state (non-time saving state), it is difficult to open the electric chew and it is difficult to win a prize in the special figure 2 starting port 232. Because it is.

Further, in the present embodiment, the number of symbol variation displays since the end of the jackpot game is displayed in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284, and the play time (b time reduction state) is displayed in the upper center of the display screen. The number of times the symbol variation display required before shifting to is displayed.

Further, in the present embodiment, a setting suggestion ball display area 285 is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area 280, and in this setting suggestion ball display area 285, four star-shaped setting suggestion balls s11 to s14 are displayed. Has been done. In the present embodiment, the setting suggestion ball is displayed every time the symbol variation display is executed 100 times in the normal game state, and the latest one is displayed on the leftmost side of the setting suggestion ball display area 285, 1 to 3 times before. The display position of the setting suggestion balls s12 to s14 displayed in is moved to the right side, respectively. In the present embodiment, setting suggestion balls of a plurality of colors may be displayed, and the player may be able to guess the setting by looking at the display history of the setting suggestion balls.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the hold icon display area of the special figure which is easy to win in special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed according to the control state (game state). That is, when the control state is the non-electric support state, as shown in FIG. 18A, the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is displayed in the effect display area 208d, and the control state is the electric support state. In some cases, on the contrary, the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2 is displayed.

Although not shown here, the default display mode of the hold icon of the special figure 1 and the default display mode of the hold icon of the special figure 2 may be the same or different. ..

In the present embodiment, the symbol variation display of the special symbol is started in the order of variation start in the special symbol display device → start of variation display of the fourth symbol → start or erase of the movement animation of the hold icon → start of variation of the decorative symbol. However, this order may change.

In FIG. 18B, the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and the variation display of the fourth symbol and the mini symbol is performed. The hold icon and decorative design have not changed yet.

In FIG. 18C, the movement animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 is started. In the movement animation here, the hold icon (the target hold icon for this symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 starts moving toward the change icon display area 280, and the second hold The hold icon at the display position of the icon h12 starts moving toward the display position of the first hold icon h11 in FIG. At this stage, the variable display of the decorative pattern has not started.

In FIG. 18D, the movement animation continues, and in FIG. 18E, the hold icon, which was the first hold icon h11 before the start of the change, reaches the change icon display area 280 and is displayed as the change icon h0. At the same time, the hold icon, which was the second hold icon h12 before the start of the fluctuation, reaches the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11, but it is still displayed at this stage. The variable display of decorative icons has not started. When the symbol change in the first special figure display device 212 is started, the hold icon that has been the first hold icon h11 may be viewed as the change icon h0, or the second hold icon may be viewed as the change icon h0. The hold icon that was h12 may be viewed as the first hold icon h11.

Then, in FIG. 18 (f), the variable display of the decorative symbol is started.

As shown in FIG. 18 (g), the operation promotion notification image 136P urging the effect button 136 to be pressed within the valid period is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 from which the variable display of the decorative symbol has been started. In the operation promotion notification image 136P, an image 136P1 of the effect button 136 and a remaining time display bar 136P2 indicating the remaining time of the valid period are displayed on the right side of the character image of the main character. The variable display of the decorative symbol is hidden by the operation promotion notification image 136P, but the player can recognize that the special symbol is changing by the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284 or the like. .. The display position of the decorative symbol may be moved to a position that does not overlap with the operation promotion notification image 136P so that the decorative symbol is not hidden.

In the remaining time display bar 136P2 shown in FIG. 18H, the valid period is reduced, and in FIG. 18I, the player presses the effect button 136. When the effect button 136 is pressed within the valid period, as shown in FIG. 18J, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the reach state entry notice image 2071 instead of the operation promotion notification image 136P. .. In the reach state entry notice image 2071, the characters "Chance!" Are displayed on the right side of the character image of the main character.

In FIG. 18 (k), the reach state entry notice image 2071 disappears, the variable display of the decorative symbol becomes visible, and then the reach state is entered as shown in FIG. 18 (l). Even if the reach state entry notice image 2071 is displayed, the reach state may not be entered, but the reach state may be entered without fail.

As described above, the appearance of the operation promotion notification image 136P corresponds to an effect that triggers a notice regarding the symbol variation display currently being performed.

In FIG. 18 (m), the background image is switched from the default background image to non-display, and the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 disappear. The fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 is displayed. Further, the variation display of the decorative symbol, which has been performed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, is moved to the lower right corner and displayed in a reduced size. , SP (special) reach (swordsman reach) has developed. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 18 (n) displays a large image of the swordsman who plays the enemy role, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. The animation of the scene is displayed.

The reach state entry notice image 2071 is not limited to the notice of entering the reach state, but may be a notice of development to SP reach.

FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 18 step by step.

In FIG. 19 (p) following from FIG. 18 (o), the animation of the duel scene continues, and this animation continues until FIG. 19 (s). In FIG. 19 (s), the hero's lord defeats the swordsman who plays the enemy role, and in FIG. 19 (t), all are temporarily hidden except for the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 and the mini symbol. Instead of hiding, a different background image may be displayed. Alternatively, in this scene, the display of the setting suggestion may be displayed. Eventually, as shown in FIG. (U), the fluctuation of the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 4" is displayed. The background here may be hidden or may be a background image different from the conventional one. Further, the display of the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 remains disappeared, and only the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 and the mini symbol are displayed. As for the mini symbol, the variable display is continuously performed for all the symbols until the symbol is confirmed and displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 19 (v), the decorative symbols start to change again with the display of the characters "re-lottery !!", and the re-lottery effect is performed. In this re-lottery effect, "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" and "decoration 7-", which are a combination of decorative symbols that become a big hit and are determined to shift to a probabilistic state advantageous to the player after the jackpot game is completed. It fuels the expectation that the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 7-Decoration 7" will be finally displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 19 (w), the probability variation jackpot of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is confirmed from the jackpot combination of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4". It is shown that a combination of decorative symbols indicating that is displayed. At this time, the effect display EF1 in which the star flashes is displayed around the decorative symbol after the stop, and it is notified that the combination of the so-called stopped jackpot decorative symbols has been upgraded.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 19 (x), the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" for which the 10R probability variation jackpot is confirmed is stopped and displayed. Further, the fourth symbol (round figure) of the special figure 1 shown in FIG. 19 (x) is stopped and displayed by "○", and the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed by the combination of "777". In FIG. 19 (x), the background is hidden, but in reality, a background image different from the default is displayed. Eventually, in FIG. 19 (y), as a big hit game start effect, the characters "Big chance big hit" are displayed together with the background image celebrating the big hit (omitted here), and the characters "Right hit!" Are displayed. Is urging right-handed. In the jackpot game start effect shown in FIG. 19 (y), a display including a setting suggestion may be displayed. In this case, only when a jackpot that satisfies some condition is achieved (for example, only in the case of the first jackpot after the power is turned on, and only when a jackpot of 5 consecutive chans or more occurs, among a plurality of jackpots with different balls. The display including the setting suggestion may be displayed only in the case of the big hit with the largest number of balls (for example, 10R big hit, etc.).

On the other hand, as a result of the re-lottery effect shown in FIG. 19 (v), for example, as shown in FIGS. 19 (w') to 19 (y'), the combination of the decorative symbols does not change from that before the re-lottery. There is. That is, it may be produced that the re-lottery has failed. However, in the present embodiment, even if the combination of decorative symbols indicating that the probability variation jackpot is fixed does not stop and display, for example, the promotion effect in the jackpot effect can be given a sense of expectation, so that the player can have a sense of expectation. In some cases, expectations can be sustained.

In the present embodiment, the mode of the re-lottery effect is one type, but there are a plurality of types, and the degree to which the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols changes before and after the re-lottery depends on the mode of the re-lottery effect executed. It may be changed, for example, the re-lottery effect of the mode accompanied by the movement of the accessory> the re-lottery effect by displaying the symbol variation by frame advance> the re-lottery effect by the high-speed fluctuation> the re-lottery effect by the slow fluctuation. The expectation that the combination of the decorative symbols of the big hit will change before and after the lottery may be high. The order and mode of the degree of expectation are not limited to those described above, and can be set as appropriate.

FIG. 20 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of an effect in a big hit game centered on a decorative symbol display device. In FIG. 20, only the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown, and the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the ordinary symbol display device 210, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 are shown. , And the drawing of the general drawing hold lamp 216 are omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 20 (a), after the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 becomes a 5R probability variation jackpot (it is difficult to determine whether it is a normal jackpot or a probability variation jackpot in the production). The transition to the first round is shown. In the first round, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the characters "Congratulations!" Along with the character of Miss Machiko on the slightly left side of the center of the display screen, congratulating the big hit. If it is determined that the jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot by the combination of the decorative symbols at the time of the jackpot (for example, if the jackpot decoration symbol combination of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is a jackpot), As shown in FIG. 20 (a'), the characters "Congratulations on a big chance!" Are displayed instead of the characters "Congratulations!" Then, the number of big hits from the first big hit (sometimes called "continuous chan number display") is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen, and in the upper left corner, "decoration" which is a big hit decorative pattern when a big hit occurs. 4 ”is displayed. In addition, in the upper center of the display screen, the current number of rounds "1R" is displayed as the number of rounds, and below that, the number of prize balls acquired in this jackpot game and the number of prizes won in this jackpot game are displayed. "60/750 get!" Is displayed to inform the expected number of prize balls. That is, since four game balls have entered the first variable winning opening 234a since the start of this jackpot, the acquisition of the number of prize balls of 60 balls is notified, and the prize balls of 750 balls are announced in this jackpot. It has been shown that acquisition can be expected. In addition, the total number of prize balls won from the first big hit is displayed at the lower right of the display screen, and this number is the number of prize balls won in the big hit and the small hit (big hit, small hit) ends. It will be added (counted up) each time. Therefore, during the jackpot game related to the first jackpot, the total number of prize balls won is not counted up until the jackpot ends, and remains at "0pt". In addition, each time a prize ball is acquired in a hit, the number may be added to the total number of prize balls acquired. Further, in the present embodiment, the number of prize balls generated by winning a prize in the variable winning openings (first variable winning opening 234a, second variable winning opening 235a) is added, but to other winning openings. The number of prize balls obtained by winning the prize may also be added. For example, the number of prize balls obtained by winning a prize in a specific general winning opening that can be won by hitting right may be added. It may be.

FIG. 20B shows how the third round of the game is being performed. In the present embodiment, since the jackpot symbol of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4" is a jackpot, it is difficult for the player to recognize whether it is a probabilistic jackpot or a normal jackpot. Therefore, in the third round, a promotion effect is performed to notify whether or not the jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot. When the promotion effect is started, the characters "promotion chance!" Are displayed in the center of the decorative pattern display device 208 to give a feeling of expectation that it will be a probabilistic jackpot. It should be noted that the promotion effect may not be performed, the promotion effect may or may not be performed, and the promotion effect may be performed without fail. In the present embodiment, when it is confirmed that the probability variation jackpot is due to the combination of decorative symbols at the time of the jackpot (for example, when the probability variation jackpot is 10R), the promotion effect is not performed, but promotion is performed. The production may be performed, and in this case, the setting suggestion may be included. At the timing shown in FIG. 20B, it is shown that in the third round, 22 game balls have entered the first variable winning opening 234a and 330 prize balls have been won. There is.

After that, as shown in FIG. 20 (c), it is shown that the result of the promotion effect is displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 20 (c), the state of success in the promotion effect is shown, and the characters "promotion!" And "next small hit RUSH rush" are displayed in the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is notified that this big hit is a probabilistic big hit. On the other hand, if the promotion effect fails, the characters "Sorry ..." are displayed as shown in FIG. 20 (c'). In addition, if the promotion production fails, it may be confirmed that it is a normal big hit, or other promotion productions (for example, reversal production in the ending) may be expected, and the probability is still changed. You may not reveal whether it is a big hit or not. At the timing shown in FIG. 20 (c), it is shown that 22 game balls have entered the first variable winning opening 234a and 330 prize balls have been won in the third round. There is.

FIG. 20D shows how the fifth round is completed and the jackpot end effect is being performed. In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 20 (d), it is shown that an effect that is confirmed to be a probabilistic jackpot is being performed. When the jackpot end effect starts, the characters "Probability change rush!" Are displayed in the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the state shifts to the probability change state (special figure high probability normal figure high probability state). In addition, an animation that counts up the total number of prize balls displayed at the bottom right of the display screen has started, and it is shown that the 750 prize balls won in this big hit are added. .. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the normal jackpot is a normal jackpot, as shown in FIG. 20 (d'), the characters "big hit end" and "time saving rush!" Are displayed in the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is displayed and notified that the state shifts to the electric support state (special figure low probability normal figure high probability state). In addition, the display showing the total number of prize balls won will be counted up in the same way as when the state shifts to the probabilistic state even when the state shifts to the electric support state, and the display of the total number of prize balls won after the count-up is displayed. , It is displayed continuously until the electric support state ends, but in the case of a normal big hit, the total number of prize balls won may not be displayed.

It should be noted that the degree of expectation for success in the promotion effect during the jackpot game may be changed by combining the decorative symbols of the jackpot when the jackpot is hit. For example, the jackpot in "decoration 3" or "decoration 7" (decoration 7) Probability change confirmation)> Big hits with odd-numbered symbols other than "Decoration 3" and "Decoration 7"> Big hits with even-numbered symbols may be made easier to succeed in promotion production.

FIG. 21 is a diagram illustrating an example of displaying information regarding play time when the power is turned on, and FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 21 step by step.

In FIG. 21, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol display device 210, a special figure 1 hold lamp 218, a special figure 2 hold lamp 220, and a general drawing are shown. Hold lamp 216 is shown.

FIG. 21A shows a state immediately after the power is turned on. After that, when the backup is restored, as shown in FIG. 3B, a symbol demo as an effect showing the standby state is displayed. On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 21B, the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 1-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 21B, all of the special figure 1, the special figure 2, and the normal figure are stopped and displayed with the outlier symbol, and the fourth symbol in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the hold number display area 284, the hold numbers of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 indicate “0”, and the stop display is indicated by “x” indicating the out-of-order symbol so as to indicate to that effect.

Further, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 21 is a non-electric support state (non-time saving state), the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area 280. .. Since the state shown in FIG. 21B is a standby state, the hold icon is not displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1.

In the present embodiment, on the standby display screen immediately after the power is turned on, "play time: not yet" and "number of fits: 432" are displayed at the upper center of the display screen (status display when the power is turned on). Therefore, the symbol variation display has been performed 432 times since the transition to the special figure low probability state after the end of the big hit, and it is notified that the play time has not started. This is a display for the clerk of the amusement park to confirm. For example, by not initializing it, the player can be in a state of shifting to the play time when the symbol variation display is performed 318 times. By creating an advantageous state or initializing and resetting the number of fits, fairness may be ensured and an advantageous state may be created in the amusement park. If the play time has ended before the power is turned off, as shown in FIG. 21 (b'), the display "play time: completed" is displayed, and a notification to that effect is given.

Further, as shown in FIG. 21 (b), "Information is deleted by operating the effect button" is displayed at the lower part of the display screen, and as shown in FIG. 21 (c), the effect button 136 is displayed. Is operated, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 21 (d), the implementation status of the play time and the number of times of fitting (play time information) are deleted, and instead, "____ times until the play time" (underscore). The part is displayed with a question mark.), And a notification for the player is given. In the present embodiment, when the power is turned on, the number of symbol variation displays until the start of the play time and the number of symbol variation displays in the special symbol low probability state after the end of the big hit are not clarified, so that the game is played in the morning. It may be possible to prevent some people from having advantages / disadvantages.

In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed to display the status display when the power is turned on so that the execution status of the play time and the number of symbol fluctuation displays after the big hit are recognizable, but the notification is made by voice. Also, for example, "Play time has been executed. It is recommended to clear the ram or change the setting." "It is 3 rotations until the play time." "200 rotations after the big hit." May be good. Further, it may be notified by a lamp or a 7-segment display.

In FIG. 22 (e) following FIG. 21 (d), the symbol demonstration production is continuously performed. After that, as shown in FIG. 22 (f), when the variable display of the special figure 1 is started, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in accordance with this. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 22 (f), the variable icon h0 is displayed in the variable icon display area 280, and the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is the default in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1. One is displayed in the display mode.

Further, the setting suggestion balls s11 to s14 displayed in the setting suggestion ball display area 285 are all displayed in a white display mode. In addition, the number of times the symbol variation is displayed until the play time has not yet been clarified.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 22 (g), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 4-decoration 5-decoration 1", and the display result of the deviation is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

In FIG. 22 (h), the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 and the change icon h0. It becomes. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. The number of times the symbol variation is displayed until the play time has not yet been clarified.

After that, in FIG. 22 (i), the decorative symbols of "Decoration 7" are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, a reach state is formed, and the reach effect is started. At the timing shown in FIG. 22 (i), two game balls enter the first special figure start port 230, two symbol variation displays of special figure 1 are held, and the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h11 and the second. Hold icon h12 is displayed.

In FIG. 22 (j), the background image is switched from the default background image to non-display, and the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 disappear. The fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 is displayed. Further, the variation display of the decorative symbol, which has been performed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, is moved to the lower right corner and displayed in a reduced size. , Has developed into SP reach (swordsman reach). After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 18 (o) to 19 (q) are performed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 22 (l), it is shown that the character of the lord is defeated and the decorative symbol sways and fluctuates due to the combination of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7". ing. After that, as shown in FIG. 22 (m), when the SP reach effect is changed to the default background image, the number of times the symbol variation is displayed until the play time becomes clear, and "421 more times until the play time" is displayed. It is recognizable that the player will shift to the play time when the symbol variation display is executed 421 more times. If it is after the play time has ended, the display of "____ times until the play time" is erased, and the player can recognize that the play time has ended.

FIG. 22 (e ″) shows how the symbol demonstration effect is performed after the power is turned on, but it is different from FIG. 22 (e) in that the play time is being executed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 22 (e ″), a right-handed display is displayed in the upper left portion of the display screen, and it may be recognized that the time is shortened. After that, as shown in FIG. 22 (f ″), when the variable display of the special figure 1 is started, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in accordance with this. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 22 (f''), the variable icon h0 is displayed in the variable icon display area 280, and the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1. One is displayed in the default display mode.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 22 (g''), the decorative symbol being displayed in a variable manner is reduced to the lower right portion and displayed, and the shoji is opened and the Gol grandfather appears. There is a production in which a balloon of "Da ..." is displayed. As a result, the player may be able to recognize that it is play time. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 22 (h ″), the effect display of the grandfather is finished, and the normal background display is restored. In addition, a large message "Please hit right!" Is displayed in the center of the display screen to encourage the player to hit right.

In the present embodiment, after the power is turned on, the pachinko machine 100 that can easily shift to the play time is targeted by not notifying the execution status of the play time, which is advantageous / disadvantageous to the pachinko machine 100 in the morning state. It may be possible to improve the player's motivation to play by clarifying the execution status of the play time on condition that the SP reach is executed. In the present embodiment, as a condition for clarifying the execution status of the play time, an example is given that the SP reach that is out of order is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a big hit or a big hit, etc. The symbol variation display may be executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), a specific notice or a look-ahead notice may be given, or the execution status of the play time may be clarified by lottery. Alternatively, the execution status of the play time may be clarified when the mission is directed and the mission is successful.

Further, in the present embodiment, the power-on status display displayed after the power is turned on is erased by operating the effect button 136, but it may be erased by other means, for example, for a predetermined time ( For example, it may be erased after 5 minutes), when the RAM clear switch 180 is operated, when the power is turned on again, or when a predetermined switch provided on the back side of the gaming machine is operated. It may be erased on condition of at least one of the cases where the operation key unit 190 is operated, the front frame door 106 is closed, and the like.

Further, in the present embodiment, the number of symbol variation display times up to the play time is displayed, but the number of symbol variation display times (TS) from the end of the jackpot may be displayed, or the number of symbol variation display counts up to the play time may be displayed. And the number of times the symbol variation is displayed (TS) since the end of the jackpot may be displayed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the number of times the symbol variation is displayed until the play time is clearly indicated, but it may not be left clearly. For example, a predetermined mark, character, character, or the like is displayed and the color is displayed. It may be implied by changing it, or it may be implied by the appearance frequency of a certain character.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display of the execution status of the play time is removed and the mode is changed when a certain condition such as the execution of SP reach is satisfied, but the change mode is not limited to the above-mentioned one, for example. The execution status of the play time may be hidden until a certain condition is satisfied, or it is implicitly indicated by the color of characters or characters until a certain condition is satisfied, and when a certain condition is satisfied, the play time is reached. The number of times the symbol variation is displayed may be specified, or the color of the character or character is not changed until a certain condition is satisfied, and when a certain condition is satisfied, the color of the character or character is changed. It may be done to implicitly represent the execution status of the play time.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display mode of the status display when the power is turned on and the display mode of the display mode of the play time execution status are different, but the same display mode may be used. A display screen may be displayed so that the clerk of the game hall can check the display of the execution status of the play time included in the display screen and consider whether to carry out the ram clear.

FIG. 23 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of the effect in the electric support state (a time saving state) centered on the decorative symbol display device. In addition, also in FIG. 23, only the decorative symbol display device 208 is illustrated, and the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the ordinary symbol display device 210, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 are shown. , And the drawing of the general drawing hold lamp 216 are omitted.

FIG. 23A shows a state in which the jackpot game related to the normal jackpot is completed and the ending effect is executed, which is the first jackpot. Further, in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 displayed in the upper right part of the display screen, one symbol variation display of special figure 1 is held, and the fourth symbol of special figure 1 displays a big hit. However, in the fourth symbol of the special figure 2, the display of the deviation is displayed respectively. Since the effect shown in FIG. 23 (a) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 20 (d'), the description thereof will be omitted.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23 (b), the ending effect is continued, and it is shown that the count-up of the total number of prize balls won has been completed. In addition, at the bottom of the display screen, the characters "If you defeat the panda, you will get a big hit!", Which is the explanation of the mission in the time saving state, are displayed. This mission is, for example, a mission in which a panda character appears in SP reach, and it is notified that a big hit will be obtained by defeating the panda. The content of the mission is not limited to this, and various things can be adopted.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23 (c), the display was stopped at "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4" which is a combination of the decorative symbols of the jackpot displayed at the time of the jackpot, and the state was changed to the electric support state. The situation is shown. At this time, the right-handed display is displayed in the upper left part of the display screen, and in the upper center of the display screen, "Time reduction remaining: 100 times" indicating the number of remaining symbol fluctuation display times in the electric support state (a time saving state) is displayed. Below that, the display of "750 more times until the play time" is displayed, which indicates the number of times the symbol variation is displayed (the number of fits) necessary for shifting to the play time (b time reduction state). Furthermore, in the lower right part of the display screen, a state in which the character of the lord is running is displayed, suggesting that the character is in an electric support state. Further, in the electric support state, since the symbol variation display is performed centering on the special figure 2, the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2 is displayed together with the variation icon display area 280 in the lower left corner of the display screen. .. At the timing shown in FIG. 23 (c), one symbol variation display of special figure 1 is held, but since the hold icon display area 281 of special figure 1 is hidden, it corresponds to special figure 1. Since the hold icon is not displayed and the symbol variation display of special figure 2 is not held, the hold icon is not displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of special figure 2.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23 (d), it is shown that the first symbol variation display is started after the transition to the electric support state (a time saving state). As described above, since the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is a special figure 2 priority variable machine, the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is performed in preference to the special figure 1, but the special figure 2 shows. Since there is no hold, the hold of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is exhausted, and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started. In addition, the display showing the number of remaining symbol fluctuations displayed in the electric support state and the display of the number of symbol fluctuations displayed up to the play time have been updated, and are displayed as "remaining time reduction: 99 times" and "749 times until the play time", respectively. .. In addition, below the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284, a display indicating the number of symbol fluctuation displays since the end of the jackpot (display of the number of starts between special prizes) is displayed. Since the execution of the first symbol variation display is started after the low probability state is reached, the display of "START: 1st time" is made. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 23 (d), since four or more game balls have entered the second special figure start port 232, all four hold icons are the defaults in the hold icon display area 282 of special figure 2. It is displayed in the mode. In the present embodiment, the number of times of symbol variation display until the transition to the play time is not counted in the probability change state (special figure high probability normal figure high probability state). In this production example, it is a special figure 2 priority variable machine, and if a big hit is made with a probability change symbol, the probability change state continues until the next big hit. For example, in the ST machine, ST ( When the state shifts to the probabilistic state as the Special Time) state, and the symbol variation display is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 150 times) to shift to the normal gaming state, the transition to the normal gaming state to the play time The number of times the symbol variation is displayed may be counted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23 (e), it is shown that the first symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is completed after the jackpot game is completed. Along with this, the decorative symbol displayed in the center of the display screen is also stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols on the outskirts of "Decoration 6-Decoration 3-Decoration 8". In addition, the mini design is also stopped and displayed at "638" in accordance with this.

Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a variable icon display area 280 appears in the lower center of the effect display area 208d.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23 (f), it is shown that the jackpot game is completed and the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is started. At the timing shown in FIG. 23 (f), the movement animation of the hold icons h21 to h24 of the special figure 2 is started. In the movement animation here, the hold icon (the target hold icon for this symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h21 starts moving toward the change icon display area 280 and is displayed as the change icon h0. At the same time, the hold icons at the display positions of the second to fourth hold icons h22 to h24 move toward the display positions of the first to third hold icons h21 to h23 of the special figure 2, respectively. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23 (f), the display showing the number of remaining symbol fluctuation display times in the electric support state and the display of the number of symbol fluctuation display times up to the play time are updated, and "time reduction remaining: 98 times", respectively. "It is displayed that" 748 times until the play time ". In addition, the display of the number of starts between special prizes has also been updated to display "START: 2nd time".

In the decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 23 (g), the state when the symbol variation display is completed 100 times after the jackpot is completed is shown. Along with this, the decorative symbol displayed in the center of the display screen is also stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols on the outskirts of "Decoration 5-Decoration 4-Decoration 1". In addition, the mini design is also stopped and displayed at "638" in accordance with this. In addition, the display showing the number of remaining symbol fluctuation display times in the electric support state and the display of the number of symbol fluctuation display times up to the play time are displayed as "remaining time reduction: 0 times" and "650 times until the play time", respectively. Further, the display of the number of start times between special prizes displayed below the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 is displayed as "START: 100th time". At this time, since the electric support state ends, the right-handed display displayed in the upper left part of the display screen and the character of the lord displayed in the lower right part of the display screen are also deleted. After that, as shown in FIG. 23 (h), the total number of prize balls acquired in this series of advantageous states (the period from the first big hit to the end of the a time saving state) and the number of big hits (number of consecutive chans). Is displayed, and the results in a series of advantageous states are displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 23 (h), the display of the number of remaining symbol fluctuation display times in the electric support state is erased.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23 (i), the electric support state (a time saving state) ends, the game shifts to the revival mode of 10 games, and the first symbol variation display (101st symbol variation from the end of the jackpot). Display) has started. In addition, the revival mode is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state (normal game state), and since the symbol variation display of special figure 1 is mainly executed, the special figure 2 displayed in the electric support state The hold icon display area 282 is displayed by switching to the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1. At this time, since there is one hold of the special figure 1, the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1. In the resurrection mode, the display mode of the hold icon in Special Figure 1 is different, and the display mode is white and triangular. It should be noted that this display mode is not a look-ahead notice display mode, but a display mode peculiar to the resurrection mode, and is a default display mode. Further, in the present embodiment, since the special figure 2 priority variable machine is used, the hold of special figure 2 is preferentially digested even in the symbol change display after the electric support state is completed, and is shown in FIG. 23 (i). At the timing, the symbol change display based on the hold of the special figure 2 is started, and the display of "special 2 changing" is displayed in the upper left part of the display screen, and the fact is notified. In addition, the characters "Enter the resurrection mode!" And "Big hit with SP reach!" Are displayed at the bottom center of the display screen, indicating that the jackpot is rich when SP reach is executed during the resurrection mode. ing. That is, in the present embodiment, as described above, in the revival mode, SP reach may not be selected when the result is out of order, and SP reach may be selected only when a big hit occurs. Therefore, SP reach may be selected. It can be said that it is suggested that it will be a big hit when is executed. Further, the display of "Resurrection mode" is displayed in the lower right part of the display screen, so that it can be recognized that it is the resurrection mode. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 23 (i), the electric support state has ended and the game has shifted to the normal game state, so left-handed strike is recommended. Therefore, by displaying "Please hit left!" In the center of the display screen, the player is urged to hit left. The display of the number of times the symbol variation is displayed up to the play time is displayed as "649 times left until the play time", and the display of the number of start times between special prizes is displayed as "START: 101st time". After that, as shown in FIG. 23 (j), the display of "Please hit left!", The display of "Enter the resurrection mode!", And the display of "Big hit with SP reach!" Are deleted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23 (k), it is shown that the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is completed. Along with this, the decorative symbol displayed in the center of the display screen is also stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols that are out of "decoration 8-decoration 6-decoration 3". In addition, the mini design is also stopped and displayed at "863" in accordance with this.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23 (l), since there are three reservations for the symbol variation display of the special figure 2, the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is started in preference to the special figure 1. It is shown. At the timing shown in FIG. 23 (l), since the hold icon of special figure 2 is hidden, the movement animation is not performed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23 (l), the display of the number of times the symbol changes are displayed up to the play time and the display of the number of start times between special prizes are updated, and the display is "648 times until the play time" and "START: 102nd time", respectively. It is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23 (m), it is shown that the tenth symbol variation display is being executed after the transition to the resurrection mode. At the timing shown in FIG. 23 (m), the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is executed, and two symbol variation displays of the special figure 1 are reserved. In addition, the display of the number of times the symbol variation is displayed up to the play time and the display of the number of start times between special prizes are displayed as "640 times until the play time" and "START: 110th time", respectively.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23 (n), it is shown that the tenth symbol variation display is completed after the transition to the revival mode. Along with this, the decorative symbol displayed in the center of the display screen is also stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols on the outskirts of "Decoration 4-Decoration 5-Decoration 1". In addition, the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed at "451" in accordance with this, and the variable icon h0 is also erased. Further, as shown in FIG. 23 (n), since the resurrection mode is terminated in the symbol variation display this time, the display of the "resurrection mode" displayed in the lower right part of the display screen is deleted, and the setting suggestion ball display area is deleted. 285 is displayed. The setting suggestion balls s11 to s14 displayed in the setting suggestion ball display area 285 are all displayed in white.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23 (o), it is shown that the first symbol variation display is started after the revival mode is completed. At this time, the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 changes to the display mode of a circle, and the movement animation of the hold icons h11 to h12 of the special figure 1 is started. In the movement animation here, the hold icon (the target hold icon for this symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 starts moving toward the change icon display area 280 and is displayed as the change icon h0. At the same time, the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 moves toward the display position of the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 and becomes the first hold icon h11. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. In addition, the display of the number of times the symbol variation is displayed up to the play time and the display of the number of start times between special prizes are updated and displayed as "639 times until the play time" and "START: 111th time", respectively. After that, every time the symbol variation display starts, the display of the symbol variation display number up to the play time is decremented, and the start between special prizes is incremented.

In this production example, the display of the number of symbol fluctuation display times up to the play time is displayed in the electric support state (a time saving state) that shifts after the end of the big hit, but it is not displayed during the execution of the a time saving state. You may. Further, the display of the number of starts between special prizes may not be displayed during the execution of the a time saving state.

In addition, in this production example, until the end of the electric support state (a time saving state) that shifts after the end of the big hit, the number of games acquired from the first big hit and the number of consecutive chans are displayed. Since it has nothing to do with a series of consecutive chans, it is hidden. Further, the setting suggestion effect may be performed at the end of the a time saving state, and the setting suggestion effect may not be performed at the end of the play time. The effect set at the end may be performed.

FIG. 24 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of the effect in the revival mode centered on the decorative symbol display device. In addition, also in FIG. 24, only the decorative symbol display device 208 is illustrated, and the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the ordinary symbol display device 210, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 are shown. , And the drawing of the general drawing hold lamp 216 are omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 24 (a), it is shown that the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is performed in the resurrection mode. In FIG. 24A, the variable icon h0 is displayed in the variable icon display area 280, and one hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, which is the default. Is displayed in the display mode (triangular patternless and white display mode). That is, the hold icon is displayed in the default display mode of the special figure 1. In addition, the display of the number of times the symbol variation is displayed up to the play time and the display of the number of start times between special prizes are updated and displayed as "643 times until the play time" and "START: 107th time", respectively.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 24 (b), two "decoration 4" are displayed to show that the user has entered the reach state. After that, SP reach is performed in the manner shown in FIGS. 18 (m) to 19 (y) to obtain a big hit, but the process shifts to SP reach and the decorative symbol display shown in FIGS. 24 (c) to 19 (d) is displayed. In device 208, an old character appears in place of the lord's character, and it is shown that the swordsman's character is defeated. The grandfather's character is a premium character, and its appearance suggests that the jackpot is rich. In the SP reach in the resurrection mode, the grandfather's character may always appear, or the lord's character may appear.

FIG. 25 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 21 step by step.

In FIG. 25 (p) following FIG. 23 (o), the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown, and the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the ordinary symbol display device 210, and the special diagram 1 are shown. The holding lamp 218, the special drawing 2 holding lamp 220, and the general drawing holding lamp 216 are not shown.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (p), the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 5-Decoration 1" is stopped and displayed. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 25 (p), both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are stopped and displayed, and in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284 in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. To that effect, "x" is displayed in both the symbol changing notification area of Special Figure 1 and the symbol changing notification area of Special Figure 2.

Further, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 25 (p) is the normal game state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state), the hold icon of special figure 1 is placed on the left side of the variable icon display area 280. A display area 281 is provided.

In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of hold of special figure 1 is also shown by the number of lights of the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, the number of hold icons of special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284, and the number of hold icons of special figure 1. The number of holdings of the special figure 2 is represented by the number of lights of the special drawing 2 holding lamp 220 and the number of holdings of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / holding number display area 284. It should be noted that it may also be represented by the number of hold icons in Special Figure 2. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning prize) may be referred to as a first hold icon, the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon, and so on. In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the hold icons are displayed side by side, and the hold icon on the right side has the older hold icon.

In FIG. 25 (p), four hold icons h11, h12, h13, and h14 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and the hold icons h11 to h11 of these four special figures 1 are displayed. All of h14 are displayed in the default display mode (round, non-patterned and white display mode). That is, the default hold icon of the special figure 1 is a round hold icon.

In FIG. 25 (q), the hold icons h11, h12, h13, and h14 of the special figure 1 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is changed to the variable icon display area 280. It moves and becomes the variable icon h0, the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1, and the hold icon at the display position of the third hold icon h13 becomes. The second hold icon h12 of the special figure 1 becomes, and the hold icon at the display position of the fourth hold icon h14 becomes the third hold icon h13 of the special figure 1. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. Further, in the present embodiment, when the number of symbol variation display times (the number of fits) after the transition to the normal game state after the end of the big hit reaches 750, the game shifts to the time saving game until the symbol variation display is executed up to 950 times. It shifts to the play time (b time reduction state), but when it shifts from the symbol fluctuation display 10 times before the number of fits reaches 750 times to the play time precursor effect mode and shifts to the play time precursor effect mode, a predetermined look-ahead notice is given. Is restricted, and every time the symbol variation display is started, a countdown display of the number of symbol variation display times up to the play time is performed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (q), the 750th symbol variation display after the end of the big hit is started, and in response to this, “0” indicating that the next symbol variation display shifts to the play time. Is displayed in the center of the display screen. In addition, the display of the number of symbol fluctuations displayed up to the play time and the display of the number of start times between special prizes are updated and displayed as "0 more times until the play time" and "START: 750th time", respectively.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 25 (r), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 8-decoration 6-decoration 3", and the display result of the deviation is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 25 (r), since the 750th symbol variation display after the end of the big hit is completed, the game shifts to the play time, and "Play time rushes !!" is displayed at the lower center of the display screen. Characters are displayed to notify that fact, and the display of the symbol variation display rotation speed up to the play time is switched to the display showing the number of remaining symbol variation display times of the play time, and "play time remaining: 950 times" is displayed. ..

After that, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (s) starts the variable display of the decorative symbol. At the time of transition to the play time, since there is no hold of the special figure 2, the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started. At this time, since the state has shifted to the electric support state (b time saving state), the right-handed display is displayed in the upper left part of the display screen, and the characters "Right-handed!" Are displayed in the lower center of the display screen. It encourages the player to hit right and promotes the winning of the game ball to the second special figure starting port 232. Further, since the time saving state in which the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is likely to be started, the display of the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is switched to the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 25 (s), four or more game balls have won a prize in the second special figure start port 232, and the hold icon display area 282 in special figure 2 is the first in special figure 2. Hold icons to fourth hold icons h21 to h24 are displayed. In addition, the display showing the number of remaining symbol fluctuations in the play time and the display of the number of start times between special prizes are updated and displayed as "play time remaining: 949 times" and "START: 751 times", respectively. Further, when the game shifts to the play time, the setting suggestion ball display area 285 is erased, the characters "play time" is displayed in the lower right part of the display screen, and the character of the bancho is displayed, and the play time is in progress. It is shown that.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (t), the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed according to the symbol variation display of the special figure 2. At the timing shown in FIG. 25 (t), the 1699th symbol variation display is being executed after the jackpot ends, that is, the 949th symbol variation display is being executed after the play time is started. .. Therefore, the display indicating the number of remaining symbol fluctuation display times of the play time and the display of the number of start times between special prizes are displayed as "play time remaining: 1 time" and "START: 1699th time", respectively. After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 25 (u), the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 6-Decoration 8-Decoration 3" is stopped and displayed, and the display result of the deviation is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

In FIG. 25 (v), the hold icons h21, h22, h23, and h24 of the special figure 2 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h21 is changed to the variable icon display area 280. It moves and becomes the variable icon h0, the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h22 becomes the first hold icon h21, and the hold icon at the display position of the third hold icon h23 becomes the second hold. The icon h22 becomes, and the hold icon at the display position of the fourth hold icon h24 becomes the third hold icon h23. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (v), the 950th symbol variation display is being executed since the play time is started. Therefore, a display indicating the number of remaining symbol variation display times of the play time and a special prize are given. The display of the number of start times is displayed as "play time last" and "START: 1700th time", respectively.

In the decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 25 (w), a state when the 950th symbol variation display is completed after the play time starts is shown. Along with this, the decorative symbol displayed in the center of the display screen is also stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols that are out of "decoration 8-decoration 6-decoration 3". In addition, the mini design is also stopped and displayed at "863" in accordance with this. In addition, since the symbol variation display of 950 times, which is the end condition of the play time, was executed, the characters "play time end" are displayed at the lower center of the display screen, and the "play time last" displayed at the upper center is displayed. , And the characters of "in play time" and the character of the bancho displayed in the lower right part were deleted, and it was notified that the play time was over, and it was displayed in the upper left part of the display screen. The right-handed display is also erased. The display of the number of starts between special prizes is maintained, and is displayed as "START: 1700th time". Here, the display of the number of starts between special prizes may also be deleted. As described above, the play time does not start until the jackpot is hit again. On the other hand, even after that, when the special figure 1 suddenly stops at the time saving symbol, the electric support state (c time saving state) is started. In the symbol variation display where the play time ends, setting suggestions may be made. For example, as shown in FIG. 25 (w'), the character of the lord is displayed in the lower right part of the display screen with the characters "opportunity". Appears, suggesting that the setting is 4 or higher.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (x), the electric support state (b time reduction state) is terminated, the game shifts to the normal game state, and the reserved symbol variation display of special figure 2 is started. It is shown. In the normal game state, since the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is likely to be started, the display is switched from the second hold icon display area 282 to the first hold icon display area 281, and the display is centered on the display screen. Is displayed with the characters "Please hit left!", Prompting the player to hit left. At this time, the setting suggestion ball display area 285 is also displayed. For example, the effect of urging left-handed is erased after a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) elapses, but when it is detected that right-handedness is continuously performed, the effect of urging left-handed is continued. Will be done.

In the present embodiment, the character appearing in the a time saving state and the character appearing in the b time saving state are at least different, that is, the type of the time saving state can be recognized by looking at the displayed character. be. In other words, it can be said that the effect mode is different between the a time saving state and the b time saving state. In this case, for example, the content and appearance rate of the background display, the notice of appearance, or the look-ahead notice may be different, or the content and appearance rate of the mission effect may be different. Further, the display mode of the hold icon may be different depending on the effect mode, or the hold icon may be hidden in a certain effect mode. In the normal game state after the a time saving state and the time saving state are completed, the display mode of the display indicating the number of remaining symbol fluctuation display times of the play time may change, and the display mode may be determined according to the setting. You may. Further, the display indicating the number of remaining symbol fluctuation display times of the play time may be directly displayed by a numerical value, or may be suggested by, for example, a change in a mode such as a color, a shape, or a size. In addition, a plurality of types of display modes for displaying the total number of acquired balls and displaying the number of consecutive chans may be prepared, and the display mode may be determined by the setting to suggest the setting.

FIG. 26 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of the effect of displaying the decorative symbol variation in the sudden time saving state (c time saving state) centered on the decorative symbol display device. In addition, also in FIG. 26, only the decorative symbol display device 208 is illustrated, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the ordinary symbol display device 210, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220. , And the drawing of the general drawing hold lamp 216 are omitted.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 26 (a), the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 1-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 26A, both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are stopped and displayed, and in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284 in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. To that effect, "x" is displayed in both the symbol changing notification area of Special Figure 1 and the symbol changing notification area of Special Figure 2.

Further, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 26A is the normal game state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state), the hold icon of special figure 1 is placed on the left side of the variable icon display area 280. A display area 281 is provided.

In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of hold of special figure 1 is also shown by the number of lights of the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, the number of hold icons of special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284, and the number of hold icons of special figure 1. The number of holdings of the special figure 2 is represented by the number of lights of the special drawing 2 holding lamp 220 and the number of holdings of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / holding number display area 284.

In FIG. 26A, two hold icons h11 and h12 of special figure 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of special figure 1, and the hold icons h11 and h12 of these two special figures 1 are both displayed. , It is displayed in the default display mode (round, non-patterned and white display mode).

Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 26A, the number of symbol variation display times (the number of fits) after the transition to the normal game state after the end of the big hit is the 263rd time, and the display of the symbol variation display number until the play time and the special prize The number of start times is displayed as "487 times until the play time" and "START: 263 times", respectively. Further, all of the four setting suggestion balls s11 to s14 displayed in the setting suggestion ball display area 285 are displayed in white.

In FIG. 26B, the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 and changes. The icon h0 is set, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11 in the special figure 1. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. In addition, in the symbol variation display this time, the time reduction (c time reduction) was suddenly won. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 26B, two game balls have won a prize at the first special figure starting port 230, and the number of holdings is three. In addition, since the number of fits increased by 1 to 263, the display of the number of symbol fluctuations displayed until the play time and the display of the number of starts between special prizes were "487 times until the play time" and "START: 263 times", respectively. It is displayed as an update. Further, all of the four setting suggestion balls s11 to s14 displayed in the setting suggestion ball display area 285 are displayed in white.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIGS. 26 (c) to 26 (d), it is shown that a copanda group notice in which a large number of copandas run from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen is performed. ing. The Copanda group notice is a notice that suggests the possibility of suddenly shortening the working hours, and gives the player a sense of expectation that the working hours will suddenly be shortened. The copanda group notice may be a notice of a big hit in the symbol variation display being executed, or may be a pre-reading notice.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 26 (e), "decoration 1" is stopped on the left symbol, then "decoration 3" is stopped on the right symbol, and the characters "petit chance!" Are displayed. It is directing that there is a possibility that the time will be shortened suddenly. After that, as shown in FIG. 26 (f), the "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and it is notified that the result of the variable display of the special figure 1 is suddenly shortened. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in the figure (f), the characters "Time saving 30 rushes!" Are displayed at the lower center of the display screen, and "Time saving remaining: 30 times" is displayed at the upper center of the display screen. Character is displayed, and it is notified that the state shifts to the electric support state (c time saving state). In the present embodiment, when the c time reduction state is entered, the electric support state is maintained until the symbol variation display is performed 30 times, but the electric support state may be performed at other times, or a plurality of types of symbols are suddenly provided. , The number of times of symbol variation display in which the electric support state is maintained may be different depending on the stopped symbol.

After that, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 26 (g) starts the variable display of the decorative symbol. At the time of transition to the electric support state, since there is no hold of special figure 2, the symbol variation display of special figure 1 is started. At this time, since the state has shifted to the electric support state (c time saving state), the right-handed display is displayed in the upper left part of the display screen, and the characters "Right-handed!" Are displayed in the lower center of the display screen. It encourages the player to hit right and promotes the winning of the game ball to the second special figure starting port 232. At this time, the setting suggestion ball display area 285 displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen is erased, and the character of Sabohani is displayed, suggesting that the c time is shortened. The setting suggestion ball display area 285 may be continuously displayed even in the electric support state. Further, since the time saving state in which the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is likely to be started, the display of the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is switched to the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 26 (g), three game balls have won in the second special figure start port 232, and the hold icon display area 282 in special figure 2 has the first hold icon in special figure 2. ~ Third hold icons h21 to h23 are displayed. In addition, the display showing the number of remaining symbol fluctuation display times in the electric support state and the display of the number of start times between special prizes are updated and displayed as "remaining time reduction: 29 times" and "START: 265th time", respectively. Furthermore, since the game state is a special figure low probability state, the number of times the special figure that shifts to the play time is displayed is also updated, and the number of times the symbol change is displayed until the play time is displayed as "485 times until the play time". It is updated and displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 26 (h), the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed according to the symbol variation display of the special figure 2. At the timing shown in FIG. 26 (h), the 29th symbol variation display is being executed after the transition to the c time saving state. Therefore, the display showing the number of remaining symbol fluctuation display times in the electric support state, the display number of symbol fluctuation display times up to the play time, and the display of the number of start times between special prizes are "remaining time reduction: 1 time", "45 times left until play time", and " START: 293th time "is displayed. After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 26 (i), the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 6-Decoration 8-Decoration 3" is stopped and displayed, and the display result of the deviation is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

In FIG. 26 (j), the hold icons h21, h22, h23, and h24 of the special figure 2 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h21 is changed to the variable icon display area 280. It moves and becomes the variable icon h0, the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h22 becomes the first hold icon h21, and the hold icon at the display position of the third hold icon h23 becomes the second hold. The icon h22 becomes, and the hold icon at the display position of the fourth hold icon h24 becomes the third hold icon h23. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 26 (j), the symbol variation display is being executed for the 30th time after shifting to the c time saving state, and therefore, a display indicating the number of remaining symbol variation display times in the electric support state is displayed. , The display of the number of symbol variation display times up to the play time and the display of the number of start times between special prizes are displayed as "time saving last", "456 times until play time", and "START: 294th time", respectively.

In the decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 26 (k), a state when the 30th symbol variation display is completed after the c time reduction state is started is shown. Along with this, the decorative symbol displayed in the center of the display screen is also stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols that are out of "decoration 8-decoration 6-decoration 3". In addition, the mini design is also stopped and displayed at "863" in accordance with this. In addition, since the symbol variation display was executed 30 times, which is the end condition of the c time reduction state, the characters "time reduction end" were displayed at the lower center of the display screen, and the "time reduction last" displayed at the upper center. And the character of Sabohani displayed in the lower right part are deleted, and it is notified that the c time saving state has ended, and the right-handed display displayed in the upper left part of the display screen is also deleted. The display of the number of times the symbol variation is displayed up to the play time and the display of the number of start times between special prizes are maintained, and are displayed as "456 times until the play time" and "START: 294 times", respectively. In addition, in this embodiment, the setting suggestion may be given when the c time saving state is completed, or may be done without fail.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 26 (l), the electric support state (c time saving state) is terminated, the game shifts to the normal game state, and the reserved symbol variation display of special figure 2 is started. It is shown. In the normal game state, since the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is likely to be started, the display is switched from the second hold icon display area 282 to the first hold icon display area 281, and the display is centered on the display screen. Is displayed with the characters "Please hit left!", Prompting the player to hit left. At this time, the setting suggestion ball display area 285 is also displayed. For example, the effect of urging left-handed is erased after a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) elapses, but when it is detected that right-handedness is continuously performed, the effect of urging left-handed is continued. Will be done.

FIG. 27 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of an effect related to the decorative symbol variation display in the case of shifting to the play time (b time saving state) during the sudden time saving state (c time saving state) centered on the decorative symbol display device. be. In addition, also in FIG. 27, only the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown, and the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the ordinary symbol display device 210, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 are shown. , And the drawing of the general drawing hold lamp 216 are omitted. Further, the effects shown in FIGS. 27 (a) to 27 (g) are different from those shown in FIGS. 26 (a) to 26 (g), except that the number of times the symbol variation is displayed after the jackpot is completed is different. Since it is the same, the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 27 (h), the variation display of the decorative symbol is displayed according to the symbol variation display of the special figure 2. At the timing shown in FIG. 27 (h), the thirteenth symbol variation display is being executed after the transition to the c time saving state. In addition, the number of times the symbol variation is displayed after the jackpot is completed is the 749th time. Therefore, the display showing the number of remaining symbol fluctuation display times in the electric support state, the display number of symbol fluctuation display times up to the play time, and the display of the number of start times between special prizes are "remaining time reduction: 13 times", "one more time until play time", and " START: 749th time "is displayed. In addition, the symbol variation display 10 times before the number of fits reaches 750 is shifted to the play time precursor effect mode, and the countdown display of the symbol variation display number up to the play time is performed, and the center of the display screen is displayed. , "1" indicating the number of times of the remaining symbol variation display until the play time is displayed. After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 27 (i), the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 6-Decoration 8-Decoration 3" is stopped and displayed, and the display result of the deviation is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

In FIG. 27 (j), the hold icons h21, h22, h23, and h24 of the special figure 2 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h21 is changed to the variable icon display area 280. It moves and becomes the variable icon h0, the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h22 becomes the first hold icon h21, and the hold icon at the display position of the third hold icon h23 becomes the second hold. The icon h22 becomes, and the hold icon at the display position of the fourth hold icon h24 becomes the third hold icon h23. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 27 (j), since the number of symbol variation displays after the jackpot is completed is the 750th, the next symbol variation display is shifted to the play time. Therefore, "0" is displayed as a countdown display in the play time precursor effect mode, suggesting that the game shifts to the play time. The display of the number of times and the display of the number of starts between special prizes are displayed as "remaining time reduction: 12 times", "0 times until play time", and "START: 750th time", respectively.

In the decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 27 (k), the state when the 750th symbol variation display (c 18th symbol variation display after the time reduction state starts) after the jackpot is completed is shown. ing. Along with this, the decorative symbol displayed in the center of the display screen is also stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols that are out of "decoration 8-decoration 6-decoration 3". In addition, the mini-design is also stopped and displayed at "863" in accordance with this, and the display result of the out-of-order is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 27 (k), since the 750th symbol variation display is completed after the big hit is completed, the game shifts to the play time, and the lower center of the display screen is "Enter the play time! Characters are displayed to notify that fact, and the display of the symbol variation display up to the play time is switched to the display showing the number of remaining symbol variation display times of the play time, and "play time remaining: 950 times" is displayed. Will be done. Further, in this production example, the number of times of the symbol variation display in which the electric support state as the c time reduction state is changed to the electric support state as the play time (b time reduction state) and the electric support state is maintained is also 12 to 950 times. As the number increases to, the characters "Add !!" are displayed to liven up the production.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 27 (l), the hold icons h21, h22, h23, and h24 of the special figure 2 were moved and displayed by the movement animation, respectively, and were at the display position of the first hold icon h21. The hold icon moves to the variable icon display area 280 and becomes the variable icon h0, the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h22 becomes the first hold icon h21, and becomes the display position of the third hold icon h23. The existing hold icon becomes the second hold icon h22, and the hold icon at the display position of the fourth hold icon h24 becomes the third hold icon h23. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At this time, since the game state has changed from the c time reduction state to the play time (b time reduction state), the character of the bancho is displayed at the lower right of the display screen together with the characters "play time in progress", and the game state has changed to the play time. Is being notified. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 27 (l), the display showing the number of remaining symbol fluctuation display times of the play time and the display of the number of start times between special prizes are updated and displayed as "play time remaining: 949 times" and "START: 751 times", respectively. ing.

In this production example, if the play time transition condition is satisfied during the execution of the c time reduction state, the play time shifts from the c time reduction state to the play time. Since it is not displayed, it can be said that it is a rare case that the time saving symbol is suddenly displayed during the playing time in the present embodiment in which the game is played by right-handed during the playing time, but in the present embodiment, the time is suddenly shortened during the playing time. When the symbol is displayed, the play time ends and the state shifts to the c time reduction state. Even if the time reduction symbol is suddenly displayed during the play time, the play time may continue and the c time reduction state may not be entered. Similarly, it is also a rare case that a time saving symbol is suddenly displayed in the a time saving state that shifts after the end of the big hit, and the a time saving state ends and the c time saving state shifts to the c time saving state. Even if the time saving symbol is suddenly displayed in the state, it may not shift to the c time saving state. Further, when the time saving symbol is suddenly displayed in the play time, the time saving state may be shifted to the c time saving state after the symbol variation display is performed 950 times after the play time starts, or conversely, c. When the condition for shifting to the play time is satisfied in the time saving state, the game is shifted to the play time after the symbol variation display of the number of times that can be executed in the time saving state (30 times in this production example) is completed. May be good. Further, when the time saving symbol is suddenly displayed in the time saving state a, the state shifts to the time saving state c after the symbol variation display of the number of times that can be executed in the time saving state (100 times in this production example) is completed. You may do it. Further, when the time saving symbol is suddenly displayed during the play time, the state may shift to or continue to the electric support state having the larger number of remaining time saving times. In addition, it is also a rare case that the time saving symbol is suddenly displayed in the c time saving state. In this case as well, the c time saving state being executed ends and the c time saving state starts again, but the execution is in progress. The c time saving state may continue, and the c time saving state may not be suddenly changed to the c time saving state based on the displayed time saving symbol.

Further, in the present embodiment, the number of symbol variation displays that can be executed in the c time reduction state (30 times) is smaller than the number of symbol variation displays that can be executed in the time reduction state (100 times), and in the c time reduction state. The number of symbol variation displays (950 times) that can be executed in the play time (b time reduction state) is set to be larger than the number of executable symbol variation displays (30 times), but it is not limited to these. , The number of times the symbol variation is displayed in each electric support state can be set arbitrarily.

Further, in the present embodiment, the production in the electric support state (c time reduction state) and the production in the play time (b time reduction state), in which the time reduction symbol is suddenly displayed and transitioned, are different, but they are the same production. May be good.

FIG. 28 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of an effect related to the decorative symbol variation display when the symbol variation display of the number of fittings shifting to the play time centered on the decorative symbol display device is suddenly won in a short time. In addition, also in FIG. 28, only the decorative symbol display device 208 is illustrated, and the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the ordinary symbol display device 210, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 are shown. , And the drawing of the general drawing hold lamp 216 are omitted. Further, the effect shown in FIG. 28 (a) is the same as that in FIG. 26 (a) except that the number of times the symbol variation is displayed after the jackpot is completed is different, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

In FIG. 28B, the hold icons h11, h12, h13, and h14 of the special figure 1 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is moved to the variable icon display area 280. It moves and becomes the variable icon h0, the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1, and the hold icon at the display position of the third hold icon h13 becomes. The second hold icon h12 of the special figure 1 becomes, and the hold icon at the display position of the fourth hold icon h14 becomes the third hold icon h13 of the special figure 1. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. Further, in the present embodiment, the symbol variation display number (the number of fits) after the transition to the normal game state after the end of the big hit is the 750th time, the play time precursor effect mode is being executed, and the symbol up to the play time is being executed. A countdown display of the number of variable impressions is performed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 28 (b), the 750th symbol variation display after the end of the big hit is started, and in response to this, “0” indicating that the next symbol variation display shifts to the play time. Is displayed in the center of the display screen. In addition, the display of the number of symbol fluctuations displayed up to the play time and the display of the number of start times between special prizes are updated and displayed as "0 more times until the play time" and "START: 750th time", respectively. In addition, in this production example, the time reduction is suddenly won in the symbol variation display this time. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 28 (c) to 28 (e) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 28 (c) to 28 (e) are different from those shown in FIGS. 26 (c) to 26 (e), except that the number of times the symbol variation is displayed after the jackpot is completed is different. Since it is the same, the description thereof will be omitted.

After that, as shown in FIG. 28 (f), the "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and it is notified that the result of the variable display of the special figure 1 is suddenly shortened. However, in this production example, the number of times the symbol variation is displayed after the jackpot is finished is the 750th time, and at the same time, the transition condition to the play time is satisfied. In this case, the play time (b time reduction state) is prioritized over the c time reduction state, the play time shifts to the play time, and the sudden time reduction becomes substantially invalid. Therefore, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 28 (f), the character of Copanda is displayed, and the characters "Entering play time !!" are displayed at the lower center of the display screen. It has been notified that the time will shift. If the time reduction and the shift to the play time are suddenly established at the same time, the shift to the c time reduction state may be prioritized in preference to the play time, or the c time reduction state is first shifted to and the c time reduction state ends. After that, it may shift to the play time.

After that, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 28 (g) starts the variable display of the decorative symbol. At the time of transition to the play time, since there is no hold of the special figure 2, the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started. At this time, since the state has shifted to the electric support state (b time saving state), the right-handed display is displayed in the upper left part of the display screen, and the characters "Right-handed!" Are displayed in the lower center of the display screen. It encourages the player to hit right and promotes the winning of the game ball to the second special figure starting port 232. Further, since the time saving state in which the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is likely to be started, the display of the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is switched to the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 28 (g), three game balls have won in the second special figure start port 232, and the hold icon display area 282 in special figure 2 has the first hold icon in special figure 2. ~ Third hold icons h21 to h23 are displayed. In addition, the display showing the number of remaining symbol fluctuations in the play time and the display of the number of start times between special prizes are updated and displayed as "play time remaining: 949 times" and "START: 751 times", respectively. Further, when the game shifts to the play time, the setting suggestion ball display area 285 is erased, the characters "play time" is displayed in the lower right part of the display screen, and the character of the bancho is displayed, and the play time is in progress. It is shown that.

FIG. 29 is a diagram showing an example of a setting suggestion effect in the jackpot game end effect centered on the decorative symbol display device. In addition, also in FIG. 29, only the decorative symbol display device 208 is illustrated, and the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the ordinary symbol display device 210, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 are shown. , And the drawing of the general drawing hold lamp 216 are omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (a), it is shown that the fifth round in the jackpot game related to the 5R probability variation jackpot is being executed. In the present embodiment, the combination of the jackpot symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5" is a jackpot, so that the player can recognize that it is a probabilistic jackpot. In the big hit game, a promotion effect for notifying whether or not the 10R probability variation big hit may be performed may be performed, and the promotion effect may include a setting suggestion. At the timing shown in FIG. 29A, it is shown that 48 game balls have entered the first variable winning opening 234a and 720 prize balls have been won in the fifth round. There is.

FIG. 29B shows a state in which 10 game balls have won a prize in the second variable winning opening 235a in the fifth round. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29B, when 10 game balls win the second variable winning opening 235a and the second variable winning opening 235a is closed, the lower right portion of the display screen shows "Big hit end". "Is displayed, notifying that the jackpot is over. At this time, the character may be displayed in the center of the display screen. As the characters appearing here, the tables shown in FIGS. 15A and 15B are used to determine whether or not the characters can appear and the type of character to be displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 29 (b), the character TDR of the Bancho is displayed together with the line "Oh !!", that is, it is suggested to the player that the setting is 5 or more. In addition, as shown in FIGS. 29 (b1) to 29 (b5), the Chappy character CYP is displayed along with the line "Afro nasai", suggesting that the setting is an odd number. The display of the grandfather's character GYJ along with the words "!" Suggests that the setting is even, and the display of the Sabohani character SBH along with the characters "!!!!!" suggests that the setting is 2 or higher. It is suggested that the setting is 4 or higher by displaying the character KPD of Copanda with the line of "Chance!", And the character MCK of Mr. Machiko is displayed with the line of "Saikou ne!" It is suggested that 6 is rich.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (c), it is shown that the fifth round is completed and the jackpot end effect is being performed. In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 29 (c), it is shown that an effect that is confirmed to be a probabilistic jackpot is being performed. When the jackpot end effect starts, the characters "Probability change rush!" Are displayed in the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the state shifts to the probability change state (special figure high probability normal figure high probability state). In addition, an animation that counts up the total number of prize balls displayed at the bottom right of the display screen has started, and it is shown that the 750 prize balls won in this big hit are added. ..

FIG. 30 is a diagram showing an example of a setting suggestion effect centered on a decorative symbol display device. In addition, also in FIG. 30, only the decorative symbol display device 208 is illustrated, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the ordinary symbol display device 210, the special diagram 1 hold lamp 218, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220. , And the drawing of the general drawing hold lamp 216 are omitted.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30 (a), the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 5-Decoration 1" is stopped and displayed. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 30A, both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are stopped and displayed, and in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284 in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. To that effect, "x" is displayed in both the symbol changing notification area of Special Figure 1 and the symbol changing notification area of Special Figure 2.

Further, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 30A is the normal game state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state), the hold icon of special figure 1 is placed on the left side of the variable icon display area 280. A display area 281 is provided.

In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of hold of special figure 1 is also shown by the number of lights of the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, the number of hold icons of special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284, and the number of hold icons of special figure 1. The number of holdings of the special figure 2 is represented by the number of lights of the special drawing 2 holding lamp 220 and the number of holdings of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / holding number display area 284.

In FIG. 30A, four hold icons h11, h12, h13, and h14 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and the hold icons h11, of these four special figures 1 are displayed. All of h12, h13, and h14 are displayed in the default display mode (round, non-patterned and white display mode).

Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 30A, the number of symbol variation display times (the number of fits) after the transition to the normal game state after the end of the big hit is the 199th time, and the display of the symbol variation display number until the play time and the special prize The display of the number of inter-starts is displayed as "551 times until the play time" and "START: 199th time", respectively. Further, all of the four setting suggestion balls s11 to s14 displayed in the setting suggestion ball display area 285 are displayed in white.

In FIG. 30B, the hold icons h11, h12, h13, and h14 of the special figure 1 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is changed to the variable icon display area 280. It moves and becomes the variable icon h0, the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1, and the hold icon at the display position of the third hold icon h13 becomes. The second hold icon h12 of the special figure 1 becomes, and the hold icon at the display position of the fourth hold icon h14 becomes the third hold icon h13 of the special figure 1. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. In addition, since the number of fits increased by 1 to 200, the display of the number of symbol fluctuations displayed up to the play time and the display of the number of starts between special prizes are "550 times left until the play time" and "START: 200th", respectively. It is displayed as an update. Further, all of the four setting suggestion balls s11 to s14 displayed in the setting suggestion ball display area 285 are displayed in white.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30 (c), the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, the symbol variation display this time is the 200th rotation after the big hit ends, and the condition that the setting suggestion ball that appears every 100 rotations after the big hit ends is satisfied. Therefore, the color of the setting suggestion ball that appears using the table shown in FIGS. 16A or 16B is selected. At the timing shown in FIG. 30 (c), since it is a normal game state before shifting to the play time, the pre-play time / setting suggestion ball selection table shown in FIG. 16 (a) is referred to, and a lottery is performed based on the setting. Is selected with. As shown in FIGS. 30 (c) to 30 (e), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows how the star-shaped setting suggestion ball moves from the upper left corner of the display screen toward the lower right. There is. The setting suggestion balls shown in FIGS. 30 (c) to 30 (e) are blue setting suggestion balls, and appear only at setting 4 or higher before the play time, suggesting that the setting is 4 or higher. It can be said that it has been done. The appearing setting suggestion balls are reflected in the display position of the first setting suggestion ball s11 in the setting suggestion ball display area 285, and the displayed first setting suggestion balls s11 to the third setting suggestion balls s13 are the first. The second setting suggestion ball s12 to the fourth setting suggestion ball s14 are displayed, and the displayed fourth setting suggestion ball s14 is erased. That is, the history of the setting suggestion balls that have appeared up to the last four times is displayed in the setting suggestion ball display area 285. In the present embodiment, it is in a non-electric support state and appears every 100 games after the big hit is completed. In addition, it may appear even in the electric support state. Further, the appearance condition of the setting suggestion ball is not limited to the above-mentioned one. For example, an appearance lottery may be performed for each symbol variation display, and the setting suggestion ball may appear when the setting suggestion ball is won. It may be made to appear when a fluctuation pattern (for example, SP reach) is executed. In addition, points are added each time any of a plurality of types of game execution conditions (for example, winning a game ball at the start port 230 of the first special figure, executing a reach effect, executing a notice effect, etc.) is satisfied, and points are added. The setting suggestion ball may appear every time the number reaches a predetermined number (for example, 200 points). In this case, for example, the points to be added may be different depending on the game execution condition (for example, 2 points are added when the first special figure start port 230 is won, and 10 points when the reach effect is executed. Is added, and 15 points are added when the notice effect is executed). Further, in the present embodiment, the appearance rate of each color of the setting suggestion ball is different between before the play time and after the play time, but it may be the same. After that, the symbol variation display ends at the timing shown in FIG. 30 (f), and the decorative symbol displayed in the center of the display screen is also the decorative symbol that is out of "decoration 6-decoration 8-decoration 3". Stop display is displayed in combination. In addition, the mini design is also stopped and displayed at "683" in accordance with this.

FIG. 31 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of the effect including the notification of shifting to the play time centered on the decorative symbol display device. In addition, also in FIG. 31, only the decorative symbol display device 208 is illustrated, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the ordinary symbol display device 210, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220. , And the drawing of the general drawing hold lamp 216 are omitted.

The production examples shown in FIGS. 31 (a1) to 31 (a4) show that a variation pattern without reach is executed without shortening the variation. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 31 (a1), the combination of decorative symbols of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 31 (a1), both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are stopped and displayed, and in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284 in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. To that effect, "x" is displayed in both the symbol changing notification area of Special Figure 1 and the symbol changing notification area of Special Figure 2.

Further, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 31 (a1) is the normal game state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state), the hold icon of special figure 1 is placed on the left side of the variable icon display area 280. A display area 281 is provided.

In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of hold of special figure 1 is also shown by the number of lights of the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, the number of hold icons of special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284, and the number of hold icons of special figure 1. The number of holdings of the special figure 2 is represented by the number of lights of the special drawing 2 holding lamp 220 and the number of holdings of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / holding number display area 284.

In FIG. 31 (a1), two hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and the hold icons h11 and h12 of the two special figures 1 are both displayed. , It is displayed in the default display mode (round, non-patterned and white display mode).

Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 31 (a1), the number of symbol variation display times (the number of fits) after the transition to the normal game state after the end of the big hit is the 749th time, and the display of the symbol variation display number until the play time and the special prize. The display of the number of interim starts is displayed as "one more time until the play time" and "START: 749th time", respectively. Further, all of the four setting suggestion balls s11 to s14 displayed in the setting suggestion ball display area 285 are displayed in white.

In FIG. 31 (a2), the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 and changes. The icon h0 is set, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11 in the special figure 1. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. Further, in the present embodiment, when the number of symbol variation display times (the number of fits) after the transition to the normal game state after the end of the big hit reaches 750, the game shifts to the time saving game until the symbol variation display is executed up to 950 times. It shifts to the play time (b time reduction state), but when it shifts from the symbol fluctuation display 10 times before the number of fits reaches 750 times to the play time precursor effect mode and shifts to the play time precursor effect mode, a predetermined look-ahead notice is given. Is restricted, and every time the symbol variation display is started, a countdown display of the number of symbol variation display times up to the play time is performed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 31 (a2), the 750th symbol variation display after the end of the big hit is started, and in response to this, “0” indicating that the next symbol variation display shifts to the play time. Is displayed in the center of the display screen. In addition, the display of the number of symbol fluctuations displayed up to the play time and the display of the number of start times between special prizes are updated and displayed as "0 more times until the play time" and "START: 750th time", respectively.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 31 (a3), it is shown that the decorative symbol is continuously displayed in a variable manner. The display of "0" in the countdown has been erased.

After that, as shown in FIG. 31 (a4), when the fluctuation time (for example, 10 seconds) of the variation pattern without reach without the variation shortening elapses, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “decoration 4-decoration 5-”. The combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 1" is stopped and displayed, and the display result of the deviation is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 31 (a4), since the 750th symbol variation display after the end of the big hit is completed, the game shifts to the play time, and "Play time rushes !!" is displayed at the lower center of the display screen. Characters are displayed to notify that fact, and the display of the symbol variation display rotation speed up to the play time is switched to the display showing the number of remaining symbol variation display times of the play time, and "play time remaining: 950 times" is displayed. ..

The production examples shown in FIGS. 31 (b1) to 31 (b4) show that a non-reach and out-of-reach fluctuation pattern accompanied by a reduction in fluctuation is executed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 31 (b1), the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 1-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 31 (b1), both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are stopped and displayed, and in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284 in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. To that effect, "x" is displayed in both the symbol changing notification area of Special Figure 1 and the symbol changing notification area of Special Figure 2.

Further, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 31 (b1) is the normal game state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state), the hold icon of special figure 1 is placed on the left side of the variable icon display area 280. A display area 281 is provided.

In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of hold of special figure 1 is also shown by the number of lights of the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, the number of hold icons of special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284, and the number of hold icons of special figure 1. The number of holdings of the special figure 2 is represented by the number of lights of the special drawing 2 holding lamp 220 and the number of holdings of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / holding number display area 284.

In FIG. 31 (b1), four hold icons h11, h12, h13, and h14 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and the hold icons h11, of these four special figures 1 are displayed. All of h12, h13, and h14 are displayed in the default display mode (round, non-patterned and white display mode).

Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 31 (b1), the number of symbol fluctuation display times (the number of fits) after the transition to the normal gaming state after the end of the big hit is the 749th time, and the display of the number of symbol fluctuation display times up to the play time and the special prize The display of the number of interim starts is displayed as "one more time until the play time" and "START: 749th time", respectively. Further, all of the four setting suggestion balls s11 to s14 displayed in the setting suggestion ball display area 285 are displayed in white.

In FIG. 31 (b2), the hold icons h11, h12, h13, and h14 of the special figure 1 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is moved to the variable icon display area 280. It moves and becomes the variable icon h0, the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1, and the hold icon at the display position of the third hold icon h13 becomes. The second hold icon h12 of the special figure 1 becomes, and the hold icon at the display position of the fourth hold icon h14 becomes the third hold icon h13 of the special figure 1. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. Further, in the present embodiment, when the number of symbol variation display times (the number of fits) after the transition to the normal game state after the end of the big hit reaches 750, the game shifts to the time saving game until the symbol variation display is executed up to 950 times. It shifts to the play time (b time reduction state), but when it shifts from the symbol fluctuation display 10 times before the number of fits reaches 750 times to the play time precursor effect mode and shifts to the play time precursor effect mode, a predetermined look-ahead notice is given. Is restricted, and every time the symbol variation display is started, a countdown display of the number of symbol variation display times up to the play time is performed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 31 (b2), the 750th symbol variation display after the end of the big hit is started, and in response to this, “0” indicating that the next symbol variation display shifts to the play time. Is displayed in the center of the display screen. In addition, the display of the number of symbol fluctuations displayed up to the play time and the display of the number of start times between special prizes are updated and displayed as "0 more times until the play time" and "START: 750th time", respectively.

After that, as shown in FIG. 31 (b3), when the fluctuation time (for example, 5 seconds) of the variation pattern without reach accompanied by the variation shortening elapses, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “decoration 4-decoration 5-decoration”. The combination of the decorative symbols of "1" is stopped and displayed, and the display result of the outlier is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 31 (b3), since the 750th symbol variation display after the end of the big hit is completed, the game shifts to the play time, and "Play time rushes !!" is displayed at the lower center of the display screen. Characters are displayed to notify that fact, and the display of the symbol variation display rotation speed up to the play time is switched to the display showing the number of remaining symbol variation display times of the play time, and "play time remaining: 950 times" is displayed. ..

As described above, in the present embodiment, in order to notify that the play time shifts to the play time at the end of the symbol variation display, the fluctuation time of the 750th symbol variation display, which is a condition for shifting to the play time after the jackpot ends. Therefore, it can be said that the time from the start of the symbol variation display to the notification of the transition to the play time is different.

FIG. 32 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of an effect including notification of shifting to play time centered on a decorative symbol display device. In addition, also in FIG. 31, only the decorative symbol display device 208 is illustrated, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the ordinary symbol display device 210, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220. , And the drawing of the general drawing hold lamp 216 are omitted.

In the production example shown in FIG. 32, it is shown that the fluctuation pattern of the SP reach loss is executed. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 32 (a) to 32 (b) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 31 (a1) and 31 (a2), the description thereof will be omitted.

After that, as shown in FIG. 32 (c), "decoration 4" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, to enter the reach state. After that, as shown in FIGS. 32 (c) to 32 (e), the process shifts to the SP reach effect. The SP reach effect shown in FIGS. 32 (c) to 32 (e) is the same as the effect shown in FIGS. 18 (l) to 19 (q), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 32 (f), it is shown that the character of the lord is defeated and the decorative symbol sways and fluctuates due to the combination of "decoration 4-decoration 5-decoration 4". ing. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 32 (g), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the characters "Entering play time !!" are displayed on the display screen in a display mode tilted downward to the right surrounded by a frame. It is notified that the symbol variation display is shifted to the play time. Here, for example, in the case of a predetermined setting (for example, setting 4 or more), as shown in FIG. 32 (g'), the characters "Enter play time !!" are surrounded by a frame and rise to the right. It may be displayed in a tilted display mode to notify that the play time is to be entered and to suggest a setting. In addition, in this embodiment, when the notification of the shift to the play time is executed, the effect of suggesting the setting may be included without fail. In this case, a plurality of types of notification modes may be prepared, and the content of the setting suggestion may differ depending on the type of the executed notification mode.

After that, as shown in FIG. 32 (h), the SP reach effect is shifted to the default background image, and at the timing shown in FIG. Confirm with. In addition, the characters "Entering play time !!" are continuously displayed until the decorative pattern is confirmed and displayed. In this way, when the SP reach effect is executed, the notification mode of shifting to the play time is different. Even when the SP reach effect is performed, for example, the shift to the play time may be notified in the manner shown in FIG. 31 (a4).

The production example shown in FIGS. 32 (f2) to 32 (i2) is an production example following FIG. 32 (e), and is an production example in which the number of times of the symbol variation display after the end of the big hit becomes the big hit at the 750th time. Is shown. In this case, since there is no shift to the play time, the effects shown in FIGS. 32 (f2) to (i2) are shown in FIGS. 19 (s) to 19 (v) and (w') to the same. An effect similar to the effect shown in FIG. (Y') is performed, and the notification of the shift to the play time is not performed.

In the present embodiment, the notification of the shift to the play time is different from the time after the start of the symbol variation display and the display mode according to the fluctuation pattern of the symbol variation display that shifts to the play time. However, the notification mode may be different depending on other methods, and for example, the length for executing the notification of shifting to the idle time may be different. In addition, in the symbol variation display that shifts to the play time, the play time shifts before the out-of-order decorative symbol is displayed, that is, before the player can recognize that the play time is out of sync. It may be made to notify the fact.

Further, in this production example, when the fluctuation pattern of the symbol variation display that shifts to the play time is a fluctuation pattern that shifts in the SP reach, when the notification of the shift to the play time is displayed as missed. However, for example, when the SP reach that is out of order is executed, the notification of the shift to the play time is not performed, and the shift to the play time is performed in the first symbol variation display that shifts to the play time. It may be notified of the fact. As a result, it is recognized that the SP reach is off and the next fluctuation that is disappointing suddenly shifts to the play time, and the production can be sharpened, and the game may be lively.

In addition, for example, when a fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time is selected, such as the fluctuation pattern of the symbol fluctuation display that shifts to the play time is out of alignment in the SP reach, the effect content is changed, and the pseudo-ream is lost. The production content may be replaced with the production of.

FIG. 33 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of a look-ahead notice effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. In addition, also in FIG. 33, only the decorative symbol display device 208 is illustrated, and the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the ordinary symbol display device 210, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 are shown. , And the drawing of the general drawing hold lamp 216 are omitted.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (a), the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 1-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 33A, both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are stopped and displayed, and in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284 in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. To that effect, "x" is displayed in both the symbol changing notification area of Special Figure 1 and the symbol changing notification area of Special Figure 2.

Further, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 33 (a) is the normal game state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state), the hold icon of special figure 1 is placed on the left side of the variable icon display area 280. A display area 281 is provided.

In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of hold of special figure 1 is also shown by the number of lights of the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, the number of hold icons of special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284, and the number of hold icons of special figure 1. The number of holdings of the special figure 2 is represented by the number of lights of the special drawing 2 holding lamp 220 and the number of holdings of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / holding number display area 284.

In FIG. 33A, two hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and the hold icons h11 and h12 of the two special figures 1 are both displayed. , It is displayed in the default display mode (round, non-patterned and white display mode).

Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 33A, the number of symbol variation display times (the number of fits) after the transition to the normal game state after the end of the big hit is the 294th time, and the display of the symbol variation display number until the play time and the special prize. The display of the number of interim starts is displayed as "456 times until the play time" and "START: 294th time", respectively. Further, all of the four setting suggestion balls s11 to s14 displayed in the setting suggestion ball display area 285 are displayed in white.

In FIG. 33B, the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 and changes. The icon h0 is set, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11 in the special figure 1. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing shown in FIG. 33 (b), one game ball wins the first special figure starting port 230, and the number of holdings is two. Further, in this winning, the result of pre-reading the jackpot random number value is a jackpot result, and the pre-reading result information command is output from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400, and as a result, Machiko as a pre-reading notice at the time of winning. The teacher's character is displayed, and the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the display mode of Sabohani as a hold notice. The character of Miss Machiko is displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) and then erased. On the other hand, the second hold icon h12 in the display mode of the Sabohani is continuously displayed until the held symbol variation display is completed. In addition, since the number of fits increased by 1 to 295, the display of the number of symbol fluctuations displayed until the play time and the display of the number of starts between special prizes were "455 times until the play time" and "START: 295th", respectively. It is displayed as an update.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (c), it is shown that the symbol variation display is digested twice from the timing shown in FIG. 33 (b) and the symbol variation display that is the target of the pre-reading notice is executed. Has been done. The variable icon h0 does not change from the one displayed in the display mode of the Sabohani at the time of winning the prize in the first special figure starting port 230. The display mode may change before the symbol variation display, which is the target of the pre-reading notice, is started. As a result, the player may be able to have a sense of expectation for the big hit. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 33 (c), there are three hold icons of special figure 1, and three hold icons h11, h12, and h13 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of special figure 1. In addition, the number of times of fitting is 297 times, and the display of the number of symbol fluctuations displayed until the play time and the display of the number of starts between special prizes are updated and displayed as "453 times until the play time" and "START: 297 times", respectively. There is.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (d), "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, indicating that the user has entered the reach state. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 33 (d) to 33 (h) are performed. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 33 (d) to 33 (h) are performed in the same manner as in FIGS. 18 (l) to 19 (s), the description thereof will be omitted.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (i), the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" for which the 10R probability variation jackpot is confirmed is stopped and displayed. Further, the fourth symbol (round figure) of the special figure 1 shown in FIG. 33 (i) is stopped and displayed by "○", and the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed by the combination of "777".

As described above, in the present embodiment, it is shown that at least one of a plurality of types of pre-reading notices may be executed in the normal gaming state.

FIG. 34 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of the effect including the notification of shifting to the play time centered on the decorative symbol display device. In addition, also in FIG. 34, only the decorative symbol display device 208 is illustrated, and the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the ordinary symbol display device 210, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 are shown. , And the drawing of the general drawing hold lamp 216 are omitted.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 34 (a), the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 1-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 34 (a), both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are stopped and displayed, and in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284 in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. To that effect, "x" is displayed in both the symbol changing notification area of Special Figure 1 and the symbol changing notification area of Special Figure 2.

Further, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 34 (a) is the normal game state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state), the hold icon of special figure 1 is placed on the left side of the variable icon display area 280. A display area 281 is provided.

In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of hold of special figure 1 is also shown by the number of lights of the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, the number of hold icons of special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284, and the number of hold icons of special figure 1. The number of holdings of the special figure 2 is represented by the number of lights of the special drawing 2 holding lamp 220 and the number of holdings of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / holding number display area 284.

In FIG. 34A, two hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and of these two hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1, the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed. The first hold icon h11 is the default display mode, but the second hold icon h12 is suddenly pre-reading the time saving symbol, the display mode is displayed with a blue circle, and the pre-reading notice is given. It is done.

Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 34 (a), the number of symbol variation display times (the number of fits) after the transition to the normal game state after the end of the big hit is the 748th time, and the display of the symbol variation display number until the play time and the special prize. The display of the number of interim starts is displayed as "two more times until the play time" and "START: 748th time", respectively. Further, all of the four setting suggestion balls s11 to s14 displayed in the setting suggestion ball display area 285 are displayed in white.

In FIG. 34 (b), the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 and changes. The icon h0 is set, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11 in the special figure 1. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. Further, in the present embodiment, when the number of symbol variation display times (number of fits) after the transition to the normal game state after the end of the big hit reaches 750, the game shifts to the time-saving game until the symbol variation display is executed up to 950 times. It shifts to the play time (b time reduction state), but shifts from the symbol fluctuation display 10 times before the number of fits reaches 750 times to the play time precursor effect mode, shifts to the play time precursor effect mode, and reaches the play time. The countdown display of the number of times the symbol variation is displayed is performed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 34 (b), the 749th symbol variation display after the end of the big hit is started, and in response to this, “1” indicating that the next symbol variation display shifts to the play time. Is displayed in the center of the display screen. In addition, the display of the number of symbol fluctuations displayed up to the play time and the display of the number of start times between special prizes are updated and displayed as "one more time until the play time" and "START: 749th time", respectively. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 34 (b), two or more game balls have won a prize at the first special drawing start port 230, and the holding of special drawing 1 is four. In addition, the fourth hold of the special figure 1 is a state in which the symbol variation display which becomes a big hit is held, and for convenience of explanation, the fourth hold icon h14 is hatched, but in the default display mode. It is displayed. This is because when the first hold of Special Figure 1 is exhausted and the symbol variation display ends, the play time shifts and the symbol variation display of Special Figure 2 is likely to start, so avoid this and aim for a big hit. Therefore, in order to prevent the inconvenience of stopping the launch, the hold notice is restricted. In the present embodiment, when the mode shifts to the play time precursor effect mode, the implementation of the pre-reading notice at the time of winning shown in FIG. 34 (b) is restricted, but the hold notice is not restricted and can be implemented. Execution of the look-ahead notice regarding the symbol variation display that is held after the symbol variation display that triggers the change of the state is restricted.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 34 (c), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 4-decoration 5-decoration 1", and the display result of the deviation is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

In FIG. 34 (d), the hold icons h11, h12, h13, and h14 of the special figure 1 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is changed to the variable icon display area 280. It moves and becomes the variable icon h0, the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11, and the hold icon at the display position of the third hold icon h13 becomes the second hold. The icon h12 becomes, and the hold icon at the display position of the fourth hold icon h14 becomes the third hold icon h13. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 34 (d), since the number of symbol variation displays after the jackpot is completed is the 750th, the next symbol variation display is shifted to the play time. Therefore, "0" is displayed as the countdown display in the play time precursor effect mode, suggesting that the game shifts to the play time. "0 more times until play time" and "START: 750th time" are displayed.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 34 (e), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 6-decoration 8-decoration 3", and the display result of the deviation is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 33 (e), since the 750th symbol variation display after the end of the big hit is completed, the game shifts to the play time, and "Play time rushes !!" is displayed at the lower center of the display screen. Characters are displayed to notify that fact, and the display of the symbol variation display rotation speed up to the play time is switched to the display showing the number of remaining symbol variation display times of the play time, and "play time remaining: 950 times" is displayed. ..

In the present embodiment, the execution of the pre-reading notice is restricted for the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 that is held after the symbol variation display that shifts to the play time, but the time saving symbol is suddenly won. The execution of the pre-reading notice is also restricted for the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 that is suspended after the symbol variation display is suspended. As a result, for example, it may be possible to prevent the game from being impaired by being targeted by a big hit in Special Figure 1 after shifting to the electric support state.

FIG. 35 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of a look-ahead notice effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. In addition, also in FIG. 35, only the decorative symbol display device 208 is illustrated, and the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the ordinary symbol display device 210, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 are shown. , And the drawing of the general drawing hold lamp 216 are omitted.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (a), the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 1-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 35 (a), both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are stopped and displayed, and in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284 in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. To that effect, "x" is displayed in both the symbol changing notification area of Special Figure 1 and the symbol changing notification area of Special Figure 2.

Further, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 35 (a) is the normal game state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state), the hold icon of special figure 1 is placed on the left side of the variable icon display area 280. A display area 281 is provided.

In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of hold of special figure 1 is also shown by the number of lights of the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, the number of hold icons of special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284, and the number of hold icons of special figure 1. The number of holdings of the special figure 2 is represented by the number of lights of the special drawing 2 holding lamp 220 and the number of holdings of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / holding number display area 284.

In FIG. 35A, two hold icons h11 and h12 of special figure 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of special figure 1, and the hold icons h11 and h12 of these two special figures 1 are both displayed. , It is displayed in the default display mode (round, non-patterned and white display mode).

Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 35 (a), the number of symbol variation display times (the number of fits) after the transition to the normal game state after the end of the big hit is the 739th time, and the display of the symbol variation display number until the play time and the special prize. The display of the number of interim starts is displayed as "11 more times until the play time" and "START: 739th time", respectively. Further, all of the four setting suggestion balls s11 to s14 displayed in the setting suggestion ball display area 285 are displayed in white.

In FIG. 35 (b), the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 and changes. The icon h0 is set, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11 in the special figure 1. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing shown in FIG. 35 (b), the number of symbol variation displays until the transition to the play time is 10 times remaining, so the mode shifts to the play time precursor effect mode and the countdown display of the number of symbol variation displays up to the play time is displayed. Is started, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, a display of "10" indicating that the play time is shifted to the play time after 10 more symbol variation displays is displayed in the center of the display screen. In addition, the display of the number of symbol fluctuations displayed up to the play time and the display of the number of start times between special prizes are updated and displayed as "10 more times until the play time" and "START: 740th time", respectively. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 35 (b), one game ball has won a prize at the first special drawing start port 230, and there are two holdings of special drawing 1. Further, a pre-reading notice is given for the second hold of the special figure 1, and the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is the display mode of the Sabohani. In the present embodiment, when the mode shifts to the play time precursor effect mode, the implementation of the pre-reading notice at the time of winning shown in FIG. 35 (b) is restricted, but the hold notice is not limited and can be implemented. That is, some of the plurality of types of pre-reading notices are restricted. It should be noted that the execution of all types of pre-reading notices may be restricted when the mode shifts to the play time precursor effect mode. Further, in the play time precursor effect mode, the pre-reading notice may not be given, but the setting suggestion may be given. Further, when a certain notice (for example, a hold notice) that is allowed to be executed is performed in the play time precursor effect mode and a big hit is made, the game may shift to the probability change big hit with electric support. Further, for example, it is possible to shift to a look-ahead mode in which a certain kind of look-ahead notice may be executed while the symbol variation display is executed a certain number of times (for example, 10 times, etc.). When the mode is changed to the effect mode, the read-ahead mode may not be changed. That is, when the number of times of the symbol variation display until the transition to the play time is 10 times remaining, the shift to the look-ahead mode may not be performed. The look-ahead mode may be performed while the symbol variation display is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, four times, etc.), and the look-ahead mode itself may function as a look-ahead notice.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (c), the variation display of the decorative symbol is displayed according to the symbol variation display of the special figure 1. At the timing shown in FIG. 35 (c), the 742th symbol variation display is being executed after the jackpot is completed. That is, the mode shifts to the play time precursor effect mode, and the third symbol variation display is being executed. Therefore, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display of "8" indicating that the play time is shifted to the play time after eight more symbol variation displays is displayed in the center of the display screen. In addition, the display of the number of symbol fluctuations displayed up to the play time and the display of the number of start times between special prizes are updated and displayed as "8 more times until the play time" and "START: 742th time", respectively. Further, between the timing shown in FIG. 35 (b) and the timing shown in FIG. 35 (c), three or more game balls have won a prize in the first special figure starting port 230, and at the timing shown in FIG. 35 (c). , There are three reservations in Special Figure 1. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 35 (c), the symbol variation display, which is the target of the pre-reading notice, is performed, and the variation icon h0 is the display mode of the Sabohani. After that, "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, and the reach state is reached. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 35 (d) to 35 (i) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 33 (d) to 33 (i), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 36 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of the production of a mini game executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. In addition, also in FIG. 36, only the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown, and the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the ordinary symbol display device 210, the special diagram 1 hold lamp 218, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 are shown. , And the drawing of the general drawing hold lamp 216 are omitted. The effects shown in FIGS. 36 (a) to 36 (b) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 30 (a) to 30 (b), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 36 (c) shows that the first mini-game is started. When the first mini-game is started, an animation of pressing the effect button 136 is displayed in the center of the display screen along with the display of the characters "continuous hits!", And the remaining time meter is displayed below it, and the effect button 136 is displayed. Indicates the operation acceptance period.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 36 (d), it is shown that a second mini-game different from the first mini-game is started during the execution of the first mini-game. There is. The second mini-game is an Omikuji mini-game, and the display area of the second mini-game is displayed on the display screen, with the words "Press the button!" And "Lucky with Daikichi!" The items of "Daikichi" are displayed side by side, and the hand-shaped cursor whose display position changes at high speed is stopped and displayed at the timing when the effect button 136 is operated, so that either "Kokichi", "Nakayoshi", or "Daikichi" is displayed. Point to the item of. The second mini-game is a mini-game that suggests the degree of expectation for the result of the first mini-game in the order of "Daikichi", "Nakayoshi", and "Kokichi", that is, "Daikichi", "Nakayoshi", and "Kokichi". It can be said that expectations for big hits are high in the order of "Kokichi". In this production example, the second mini-game started after the first mini-game is a mini-game in which the result is displayed in preference to the first mini-game.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 36 (e) and the cursor points to "Daikichi", in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 36 (f), the items "Kokichi" and "Nakayoshi" are displayed. Is deleted and only the item of "Daikichi" is displayed, and the display of "Lucky with Daikichi!" Is switched to "Lucky! Strong cut-in!".

After that, when the second mini-game is completed, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 36 (g) shows that the first mini-game is restarted. Then, when the effect button 136 is repeatedly hit by the player, the cut-in image is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 36 (h). This cut-in image is a production in which the character of the lord is displayed up with a balloon of the characters "Game!", And in the cut-in image shown in FIG. 36 (h), a large number of bancho's faces are displayed in the balloon. It is a strong cut-in image. In addition, a weak cut-in image of the display that does not include the face of the bancho may be displayed in the balloon, and it is more final when the strong cut-in image is displayed than when the weak cut-in image is displayed. The jackpot symbol is easily displayed on. After that, when the strong cut-in image is erased, the effects shown in FIGS. 36 (i) to 36 (o) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 36 (i) to 36 (o) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 18 (l) to 19 (v) and 19 (w') to 19 (y'). Therefore, the description is omitted.

In the present embodiment, the mini-game may be played in the normal game state, but the mini-game is not played after the number of times of the symbol variation display until the transition to the play time is 10 times remaining. The player may be focused on the transition to play time. That is, in the normal game state, there is a period in which a plurality of mini-games are executed in an overlapping manner, but after shifting to the above-mentioned play time precursor effect mode, the plurality of mini-games may not be executed in an overlapping manner.

FIG. 37 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of a notice effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. In addition, also in FIG. 37, only the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown, and the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the ordinary symbol display device 210, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 are shown. , And the drawing of the general drawing hold lamp 216 are omitted.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 37 (a), the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 1-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 37 (a), both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are stopped and displayed, and in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284 in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. To that effect, "x" is displayed in both the symbol changing notification area of Special Figure 1 and the symbol changing notification area of Special Figure 2.

Further, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 37 (a) is the normal game state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state), the hold icon of special figure 1 is placed on the left side of the variable icon display area 280. A display area 281 is provided.

In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of hold of special figure 1 is also shown by the number of lights of the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, the number of hold icons of special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284, and the number of hold icons of special figure 1. The number of holdings of the special figure 2 is represented by the number of lights of the special drawing 2 holding lamp 220 and the number of holdings of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / holding number display area 284.

In FIG. 37A, four hold icons h11, h12, h13, and h14 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and the hold icons h11, of these four special figures 1 are displayed. Of h12, h13, and h14, the second hold icon h12 to the fourth hold icon h14 are all default display modes (round, non-patterned and white display mode), but the first hold icon. h11 is a display mode of Sabohani, and a hold notice (look-ahead notice) is given.

Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 37 (a), the number of symbol variation display times (the number of fits) after the transition to the normal game state after the end of the big hit is the 325th time, and the display of the symbol variation display number until the play time and the special prize. The display of the number of start times is displayed as "426 times until the play time" and "START: 324 times", respectively. Further, all of the four setting suggestion balls s11 to s14 displayed in the setting suggestion ball display area 285 are displayed in white.

In FIG. 37 (b), the hold icons h11, h12, h13, and h14 of the special figure 1 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is moved to the variable icon display area 280. It moves and becomes the variable icon h0, the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1, and the hold icon at the display position of the third hold icon h13 becomes. The second hold icon h12 of the special figure 1 becomes, and the hold icon at the display position of the fourth hold icon h14 becomes the third hold icon h13 of the special figure 1. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing shown in FIG. 37 (b), the number of symbol variation displays since the end of the jackpot is the 325th, so the display of the symbol variation display number up to the play time and the display of the number of start times between special prizes are "play", respectively. It is updated and displayed as "425 times until the time" and "START: 325th time".

After that, as shown in FIG. 37 (c), a notice display effect may be performed in which the display mode of the display of the number of symbol variation display times up to the play time changes for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second). In this production example, the notice is given by changing the color of the display of the number of times the symbol changes are displayed until the play time, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be changed in other modes, for example, the size. May change, the display position may be changed, or it may be erased for a predetermined time. In addition, a plurality of types of change modes may be prepared so that the degree of expectation for a big hit differs depending on the change mode. Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 37 (c'), at least a part of the characters may be changed in the display of the number of times the symbol variation is displayed until the play time. In this case, in the example shown in FIG. 37 (c'), the color of the display of the number of times the symbol changes are displayed up to the play time also changes, but the color does not change and only the characters change. good. Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 37 (c ″), a big hit notice may be given by changing the display mode of the start number display between special prizes. Here, the change mode is not limited to that shown in FIG. 37 (c ″), and various change modes as described above can be adopted. Further, depending on the mode of change, it may be suggested that the jackpot is rich or the probability variation jackpot is rich, and for example, it may be suggested that the winning in the c time reduction is rich. Further, it goes without saying that the above-mentioned jackpot notice may be given even in the a time saving state and the c time saving state before the transition to the play time, and for example, the remaining symbol variation display in the c time saving state shown in FIG. 26 (g). The jackpot notice may be given by applying the display of the number of times and the display of the number of times of the remaining symbol variation display in the a time saving state shown in FIG. 23 (c). In this case, the execution mode of the jackpot notice in the a time saving state or the c time saving state may be different from the execution mode of the jackpot notice in the normal gaming state. Further, in this production example, the jackpot notice in the symbol variation display during execution has been described, but it may be executed as a look-ahead notice. Further, when the above-mentioned jackpot notice is given and then the jackpot shifts to the jackpot, after the jackpot game related to the jackpot is completed, the game is executed in the normal effect mode (default mode). Further, the above-mentioned jackpot notice effect may not be executed in the play time precursor effect mode. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 37 (d) to 37 (j) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 37 (d) to 37 (j) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 36 (i) to 36 (o), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

In this production example, a hold notice is given as a look-ahead notice by displaying a hold icon, which is a display mode of Sabohani, but the look-ahead notice mode is not limited to this, and for example, a character appears for each symbol variation display. It may be a continuous notice in which a predetermined effect such as is executed, or it may be a look-ahead notice in which the predetermined effect is executed only once. Further, it is needless to say that a plurality of types of display modes of the hold notice can be displayed, and the degree of expectation of the jackpot may differ depending on the displayed modes.

Further, in this production example, an example of executing the game before shifting to the play time is shown, but at least one of the above-mentioned jackpot notice effect and pre-reading notice may not be executed during the play time, or the jackpot may be executed. Both the advance notice effect and the look-ahead notice may be executed.

Further, in this effect example, the execution may be performed before the play time when the display of the number of symbol variation display times up to the play time is displayed, and may not be executed after the play time ends, or after the play time ends, A big hit notice may be given by changing the display mode of the start number display between special prizes.

In the embodiment described above, the display of the number of times the symbol variation is displayed up to the play time and the display of the number of start times between special prizes are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, but a display device different from the decorative symbol display device 208 (for example, , Sub-display device, etc.) may be provided on this display device to display the number of times the symbol changes are displayed up to the play time and the number of start times between special prizes.

In the above description,
"Symbol display means capable of executing variable display of special symbols [for example, first special symbol display device 212, second special symbol display device 214, etc.] and
A game control means that can control the game state [for example, CPU 304 of the main control unit 300] and
A notification means capable of executing a plurality of notifications [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, etc.] and
It is a game table equipped with
The game control means is a means capable of controlling a low probability state [for example, a special figure low probability state, etc.] and a high probability state [for example, a special figure high probability state, etc.].
The high-probability state is a state in which the probability that the result of the variation display of the special symbol is a big hit is higher than that of the low-probability state.
The game control means is a means capable of starting a second time saving state [for example, play time (b time saving state), etc.].
The second time saving state is the number of times that the result of the variation display of the special symbol that is continuously lost without becoming a big hit is displayed after the big hit game ends and shifts to the low probability state (hereinafter, "" It is a time saving state that may shift when the first number of times [for example, 750 times, etc.] is reached.
When the result of the variation display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times [for example, 950 times, etc.] is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the start of the second time saving state, the second The time saving state is over,
From the end of the second time saving state to the big hit, the second time saving state is not started [for example, after shifting to the play time and the play time ends, the big hit is obtained. Will not shift to play time again, etc.],
One of the plurality of notifications is the first notification [for example, the play time information display shown in FIG. 21B].
The first notification is a notification that can recognize the execution status of the second time saving state [for example, as shown in FIG. 21B, whether or not the play time is executed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Information indicating whether or not, and information indicating the number of times the symbol variation is displayed after the big hit is displayed],
The notification means is a means capable of executing the first notification in relation to the power being turned on [for example, as shown in FIGS. 21A to 21B, the power is turned on. Then, the play time information display is displayed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the notification means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the notification means.

Further, according to this game table, the clerk of the game field may be able to determine whether or not to initialize by referring to the information of the notification regarding the second time saving state.

Here, the symbol display means may be capable of executing only the variable display of the special symbol, or may be capable of executing a display other than the variable display of the special symbol. Further, the symbol display means may always execute the variable display of the special symbol, or may not execute the variable display of the special symbol.

Further, the game control means may be capable of controlling only the game state, or may be capable of controlling a state other than the game state. Further, the game control means may always control the game state, or may not control the game state.

Further, the notification means may be capable of executing only a plurality of notifications, or may be capable of executing notifications other than the plurality of notifications. Further, the notification means may always execute a plurality of notifications, or may not execute a plurality of notifications.

Further, the game control means may be able to control only the low-probability state and the high-probability state, or may be able to control the state other than the low-probability state and the high-probability state. Further, the game control means may be one that always controls the low-probability state and the high-probability state, or may not be controlled to the low-probability state and the high-probability state.

Further, the high-probability state may be a state in which only the probability that the result of the variation display of the special symbol becomes a big hit is higher than that in the low-probability state, or the result of the variation display of the special symbol is a big hit than the low-probability state. It may be in a state where the probability other than the probability of becoming is high. In addition, the high-probability state may be a state in which the probability that the result of the variation display of the special symbol will be a big hit is always higher than that in the low-probability state, and the result of the variation display of the special symbol is a big hit than the low-probability state. It may not be in a state where the probability of becoming is high.

Further, the game control means may be capable of starting only the second time saving state, or may be capable of starting a state other than the second time saving state. Further, the game control means may always start the second time saving state, or may not start the second time saving state.

In addition, in the second time saving state, only the number of times that the result of the variation display of the special symbol that is out of the way is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the big hit game ends and shifts to the low probability state is the first. It may shift when the number of times is reached, or after the jackpot game ends and shifts to the low probability state, the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of order is continuously displayed without becoming a jackpot. It may shift when the number of times other than the number of times becomes the first number. In addition, after the big hit game ends and shifts to the low probability state, the number of times that the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the way is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit is always changed to the first number. It may be present, or when the number of times that the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the way is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit after the big hit game ends and shifts to the low probability state becomes the first number, it shifts. It may not be the one that may not be.

In addition, even if only the second time saving state ends when the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the second time saving state is started. Well, after the second time saving state is started, the state other than the second time saving state ends when the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit. You may. In addition, even if the second time saving state is always terminated when the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit after the second time saving state is started. It is good, and if the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit after the second time saving state is started, the second time saving state may not end. There may be.

In addition, even if the second time saving state ends, if only the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the second time saving state is started. Well, after the second time saving state is started, the second time saving state ends when a result other than the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit. You may.

Further, it is not necessary to start only the second time saving state from the end of the second time saving state to the big hit, and from the end of the second time saving state to the big hit. It is not necessary that a state other than the second time saving state is started. Further, it is not always necessary to start the second time saving state from the end of the second time saving state to the big hit, and from the end of the second time saving state to the big hit. A second time saving state may be initiated.

Further, it is not necessary to start the second time saving state only from the end of the second time saving state to the big hit, and other than from the end of the second time saving state to the big hit. Also, the second time saving state does not have to be started.

Further, the first notification may be recognizable only for the execution status of the second time saving state, or may be recognizable for situations other than the execution status of the second time saving state. May be good. Further, the first notification may be such that the execution status of the second time saving state is always recognized, or may not be recognized about the execution status of the second time saving state.

Further, the notification means may be capable of executing only the first notification in relation to the power being turned on, or the notification other than the first notification in relation to the power being turned on. May also be feasible. Further, the notification means may always execute the first notification in connection with the power being turned on, or may not execute the first notification in relation to the power being turned on. There may be one.

Further, "The first notification is at least recognizable notification before the start of the second time saving state and after the end of the second time saving state [for example, FIG. As shown in 21 (b) and FIG. 21 (b'), information indicating whether or not the play time has been executed is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, the clerk at the game hall may be able to take various actions depending on the situation when the power is turned on. For example, after the second time saving state is completed, the player can feel at ease by initializing it. While it is possible to create a situation in which the player can play, the second time saving state is not executed until the big hit by not initializing it, which is disadvantageous to the player but may contribute to sales. Further, for example, during the execution of the second time saving state, by initializing, it is possible to prevent the player from suddenly starting in a state advantageous to the player, and while maintaining fairness, by not initializing, it is possible. It may be possible to provide the player with a service immediately after the store opens. Further, for example, before the execution of the second time saving state, the symbol variation display can increase the fit up to the predetermined rotation speed by initializing, while the predetermined rotation of the symbol variation display can be increased by not initializing. In some cases, the number of revolutions can be reduced by the number of revolutions of the previous day.

Here, the first notification may be recognizable only before the start of the second time saving state and after the end of the second time saving state, or the second. It may be recognizable other than before the time saving state of (1) is started and after the second time saving state is finished. Further, the first notification may at least be made to recognize that it is before the start of the second time saving state and after the end of the second time saving state, or the second notification may be made. It may at least be unaware that it is before the start of the time saving state and after the end of the second time saving state.

Further, "The first notification is a notification that may include information on the number of times of fitting before the power is cut off [for example, as shown in FIG. 21 (b), the decorative symbol display device 208 is used. , Information indicating the number of times the symbol variation is displayed (the number of fits) after the end of the jackpot before the power is turned off is displayed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the first notification may include only information on the number of fits before the power is cut off, or information other than the information on the number of fits before the power is cut off. May also be included. In addition, the first notification may always include information on the number of fits before the power is cut off, or may not include information on the number of fits before the power is cut off. There may be.

Further, when "after the first notification is executed, the first condition [for example, the effect button 136 is operated as shown in FIG. 21C] is satisfied, the first notification is sent. End [For example, as shown in FIG. 21 (c), when the effect button 136 is operated after the play time information is displayed, the play time information is deleted, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, if the first condition is satisfied after the first notification is executed, only the first notification may be terminated, or after the first notification is executed, the first condition is satisfied. Then, the notification other than the first notification may be terminated. Further, if the first condition is satisfied after the first notification is executed, the first notification may be terminated without fail, or if the first condition is satisfied after the first notification is executed. , The first notification may not be completed.

Further, after the first notification is executed, the first notification may be terminated only when the first condition is satisfied, or after the first notification is executed, other than the first condition. Even if the condition of is satisfied, the first notification may be terminated. Further, if the first condition is satisfied only after the first notification is executed, the first notification may be terminated, and the first condition may be terminated other than after the first notification is executed. When is satisfied, the first notification may be terminated.

Further, "one of the plurality of notifications is a second notification [for example, display of the number of times the symbol variation is displayed until the play time shown in FIG. 18A].
The second notification is a notification different from the first notification.
The second notification is notification of information regarding the second time saving state to the player [for example, as shown in FIG. 18A, information regarding the number of times the symbol variation is displayed up to the play time is notified. etc],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the player may be able to select a game table to play with reference to the information of the second notification.

Here, the second notification may be notification of only the information regarding the second time saving state to the player, or may be notification including information other than the information regarding the second time saving state to the player. good. Further, the second notification may be a notification that always includes information on the second time saving state for the player, or may be a notification that may not include information on the second time saving state for the player. good.

The second notification may be a notification that is completely different from the first notification, or may be a notification that is partially different from the first notification.

Further, "The second notification is a notification including information that at least suggests the number of times of fitting [for example, as shown in FIG. 18A, information regarding the number of times the symbol variation is displayed up to the play time is notified. Etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the second notification may be a notification including information suggesting only the number of fits, or a notification including information suggesting other than the number of fits. Further, the second notification may be a notification that includes information that at least always suggests the number of fits, or may be a notification that may not include information that suggests the number of fits.

Further, "The second notification is a notification including information that at least suggests the number of times of variation display of the special symbol until the number of times of fitting becomes the first number of times [for example, in FIG. 18 (a). As shown, information on the number of start times (TS) between special prizes has been notified, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Here, the second notification may be a notification including at least information suggesting at least the number of times of variation display of the special symbol until the number of fittings becomes the first number of times, or the number of fittings is the first number of times. The notification may include information other than information that at least suggests the number of times the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner until the value is reached. Further, the second notification may be a notification that always includes information that at least suggests the number of fluctuations of the special symbol until the number of fittings becomes the first number, and the number of fittings is the first number. It may be a notification that may not include information that at least suggests the number of times the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

In addition, "The second notification is a notification that can take one of a plurality of modes.
One of the plurality of aspects is the first aspect [for example, as shown in FIG. 22 (e), the information regarding the number of times the symbol variation is displayed until the play time is not clearly displayed, etc.]. can be,
One aspect of the plurality of aspects is the second aspect [for example, as shown in FIG. 22 (m), an aspect in which information regarding the number of times the symbol variation is displayed up to the play time is clearly displayed]. can be,
The first aspect and the second aspect are different aspects.
The second notification may be executed in the first aspect after the power is turned on [for example, as shown in FIG. 21D, after the power is turned on, the symbol variation display until the play time is displayed. Information about the number of times is displayed in an unclear manner, etc.],
When the second condition [for example, as shown in FIG. 22, the out-of-order SP reach is executed, etc.] is satisfied after the execution of the second notification is started in the first aspect, the second condition is satisfied. The notification changes from the first aspect to the second aspect [for example, as shown in FIGS. 22 (g) to 22 (m), the information regarding the number of times the symbol variation is displayed until the play time is unclear. When the out-of-SP reach is executed in the state shown in the mode, the information regarding the number of times the symbol variation is displayed until the subsequent play time is displayed in a clear mode, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

According to this game table, until the second condition is satisfied, it may be possible to make the player play the game while paying attention to the player by making the information regarding the second time saving state muddy.

Here, the second notification may be capable of taking only one of a plurality of modes, or may take a mode other than one of the plurality of modes. It may be anything. In addition, the second notification may always take one of a plurality of aspects, or may not take one of a plurality of aspects.

Further, only the second notification may be executed in the first mode after the power is turned on, or the notification other than the second notification may be executed in the first mode after the power is turned on. May be executed. Further, the second notification may always be executed in the first mode after the power is turned on, or the second notification may not be executed in the first mode after the power is turned on. May be good.

Further, the second notification may be executed only in the first mode after the power is turned on, or the second notification may be executed in a mode other than the first mode after the power is turned on. May be executed. Further, the second notification may be executed in the first mode only after the power is turned on, and the second notification may be executed in the first mode even after the power is turned on. May be done.

Further, if the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second notification is started in the first aspect, the second notification may be changed only from the first aspect to the second aspect. If the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second notification is started in the first aspect, the second notification may be changed from the first aspect to an aspect other than the second aspect. Further, if the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second notification is started in the first aspect, the second notification may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect without fail. If the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second notification is started in the first aspect, the second notification may not change from the first aspect to the second aspect.

Further, if the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second notification is started in the first aspect, only the second notification may change from the first aspect to the second aspect. If the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second notification is started in the first aspect, the notifications other than the second notification may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. Further, if only the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second notification is started in the first aspect, the second notification may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. If a condition other than the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second notification is started in the first aspect, the second notification may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect.

Further, if the second condition is satisfied only after the execution of the second notification is started in the first aspect, the second notification may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. If the second condition is satisfied except after the execution of the second notification is started in the first aspect, the second notification may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. If the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second notification is started only in the first aspect, the second notification may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect, or the first aspect may be changed. If the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second notification is started in a mode other than the above aspect, the second notification may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect.

In addition, "the game control means sets a first time saving state [for example, an electric support state (for example, a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state; a time saving state) that shifts after the big hit game for a normal big hit is completed]. It ’s a startable way,
The first time saving state is a time saving state that may be started when the jackpot game ends and shifts to the low probability state.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the game control means may be capable of starting only the first time saving state, or may be capable of starting a state other than the first time saving state. Further, the game control means may always start the first time saving state, or may not start the first time saving state.

Further, the first time saving state may be started when the big hit game ends and shifts only to the low probability state, or the big hit game ends and shifts to a state other than the low probability state. Then, it may be started. Further, the first time saving state may be always started when the big hit game ends and shifts to the low probability state, or may not start when the big hit game ends and shifts to the low probability state. It may be a thing.

Further, "the game control means can start a third time saving state [for example, an electric support state in which a time saving symbol is suddenly displayed and transitions (special figure low probability normal figure high probability state; c time saving state), etc.]. Means,
The third time saving state is a time saving state that may be started when a time saving symbol [for example, "special symbol E" or the like] is displayed as a result of the variation display of the special symbol.
The time saving symbol is a symbol different from the jackpot symbol,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the game control means may be capable of starting only the third time saving state, or may be capable of starting a state other than the third time saving state. Further, the game control means may always start the third time saving state, or may not start the third time saving state.

Further, the third time saving state may be started only when the time saving symbol is displayed as a result of the variation display of the special symbol, or the time saving symbol may be started as a result of the variation display of the special symbol. It may be started in a case other than the case where is displayed. Further, the third time saving state may be started whenever the time saving symbol is displayed as a result of the variation display of the special symbol, or the time saving symbol is displayed as the result of the variation display of the special symbol. It may not be started.

Further, "The game table is a pachinko machine [for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description,
"Symbol display means capable of executing variable display of special symbols [for example, first special symbol display device 212, second special symbol display device 214, etc.] and
A game control means that can control the game state [for example, CPU 304 of the main control unit 300] and
It is a game table equipped with
The game control means is a means capable of controlling a low probability state [for example, a special figure low probability state, etc.] and a high probability state [for example, a special figure high probability state, etc.].
The high-probability state is a state in which the probability that the result of the variation display of the special symbol becomes a big hit is higher than that of the low-probability state.
The game control means is a means capable of starting a second time saving state [for example, play time (b time saving state), etc.].
The game control means is a means capable of starting a third time saving state [for example, an electric support state (for example, a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state; c time saving state) in which a time saving symbol is suddenly displayed and transitions]. ,
The second time-saving state is the number of times that the result of the variation display of the special symbol that is out of the way is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the big hit game is completed and the state shifts to the low probability state (hereinafter, "fitting"). When the number of times (referred to as "number of times") becomes the first number of times [for example, 750 times, etc.], it is a time saving state that may shift.
The third time saving state is a time saving state that may be started when a time saving symbol [for example, "special symbol E" or the like] is displayed as a result of the variable display of the special symbol.
The time saving symbol is a symbol different from the jackpot symbol,
In the second time saving state, the third time saving state is not started [For example, in the play time, the game is played by right-handed hitting, so that the normal game ball wins the first special figure starting port 230 during right-handed hitting. Therefore, "Special Figure E", which is displayed only in Special Figure 1, is not displayed, and therefore the c time saving state is not started, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the game control means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the game control means.

Here, the symbol display means may be capable of executing only the variable display of the special symbol, or may be capable of executing a display other than the variable display of the special symbol. Further, the symbol display means may always execute the variable display of the special symbol, or may not execute the variable display of the special symbol.

Further, the game control means may be capable of controlling only the game state, or may be capable of controlling a state other than the game state. Further, the game control means may always control the game state, or may not control the game state.

Further, the game control means may be able to control only the low-probability state and the high-probability state, or may be able to control the state other than the low-probability state and the high-probability state. Further, the game control means may be one that always controls the low-probability state and the high-probability state, or may not be controlled to the low-probability state and the high-probability state.

Further, the high-probability state may be a state in which only the probability that the result of the variation display of the special symbol becomes a big hit is higher than that in the low-probability state, or the result of the variation display of the special symbol is a big hit than the low-probability state. It may be in a state where the probability other than the probability of becoming is high. In addition, the high-probability state may be a state in which the probability that the result of the variation display of the special symbol will be a big hit is always higher than that in the low-probability state, and the result of the variation display of the special symbol is a big hit than the low-probability state. It may not be in a state where the probability of becoming is high.

Further, the game control means may be capable of starting only the second time saving state, or may be capable of starting a state other than the second time saving state. Further, the game control means may always start the second time saving state, or may not start the second time saving state.

Further, the game control means may be capable of starting only the third time saving state, or may be capable of starting a state other than the third time saving state. Further, the game control means may always start the third time saving state, or may not start the third time saving state.

In addition, in the second time saving state, only the number of times that the result of the variation display of the special symbol that is out of the way is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the big hit game ends and shifts to the low probability state is the first. It may shift when the number of times is reached, or after the jackpot game ends and shifts to the low probability state, the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of order is continuously displayed without becoming a jackpot. It may shift when the number of times other than the number of times becomes the first number. In addition, after the big hit game ends and shifts to the low probability state, the number of times that the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the way is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit is always changed to the first number. It may be present, or when the number of times that the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the way is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit after the big hit game ends and shifts to the low probability state becomes the first number, it shifts. It may not be the one that may not be.

Further, the third time saving state may be started only when the time saving symbol is displayed as a result of the variation display of the special symbol, or the time saving symbol may be started as a result of the variation display of the special symbol. It may be started in cases other than the case where is displayed. Further, the third time saving state may be started whenever the time saving symbol is displayed as a result of the variation display of the special symbol, or the time saving symbol which is the result of the variation display of the special symbol is displayed. May not be started.

Further, it is not necessary that only the third time saving state is started in the second time saving state, and the state other than the third time saving state may not be started in the second time saving state. Further, the third time saving state may not always be started in the second time saving state, or the third time saving state may be started in the second time saving state.

In addition, "when the result of the variation display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times [for example, 950 times, etc.] is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the start of the second time saving state, the first The second time saving state is over,
When the result of the variation display of the special symbol that is out of the third number of times [for example, 30 times, etc.] is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit after the start of the third time reduction state, the third time reduction state is displayed. The state is over,
Of the second number and the third number, the third number is smaller.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, even if only the second time saving state ends when the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the second time saving state is started. Well, after the second time saving state is started, the state other than the second time saving state ends when the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit. You may. In addition, even if the second time saving state is always terminated when the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit after the second time saving state is started. It is good, and if the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit after the second time saving state is started, the second time saving state may not end. There may be.

In addition, even if the second time saving state ends, if only the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the second time saving state is started. Well, after the second time saving state is started, the second time saving state ends when a result other than the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit. You may.

In addition, even if only the third time saving state ends when the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the third number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the third time saving state is started. Well, after the third time saving state is started, the state other than the third time saving state ends when the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the third number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit. You may. In addition, even if the third time-saving state is always terminated when the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the third number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit after the third time-saving state is started. It is good, and if the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the third number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit after the start of the third time saving state, the third time saving state may not end. There may be.

In addition, even if the third time saving state ends, if only the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the third number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the third time saving state is started. Well, after the third time saving state is started, the third time saving state ends when a result other than the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the third number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit. You may.

In addition, "the game control means sets a first time saving state [for example, an electric support state (for example, a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state; a time saving state) that shifts after the big hit game for a normal big hit is completed]. It ’s a startable way,
The first time saving state is a time saving state that may be started when the jackpot game ends and shifts to the low probability state.
The number of times of fitting includes the number of times that the result of the variation display of the special symbol has been displayed since the first time saving state was started [for example, as shown in FIG. 23, in the time saving state a. The number of starts between special prizes is updated and displayed, etc.],
When the result of the variation display of the special symbol that is out of the fourth number of times [for example, 100 times, etc.] is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit after the first time saving state is started, the first time saving state is displayed. The state is over,
When the result of the variation display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times [for example, 950 times] is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit after the second time saving state is started, the second time saving state is displayed. The state is over,
Of the second number and the fourth number, the second number is the larger number.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the number of fits is counted even during the execution of the first time saving state, so that the player may be able to position it as a happy function. On the other hand, since the second time saving state is not started during the execution of the first time saving state, it may be possible to prevent the player from becoming too advantageous.

Here, the game control means may be capable of starting only the first time saving state, or may be capable of starting a state other than the first time saving state. Further, the game control means may always start the first time saving state, or may not start the first time saving state.

Further, the first time saving state may be started when the big hit game ends and shifts only to the low probability state, or the big hit game ends and shifts to a state other than the low probability state. Then, it may be started. Further, the first time saving state may be always started when the big hit game ends and shifts to the low probability state, or may not start when the big hit game ends and shifts to the low probability state. It may be a thing.

Further, the number of times of fitting may be only the number of times that the result of the variation display of the special symbol is displayed after the first time saving state is started, or after the first time saving state is started. The number of times may include the number of times other than the number of times that the result of the variable display of the special symbol is displayed. In addition, the number of times that the result of the variation display of the special symbol after the start of the first time saving state is always included may be included, or the special time after the first time saving state is started. The number of times that the result of the variable display of the symbol is displayed may not be included.

In addition, even if only the first time saving state ends when the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the fourth number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the first time saving state is started. Well, after the first time saving state is started, the state other than the first time saving state ends when the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the fourth number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit. You may. In addition, even if the first time saving state is always terminated when the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the fourth number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit after the first time saving state is started. It is good, and if the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the fourth number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit after the first time saving state is started, the first time saving state may not end. There may be.

In addition, even if the first time saving state ends, if only the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the fourth number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the first time saving state is started. Well, after the first time saving state is started, the first time saving state ends when a result other than the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the fourth number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit. You may.

In addition, even if only the second time saving state ends when the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the second time saving state is started. Well, after the second time saving state is started, the state other than the second time saving state ends when the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit. You may. In addition, even if the second time saving state is always terminated when the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit after the second time saving state is started. It is good, and if the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit after the second time saving state is started, the second time saving state may not end. There may be.

In addition, even if the second time saving state ends, if only the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the second time saving state is started. Well, after the second time saving state is started, the second time saving state ends when a result other than the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit. You may.

Further, "the symbol display means is a means including a first symbol display means [for example, a first special symbol display device 212 or the like] and a second symbol display means [for example, a second special symbol display device 214 or the like]. can be,
The variable display of the special symbol by the second symbol display means (hereinafter, referred to as “second symbol variable display”) is the variable display of the special symbol by the first symbol display means (hereinafter, “first symbol”). It is a symbol variation display that can be executed with priority over "variation display".
As a result of executing the first symbol variation display, the time saving symbol [for example, "special symbol E" etc.] may be displayed.
The time saving symbol may not be displayed as a result of executing the second symbol variation display.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the symbol display means may include only the first symbol display means and the second symbol display means, and the symbol display means other than the first symbol display means and the second symbol display means may also be included. It may include. Further, the symbol display means may always include the first symbol display means and the second symbol display means, or may not include the first symbol display means and the second symbol display means. It may be a thing.

Further, the second symbol variation display may be executed with priority over only the first symbol variation display, or may be executed with priority over the symbol variation display other than the first symbol variation display. It may be possible. Further, the second symbol variation display may always be executed with priority over the first symbol variation display, or may not be executed with priority over the first symbol variation display. There may be.

In addition, only the time-saving symbols may be displayed as a result of executing the first symbol variation display, or symbols other than the time-saving symbols may be displayed as a result of executing the first symbol variation display. There may be cases. Further, the time-saving symbol may always be displayed as a result of executing the first symbol variation display, or the time-saving symbol may not be displayed as a result of executing the first symbol variation display.

In addition, the time saving symbol may be displayed only as a result of executing the first symbol variation display, or the time saving symbol may be displayed as a result other than the result of executing the first symbol variation display. There may be cases.

In addition, it is not necessary that only the time-saving symbol is displayed as a result of executing the second symbol variation display, and symbols other than the time-saving symbol are also displayed as a result of executing the second symbol variation display. It does not have to be the case. Further, the time saving symbol may not always be displayed as a result of executing the second symbol variation display, or the time saving symbol may be displayed as a result of executing the second symbol variation display. ..

Further, the time saving symbol may not be displayed only as a result of executing the second symbol variation display, and the time saving symbol is displayed as a result other than the result of executing the second symbol variation display. It does not have to be the case.

In addition, "after the second time saving state is started and the second time saving state is completed without becoming a big hit, the game shifts to the normal gaming state [for example, the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, etc.]. ,
From the end of the second time saving state to the big hit, the second time saving state is not started.
From the end of the second time saving state to the big hit, the third time saving state may be started [for example, even after the play time is finished, "special figure E" is displayed in special figure 1. When it is displayed, it shifts to the c time saving state, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, after the second time saving state is started and the second time saving state ends without becoming a big hit, it may shift only to the normal game state, or the second time saving state is started and the big hit. After the second time saving state is completed without the above, the game state may be changed to a game state other than the normal game state. In addition, after the second time saving state is started and the second time saving state is completed without becoming a big hit, it may always shift to the normal game state, or the second time saving state is started and the big hit After the second time saving state is completed without becoming, the normal gaming state may not be entered.

Further, the normal game state may be entered only after the second time saving state is started and the second time saving state is completed without becoming a big hit, or the second time saving state is started and the big hit It is possible to shift to the normal gaming state even after the second time saving state is completed without becoming. Further, only the second time saving state is started, and after the second time saving state is completed without becoming a big hit, the normal gaming state may be started, or the gaming state other than the second time saving state is started. After the second time saving state is completed without becoming a big hit, the normal gaming state may be entered.

Further, it is not necessary to start only the second time saving state from the end of the second time saving state to the big hit, and from the end of the second time saving state to the big hit. It is not necessary to start a gaming state other than the second time saving state. Further, it is not always necessary to start the second time saving state from the end of the second time saving state to the big hit, and from the end of the second time saving state to the big hit. A second time saving condition may be initiated.

Further, it is not necessary to start the second time saving state only from the end of the second time saving state to the big hit, and other than from the end of the second time saving state to the big hit. Also, the second time saving state does not have to be started.

Further, only the third time saving state may be started from the end of the second time saving state to the big hit, or from the end of the second time saving state to the big hit. A gaming state other than the third time saving state may be started. In addition, the third time saving state may always be started from the end of the second time saving state to the big hit, or the third time saving state from the end of the second time saving state to the big hit. The state may not start.

In addition, the third time saving state may be started only from the end of the second time saving state to the big hit, or from the end of the second time saving state to the big hit. In addition, a third time saving state may be started.

In addition, "the third time saving state may be started before the number of times of fitting becomes the first number of times [for example, as shown in FIG. 27, the c time saving state is set before shifting to the idle time. May be migrated, etc.],
In the third time saving state, when the number of times of fitting becomes the first number of times, the second time saving state starts [for example, as shown in FIG. 27, the symbol variation display after the end of the jackpot in the c time saving state. When is executed 750 times, it shifts to play time, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, only the third time saving state may be started before the number of fittings becomes the first number, or other than the third time saving state before the number of fittings becomes the first number. The gaming state may be started. In addition, the third time saving state may always be started before the number of fittings becomes the first number, and the third time saving state may not be started before the number of fittings becomes the first number. May be good.

Further, the third time saving state may be started only before the number of fittings becomes the first number, and the third time saving state may be started other than before the number of fittings becomes the first number. It may be started.

In addition, "a production means capable of executing a plurality of effects [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, etc.] is provided.
One of the plurality of effects is the second effect,
The second effect is an effect that at least suggests information about the second time saving state.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the effect means may be one that can execute only a plurality of effects, or may be one that can execute other than a plurality of effects. Further, the effect means may be one that always executes a plurality of effects, or may not execute a plurality of effects.

Further, the second effect may suggest only the information regarding the second time saving state, or may suggest information other than the information regarding the second time saving state. Further, the second effect may always suggest information on the second time saving state, or may not suggest information on the second time saving state.

In addition, "the second effect is an effect that includes at least information suggesting the number of fits [for example, information on the number of start times between special prizes (TS), as shown in FIG. 18 (a)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the second effect may include only information suggesting the number of fits, or may include information other than the information suggesting the number of fits. In addition, the second effect may always include information suggesting the number of fits, or may not include information suggesting the number of fits.

Further, "The second effect is information that at least suggests the number of times of variation display of the special symbol until the number of times of fitting becomes the first number of times [for example, as shown in FIG. 18A, play time. Information on the number of times the symbol changes are displayed up to
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the second effect may include only information suggesting the number of times of variable display of the special symbol until the number of fits becomes the first number, or the number of fits becomes the first number. It may include information other than the information suggesting the number of times of variable display of the special symbol up to. In addition, the second effect may always include information suggesting the number of times of variable display of the special symbol until the number of fits becomes the first number, and the number of fits becomes the first number. It may not include information suggesting the number of times of variable display of the special symbol up to.

In addition, "The second effect is an effect that can be performed in one of a plurality of aspects.
One of the plurality of aspects is the first aspect [for example, as shown in FIG. 22 (e), the information regarding the number of times the symbol variation is displayed until the play time is not clearly displayed, etc.]. can be,
One aspect of the plurality of aspects is the second aspect [for example, as shown in FIG. 22 (m), an aspect in which information regarding the number of times the symbol variation is displayed up to the play time is clearly displayed]. can be,
The first aspect and the second aspect are different aspects.
After the power is turned on, the second effect may be executed in the first aspect [for example, as shown in FIG. 21D, after the power is turned on, the symbol variation display until the play time is displayed. Information about the number of times is displayed in an unclear manner, etc.],
When the second condition [for example, as shown in FIG. 22, the out-of-order SP reach is executed, etc.] is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, the second The effect changes from the first aspect to the second aspect [for example, as shown in FIGS. 22 (g) to 22 (m), the information regarding the number of times the symbol variation is displayed until the play time is unclear. When the out-of-SP reach is executed in the state shown in the mode, the information regarding the number of times the symbol variation is displayed until the subsequent play time is displayed in a clear mode, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the second effect may be feasible only in one of a plurality of modes, or may be feasible in a mode other than one of the plurality of modes. You may. Further, the second effect may be always executed in one of a plurality of aspects, or may not be executed in one of a plurality of aspects. ..

Further, only the second effect may be executed in the first aspect after the power is turned on, or the notification other than the second effect in the first aspect after the power is turned on. May be executed. Further, the second effect may always be executed in the first aspect after the power is turned on, or the second effect may not be executed in the first aspect after the power is turned on. May be good.

Further, the second effect may be executed only in the first aspect after the power is turned on, or the second effect may be executed in an aspect other than the first aspect after the power is turned on. May be executed. Further, the second effect may be executed in the first mode only after the power is turned on, and the second effect may be executed in the first mode even after the power is turned on. May be done.

Further, if the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, the second effect may be changed only from the first aspect to the second aspect. If the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, the second effect may be changed from the first aspect to an aspect other than the second aspect. Further, if the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, the second effect may always change from the first aspect to the second aspect. If the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, the second effect may not change from the first aspect to the second aspect.

Further, if the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, only the second effect may change from the first aspect to the second aspect. If the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, the effects other than the second effect may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. Further, if only the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, the second effect may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. If a condition other than the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, the second effect may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect.

Further, if the second condition is satisfied only after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, the second effect may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. If the second condition is satisfied except after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, the second effect may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. If the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started only in the first aspect, the second effect may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect, or the first aspect may be changed. If the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in an aspect other than the above aspect, the second effect may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect.

Further, "The game table is a pachinko machine [for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description,
"Symbol display means capable of executing variable display of special symbols [for example, first special symbol display device 212, second special symbol display device 214, etc.] and
A game control means that can control the game state [for example, CPU 304 of the main control unit 300] and
It is a game table equipped with
The game control means is a means capable of controlling a low probability state [for example, a special figure low probability state, etc.] and a high probability state [for example, a special figure high probability state, etc.].
The high-probability state is a state in which the probability that the result of the variation display of the special symbol becomes a big hit is higher than that of the low-probability state.
The game control means is a means capable of starting a second time saving state [for example, play time (b time saving state), etc.].
The game control means is a means capable of starting a third time saving state [for example, an electric support state (for example, a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state; c time saving state) in which a time saving symbol is suddenly displayed and transitions]. ,
The game control means is a means capable of starting a normal game state [for example, a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, etc.].
The second time-saving state is the number of times that the result of the variation display of the special symbol that is out of the way is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the big hit game is completed and the state shifts to the low probability state (hereinafter, "fitting"). When the number of times (referred to as "number of times") becomes the first number of times [for example, 750 times, etc.], it is a time saving state that may shift.
The third time saving state is a time saving state that may be started when a time saving symbol [for example, "special symbol E" or the like] is displayed as a result of the variable display of the special symbol.
The time saving symbol is a symbol different from the jackpot symbol,
The normal gaming state is a gaming state that is the low probability state and is a non-electric support state.
In the normal gaming state, when the number of fittings becomes the first number and the time saving symbol is displayed as a result of the variation display of the special symbol (hereinafter, "the first case [for example, in FIG. 28]. As shown, there is a case where the time saving symbol is suddenly displayed at the 750th rotation, which is the transition condition of the play time, which is the number of times the symbol variation is displayed after the big hit ends] ".
In the first case, the third time saving state is not started, and the second time saving state is started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 28 (f) to (g), in the idle time. If the symbol variation display that satisfies the transition condition is suddenly stopped and displayed with a time-saving symbol, c does not shift to the time-saving state, but shifts to play time, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the game control means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the game control means.

Here, the symbol display means may be capable of executing only the variable display of the special symbol, or may be capable of executing a display other than the variable display of the special symbol. Further, the symbol display means may always execute the variable display of the special symbol, or may not execute the variable display of the special symbol.

Further, the game control means may be capable of controlling only the game state, or may be capable of controlling a state other than the game state. Further, the game control means may always control the game state, or may not control the game state.

Further, the game control means may be able to control only the low-probability state and the high-probability state, or may be able to control the state other than the low-probability state and the high-probability state. Further, the game control means may be one that always controls the low-probability state and the high-probability state, or may not be controlled to the low-probability state and the high-probability state.

Further, the high-probability state may be a state in which only the probability that the result of the variation display of the special symbol becomes a big hit is higher than that in the low-probability state, or the result of the variation display of the special symbol is a big hit than the low-probability state. It may be in a state where the probability other than the probability of becoming is high. In addition, the high-probability state may be a state in which the probability that the result of the variation display of the special symbol will be a big hit is always higher than that in the low-probability state, and the result of the variation display of the special symbol is a big hit than the low-probability state. It may not be in a state where the probability of becoming is high.

Further, the game control means may be capable of starting only the second time saving state, or may be capable of starting a state other than the second time saving state. Further, the game control means may always start the second time saving state, or may not start the second time saving state.

Further, the game control means may be capable of starting only the third time saving state, or may be capable of starting a state other than the third time saving state. Further, the game control means may always start the third time saving state, or may not start the third time saving state.

Further, the game control means may be one that can start only the normal game state, or may be one that can start a state other than the normal game state. Further, the game control means may be one that always starts the normal game state, or may not start the normal game state.

In addition, in the second time saving state, only the number of times that the result of the variation display of the special symbol that is out of the way is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the big hit game ends and shifts to the low probability state is the first. It may shift when the number of times is reached, or after the jackpot game ends and shifts to the low probability state, the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of order is continuously displayed without becoming a jackpot. It may shift when the number of times other than the number of times becomes the first number. In addition, after the big hit game ends and shifts to the low probability state, the number of times that the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the way is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit is always changed to the first number. It may be present, or when the number of times that the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the way is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit after the big hit game ends and shifts to the low probability state becomes the first number, it shifts. It may not be the one that may not be.

Further, the third time saving state may be started only when the time saving symbol is displayed as a result of the variation display of the special symbol, or the time saving symbol may be started as a result of the variation display of the special symbol. It may be started in cases other than the case where is displayed. Further, the third time saving state may be started whenever the time saving symbol is displayed as a result of the variation display of the special symbol, or the time saving symbol which is the result of the variation display of the special symbol is displayed. May not be started.

Further, in the normal gaming state, the number of fittings may be the first number, and as a result of the variable display of the special symbol, only the time-saving symbol may be displayed, or in the normal gaming state, the number of fittings may be the number of fittings. It may be the first number of times, and as a result of the variable display of the special symbol, a symbol other than the time-saving symbol may be displayed. Further, in the normal game state, the number of fits may be the first number, and the time-saving symbol may always be displayed as a result of the variable display of the special symbol, and in the normal game state, the number of fits is the first number. In addition, the time saving symbol may not be displayed as a result of the variable display of the special symbol.

Further, only in the normal gaming state, the number of fittings may be the first number, and the time saving symbol may be displayed as a result of the variable display of the special symbol, or in a gaming state other than the normal gaming state. However, the number of times of fitting may be the first number, and the time saving symbol may be displayed as a result of the variable display of the special symbol.

Further, in the first case, the third time saving state may not be started and only the second time saving state may be started, and in the first case, the third time saving state is not started and the second time saving state may be started. A gaming state other than the time saving state of may be started. Further, in the first case, the third time saving state may not be started and the second time saving state may be started without fail, and in the first case, the third time saving state is not started and the second time saving state is not started. The time saving state of may not be started.

Further, in the first case, only the third time saving state may not be started, and the second time saving state may be started, and in the first case, the gaming state other than the third time saving state is started. Instead, the second time saving state may be started. Further, only in the first case, the third time saving state may not be started and the second time saving state may be started, and even in cases other than the first case, the third time saving state is not started. , The second time saving state may be started.

In addition, "when the result of the variation display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times [for example, 950 times, etc.] is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the start of the second time saving state, the first The second time saving state is over,
When the result of the variation display of the special symbol that is out of the third number of times [for example, 30 times, etc.] is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit after the start of the third time reduction state, the third time reduction state is displayed. The state is over,
Of the second number and the third number, the third number is smaller.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, even if only the second time saving state ends when the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the second time saving state is started. Well, after the second time saving state is started, the state other than the second time saving state ends when the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit. You may. In addition, even if the second time saving state is always terminated when the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit after the second time saving state is started. It is good, and if the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit after the second time saving state is started, the second time saving state may not end. There may be.

In addition, even if the second time saving state ends, if only the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the second time saving state is started. Well, after the second time saving state is started, the second time saving state ends when a result other than the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit. You may.

In addition, even if only the third time saving state ends when the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the third number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the third time saving state is started. Well, after the third time saving state is started, the state other than the third time saving state ends when the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the third number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit. You may. In addition, even if the third time-saving state is always terminated when the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the third number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit after the third time-saving state is started. It is good, and if the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the third number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit after the start of the third time saving state, the third time saving state may not end. There may be.

In addition, even if the third time saving state ends, if only the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the third number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the third time saving state is started. Well, after the third time saving state is started, the third time saving state ends when a result other than the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the third number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit. You may.

Further, "In the third time saving state, when the number of times of fitting becomes the first number of times, the state shifts from the third time saving state to the second time saving state [for example, FIGS. 27 (i) to 27 (i). As shown in Fig. (L), the number of symbol variation displays after the jackpot is completed in the c time saving state shifts to play time when the 750th symbol variation display is executed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the number of times the symbol variation is displayed in the electric support state increases, so that the interest of the game may be improved.

Here, in the third time saving state, when the number of times of fitting becomes the first number, the transition from the third time saving state to the second time saving state may be performed, or in the third time saving state, the fitting may be performed. When the number of times reaches the first number, the game state may shift from the third time saving state to a game state other than the second time saving state. Further, in the third time saving state, when the number of times of fitting becomes the first number of times, the transition from the third time saving state to the second time saving state may be made without fail, and in the third time saving state, the number of fittings may be performed. May not shift from the third time saving state to the second time saving state when the first number of times is reached.

Further, in the third time saving state, the transition from the third time saving state to the second time saving state may be performed only when the number of fittings reaches the first number of times, and in the third time saving state, the number of fittings may be changed. The transition from the third time saving state to the second time saving state may be performed even in cases other than the case where is the first number of times. Further, only in the third time saving state, when the number of times of fitting becomes the first number, the third time saving state may be changed to the second time saving state, or the gaming state other than the third time saving state may be changed. Also, when the number of times of fitting becomes the first number, the third time saving state may be changed to the second time saving state.

In addition, "In the second time saving state, the second time saving state does not shift to the third time saving state. Since the normal game ball is not won at the starting port 230 in the figure, the "special figure E" displayed only in the special figure 1 is not displayed, and therefore the c time saving state is not started, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, there is a case that there is no disadvantage due to the downgrade of the game state.

Here, in the second time saving state, it is not necessary to shift only from the second time saving state to the third time saving state, and in the second time saving state, other than the second time saving state to the third time saving state. It is not necessary to shift to the game state of. Further, in the second time saving state, it is not always necessary to shift from the second time saving state to the third time saving state, and in the second time saving state, the transition from the second time saving state to the third time saving state is performed. May be done.

Further, it is not necessary to shift from the second time saving state to the third time saving state only in the second time saving state, and even in the gaming state other than the second time saving state, the second time saving state is changed to the third. It is not necessary to shift to the time saving state of.

In addition, "In the third time-saving state, the third time-saving state is not restarted. Since the normal game ball does not win a prize, the "special figure E" displayed only in the special figure 1 is not displayed, and therefore, the c time saving state is not started again in the c time saving state, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, in the third time saving state, only the third time saving state may not be restarted, and in the third time saving state, the gaming state other than the third time saving state may not be restarted. .. Further, in the third time saving state, the third time saving state may not always be restarted, and in the third time saving state, the third time saving state may be restarted.

Further, the third time saving state may not be restarted only in the third time saving state, and the third time saving state may not be restarted even in the gaming state other than the third time saving state. ..

In addition, "the game control means sets a first time saving state [for example, an electric support state (for example, a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state; a time saving state) that shifts after the big hit game for a normal big hit is completed]. It ’s a startable way,
The first time saving state is a time saving state that may be started when the jackpot game ends and shifts to the low probability state.
The number of times of fitting includes the number of times that the result of the variation display of the special symbol has been displayed since the first time saving state was started [for example, as shown in FIG. 23, in the time saving state a. The number of starts between special prizes is updated and displayed, etc.],
When the result of the variation display of the special symbol that is out of the fourth number of times [for example, 100 times, etc.] is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit after the first time saving state is started, the first time saving state is displayed. The state is over,
Of the first number and the fourth number, the fourth number is smaller.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the game control means may be capable of starting only the first time saving state, or may be capable of starting a state other than the first time saving state. Further, the game control means may always start the first time saving state, or may not start the first time saving state.

Further, the first time saving state may be started when the big hit game ends and shifts only to the low probability state, or the big hit game ends and shifts to a state other than the low probability state. Then, it may be started. Further, the first time saving state may be always started when the big hit game ends and shifts to the low probability state, or may not start when the big hit game ends and shifts to the low probability state. It may be a thing.

Further, the number of times of fitting may be only the number of times that the result of the variation display of the special symbol is displayed after the first time saving state is started, or after the first time saving state is started. The number of times may include the number of times other than the number of times that the result of the variable display of the special symbol is displayed. In addition, the number of times that the result of the variation display of the special symbol after the start of the first time saving state is always included may be included, or the special time after the first time saving state is started. The number of times that the result of the variable display of the symbol is displayed may not be included.

In addition, even if only the first time saving state ends when the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the fourth number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the first time saving state is started. Well, after the first time saving state is started, the state other than the first time saving state ends when the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the fourth number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit. You may. In addition, even if the first time saving state is always terminated when the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the fourth number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit after the first time saving state is started. It is good, and if the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the fourth number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit after the first time saving state is started, the first time saving state may not end. There may be.

In addition, even if the first time saving state ends, if only the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the fourth number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the first time saving state is started. Well, after the first time saving state is started, the first time saving state ends when a result other than the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the fourth number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit. You may.

In addition, "a production means capable of executing a plurality of effects [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, etc.] is provided.
One of the plurality of effects is the second effect,
The second effect is an effect that at least suggests information about the second time saving state.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the effect means may be one that can execute only a plurality of effects, or may be one that can execute other than a plurality of effects. Further, the effect means may be one that always executes a plurality of effects, or may not execute a plurality of effects.

Further, the second effect may suggest only the information regarding the second time saving state, or may suggest information other than the information regarding the second time saving state. Further, the second effect may always suggest information on the second time saving state, or may not suggest information on the second time saving state.

In addition, "the second effect is an effect that includes at least information suggesting the number of fits [for example, information on the number of start times between special prizes (TS), as shown in FIG. 18 (a)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the second effect may include only information suggesting the number of fits, or may include information other than the information suggesting the number of fits. In addition, the second effect may always include information suggesting the number of fits, or may not include information suggesting the number of fits.

Further, "The second effect is information that at least suggests the number of times of variation display of the special symbol until the number of times of fitting becomes the first number of times [for example, as shown in FIG. 18A, play time. Information including the number of times the symbol changes are displayed up to
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the second effect may include only information suggesting the number of times of variable display of the special symbol until the number of fits becomes the first number, or the number of fits becomes the first number. It may include information other than the information suggesting the number of times of variable display of the special symbol up to. In addition, the second effect may always include information suggesting the number of times of variable display of the special symbol until the number of fits becomes the first number, and the number of fits becomes the first number. It may not include information suggesting the number of times of variable display of the special symbol up to.

In addition, "The second effect is an effect that can be performed in one of a plurality of aspects.
One of the plurality of aspects is the first aspect [for example, as shown in FIG. 22 (e), the information regarding the number of times the symbol variation is displayed until the play time is not clearly displayed, etc.]. can be,
One aspect of the plurality of aspects is the second aspect [for example, as shown in FIG. 22 (m), an aspect in which information regarding the number of times the symbol variation is displayed up to the play time is clearly displayed]. can be,
The first aspect and the second aspect are different aspects.
After the power is turned on, the second effect may be executed in the first aspect [for example, as shown in FIG. 21D, after the power is turned on, the symbol variation display until the play time is displayed. Information about the number of times is displayed in an unclear manner, etc.],
When the second condition [for example, as shown in FIG. 22, the out-of-order SP reach is executed, etc.] is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, the second The effect changes from the first aspect to the second aspect [for example, as shown in FIGS. 22 (g) to 22 (m), the information regarding the number of times the symbol variation is displayed until the play time is unclear. When the out-of-SP reach is executed in the state shown in the mode, the information regarding the number of times the symbol variation is displayed until the subsequent play time is displayed in a clear mode, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the second effect may be feasible only in one of a plurality of modes, or may be feasible in a mode other than one of the plurality of modes. You may. Further, the second effect may be always executed in one of a plurality of aspects, or may not be executed in one of a plurality of aspects. ..

Further, only the second effect may be executed in the first aspect after the power is turned on, or the notification other than the second effect in the first aspect after the power is turned on. May be executed. Further, the second effect may always be executed in the first aspect after the power is turned on, or the second effect may not be executed in the first aspect after the power is turned on. May be good.

Further, the second effect may be executed only in the first aspect after the power is turned on, or the second effect may be executed in an aspect other than the first aspect after the power is turned on. May be executed. Further, the second effect may be executed in the first mode only after the power is turned on, and the second effect may be executed in the first mode even after the power is turned on. May be done.

Further, if the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, the second effect may be changed only from the first aspect to the second aspect. If the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, the second effect may be changed from the first aspect to an aspect other than the second aspect. Further, if the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, the second effect may always change from the first aspect to the second aspect. If the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, the second effect may not change from the first aspect to the second aspect.

Further, if the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, only the second effect may change from the first aspect to the second aspect. If the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, the effects other than the second effect may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. Further, if only the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, the second effect may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. If a condition other than the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, the second effect may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect.

Further, if the second condition is satisfied only after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, the second effect may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. If the second condition is satisfied except after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, the second effect may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. If the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started only in the first aspect, the second effect may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect, or the first aspect may be changed. If the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in an aspect other than the above aspect, the second effect may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect.

Further, "The game table is a pachinko machine [for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description,
"Symbol display means capable of executing variable display of special symbols [for example, first special symbol display device 212, second special symbol display device 214, etc.] and
A game control means that can control the game state [for example, CPU 304 of the main control unit 300] and
It is a game table equipped with
The game control means is a means capable of controlling a low probability state [for example, a special figure low probability state, etc.] and a high probability state [for example, a special figure high probability state, etc.].
The high-probability state is a state in which the probability that the result of the variation display of the special symbol becomes a big hit is higher than that of the low-probability state.
The game control means is a means capable of starting a second time saving state [for example, play time (b time saving state), etc.].
The game control means is a means capable of starting a third time saving state [for example, an electric support state (for example, a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state; c time saving state) in which a time saving symbol is suddenly displayed and transitions]. ,
The second time-saving state is the number of times that the result of the variation display of the special symbol that is out of the way is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the big hit game is completed and the state shifts to the low probability state (hereinafter, "fitting"). When the number of times (referred to as "number of times") becomes the first number of times [for example, 750 times, etc.], it is a time saving state that may shift.
The third time saving state is a time saving state that may be started when a time saving symbol [for example, "special symbol E" or the like] is displayed as a result of the variable display of the special symbol.
The time saving symbol is a symbol different from the jackpot symbol,
In the third time saving state, the third time saving state may shift to the second time saving state [for example, as shown in FIGS. 27 (i) to 27 (l), a big hit in the c time saving state. When the 750th symbol variation display is executed, the number of symbol variation displays since the end of is shifted to play time, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the game control means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the game control means.

Here, the symbol display means may be capable of executing only the variable display of the special symbol, or may be capable of executing a display other than the variable display of the special symbol. Further, the symbol display means may always execute the variable display of the special symbol, or may not execute the variable display of the special symbol.

Further, the game control means may be capable of controlling only the game state, or may be capable of controlling a state other than the game state. Further, the game control means may always control the game state, or may not control the game state.

Further, the game control means may be able to control only the low-probability state and the high-probability state, or may be able to control the state other than the low-probability state and the high-probability state. Further, the game control means may be one that always controls the low-probability state and the high-probability state, or may not be controlled to the low-probability state and the high-probability state.

Further, the high-probability state may be a state in which only the probability that the result of the variation display of the special symbol becomes a big hit is higher than that in the low-probability state, or the result of the variation display of the special symbol is a big hit than the low-probability state. It may be in a state where the probability other than the probability of becoming is high. In addition, the high-probability state may be a state in which the probability that the result of the variation display of the special symbol will be a big hit is always higher than that in the low-probability state, and the result of the variation display of the special symbol is a big hit than the low-probability state. It may not be in a state where the probability of becoming is high.

Further, the game control means may be capable of starting only the second time saving state, or may be capable of starting a state other than the second time saving state. Further, the game control means may always start the second time saving state, or may not start the second time saving state.

Further, the game control means may be capable of starting only the third time saving state, or may be capable of starting a state other than the third time saving state. Further, the game control means may always start the third time saving state, or may not start the third time saving state.

In addition, in the second time saving state, only the number of times that the result of the variation display of the special symbol that is out of the way is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the big hit game ends and shifts to the low probability state is the first. It may shift when the number of times is reached, or after the jackpot game ends and shifts to the low probability state, the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of order is continuously displayed without becoming a jackpot. It may shift when the number of times other than the number of times becomes the first number. In addition, after the big hit game ends and shifts to the low probability state, the number of times that the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the way is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit is always changed to the first number. It may be present, or when the number of times that the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the way is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit after the big hit game ends and shifts to the low probability state becomes the first number, it shifts. It may not be the one that may not be.

Further, the third time saving state may be started only when the time saving symbol is displayed as a result of the variation display of the special symbol, or the time saving symbol may be started as a result of the variation display of the special symbol. It may be started in cases other than the case where is displayed. Further, the third time saving state may be started whenever the time saving symbol is displayed as a result of the variation display of the special symbol, or the time saving symbol which is the result of the variation display of the special symbol is displayed. May not be started.

Further, in the third time saving state, there may be a case where only the third time saving state is changed to the second time saving state, and in the third time saving state, the third time saving state is other than the second time saving state. It may also shift to the gaming state. Further, in the third time saving state, the third time saving state may be changed to the second time saving state without fail, and in the third time saving state, the third time saving state may not be changed to the second time saving state. There may be.

Further, in the third time saving state, there may be a case where only the third time saving state is changed to the second time saving state, and in the third time saving state, the gaming state other than the third time saving state is changed to the second time saving state. It may shift to a time saving state. In addition, there may be a case where the third time saving state is changed to the second time saving state only in the third time saving state, and the third time saving state is changed to the second in the gaming state other than the third time saving state. It may shift to the time saving state of.

In addition, "the number of times of fitting includes the number of times that the result of the variation display of the special symbol has been displayed since the start of the third time saving state [for example, FIGS. 26 (f) to FIG. As shown in (k), the number of start times between special prizes is updated and displayed even in the c time saving state],
When the number of times of fitting becomes the first number in the third time saving state, the transition from the third time saving state to the second time saving state [for example, FIGS. 27 (i) to 27 (l). ), The number of symbol variation displays since the end of the jackpot in the c time saving state shifts to play time when the 750th symbol variation display is executed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the number of times the symbol variation is displayed in the electric support state increases, so that the interest of the game may be improved.

Here, the number of fits may be only the number of times that the result of the variation display of the special symbol has been displayed since the start of the third time reduction state, or after the start of the third time reduction state. The number of times other than the number of times that the result of the variable display of the special symbol of is displayed may be included. In addition, the number of times that the result of the variation display of the special symbol after the start of the third time saving state is always included may be included, or the special time after the start of the third time saving state may be included. The number of times that the result of the variable display of the symbol is displayed may not be included.

Further, in the third time saving state, when the number of fittings becomes the first number, the transition from the third time saving state to the second time saving state may be performed, or in the third time saving state, the number of fittings may be changed. When is the first number of times, the game state may be changed from the third time saving state to a game state other than the second time saving state. Further, in the third time saving state, when the number of times of fitting becomes the first number of times, the transition from the third time saving state to the second time saving state may be made without fail, and in the third time saving state, the number of fittings may be performed. May not shift from the third time saving state to the second time saving state when the first number of times is reached.

Further, in the third time saving state, the transition from the third time saving state to the second time saving state may be performed only when the number of fittings reaches the first number of times, and in the third time saving state, the number of fittings may be changed. The transition from the third time saving state to the second time saving state may be performed even in cases other than the case where is the first number of times. Further, only in the third time saving state, when the number of times of fitting becomes the first number, the third time saving state may be changed to the second time saving state, or the gaming state other than the third time saving state may be changed. Also, when the number of times of fitting becomes the first number, the third time saving state may be changed to the second time saving state.

In addition, "when the number of times of fitting becomes the first number of times in the third time saving state, the change display of the special symbol next to the first number of times changes from the third time saving state to the second time saving state. Transition [For example, as shown in FIGS. 27 (i) to 27 (l), when the symbol variation display is executed for the 750th time since the jackpot is completed in the c time saving state, the play occurs. Shift to time, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, when the number of times of fitting becomes the first number in the third time saving state, the transition from the third time saving state to the second time saving state may be performed only in the variation display of the special symbol next to the first number of times. However, when the number of times of fitting becomes the first number in the third time saving state, the game state shifts from the third time saving state to the gaming state other than the second time saving state by the variable display of the special symbol next to the first number of times. Alternatively, when the number of times of fitting becomes the first number in the third time saving state, the change display of the special symbol next to the first number of times always shifts from the third time saving state to the second time saving state. Alternatively, if the number of times of fitting becomes the first number in the third time saving state, the change display of the special symbol next to the first number of times may not shift from the third time saving state to the second time saving state. You may.

Further, when the number of times of fitting becomes the first number in the third time saving state, it may shift from only the third time saving state to the second time saving state by the variation display of the special symbol next to the first number of times. , When the number of times of fitting becomes the first number in the third time saving state, even if the game state other than the third time saving state is changed to the second time saving state by the variation display of the special symbol next to the first number of times. good.

Further, when the number of fittings becomes the first number in the third time saving state, the third time saving state may be changed to the second time saving state only by the variable display of the special symbol next to the first number of times. , When the number of fits becomes the first number in the third time saving state, even if the fluctuation display other than the fluctuation display of the special symbol next to the first number of times is changed from the third time saving state to the second time saving state. good.

Further, when the number of times of fitting becomes the first number only in the third time saving state, the third time saving state may be changed to the second time saving state by the variation display of the special symbol next to the first number of times. , When the number of fits becomes the first number in the game state other than the third time saving state, even if the third time saving state is changed to the second time saving state by the variation display of the special symbol next to the first number of times. good.

In addition, "when the result of the variation display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times [for example, 950 times, etc.] is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the start of the second time saving state, the first The second time saving state is over,
When the result of the variation display of the special symbol that is out of the third number of times [for example, 30 times, etc.] is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit after the start of the third time reduction state, the third time reduction state is displayed. The state is over,
Of the second number and the third number, the third number is smaller.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the number of times the symbol variation of the electric support state is displayed increases, so that the interest of the game may be improved.

Here, when the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the start of the second time saving state, only the second time saving state ends. Or, if the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit after the start of the second time saving state, the state other than the second time saving state will be displayed. You may end. In addition, even if the second time saving state is always terminated when the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit after the second time saving state is started. It is good, and if the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit after the second time saving state is started, the second time saving state may not end. There may be.

In addition, even if the second time saving state ends, if only the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the second time saving state is started. Well, after the second time saving state is started, the second time saving state ends when a result other than the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit. You may.

In addition, even if only the third time saving state ends when the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the third number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the third time saving state is started. Well, after the third time saving state is started, the state other than the third time saving state ends when the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the third number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit. You may. In addition, even if the third time-saving state is always terminated when the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the third number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit after the third time-saving state is started. It is good, and if the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the third number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit after the start of the third time saving state, the third time saving state may not end. There may be.

In addition, even if the third time saving state ends, if only the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the third number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the third time saving state is started. Well, after the third time saving state is started, the third time saving state ends when a result other than the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the third number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit. You may.

Further, "the symbol display means is a means including a first symbol display means [for example, a first special symbol display device 212 or the like] and a second symbol display means [for example, a second special symbol display device 214 or the like]. can be,
The variable display of the special symbol by the second symbol display means (hereinafter, referred to as “second symbol variable display”) is the variable display of the special symbol by the first symbol display means (hereinafter, “first symbol”). It is a symbol variation display that can be executed with priority over "variation display".
As a result of executing the first symbol variation display, the time saving symbol [for example, "special symbol E" etc.] may be displayed.
The time saving symbol may not be displayed as a result of executing the second symbol variation display.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the symbol display means may include only the first symbol display means and the second symbol display means, and the symbol display means other than the first symbol display means and the second symbol display means may also be included. It may include. Further, the symbol display means may always include the first symbol display means and the second symbol display means, or may not include the first symbol display means and the second symbol display means. It may be a thing.

Further, the second symbol variation display may be executed with priority over only the first symbol variation display, or may be executed with priority over the symbol variation display other than the first symbol variation display. It may be possible. Further, the second symbol variation display may always be executed with priority over the first symbol variation display, or may not be executed with priority over the first symbol variation display. There may be.

In addition, only the time-saving symbols may be displayed as a result of executing the first symbol variation display, or symbols other than the time-saving symbols may be displayed as a result of executing the first symbol variation display. There may be cases. Further, the time-saving symbol may always be displayed as a result of executing the first symbol variation display, or the time-saving symbol may not be displayed as a result of executing the first symbol variation display.

In addition, the time saving symbol may be displayed only as a result of executing the first symbol variation display, or the time saving symbol may be displayed as a result other than the result of executing the first symbol variation display. There may be cases.

In addition, it is not necessary that only the time-saving symbol is displayed as a result of executing the second symbol variation display, and symbols other than the time-saving symbol are also displayed as a result of executing the second symbol variation display. It does not have to be the case. Further, the time saving symbol may not always be displayed as a result of executing the second symbol variation display, or the time saving symbol may be displayed as a result of executing the second symbol variation display. ..

Further, the time saving symbol may not be displayed only as a result of executing the second symbol variation display, and the time saving symbol is displayed as a result other than the result of executing the second symbol variation display. It does not have to be the case.

In addition, "the game control means sets a first time saving state [for example, an electric support state (for example, a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state; a time saving state) that shifts after the big hit game for a normal big hit is completed]. It ’s a startable way,
The first time saving state is a time saving state that may be started when the jackpot game ends and shifts to the low probability state.
The number of times of fitting includes the number of times that the result of the variation display of the special symbol has been displayed since the first time saving state was started [for example, as shown in FIG. 23, in the time saving state a. The number of starts between special prizes is updated and displayed, etc.],
When the result of the variation display of the special symbol that is out of the fourth number of times [for example, 100 times, etc.] is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit after the first time saving state is started, the first time saving state is displayed. The state is over,
Of the first number and the fourth number, the fourth number is smaller.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, even if the symbol variation display is deviated during the execution of the first time saving state, it is counted as the number of fittings, so that it may be positioned as a function that the player is happy with. On the other hand, since the second time saving state is not started during the execution of the first time saving state, it may be possible to prevent the player from becoming too advantageous.

Here, the game control means may be capable of starting only the first time saving state, or may be capable of starting a state other than the first time saving state. Further, the game control means may always start the first time saving state, or may not start the first time saving state.

Further, the first time saving state may be started when the big hit game ends and shifts only to the low probability state, or the big hit game ends and shifts to a state other than the low probability state. Then, it may be started. Further, the first time saving state may be always started when the big hit game ends and shifts to the low probability state, or may not start when the big hit game ends and shifts to the low probability state. It may be a thing.

Further, the number of times of fitting may be only the number of times that the result of the variation display of the special symbol is displayed after the first time saving state is started, or after the first time saving state is started. The number of times may include the number of times other than the number of times that the result of the variable display of the special symbol is displayed. In addition, the number of times that the result of the variation display of the special symbol after the start of the first time saving state is always included may be included, or the special time after the first time saving state is started. The number of times that the result of the variable display of the symbol is displayed may not be included.

In addition, even if only the first time saving state ends when the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the fourth number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the first time saving state is started. Well, after the first time saving state is started, the state other than the first time saving state ends when the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the fourth number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit. You may. In addition, even if the first time saving state is always terminated when the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the fourth number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit after the first time saving state is started. It is good, and if the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the fourth number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit after the first time saving state is started, the first time saving state may not end. There may be.

In addition, even if the first time saving state ends, if only the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the fourth number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the first time saving state is started. Well, after the first time saving state is started, the first time saving state ends when a result other than the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the fourth number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit. You may.

In addition, "a production means capable of executing a plurality of effects [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, etc.] is provided.
One of the plurality of effects is a third effect [for example, an effect in which the character of the chief is displayed together with the characters “during play time” shown in FIG. 25 (s)].
One of the plurality of effects is a fourth effect [for example, an effect in which the character of Sabohani shown in FIG. 26 (g) is displayed].
The third effect is an effect that may be executed in the second time saving state.
The fourth effect is an effect that may be executed in the third time saving state.
The third aspect of the effect and the fourth aspect of the effect are at least partially different.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the effect means may be one that can execute only a plurality of effects, or may be one that can execute other than a plurality of effects. Further, the effect means may be one that always executes a plurality of effects, or may not execute a plurality of effects.

Further, the third effect may be executed only in the second time saving state, or may be executed in a gaming state other than the second time saving state. May be good. Further, the third effect may be always executed in the second time saving state, or may not be executed in the second time saving state.

Further, the fourth effect may be executed only in the third time saving state, or may be executed in a gaming state other than the third time saving state. May be good. Further, the fourth effect may be always executed in the third time saving state, or may not be executed in the third time saving state.

In addition, in the aspect of the third effect and the aspect of the fourth effect, a part may be different, or all may be different. Moreover, the aspect of the third effect and the aspect of the fourth effect may be the same.

In addition, "a production means capable of executing a plurality of effects [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, etc.] is provided.
One of the plurality of effects is the second effect,
The second effect is an effect that at least suggests information on the second time saving state [for example, information on the number of times the symbol changes are displayed until the play time, as shown in FIG. 18A].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the effect means may be one that can execute only a plurality of effects, or may be one that can execute other than a plurality of effects. Further, the effect means may be one that always executes a plurality of effects, or may not execute a plurality of effects.

Further, the second effect may suggest only the information regarding the second time saving state, or may suggest information other than the information regarding the second time saving state. Further, the second effect may always suggest information on the second time saving state, or may not suggest information on the second time saving state.

In addition, "the second effect is an effect that includes at least information suggesting the number of fits [for example, information on the number of start times between special prizes (TS), as shown in FIG. 18 (a)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the second effect may include only information suggesting the number of fits, or may include information other than the information suggesting the number of fits. In addition, the second effect may always include information suggesting the number of fits, or may not include information suggesting the number of fits.

Further, "The second effect is information that at least suggests the number of times of variation display of the special symbol until the number of times of fitting becomes the first number of times [for example, as shown in FIG. 18A, play time. Information including the number of times the symbol changes are displayed up to
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the second effect may include only information suggesting the number of times of variable display of the special symbol until the number of fits becomes the first number, or the number of fits becomes the first number. It may include information other than the information suggesting the number of times of variable display of the special symbol up to. In addition, the second effect may always include information suggesting the number of times of variable display of the special symbol until the number of fits becomes the first number, and the number of fits becomes the first number. It may not include information suggesting the number of times of variable display of the special symbol up to.

In addition, "The second effect is an effect that can be performed in one of a plurality of aspects.
One of the plurality of aspects is the first aspect [for example, as shown in FIG. 22 (e), the information regarding the number of times the symbol variation is displayed until the play time is not clearly displayed, etc.]. can be,
One aspect of the plurality of aspects is the second aspect [for example, as shown in FIG. 22 (m), an aspect in which information regarding the number of times the symbol variation is displayed up to the play time is clearly displayed]. can be,
The first aspect and the second aspect are different aspects.
After the power is turned on, the second effect may be executed in the first aspect [for example, as shown in FIG. 21D, after the power is turned on, the symbol variation display until the play time is displayed. Information about the number of times is displayed in an unclear manner, etc.],
When the second condition [for example, as shown in FIG. 22, the out-of-order SP reach is executed, etc.] is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, the second The effect changes from the first aspect to the second aspect [for example, as shown in FIGS. 22 (g) to 22 (m), the information regarding the number of times the symbol variation is displayed until the play time is unclear. When the out-of-SP reach is executed in the state shown in the mode, the information regarding the number of times the symbol variation is displayed until the subsequent play time is displayed in a clear mode, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the second effect may be feasible only in one of a plurality of modes, or may be feasible in a mode other than one of the plurality of modes. You may. Further, the second effect may be always executed in one of a plurality of aspects, or may not be executed in one of a plurality of aspects. ..

Further, only the second effect may be executed in the first aspect after the power is turned on, or the notification other than the second effect in the first aspect after the power is turned on. May be executed. Further, the second effect may always be executed in the first aspect after the power is turned on, or the second effect may not be executed in the first aspect after the power is turned on. May be good.

Further, the second effect may be executed only in the first aspect after the power is turned on, or the second effect may be executed in an aspect other than the first aspect after the power is turned on. May be executed. Further, the second effect may be executed in the first mode only after the power is turned on, and the second effect may be executed in the first mode even after the power is turned on. May be done.

Further, if the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, the second effect may be changed only from the first aspect to the second aspect. If the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, the second effect may be changed from the first aspect to an aspect other than the second aspect. Further, if the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, the second effect may always change from the first aspect to the second aspect. If the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, the second effect may not change from the first aspect to the second aspect.

Further, if the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, only the second effect may change from the first aspect to the second aspect. If the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, the effects other than the second effect may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. Further, if only the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, the second effect may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. If a condition other than the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, the second effect may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect.

Further, if the second condition is satisfied only after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, the second effect may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. If the second condition is satisfied except after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, the second effect may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. If the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started only in the first aspect, the second effect may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect, or the first aspect may be changed. If the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in an aspect other than the above aspect, the second effect may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect.

In addition, "after the second time saving state is started and the second time saving state ends without becoming a big hit, the game may shift to the normal game state [for example, the game shifts to the play time and the game is played. After the time is over, it shifts to the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, etc.],
From the end of the second time saving state to the big hit, the second time saving state is not started [for example, after shifting to the play time and the play time ends, the big hit is obtained. Will not shift to play time again, etc.],
The third time saving state may be started from the end of the second time saving state until a big hit [For example, even after the play time is finished, the result of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is If it is suddenly displayed with a time saving symbol ("Special figure E"), it will shift to the c time saving state, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, after the second time saving state is started and the second time saving state ends without becoming a big hit, it may shift only to the normal gaming state, or the second time saving state starts. After the second time saving state is completed without becoming a big hit, the game state may shift to a game state other than the normal game state. In addition, after the second time saving state is started and the second time saving state is completed without becoming a big hit, it may always shift to the normal game state, or the second time saving state is started and the big hit After the second time saving state is completed without becoming, the normal gaming state may not be entered.

Further, the normal game state may be started only after the second time saving state is started and the second time saving state is completed without becoming a big hit, or the second time saving state is started and the second time saving state is started. There may be a case where the game shifts to the normal game state other than after the second time saving state ends without becoming a big hit. In addition, only the second time-saving state is started, and after the second time-saving state ends without a big hit, the game may shift to the normal game state, or a game other than the second time-saving state. After the state is started and the second time saving state is completed without becoming a big hit, it may shift to the normal gaming state.

Further, it is not necessary to start only the second time saving state from the end of the second time saving state to the big hit, and from the end of the second time saving state to the big hit. It is not necessary to start a gaming state other than the second time saving state. Further, it is not always necessary to start the second time saving state from the end of the second time saving state to the big hit, and from the end of the second time saving state to the big hit. A second time saving condition may be initiated.

Further, it is not necessary to start the second time saving state only from the end of the second time saving state to the big hit, and other than from the end of the second time saving state to the big hit. Also, the second time saving state does not have to be started.

Further, only the third time saving state may be started from the end of the second time saving state to the big hit, or from the end of the second time saving state to the big hit. A gaming state other than the third time saving state may be started. In addition, the third time saving state may always be started from the end of the second time saving state to the big hit, or the third time saving state from the end of the second time saving state to the big hit. The state may not start.

In addition, the third time saving state may be started only from the end of the second time saving state to the big hit, or from the end of the second time saving state to the big hit. In addition, a third time saving state may be started.

Further, "The game table is a pachinko machine [for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description,
"Symbol display means capable of executing variable display of special symbols [for example, first special symbol display device 212, second special symbol display device 214, etc.] and
A game control means that can control the game state [for example, CPU 304 of the main control unit 300] and
An effect means capable of executing a plurality of effects [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, etc.] and
It is a game table equipped with
When the probability setting change operation is accepted, any one of the probability settings is selected from the plurality of probability settings [for example, in the setting change process (step S117) of the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 7, the setting change button. It is possible to set one of multiple settings by pressing 194],
The game control means is a means capable of controlling a low probability state [for example, a special figure low probability state, etc.] and a high probability state [for example, a special figure high probability state, etc.].
The high-probability state is a state in which the probability that the result of the variation display of the special symbol becomes a big hit is higher than that of the low-probability state.
The game control means is a means capable of starting a second time saving state [for example, play time (b time saving state), etc.].
The second time-saving state is the number of times that the result of the variation display of the special symbol that is out of the way is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the big hit game is completed and the state shifts to the low probability state (hereinafter, "fitting"). When the number of times (referred to as "number of times") becomes the first number of times [for example, 750 times, etc.], it is a time saving state that may shift.
The effect means is a means capable of executing a setting suggestion effect [for example, a display of a character that may appear at the end of the jackpot game shown in FIG. 29] that suggests information about the setting.
The appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect is different before the start of the second time saving state and after the start of the second time saving state [for example, as shown in FIG. 15A, the first jackpot end effect. The setting suggestion effect that may be executed at times is easier to be executed after the play time starts than before the play time starts. As shown in FIG. 16, in the appearance of the setting suggestion ball, the setting suggestion ball appears more than before the play time shifts. After the transition, setting suggestion balls such as blue and green are more likely to appear],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the production means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a characteristic in the production means.

Here, the symbol display means may be capable of executing only the variable display of the special symbol, or may be capable of executing a display other than the variable display of the special symbol. Further, the symbol display means may always execute the variable display of the special symbol, or may not execute the variable display of the special symbol.

Further, the game control means may be capable of controlling only the game state, or may be capable of controlling a state other than the game state. Further, the game control means may always control the game state, or may not control the game state.

Further, the effect means may be one that can execute only a plurality of effects, or may be capable of executing a method other than the plurality of effects. Further, the effect means may be one that always executes a plurality of effects, or may not execute a plurality of effects.

Further, when the probability setting operation is accepted, only one of the probability settings may be selected from the plurality of probability settings, and when the probability setting operation is accepted, any one of the plurality of probability settings may be selected. Settings other than the two probability settings may be selected. Further, when the probability setting operation is accepted, any one of the probability settings may be always selected from the plurality of probability settings, and when the probability setting operation is accepted, any one of the plurality of probability settings may be selected. One probability setting may not be selected.

Further, when the probability setting operation is accepted, any one of the probability settings may be selected from only a plurality of probability settings, and when the probability setting operation is accepted, the settings other than the plurality of probability settings may be selected. Any one probability setting may be selected. Further, only when the probability setting operation is accepted, any one of the probability settings may be selected from the plurality of probability settings, and even when the probability setting operation is not accepted, the plurality of probability settings may be selected. Any one of the probability settings may be selected from.

Further, the game control means may be able to control only the low-probability state and the high-probability state, or may be able to control the state other than the low-probability state and the high-probability state. Further, the game control means may be one that always controls the low-probability state and the high-probability state, or may not be controlled to the low-probability state and the high-probability state.

Further, the high-probability state may be a state in which only the probability that the result of the variation display of the special symbol becomes a big hit is higher than that in the low-probability state, or the result of the variation display of the special symbol is a big hit than the low-probability state. It may be in a state where the probability other than the probability of becoming is high. In addition, the high-probability state may be a state in which the probability that the result of the variation display of the special symbol will be a big hit is always higher than that in the low-probability state, and the result of the variation display of the special symbol is a big hit than the low-probability state. It may not be in a state where the probability of becoming is high.

Further, the game control means may be capable of starting only the second time saving state, or may be capable of starting a state other than the second time saving state. Further, the game control means may always start the second time saving state, or may not start the second time saving state.

In addition, in the second time saving state, only the number of times that the result of the variation display of the special symbol that is out of the way is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the big hit game ends and shifts to the low probability state is the first. It may shift when the number of times is reached, or after the jackpot game ends and shifts to the low probability state, the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of order is continuously displayed without becoming a jackpot. It may shift when the number of times other than the number of times becomes the first number. In addition, after the big hit game ends and shifts to the low probability state, the number of times that the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the way is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit is always changed to the first number. It may be present, or when the number of times that the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the way is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit after the big hit game ends and shifts to the low probability state becomes the first number, it shifts. It may not be the one that may not be.

Further, the effect means may be capable of executing only the setting suggestion effect that suggests information about the setting, or may be capable of executing the effect other than the setting suggestion effect that suggests the information about the setting. .. Further, the effect means may always execute the setting suggestion effect that suggests the information about the setting, or may not execute the setting suggestion effect that suggests the information about the setting.

Further, the effect means may be capable of executing a setting suggestion effect that suggests only information related to the setting, or may be capable of executing a setting suggestion effect that suggests information other than the information related to the setting. ..

Further, only the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect may be different before the second time saving state is started and after the second time saving state is started, and before the second time saving state is started and after the second time saving state is started. Probabilities other than the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect may be different after the second time saving state is started. In addition, the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect may always be different before the second time saving state is started and after the second time saving state is started, and before the second time saving state is started and after the second time saving state is started. The appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect may not be different after the second time saving state is started.

Further, "The setting suggestion effect is more likely to be executed after the second time saving state is started than before the second time saving state is started.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to increase the appearance rate of setting suggestions so as not to impair the player's willingness to continue the game when the deviation continues.

Here, it may be easier to execute only the setting suggestion effect after the second time saving state is started than before the second time saving state is started, or the second time saving state is started. It may be easier to execute an effect other than the setting suggestion effect after the second time saving state is started than before. Further, the setting suggestion effect may be more easily executed after the second time saving state is started than before the second time saving state is started, and the second time saving state is started. It may be more difficult to execute the setting suggestion effect after the second time saving state is started than before.

It should be noted that the setting suggestion effect may be more easily executed before the second time saving state is started than after the second time saving state is started.

In addition, "when the result of the variation display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times [for example, 950 times, etc.] is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the start of the second time saving state, the first The second time saving state is over,
The setting suggestion effect is an effect that may be executed in the third aspect [for example, a white setting suggestion ball, etc.].
The setting suggestion effect is an effect that may be executed in the fourth aspect [for example, a blue setting suggestion ball, etc.].
The third aspect and the fourth aspect are at least partially the same aspect [for example, the setting suggestion ball has a star shape, etc.].
After the second time saving state is completed, the setting suggestion effect is more likely to be executed in the fourth aspect than before the second time saving state is started [for example, the setting suggestion effect is more likely to be executed in the fourth aspect than before. , In setting 1, the blue setting suggestion ball is more likely to be displayed after the end of the play time than before the transition of the play time],
The setting suggestion effect is more likely to be executed in the third aspect than after the second time saving state is started before the second time saving state is started [for example, the setting suggestion effect is more likely to be executed in the third aspect than after the second time saving state is completed. , In setting 1, white setting suggestion balls are more likely to be displayed before the end of the play time than after the transition of the play time],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, when the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the start of the second time saving state, only the second time saving state ends. Or, if the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit after the start of the second time saving state, the gaming state other than the second time saving state is displayed. May also end. In addition, even if the second time saving state is always terminated when the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit after the second time saving state is started. It is good, and if the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit after the second time saving state is started, the second time saving state may not end. There may be.

In addition, even if the second time saving state ends, if only the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the second time saving state is started. Well, after the second time saving state is started, the second time saving state ends when a result other than the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit. You may.

Further, the setting suggestion effect may be executed only in the third aspect, or may be executed in an aspect other than the third aspect. Further, the setting suggestion effect may be always executed in the third aspect, or may not be executed in the third aspect.

Further, the setting suggestion effect may be executed only in the fourth aspect, or may be executed in an aspect other than the fourth aspect. Further, the setting suggestion effect may be always executed in the fourth aspect, or may not be executed in the fourth aspect.

Further, it may be easier to execute only the setting suggestion effect in the fourth aspect than in the third aspect after the end of the second time reduction state than before the start of the second time reduction state. , It may be easier to execute an effect other than the setting suggestion effect in the fourth aspect than in the third aspect after the end of the second time reduction state than before the start of the second time reduction state. .. Further, it may be easier to execute the setting suggestion effect in the fourth aspect than in the third aspect after the end of the second time reduction state than before the start of the second time reduction state. , Even if the setting suggestion effect may not be more easily executed in the fourth aspect than in the third aspect after the end of the second time reduction state than before the start of the second time reduction state. good.

Further, it may be easier to execute the setting suggestion effect only in the fourth aspect than in the third aspect after the end of the second time reduction state than before the start of the second time reduction state. , The setting suggestion effect may be more easily executed after the second time saving state is completed than before the second time saving state is started in a mode other than the fourth aspect than in the third aspect. .. Further, the setting suggestion effect may be more easily executed in the fourth aspect than in the third aspect only after the second time saving state is completed than before the second time saving state is started. , The setting suggestion effect may be more easily executed in the fourth aspect than in the third aspect except after the second time saving state is completed than before the second time saving state is started.

Further, it may be easier to execute only the setting suggestion effect in the third aspect than in the fourth aspect before the start of the second time reduction state than after the end of the second time reduction state. , The effect other than the setting suggestion effect may be more easily executed in the third aspect than in the fourth aspect before the start of the second time reduction state than after the end of the second time reduction state. .. Further, the setting suggestion effect may be more easily executed in the third aspect than in the fourth aspect before the start of the second time reduction state than after the end of the second time reduction state. , Even if the setting suggestion effect may not be more easily executed in the third aspect than in the fourth aspect before the start of the second time reduction state than after the end of the second time reduction state. good.

Further, it may be easier to execute the setting suggestion effect only in the third aspect than in the fourth aspect before the start of the second time saving state than after the end of the second time saving state. , The setting suggestion effect may be more easily executed in a mode other than the third mode than in the fourth mode before the second time saving state is started than after the second time saving state is finished. .. Further, the setting suggestion effect may be more easily executed in the third aspect than in the fourth aspect only before the second time saving state is started than after the second time saving state is completed. , The setting suggestion effect may be more easily executed in the third aspect than in the fourth aspect except before the start of the second time saving state than after the end of the second time saving state.

In addition, a part of the third aspect and the fourth aspect may be the same, or all of them may be the same. Moreover, all may be different aspects.

In addition, "when the result of the variation display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times [for example, 950 times, etc.] is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the start of the second time saving state, the first The second time saving state is over,
The setting suggestion effect may be executed in connection with the end of the second time saving state [for example, as shown in FIG. 25 (w'), when the symbol variation display at which the play time ends ends. The character of the lord is displayed along with the characters "opportunity", suggesting that the setting is 4 or higher],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to tackle the game with the goal of a second time saving state, even if it fits a little.

Here, when the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the start of the second time saving state, only the second time saving state ends. Or, if the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit after the start of the second time saving state, the state other than the second time saving state will be displayed. You may end. In addition, even if the second time saving state is always terminated when the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit after the second time saving state is started. It is good, and if the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit after the second time saving state is started, the second time saving state may not end. There may be.

In addition, even if the second time saving state ends, if only the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the second time saving state is started. Well, after the second time saving state is started, the second time saving state ends when a result other than the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit. You may.

In addition, only the setting suggestion effect may be executed in connection with the end of the second time saving state, or an effect other than the setting suggestion effect in connection with the end of the second time saving state. May also be executed. In addition, the setting suggestion effect may always be executed in connection with the end of the second time saving state, or the setting suggestion effect may not be executed in connection with the end of the second time saving state. May be good.

In addition, the setting suggestion effect may be executed only in relation to the end of the second time saving state, or the setting suggestion effect may be executed in relation to other than the end of the second time saving state. May be executed. In addition, the setting suggestion effect may be executed in connection with the end of only the second time reduction state, or the setting suggestion in connection with the end of the game state other than the second time reduction state. The production may be performed.

In addition, "The setting suggestion effect may be executed when the jackpot game ends [For example, as shown in FIG. 29, the setting suggestion is performed by displaying the character at the end of the first jackpot game. etc],
The setting suggestion effect is more when the jackpot game started after the second time saving state ends than when the jackpot game started before the second time saving state starts. Easy to execute [For example, as shown in FIG. 15A, the setting suggestion effect that may be executed at the time of the first big hit end effect is more likely to be executed after the play time starts than before the play time starts]. ,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to maintain the motivation to continue the game until a big hit even after the end of the second time saving state because the setting suggestion effect is easily produced.

Further, according to this game table, the opportunity for suggesting the setting may be easily understood and set as the goal of the player's game.

Here, only the setting suggestion effect may be executed when the big hit game ends, or an effect other than the setting suggestion effect may be executed when the big hit game ends. Further, the setting suggestion effect may always be executed when the jackpot game ends, or the setting suggestion effect may not be executed when the jackpot game ends.

Further, the setting suggestion effect may be executed only when the big hit game is finished, or the setting suggestion effect may be executed only when the big hit game is not finished. Further, the setting suggestion effect may be executed when only the big hit game is completed, or the setting suggestion effect may be executed when the game other than the big hit game is completed.

Also, when the jackpot game started after the second time saving state ends, only the setting suggestion effect is completed than when the jackpot game started before the second time saving state ends. It may be easier to execute, and when the jackpot game started after the second time saving state ends than when the jackpot game started before the second time saving state starts However, it may be easy to execute an effect other than the setting suggestion effect. In addition, the setting suggestion effect is always performed when the jackpot game started after the second time saving state ends than when the jackpot game started before the second time saving state ends. It may be easier to execute, and when the jackpot game started after the second time saving state ends than when the jackpot game started before the second time saving state starts However, the setting suggestion effect may not be executed.

Also, the setting suggestion effect is better only when the jackpot game started after the second time saving state ends than when the jackpot game started before the second time saving state ends. It may be easier to execute, except when the jackpot game started after the second time saving state ends than when the jackpot game started before the second time saving state starts. It may be easier to execute the setting suggestion effect at the time. In addition, the setting suggestion effect is more when the jackpot game started after only the second time saving state ends than when the jackpot game started before the second time saving state starts. It may be easier to execute, and the jackpot game started after the game state other than the second time saving state ends than when the jackpot game started before the second time saving state starts ends. It may be easier to execute the setting suggestion effect when this is done.

In addition, the setting suggestion effect is more when the jackpot game started after the second time saving state ends than when the jackpot game started before the second time saving state ends. It may be easier to execute, and the jackpot game started after the second time saving state has ended than when the jackpot game started before the second time saving state has ended has ended. It may be easier to execute the setting suggestion effect at the time. In addition, the setting suggestion effect is more when the jackpot game started after the second time saving state ends than when the jackpot game started before only the second time saving state ends. It may be easier to execute, and the jackpot game started after the second time saving state ends than when the jackpot game started before the game state other than the second time saving state starts ends. It may be easier to execute the setting suggestion effect when this is done.

Further, "when the probability setting change operation is accepted, the initial state is set when the power is restored [for example, as shown in steps S113 to S119 of FIG. 7, the initialization process is executed when the setting is changed. Will be, etc.],
Even when the power is restored to the initial state, the number of times of fitting before the power is cut off can be maintained.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, for example, if the number of fits on the previous day is maintained, the number of times the symbol variation is displayed until the transition to the second time saving state on the day is shortened, so that a little service is given to the player. May be possible.

In addition, a low setting may be detected depending on the fit or the transition status to the second time saving state, but shortening the number of times of symbol variation display does not mean that the setting is deferred, so the player has expectations. It may be possible to make it.

In addition, "One of the plurality of productions is the second production,
The second effect includes at least information on the second time saving state [for example, information on the number of times the symbol variation is displayed until the play time, information on the number of start times between special prizes (TS), etc. shown in FIG. 18A]. It is a suggestive production,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, the second effect may suggest only the information regarding the second time saving state, or may suggest information other than the information regarding the second time saving state. Further, the second effect may always suggest information on the second time saving state, or may not suggest information on the second time saving state.

In addition, "the second effect is an effect that includes at least information suggesting the number of fits [for example, information on the number of start times between special prizes (TS) shown in FIG. 18 (a)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the second effect may include only information suggesting the number of fits, or may include information other than the information suggesting the number of fits. In addition, the second effect may always include information suggesting the number of fits, or may not include information suggesting the number of fits.

Further, "The second effect is information that at least suggests the number of times of variation display of the special symbol until the number of times of fitting becomes the first number of times [for example, up to the play time shown in FIG. 18A. Information including the number of times the symbol changes are displayed]
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the second effect may include only information suggesting the number of times of variable display of the special symbol until the number of fits becomes the first number, or the number of fits becomes the first number. It may include information other than the information suggesting the number of times of variable display of the special symbol up to. In addition, the second effect may always include information suggesting the number of times of variable display of the special symbol until the number of fits becomes the first number, and the number of fits becomes the first number. It may not include information suggesting the number of times of variable display of the special symbol up to.

In addition, "The second effect is an effect that can be performed in one of a plurality of aspects.
One of the plurality of aspects is the first aspect [for example, as shown in FIG. 22 (e), the information regarding the number of times the symbol variation is displayed until the play time is not clearly displayed, etc.]. can be,
One aspect of the plurality of aspects is the second aspect [for example, as shown in FIG. 22 (m), an aspect in which information regarding the number of times the symbol variation is displayed up to the play time is clearly displayed]. can be,
The first aspect and the second aspect are different aspects.
After the power is turned on, the second effect may be executed in the first aspect [for example, as shown in FIG. 21D, after the power is turned on, the symbol variation display until the play time is displayed. Information about the number of times is displayed in an unclear manner, etc.],
When the second condition [for example, as shown in FIG. 22, the out-of-order SP reach is executed, etc.] is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, the second The effect changes from the first aspect to the second aspect [for example, as shown in FIGS. 22 (g) to 22 (m), the information regarding the number of times the symbol variation is displayed until the play time is unclear. When the out-of-SP reach is executed in the state shown in the mode, the information regarding the number of times the symbol variation is displayed until the subsequent play time is displayed in a clear mode, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the second effect may be feasible only in one of a plurality of modes, or may be feasible in a mode other than one of the plurality of modes. You may. Further, the second effect may be always executed in one of a plurality of aspects, or may not be executed in one of a plurality of aspects. ..

Further, only the second effect may be executed in the first aspect after the power is turned on, or the notification other than the second effect in the first aspect after the power is turned on. May be executed. Further, the second effect may always be executed in the first aspect after the power is turned on, or the second effect may not be executed in the first aspect after the power is turned on. May be good.

Further, the second effect may be executed only in the first aspect after the power is turned on, or the second effect may be executed in an aspect other than the first aspect after the power is turned on. May be executed. Further, the second effect may be executed in the first mode only after the power is turned on, and the second effect may be executed in the first mode even after the power is turned on. May be done.

Further, if the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, the second effect may be changed only from the first aspect to the second aspect. If the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, the second effect may be changed from the first aspect to an aspect other than the second aspect. Further, if the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, the second effect may always change from the first aspect to the second aspect. If the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, the second effect may not change from the first aspect to the second aspect.

Further, if the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, only the second effect may change from the first aspect to the second aspect. If the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, the effects other than the second effect may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. Further, if only the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, the second effect may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. If a condition other than the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, the second effect may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect.

Further, if the second condition is satisfied only after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, the second effect may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. If the second condition is satisfied except after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, the second effect may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. If the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started only in the first aspect, the second effect may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect, or the first aspect may be changed. If the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in an aspect other than the above aspect, the second effect may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect.

In addition, "the game control means sets a first time saving state [for example, an electric support state (for example, a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state; a time saving state) that shifts after the big hit game for a normal big hit is completed]. It ’s a startable way,
The first time saving state is a time saving state that may be started when the jackpot game ends and shifts to the low probability state.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the game control means may be capable of starting only the first time saving state, or may be capable of starting a state other than the first time saving state. Further, the game control means may always start the first time saving state, or may not start the first time saving state.

Further, the first time saving state may be started when the big hit game ends and shifts only to the low probability state, or the big hit game ends and shifts to a state other than the low probability state. Then, it may be started. Further, the first time saving state may be always started when the big hit game ends and shifts to the low probability state, or may not start when the big hit game ends and shifts to the low probability state. It may be a thing.

Further, "the game control means can start a third time saving state [for example, an electric support state in which a time saving symbol is suddenly displayed and transitions (special figure low probability normal figure high probability state; c time saving state), etc.]. Means,
The third time saving state is a time saving state that may be started when a time saving symbol [for example, "special symbol E" or the like] is displayed as a result of the variable display of the special symbol.
The time saving symbol is a symbol different from the jackpot symbol,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the game control means may be capable of starting only the third time saving state, or may be capable of starting a state other than the third time saving state. Further, the game control means may always start the third time saving state, or may not start the third time saving state.

Further, the third time saving state may be started only when the time saving symbol is displayed as a result of the variation display of the special symbol, or the time saving symbol may be started as a result of the variation display of the special symbol. It may be started in a case other than the case where is displayed. Further, the third time saving state may be started whenever the time saving symbol is displayed as a result of the variation display of the special symbol, or the time saving symbol is displayed as the result of the variation display of the special symbol. It may not be started.

Further, "The game table is a pachinko machine [for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description,
"Symbol display means capable of executing variable display of special symbols [for example, first special symbol display device 212, second special symbol display device 214, etc.] and
A game control means that can control the game state [for example, CPU 304 of the main control unit 300] and
An effect means capable of executing a plurality of effects [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, etc.] and
It is a game table equipped with
The game control means is a means capable of controlling a low probability state [for example, a special figure low probability state, etc.] and a high probability state [for example, a special figure high probability state, etc.].
The high-probability state is a state in which the probability that the result of the variation display of the special symbol becomes a big hit is higher than that of the low-probability state.
The game control means can start a first time saving state [for example, an electric support state (for example, a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state; a time saving state) that shifts after the big hit game for a normal big hit is completed]. Means,
The game control means is a means capable of starting a second time saving state [for example, play time (b time saving state), etc.].
The first time saving state is a time saving state that may be started when the jackpot game ends and shifts to the low probability state.
When the result of the variation display of the special symbol that is out of the fourth number of times [for example, 100 times, etc.] is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit after the first time saving state is started, the first time saving state is displayed. The state is over,
The second time-saving state is the number of times that the result of the variation display of the special symbol that is out of the way is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the big hit game is completed and the state shifts to the low probability state (hereinafter, "fitting"). When the number of times (referred to as "number of times") becomes the first number of times [for example, 750 times, etc.], it is a time saving state that may shift.
When the result of the variation display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times [for example, 950 times] is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit after the second time saving state is started, the second time saving state is displayed. The state is over,
From the end of the second time saving state to the big hit, the second time saving state is not started.
The effect executed in the first time saving state and the effect executed in the second time saving state are different [for example, as shown in FIG. 23C, in the a time saving state, at the lower right of the display screen. The character of the lord is displayed, but as shown in FIG. 25 (s), in the b time saving state, the character of the bancho is displayed at the lower right of the display screen, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the production means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a characteristic in the production means.

Further, according to this game table, it may be possible to give a variation to the production related to the time saving state.

Here, the symbol display means may be capable of executing only the variable display of the special symbol, or may be capable of executing a display other than the variable display of the special symbol. Further, the symbol display means may always execute the variable display of the special symbol, or may not execute the variable display of the special symbol.

Further, the game control means may be capable of controlling only the game state, or may be capable of controlling a state other than the game state. Further, the game control means may always control the game state, or may not control the game state.

Further, the effect means may be one that can execute only a plurality of effects, or may be capable of executing a method other than the plurality of effects. Further, the effect means may be one that always executes a plurality of effects, or may not execute a plurality of effects.

Further, the game control means may be able to control only the low-probability state and the high-probability state, or may be able to control the state other than the low-probability state and the high-probability state. Further, the game control means may be one that always controls the low-probability state and the high-probability state, or may not be controlled to the low-probability state and the high-probability state.

Further, the high-probability state may be a state in which only the probability that the result of the variation display of the special symbol becomes a big hit is higher than that in the low-probability state, or the result of the variation display of the special symbol is a big hit than the low-probability state. It may be in a state where the probability other than the probability of becoming is high. In addition, the high-probability state may be a state in which the probability that the result of the variation display of the special symbol will be a big hit is always higher than that in the low-probability state, and the result of the variation display of the special symbol is a big hit than the low-probability state. It may not be in a state where the probability of becoming is high.

Further, the game control means may be capable of starting only the first time saving state, or may be capable of starting a state other than the first time saving state. Further, the game control means may always start the first time saving state, or may not start the first time saving state.

Further, the game control means may be capable of starting only the second time saving state, or may be capable of starting a state other than the second time saving state. Further, the game control means may always start the second time saving state, or may not start the second time saving state.

Further, the first time saving state may be started when the big hit game ends and shifts only to the low probability state, or the big hit game ends and shifts to a state other than the low probability state. Then, it may be started. Further, the first time saving state may be always started when the big hit game ends and shifts to the low probability state, or may not start when the big hit game ends and shifts to the low probability state. It may be a thing.

In addition, even if only the first time saving state ends when the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the fourth number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the first time saving state is started. Well, after the first time saving state is started, the state other than the first time saving state ends when the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the fourth number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit. You may. In addition, even if the first time saving state is always terminated when the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the fourth number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit after the first time saving state is started. It is good, and if the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the fourth number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit after the first time saving state is started, the first time saving state may not end. There may be.

In addition, even if the first time saving state ends, if only the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the fourth number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the first time saving state is started. Well, after the first time saving state is started, the first time saving state ends when a result other than the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the fourth number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit. You may.

In addition, in the second time saving state, only the number of times that the result of the variation display of the special symbol that is out of the way is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the big hit game ends and shifts to the low probability state is the first. It may shift when the number of times is reached, or after the jackpot game ends and shifts to the low probability state, the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of order is continuously displayed without becoming a jackpot. It may shift when the number of times other than the number of times becomes the first number. In addition, after the big hit game ends and shifts to the low probability state, the number of times that the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the way is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit is always changed to the first number. It may be present, or when the number of times that the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the way is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit after the big hit game ends and shifts to the low probability state becomes the first number, it shifts. It may not be the one that may not be.

Here, when the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the start of the second time saving state, only the second time saving state ends. Or, if the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit after the start of the second time saving state, the state other than the second time saving state will be displayed. You may end. In addition, even if the second time saving state is always terminated when the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit after the second time saving state is started. It is good, and if the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit after the second time saving state is started, the second time saving state may not end. There may be.

In addition, even if the second time saving state ends, if only the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the second time saving state is started. Well, after the second time saving state is started, the second time saving state ends when a result other than the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit. You may.

Further, it is not necessary to start only the second time saving state from the end of the second time saving state to the big hit, and from the end of the second time saving state to the big hit. It is not necessary that a state other than the second time saving state is started. Further, it is not always necessary to start the second time saving state from the end of the second time saving state to the big hit, and from the end of the second time saving state to the big hit. A second time saving state may be initiated.

Further, it is not necessary to start the second time saving state only from the end of the second time saving state to the big hit, and other than from the end of the second time saving state to the big hit. Also, the second time saving state does not have to be started.

It should be noted that a part of the effect executed in the first time saving state and a part of the effect executed in the second time saving state may be different, or all of them may be different. Further, the effect executed in the first time saving state and the effect executed in the second time saving state may be the same.

In addition, "one of the plurality of effects is the first suggestive effect [for example, an effect including information on the remaining number of times of the symbol variation display until the end of the time saving state shown in FIG. 23 (c), etc." ], And
One of the plurality of effects is a second suggestive effect [for example, an effect including information on the number of times the symbol changes are displayed up to the play time shown in FIG. 23 (c), and information on the number of start times between special prizes (TS). Etc.]
One of the plurality of effects is a third suggestive effect [for example, an effect including information on the number of times the symbol variation is displayed until the play time shown in FIG. 25 (c) ends].
The first suggestion effect is an effect of suggesting the number of times of variable display of the special symbol in the first time saving state.
The second suggestion effect is an effect of suggesting the number of times of fitting.
The third suggestion effect is an effect of suggesting the number of times of variable display of the special symbol in the second time saving state.
In the first time saving state, the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect are executed [for example, as shown in FIG. 23 (c), in the a time saving state, the symbol changes until the a time saving ends. An effect including information on the number of display times, an information on the number of times the symbol changes are displayed until the play time, and an effect including information on the number of start times between special prizes (TS) are performed],
In the second time saving state, the third suggestion effect is executed [for example, as shown in FIG. 25C, in the b time saving state, information on the number of times the symbol variation is displayed until the play time ends is included. Directing, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the first suggestion effect may only suggest the number of times the special symbol is fluctuated in the first time-saving state, or may be related to the number of times the special symbol is fluctuated in the first time-saving state. Suggestions other than suggestions may also be made. Further, the first suggestion effect may always give a suggestion regarding the number of times the special symbol is varied and displayed in the first time-saving state, or a suggestion regarding the number of times the special symbol is changed and displayed in the first time-saving state. May not be performed.

Further, the second suggestion effect may be to give only a suggestion regarding the number of fits, or may be to give a suggestion other than the suggestion regarding the number of fits. In addition, the second suggestion effect may always give a suggestion regarding the number of fits, or may not give a suggestion regarding the number of fits.

Further, the third suggestion effect may only suggest the number of times the special symbol is varied and displayed in the second time-saving state, or may be the suggestion regarding the number of times the special symbol is changed and displayed in the second time-saving state. Other suggestions may also be made. Further, the third suggestion effect may always give a suggestion regarding the number of times of variable display of the special symbol in the second time-saving state, or a suggestion regarding the number of times of variable display of the special symbol in the second time-saving state. May not be performed.

Further, only the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect may be executed in the first time-saving state, and the effects other than the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect are also executed in the first time-saving state. May be done. Further, the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect may always be executed in the first time saving state, and the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect may not be executed in the first time saving state. There may be.

Further, the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect may be executed only in the first time saving state, and the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect may be executed even in the gaming state other than the first time saving state. May be executed.

Moreover, only the third suggestion effect may be executed in the second time saving state, or the effect other than the third suggestion effect may be executed in the second time saving state. Further, the third suggestion effect may always be executed in the second time saving state, or the third suggestion effect may not be executed in the second time saving state.

Further, the third suggestion effect may be executed only in the second time reduction state, or the third suggestion effect may be executed in a gaming state other than the second time reduction state.

Further, "one of the plurality of effects is a second suggestive effect [for example, information on the number of start times (TS) between special prizes shown in FIG. 23 (c)].
The second suggestion effect is an effect of suggesting the number of times of fitting.
The second suggestion effect may be executed in a normal game state [for example, a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, etc.] [For example, in the normal game state, the number of start times between special prizes shown in FIG. 23 (c). A production that includes information about (TS) is being performed, etc.],
The second suggestion effect is executed in the normal gaming state shifted after the first time saving state is completed.
The second suggestion effect is not executed in the normal gaming state shifted after the second time saving state ends.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the second suggestion effect may give only a suggestion regarding the number of fits, or may also give a suggestion other than the suggestion regarding the number of fits. In addition, the second suggestion effect may always give a suggestion regarding the number of fits, or may not give a suggestion regarding the number of fits.

In addition, only the second suggestion effect may be executed in the normal game state, or an effect other than the second suggestion effect may be executed in the normal game state. Further, the second suggestion effect may always be executed in the normal game state, or the second suggestion effect may not be executed in the normal game state.

Further, the second suggestion effect may be executed only in the normal game state, or the second suggestion effect may be executed in a game state other than the normal game state.

Further, only the second suggestion effect may be executed in the normal gaming state shifted after the first time saving state ends, or the second suggestion in the normal gaming state shifted after the first time saving state ends. A production other than the production may be executed. Further, the second suggestion effect may always be executed in the normal gaming state shifted after the first time saving state ends, or the second suggestion in the normal gaming state shifted after the first time saving state ends. The effect may not be executed.

Further, the second suggestion effect may be executed only in the normal gaming state shifted after the first time saving state ends, or in a gaming state other than the normal gaming state shifted after the first time saving state ends. Also, the second suggestive effect may be executed. Further, the second suggestion effect may be executed in the normal gaming state shifted only after the first time saving state ends, or in the normal gaming state shifted after the first time saving state ends. The second suggestive effect may be executed.

Further, only the second suggestion effect does not have to be executed in the normal game state shifted after the second time saving state ends, and the second suggestion effect does not have to be executed in the normal game state shifted after the second time saving state ends. It is not necessary to execute an effect other than the suggestion effect. Further, the second suggestion effect does not necessarily have to be executed in the normal game state shifted after the end of the second time saving state, and the second suggestion effect is not always executed in the normal game state shifted after the end of the second time saving state. Suggestion effects may be performed.

Further, the second suggestion effect may not be executed only in the normal gaming state shifted after the second time saving state ends, and the gaming state other than the normal gaming state shifted after the second time saving state ends. However, the second suggestive effect does not have to be executed. Further, the second suggestion effect does not have to be executed in the normal gaming state shifted only after the end of the second time saving state, and in the normal gaming state shifted after the transition other than after the end of the second time saving state. The second suggestion effect does not have to be executed.

In addition, "one of the plurality of effects includes the display of the fifth effect [for example, the total number of prize balls acquired in the series of advantageous states shown in FIG. 23 (h) and the number of times the jackpot has occurred. Directing, etc.]
The fifth effect is an effect that includes at least a display indicating the cumulative number of acquired balls acquired in a series of advantageous states from the start of a big hit game to the end of the first time-saving game.
The fifth effect is executed in relation to the fourth number of times [for example, 100 times, etc.] of the variation display of the special symbol, which is shifted in the first time saving state [for example, the figure. As shown in 23 (g) to FIG. 23 (h), when the time saving state ends, the production including the display of the total number of prize balls acquired in the series of advantageous states and the number of times the jackpot occurs is started, etc.] ,
The fifth effect is not executed in relation to the second number of times [for example, 950 times, etc.] of the variation display of the special symbol, which is shifted in the second time saving state.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, even if the fifth effect is an effect that includes only a display showing the cumulative number of acquired balls acquired in a series of advantageous states from the start of a certain jackpot game to the end of the first time-saving game. Alternatively, the effect may include a display other than the display indicating the cumulative number of acquired balls acquired in a series of advantageous states from the start of a certain jackpot game to the end of the first time-saving game. Further, the fifth effect may be an effect that always includes a display showing the cumulative number of acquired balls acquired in a series of advantageous states from the start of a certain jackpot game to the end of the first time-saving game. However, the effect may not include a display indicating the cumulative number of acquired balls acquired in a series of advantageous states from the start of a certain jackpot game to the end of the first time-saving game.

Further, the fifth effect may include at least a display showing the cumulative number of acquired balls acquired only in a series of advantageous states from the start of a certain jackpot game to the end of the first time-saving game. Alternatively, the effect may include at least a display indicating the cumulative number of acquired balls acquired even in a state other than a series of advantageous states from the start of a certain jackpot game to the end of the first time-saving game.

In addition, only the fifth effect may be executed in relation to the number of times of variation display of the special symbol, which is shifted in the first time saving state, becomes the fourth number, or in the first time saving state. An effect other than the fifth effect may be executed in connection with the fact that the number of times of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of alignment becomes the fourth number. In addition, the fifth effect may always be executed in relation to the number of times of variation display of the special symbol, which is shifted in the first time saving state, becomes the fourth number, or in the first time saving state. In some cases, the fifth effect may not be executed in connection with the fact that the number of times of variation display of the special symbol that is out of alignment becomes the fourth number.

In addition, the fifth effect may be executed only in relation to the number of times of variation display of the special symbol, which is shifted in the first time saving state, becomes the fourth number, or in the first time saving state. A fifth effect may be performed in relation to a matter other than the number of times the variation display of the special symbol that is out of alignment has become the fourth number. In addition, the fifth effect may be executed in relation to the fact that only the number of fluctuations of the special symbol, which is shifted in the first time saving state, becomes the fourth number, or in the first time saving state. A fifth effect may be executed in relation to the fact that the number of times other than the number of times of variable display of the special symbol that is out of place becomes the fourth number of times.

In addition, the fifth effect may be executed in relation to the number of times of variation display of the special symbol, which is lost only in the first time saving state, becomes the fourth number, and other than the first time saving state. The fifth effect may be executed in relation to the number of times of the variation display of the special symbol, which is shifted in the game state of, becomes the fourth number.

In addition, it is not necessary to execute only the fifth effect in relation to the number of times of variation display of the special symbol, which is shifted in the second time saving state, becomes the second number, and the second time saving state. Then, it is not necessary to execute an effect other than the fifth effect in relation to the fact that the number of times of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of alignment becomes the second number. In addition, the fifth effect does not necessarily have to be executed in relation to the number of times of variation display of the special symbol, which is shifted in the second time saving state, becomes the second number, and the second time saving state. In some cases, the fifth effect may be executed in connection with the fact that the number of times of the variation display of the special symbol that is out of alignment becomes the second number.

In addition, the fifth effect does not have to be executed only in relation to the number of times the variation display of the special symbol, which is shifted in the second time saving state, becomes the second number, and the second time saving state. Then, it is not necessary to execute the fifth effect in relation to the number of times of the variation display of the special symbol that is out of alignment is the second number. In addition, it is not necessary to execute the fifth effect in relation to the fact that only the number of times of the variation display of the special symbol, which is shifted in the second time saving state, becomes the second number of times, and the second time saving state Then, it is not necessary to execute the fifth effect in relation to the second number of times other than the number of times of variable display of the special symbol that is out of alignment.

In addition, it is not necessary to execute the fifth effect in relation to the number of times of variation display of the special symbol that is missed only in the second time saving state becomes the second number, and the second time saving state It is not necessary to execute the fifth effect in relation to the number of times the variation display of the special symbol, which is shifted in the game state other than the above, becomes the second number.

In addition, "In the first time saving state, the first production mode [for example, the production mode in which the character of the lord is sprinting and defeating the panda, as shown in FIGS. 23 (b) to 23 (h), etc." ] To execute the production,
In the second time saving state, the effect is executed in the second effect mode [for example, the effect mode in which the character of the Bancho appears, as shown in FIGS. 25 (c) to 25 (w)].
The production mode in the first production mode and the production mode in the second production mode are different production modes.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to increase the variation in the time saving state by changing the appearance.

Here, in the first time-saving state, the effect may be executed only in the first effect mode, or in the first time-saving state, the effect may be executed in an effect mode other than the first effect mode. Further, in the first time saving state, the effect may always be executed in the first effect mode, or in the first time saving state, the effect may not be executed in the first effect mode.

Further, the effect may be executed in the first effect mode only in the first time-saving state, or the effect may be executed in the first effect mode in a gaming state other than the first time-saving state.

Further, in the second time saving state, the effect may be executed only in the second effect mode, and in the second time saving state, the effect may be executed in an effect mode other than the second effect mode. Further, in the second time saving state, the effect may always be executed in the second effect mode, and in the second time saving state, the effect may not be executed in the second effect mode.

Further, the effect may be executed in the second effect mode only in the second time reduction state, or the effect may be executed in the second effect mode in a game state other than the second time reduction state.

In addition, "a fluctuation time determining means capable of determining one fluctuation time from a plurality of fluctuation times [for example, CPU 304 of the main control unit 300, etc.] and
A plurality of fluctuation time tables [for example, a fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 17] and
With
The fluctuation time determining means is the fifth number of times [for example, 10 times] after the start of the normal gaming state [for example, the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, etc.] that has shifted after the first time saving state is completed. Etc.] until the variation display of the special symbol is executed, from the first variation time table [for example, the table of “normal time (revival mode)” shown in FIG. 17] among the plurality of variation time tables. Select the fluctuation time of
The fluctuation time determining means is the second of the plurality of fluctuation time tables in the normal gaming state [for example, the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, etc.] that has shifted after the end of the second time saving state. Select one fluctuation time from the fluctuation time table [for example, the "normal time" table shown in FIG. 17].
The first fluctuation time table is a fluctuation time table that is not selected when the power is turned on.
The first fluctuation time table and the second fluctuation time table are different fluctuation time tables.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the fluctuation time determining means may be able to determine only one fluctuation time from a plurality of fluctuation times, or can determine a fluctuation time other than one fluctuation time from a plurality of fluctuation times. It may be anything. Further, the fluctuation time determining means may always determine one fluctuation time from a plurality of fluctuation times, or may not determine one fluctuation time from a plurality of fluctuation times. There may be.

Further, the fluctuation time determining means is among a plurality of fluctuation time tables from the start of the normal gaming state shifted after the end of the first time reduction state to the execution of the fluctuation display of the fifth special symbol. Only one variation time may be selected from the first variation time table of, or the variation display of the fifth number of special symbols after the start of the normal gaming state that has shifted after the end of the first time saving state May be selected from the first fluctuation time table among the plurality of fluctuation time tables until the fluctuation time other than one fluctuation time is executed. Further, the fluctuation time determining means is among a plurality of fluctuation time tables from the start of the normal gaming state shifted after the end of the first time reduction state to the execution of the fluctuation display of the fifth special symbol. You may always select one variation time from the first variation time table of, or the variation display of the fifth number of special symbols after the start of the normal gaming state that has shifted after the end of the first time saving state. May not be selected from the first variation time table of the plurality of variation time tables until is executed.

Further, the fluctuation time determining means is among a plurality of fluctuation time tables from the start of the normal gaming state shifted after the end of the first time reduction state to the execution of the fluctuation display of the fifth special symbol. One variation time may be selected only from the first variation time table of, or the variation display of the fifth number of special symbols after the start of the normal gaming state that has shifted after the end of the first time saving state. May be selected from a table other than the first variable time table among the plurality of variable time tables until is executed.

Further, the variable time determining means is used for a plurality of variable time tables only from the start of the normal gaming state shifted after the end of the first time saving state to the execution of the variable display of the fifth special symbol. One fluctuation time may be selected from the first fluctuation time table, or the fluctuation display of the fifth number of special symbols after the start of the normal gaming state shifted after the first time reduction state ends. One fluctuation time may be selected from the first fluctuation time table among the plurality of fluctuation time tables until the display other than is executed.

Further, the variable time determining means is used for a plurality of variable time tables from the start of the transitioned normal gaming state after the end of the first time saving state until the fifth number of special symbol variation displays are executed. One variable time may be selected from the first variable time table, or the fifth special number of times since the game state other than the normal game state shifted after the first time saving state ends is started. One fluctuation time may be selected from the first fluctuation time table among the plurality of fluctuation time tables until the fluctuation display of the symbol is executed.

Further, the variable time determining means is used for a plurality of variable time tables from the start of the normal gaming state, which has been shifted only after the first time saving state is completed, to the execution of the variable display of the fifth special symbol. One variable time may be selected from the first variable time table, or the fifth special number of times since the transitioned normal gaming state was started after the gaming state other than the first time saving state was completed. One fluctuation time may be selected from the first fluctuation time table among the plurality of fluctuation time tables until the fluctuation display of the symbol is executed.

Further, the fluctuation time determining means may select only one fluctuation time from the second fluctuation time table among the plurality of fluctuation time tables in the normal gaming state shifted after the second time reduction state ends. Then, in the normal gaming state shifted after the end of the second time saving state, a fluctuation time other than one fluctuation time may be selected from the second fluctuation time table among the plurality of fluctuation time tables. Further, the fluctuation time determining means may always select one fluctuation time from the second fluctuation time table among the plurality of fluctuation time tables in the normal gaming state shifted after the second time reduction state ends. However, in the normal gaming state shifted after the end of the second time saving state, one fluctuation time may not be selected from the second fluctuation time table among the plurality of fluctuation time tables.

Further, the fluctuation time determining means may select one fluctuation time from only the second fluctuation time table among the plurality of fluctuation time tables in the normal gaming state shifted after the second time reduction state ends. Then, in the normal gaming state shifted after the end of the second time saving state, one fluctuation time may be selected from the tables other than the second fluctuation time table among the plurality of fluctuation time tables.

Further, the fluctuation time determining means may select one fluctuation time from the second fluctuation time table among the plurality of fluctuation time tables only in the normal gaming state shifted after the second time reduction state ends. Then, even in the gaming state other than the normal gaming state which is shifted after the end of the second time saving state, one fluctuation time may be selected from the second fluctuation time table among the plurality of fluctuation time tables.

Further, the fluctuation time determining means may select one fluctuation time from the second fluctuation time table among the plurality of fluctuation time tables in the normal gaming state in which the transition is made only after the second time reduction state is completed. Then, in the normal gaming state shifted after the gaming state other than the second time saving state is completed, one fluctuation time may be selected from the second fluctuation time table among the plurality of fluctuation time tables.

Further, the first fluctuation time table may be a fluctuation time table that is not selected only when the power is turned on, or may be a fluctuation time table that is not selected only when the power is turned on. Further, the first fluctuation time table may be a fluctuation time table that is not always selected when the power is turned on, or may be a fluctuation time table that may be selected when the power is turned on.

The first fluctuation time table and the second fluctuation time table may be partially different fluctuation time tables or all may be different fluctuation time tables.

In addition, "One of the plurality of productions is the second production,
The second effect includes at least information on the second time saving state [for example, information on the number of times the symbol variation is displayed until the play time, information on the number of start times between special prizes (TS), etc. shown in FIG. 18A]. It is a suggestive production,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the second effect may suggest only the information regarding the second time saving state, or may suggest information other than the information regarding the second time saving state. Further, the second effect may always suggest information on the second time saving state, or may not suggest information on the second time saving state.

In addition, "the second effect is an effect that includes at least information suggesting the number of fits [for example, information on the number of start times between special prizes (TS), as shown in FIG. 18 (a)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the second effect may include only information suggesting the number of fits, or may include information other than the information suggesting the number of fits. In addition, the second effect may always include information suggesting the number of fits, or may not include information suggesting the number of fits.

Further, "The second effect is information that at least suggests the number of times of variation display of the special symbol until the number of times of fitting becomes the first number of times [for example, as shown in FIG. 18A, play time. Information including the number of times the symbol changes are displayed up to
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the second effect may include only information suggesting the number of times of variable display of the special symbol until the number of fits becomes the first number, or the number of fits becomes the first number. It may include information other than the information suggesting the number of times of variable display of the special symbol up to. In addition, the second effect may always include information suggesting the number of times of variable display of the special symbol until the number of fits becomes the first number, and the number of fits becomes the first number. It may not include information suggesting the number of times of variable display of the special symbol up to.

In addition, "The second effect is an effect that can be performed in one of a plurality of aspects.
One of the plurality of aspects is the first aspect [for example, as shown in FIG. 22 (e), the information regarding the number of times the symbol variation is displayed until the play time is not clearly displayed, etc.]. can be,
One aspect of the plurality of aspects is the second aspect [for example, as shown in FIG. 22 (m), an aspect in which information regarding the number of times the symbol variation is displayed up to the play time is clearly displayed]. can be,
The first aspect and the second aspect are different aspects.
After the power is turned on, the second effect may be executed in the first aspect [for example, as shown in FIG. 21D, after the power is turned on, the symbol variation display until the play time is displayed. Information about the number of times is displayed in an unclear manner, etc.],
When the second condition [for example, as shown in FIG. 22, the out-of-order SP reach is executed, etc.] is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, the second The effect changes from the first aspect to the second aspect [for example, as shown in FIGS. 22 (g) to 22 (m), the information regarding the number of times the symbol variation is displayed until the play time is unclear. When the out-of-SP reach is executed in the state shown in the mode, the information regarding the number of times the symbol variation is displayed until the subsequent play time is displayed in a clear mode, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the second effect may be feasible only in one of a plurality of modes, or may be feasible in a mode other than one of the plurality of modes. You may. Further, the second effect may be always executed in one of a plurality of aspects, or may not be executed in one of a plurality of aspects. ..

Further, only the second effect may be executed in the first aspect after the power is turned on, or the notification other than the second effect in the first aspect after the power is turned on. May be executed. Further, the second effect may always be executed in the first aspect after the power is turned on, or the second effect may not be executed in the first aspect after the power is turned on. May be good.

Further, the second effect may be executed only in the first aspect after the power is turned on, or the second effect may be executed in an aspect other than the first aspect after the power is turned on. May be executed. Further, the second effect may be executed in the first mode only after the power is turned on, and the second effect may be executed in the first mode even after the power is turned on. May be done.

Further, if the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, the second effect may be changed only from the first aspect to the second aspect. If the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, the second effect may be changed from the first aspect to an aspect other than the second aspect. Further, if the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, the second effect may always change from the first aspect to the second aspect. If the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, the second effect may not change from the first aspect to the second aspect.

Further, if the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, only the second effect may change from the first aspect to the second aspect. If the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, the effects other than the second effect may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. Further, if only the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, the second effect may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. If a condition other than the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, the second effect may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect.

Further, if the second condition is satisfied only after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, the second effect may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. If the second condition is satisfied except after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, the second effect may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. If the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started only in the first aspect, the second effect may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect, or the first aspect may be changed. If the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in an aspect other than the above aspect, the second effect may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect.

Further, "the game control means can start a third time saving state [for example, an electric support state in which a time saving symbol is suddenly displayed and transitions (special figure low probability normal figure high probability state; c time saving state), etc.]. Means,
The third time saving state is a time saving state that may be started when a time saving symbol [for example, "special symbol E" or the like] is displayed as a result of the variable display of the special symbol.
The time saving symbol is a symbol different from the jackpot symbol,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the game control means may be capable of starting only the third time saving state, or may be capable of starting a state other than the third time saving state. Further, the game control means may always start the third time saving state, or may not start the third time saving state.

Further, the third time saving state may be started only when the time saving symbol is displayed as a result of the variation display of the special symbol, or the time saving symbol may be started as a result of the variation display of the special symbol. It may be started in a case other than the case where is displayed. Further, the third time saving state may be started whenever the time saving symbol is displayed as a result of the variation display of the special symbol, or the time saving symbol is displayed as the result of the variation display of the special symbol. It may not be started.

Further, "The game table is a pachinko machine [for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description,
"Symbol display means capable of executing variable display of special symbols [for example, first special symbol display device 212, second special symbol display device 214, etc.] and
A game control means that can control the game state [for example, CPU 304 of the main control unit 300] and
A fluctuation time determining means capable of determining one fluctuation time from a plurality of fluctuation times [for example, CPU 304 of the main control unit 300] and
An effect means capable of executing a plurality of effects [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, etc.] and
It is a game table equipped with
The game control means is a means capable of controlling a low probability state [for example, a special figure low probability state, etc.] and a high probability state [for example, a special figure high probability state, etc.].
The high-probability state is a state in which the probability that the result of the variation display of the special symbol becomes a big hit is higher than that of the low-probability state.
The game control means is a means capable of starting a second time saving state [for example, play time (b time saving state), etc.].
The second time-saving state is the number of times that the result of the variation display of the special symbol that is out of the way is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the big hit game is completed and the state shifts to the low probability state (hereinafter, "fitting"). When the number of times (referred to as "number of times") becomes the first number of times [for example, 750 times, etc.], it is a time saving state that may shift.
Fluctuation display of a certain special symbol (hereinafter, "a certain special symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 31 (a2) to (a4) and FIGS. 31 (b2) to (b3)) The effect of notifying that the second time saving state is started in the symbol variation display shown and referred to as “Fig. 32 (b) to FIG. (I)]” (hereinafter, “notification effect [for example, FIG. 31”). (A4) and FIG. 31 (b3) for displaying the characters "play time rush !!" and FIG. 32 (g) for displaying the characters "play time rush !!"] ") are executed. May be
The certain symbol variation display is a special symbol variation display executed immediately before the transition to the second time saving state.
The fluctuation display of the special symbol is executed at the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation time determination means.
The fluctuation time of one of the plurality of fluctuation times is the first fluctuation time [for example, 5 seconds, etc.].
The fluctuation time of one of the plurality of fluctuation times is the second fluctuation time [for example, 10 seconds, etc.].
The length of the first fluctuation time and the length of the second fluctuation time are different lengths.
When the certain symbol variation display is executed in the first variation time, the first execution mode [for example, "play time rushes !!" 5 seconds after the symbol variation display of special figure 1 starts. The notification effect is executed in the mode in which the characters of
When the certain symbol variation display is executed in the second variation time, the second execution mode [for example, "play time rushes !!" 10 seconds after the symbol variation display of special figure 1 starts. The notification effect is executed in the mode in which the characters of
The first execution mode and the second execution mode are different execution modes.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the production means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a characteristic in the production means.

Here, the symbol display means may be capable of executing only the variable display of the special symbol, or may be capable of executing a display other than the variable display of the special symbol. Further, the symbol display means may always execute the variable display of the special symbol, or may not execute the variable display of the special symbol.

Further, the game control means may be capable of controlling only the game state, or may be capable of controlling a state other than the game state. Further, the game control means may always control the game state, or may not control the game state.

Further, the fluctuation time determining means may be capable of determining only one fluctuation time from a plurality of fluctuation times, or can determine a fluctuation time other than one fluctuation time from a plurality of fluctuation times. It may be a thing. Further, the fluctuation time determining means may always determine one fluctuation time from a plurality of fluctuation times, or may not determine one fluctuation time from a plurality of fluctuation times. There may be.

Further, the effect means may be one that can execute only a plurality of effects, or may be capable of executing a method other than the plurality of effects. Further, the effect means may be one that always executes a plurality of effects, or may not execute a plurality of effects.

Further, the game control means may be able to control only the low-probability state and the high-probability state, or may be able to control the state other than the low-probability state and the high-probability state. Further, the game control means may be one that always controls the low-probability state and the high-probability state, or may not be controlled to the low-probability state and the high-probability state.

Further, the high-probability state may be a state in which only the probability that the result of the variation display of the special symbol becomes a big hit is higher than that in the low-probability state, or the result of the variation display of the special symbol is a big hit than the low-probability state. It may be in a state where the probability other than the probability of becoming is high. In addition, the high-probability state may be a state in which the probability that the result of the variation display of the special symbol will be a big hit is always higher than that in the low-probability state, and the result of the variation display of the special symbol is a big hit than the low-probability state. It may not be in a state where the probability of becoming is high.

Further, the game control means may be capable of starting only the second time saving state, or may be capable of starting a state other than the second time saving state. Further, the game control means may always start the second time saving state, or may not start the second time saving state.

In addition, in the second time saving state, only the number of times that the result of the variation display of the special symbol that is out of the way is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the big hit game ends and shifts to the low probability state is the first. It may shift when the number of times is reached, or after the jackpot game ends and shifts to the low probability state, the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of order is continuously displayed without becoming a jackpot. It may shift when the number of times other than the number of times becomes the first number. In addition, after the big hit game ends and shifts to the low probability state, the number of times that the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the way is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit is always changed to the first number. It may be present, or when the number of times that the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the way is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit after the big hit game ends and shifts to the low probability state becomes the first number, it shifts. It may not be the one that may not be.

In addition, there may be a case where only the effect of notifying that the second time saving state is started is executed in the variation display of a certain special symbol, or the second time saving state in the variation display of a certain special symbol. There may be cases where an effect other than the effect of notifying that is started is also executed. In addition, an effect of notifying that the second time saving state is started in the variable display of a certain special symbol may be executed without fail, or the second time saving state is started in the variable display of a certain special symbol. In some cases, the effect of notifying that is not executed.

In addition, there may be a case where an effect of notifying that only the second time saving state is started is executed in the variation display of a certain special symbol, or the second time saving state in the variation display of a certain special symbol. There may be a case where an effect for notifying that a game state other than the above is started is executed.
In addition, an effect of notifying that the second time saving state is started may be executed only in the variation display of a certain special symbol, or the variation of the special symbol other than the variation display of the special symbol may be executed. In the display as well, an effect of notifying that the second time saving state is started may be executed.

Further, only the fluctuation display of the special symbol may be executed at the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation time determining means, or the display other than the fluctuation display of the special symbol is executed at the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation time determining means. May be good. In addition, the fluctuation display of the special symbol may always be executed at the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation time determining means, or the variation display of the special symbol may not be executed at the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation time determining means. May be good.

Further, the fluctuation display of the special symbol may be executed only at the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation time determining means, or the fluctuation display of the special symbol is executed at the fluctuation time other than the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation time determining means. You may.

Further, when a certain symbol variation display is executed in the first variation time, the notification effect may be executed only in the first execution mode, or a certain symbol variation display is executed in the first variation time. If so, the notification effect may be executed in an execution mode other than the first execution mode. Further, when a certain symbol variation display is executed in the first variation time, the notification effect may be always executed in the first execution mode, or a certain symbol variation display is executed in the first variation time. If so, the notification effect may not be executed in the first execution mode.

Further, the notification effect may be executed in the first execution mode only when a certain symbol variation display is executed in the first variation time, or a certain symbol variation display is executed in the first variation time. Even in cases other than the case where the notification effect is performed, the notification effect may be executed in the first execution mode.

Further, when a certain symbol variation display is executed in the second variation time, the notification effect may be executed only in the second execution mode, or a certain symbol variation display is executed in the second variation time. If so, the notification effect may be executed in an execution mode other than the second execution mode. Further, when a certain symbol variation display is executed in the second variation time, the notification effect may be always executed in the second execution mode, or a certain symbol variation display is executed in the second variation time. If so, the notification effect may not be executed in the second execution mode.

Further, the notification effect may be executed in the second execution mode only when a certain symbol variation display is executed in the second variation time, or a certain symbol variation display is executed in the second variation time. Even in cases other than the case where the notification effect is performed, the notification effect may be executed in the second execution mode.

The length of the first fluctuation time and the length of the second fluctuation time may be partially different lengths or all may be different lengths. Further, the length of the first fluctuation time and the length of the second fluctuation time may be the same.

Further, the first execution mode and the second execution mode may be partially different modes or all may be different modes. Moreover, the first execution mode and the second execution mode may be the same.

In addition, "The length of the second fluctuation time is longer than the length of the first fluctuation time.
The first execution mode is that the notification effect is performed at the first timing after the start of the certain symbol variation display [for example, 5 seconds after the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1]. It is an execution mode to be started,
In the second execution mode, the notification effect starts at the second timing after the start of the certain symbol variation display [for example, 10 seconds after the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1]. It is an execution mode to be performed.
The period from the start of the certain symbol variation display to the second timing is longer than the period from the start of the certain symbol variation display to the first timing. Is,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "In the variation display of the special symbol of the first variation time, an effect that is out of alignment without a certain reach effect is executed.
In the variation display of the special symbol of the second variation time, an effect of deviation is executed after the certain reach effect is performed [for example, the deviation SP shown in FIGS. 32 (c) to 32 (i)). Reach production, etc.],
In the certain symbol variation display, the state in which the player can recognize that the certain reach effect is performed and at least it is out of alignment [for example, as shown in FIG. 32 (f), the character of the lord becomes the character of the swordsman. The second timing will be reached after the player is in a state where the player can recognize that it is out of place by performing the defeated production.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to keep expectations to the end by including the possibility of a big hit in a certain reach production.

Here, in the variable display of the special symbol of the first variable time, only the effect that is out of alignment without a certain reach effect may be executed, and in the variable display of the special symbol of the first variable time, the variable display may be executed. An effect other than an effect that is not accompanied by a certain reach effect may be executed. Further, in the variable display of the special symbol of the first variable time, an effect that is out of alignment without a certain reach effect may be executed without fail, and in the variable display of the special symbol of the first variable time, or There may be cases where the out-of-order effect is not executed without the reach effect.

Further, in the variable display of the special symbol of the first variable time, an effect that is out of alignment with only a certain reach effect may be executed, and in the variable display of the special symbol of the first variable time, An effect that is different from the effect may be executed without an effect other than the reach effect. Further, only in the variable display of the special symbol of the first variable time, an effect that is out of alignment without a certain reach effect may be executed, or in the variable display of the special symbol other than the first variable time, the variable display may be performed. An effect that is out of sync with a certain reach effect may be executed.

Further, in the variable display of the special symbol of the second variable time, only the effect that is out of alignment after a certain reach effect is performed may be executed, and in the variable display of the special symbol of the second variable time, the variable display may be executed. , An effect other than the effect that is off after a certain reach effect is performed may be executed. Further, in the variable display of the special symbol of the second variable time, an effect that is shifted after a certain reach effect is performed may always be executed, and in the variable display of the special symbol of the second variable time, the effect may be shifted. , After a certain reach effect is performed, the effect that is out of alignment may not be executed.

Further, in the variable display of the special symbol of the second variable time, an effect that is out of order may be executed only after a certain reach effect is performed, and in the variable display of the special symbol of the second variable time, the effect may be executed. , An extraordinary effect may be executed other than after a certain reach effect is performed. Further, only in the variable display of the special symbol of the second variable time, an effect that is different after a certain reach effect is performed may be executed, or the variable display of the special symbol other than the second variable time may be executed. However, after a certain reach effect is performed, an effect that is out of alignment may be executed.

Further, the second timing may be set only after a certain reach effect is performed in a certain symbol variation display and at least it becomes recognizable to the player that it is out of alignment, or a certain symbol variation display may be performed. The second timing may be set other than after a certain reach effect is performed and at least the player can recognize that the reach is out of alignment. In addition, a certain reach effect may be performed in a certain symbol variation display, and at least the second timing may be set after the player can recognize that it is out of alignment, or a certain symbol variation display. In some cases, the second timing may not be reached after a certain reach effect is performed and at least it becomes recognizable to the player that it is out of alignment.

Further, the second timing may be set after a certain reach effect is performed in a certain symbol variation display and at least the deviation is recognizable only to the player, or a certain symbol variation display may be performed. The second timing may be set after a certain reach effect is performed in the above and at least it becomes recognizable to other than the player that it is out of alignment. Further, the second timing may be set after the player can recognize only that a certain reach effect is performed in a certain symbol variation display and the player can recognize it, or in a certain symbol variation display. The second timing may be set after a state in which the player can recognize other than the fact that a certain reach effect is performed and the player is out of order.

Further, the second timing may be set after only a certain reach effect is performed in a certain symbol variation display and at least it becomes recognizable to the player that it is out of alignment, or a certain symbol variation display. In, the second timing may be set after an effect other than a certain reach effect is performed and at least the player can recognize that the effect is out of alignment. Further, the second timing may be set after a certain reach effect is performed only in a certain symbol variation display and at least it becomes recognizable to the player that it is out of alignment, or a certain symbol variation display. In the symbol variation display other than the above, the second timing may be set after a certain reach effect is performed and at least it becomes recognizable to the player that it is out of alignment.

In addition, "when the certain symbol variation display is a variation display of a special symbol that is a big hit, the notification effect is not executed [for example, FIGS. 32 (a) to 32 (e) and FIGS. (F2) to 2). As shown in (i2), if there is a big hit in the symbol variation display that will shift to the play time, the notification that the shift to the play time will not be performed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to make the player expect that the notification effect is not performed in a certain symbol variation display by functioning as a jackpot notice.

Here, when a certain symbol variation display is a variation display of a special symbol that is a big hit, it is not necessary to execute only the notification effect, and a certain symbol variation display is a variation display of a special symbol that is a big hit. In that case, it is not necessary to execute an effect other than the notification effect. Further, when a certain symbol variation display is a variation display of a special symbol which is a big hit, the notification effect does not necessarily have to be executed, and when a certain symbol variation display is a variation display of a special symbol which is a big hit. May execute a notification effect.

Further, the notification effect does not have to be executed only when a certain symbol variation display is a variation display of a special symbol which is a big hit, and when a certain symbol variation display is a variation display of a special symbol which is a big hit. In cases other than the above, the notification effect may not be executed.

In addition, "when the probability setting change operation is accepted, any one of the probability settings is selected from the plurality of probability settings [for example, in the setting change process (step S117) of the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 7). It is possible to set one of multiple settings by pressing the setting change button 194],
The notification effect is an effect that may suggest information about the setting [for example, as shown in FIG. 32 (f'), the display of "play time rush !!" is displayed in a direction different from the usual direction. Suggests that the setting is 4 or more],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, dissatisfaction with the fit up to a predetermined rotation may be reduced by giving the setting information to the player.

Here, when the probability setting operation is accepted, only one of the probability settings may be selected from the plurality of probability settings, or when the probability setting operation is accepted, any one of the plurality of probability settings may be selected. Settings other than one probability setting may be selected. Further, when the probability setting operation is accepted, any one of the probability settings may be always selected from the plurality of probability settings, and when the probability setting operation is accepted, any one of the plurality of probability settings may be selected. One probability setting may not be selected.

Further, when the probability setting operation is accepted, any one of the probability settings may be selected from only a plurality of probability settings, and when the probability setting operation is accepted, the settings other than the plurality of probability settings may be selected. Any one probability setting may be selected. Further, only when the probability setting operation is accepted, any one of the probability settings may be selected from the plurality of probability settings, and even when the probability setting operation is not accepted, the plurality of probability settings may be selected. Any one of the probability settings may be selected from.

Further, the notification effect may suggest only information related to the setting, or may suggest information other than the information related to the setting. In addition, the notification effect may always suggest information about the setting, or may not suggest information about the setting.

In addition, "One of the plurality of productions is the second production,
The second effect is information on the period until the start of the second time saving state [for example, information on the number of times the symbol variation is displayed until the play time shown in FIG. 18A, the number of start times between special prizes (TS). Information about] at least suggesting,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the second effect may suggest only information about the period until the second time saving state starts, or information other than the information about the period until the second time saving state starts. May also suggest. In addition, the second effect may always suggest information on the period until the second time saving state starts, or does not suggest information on the period until the second time saving state starts. There may be one.

In addition, "the second effect is an effect that includes at least information suggesting the number of fits [for example, information on the number of start times between special prizes (TS) shown in FIG. 18 (a)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the second effect may include only information suggesting the number of fits, or may include information other than the information suggesting the number of fits. In addition, the second effect may always include information suggesting the number of fits, or may not include information suggesting the number of fits.

Further, "The second effect is information that at least suggests the number of times of variation display of the special symbol until the number of times of fitting becomes the first number of times [for example, up to the play time shown in FIG. 18A. Information including the number of times the symbol changes are displayed]
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the second effect may include only information suggesting the number of times of variable display of the special symbol until the number of fits becomes the first number, or the number of fits becomes the first number. It may include information other than the information suggesting the number of times of variable display of the special symbol up to. In addition, the second effect may always include information suggesting the number of times of variable display of the special symbol until the number of fits becomes the first number, and the number of fits becomes the first number. It may not include information suggesting the number of times of variable display of the special symbol up to.

In addition, "The second effect is an effect that can be performed in one of a plurality of aspects.
One of the plurality of aspects is the first aspect [for example, as shown in FIG. 22 (e), the information regarding the number of times the symbol variation is displayed until the play time is not clearly displayed, etc.]. can be,
One aspect of the plurality of aspects is the second aspect [for example, as shown in FIG. 22 (m), an aspect in which information regarding the number of times the symbol variation is displayed up to the play time is clearly displayed]. can be,
The first aspect and the second aspect are different aspects.
After the power is turned on, the second effect may be executed in the first aspect [for example, as shown in FIG. 21D, after the power is turned on, the symbol variation display until the play time is displayed. Information about the number of times is displayed in an unclear manner, etc.],
When the second condition [for example, as shown in FIG. 22, the out-of-order SP reach is executed, etc.] is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, the second The effect changes from the first aspect to the second aspect [for example, as shown in FIGS. 22 (g) to 22 (m), the information regarding the number of times the symbol variation is displayed until the play time is unclear. When the out-of-SP reach is executed in the state shown in the mode, the information regarding the number of times the symbol variation is displayed until the subsequent play time is displayed in a clear mode, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the second effect may be feasible only in one of a plurality of modes, or may be feasible in a mode other than one of the plurality of modes. You may. Further, the second effect may be always executed in one of a plurality of aspects, or may not be executed in one of a plurality of aspects. ..

Further, only the second effect may be executed in the first aspect after the power is turned on, or the notification other than the second effect in the first aspect after the power is turned on. May be executed. Further, the second effect may always be executed in the first aspect after the power is turned on, or the second effect may not be executed in the first aspect after the power is turned on. May be good.

Further, the second effect may be executed only in the first aspect after the power is turned on, or the second effect may be executed in an aspect other than the first aspect after the power is turned on. May be executed. Further, the second effect may be executed in the first mode only after the power is turned on, and the second effect may be executed in the first mode even after the power is turned on. May be done.

Further, if the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, the second effect may be changed only from the first aspect to the second aspect. If the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, the second effect may be changed from the first aspect to an aspect other than the second aspect. Further, if the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, the second effect may always change from the first aspect to the second aspect. If the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, the second effect may not change from the first aspect to the second aspect.

Further, if the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, only the second effect may change from the first aspect to the second aspect. If the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, the effects other than the second effect may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. Further, if only the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, the second effect may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. If a condition other than the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, the second effect may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect.

Further, if the second condition is satisfied only after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, the second effect may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. If the second condition is satisfied except after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, the second effect may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. If the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started only in the first aspect, the second effect may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect, or the first aspect may be changed. If the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in an aspect other than the above aspect, the second effect may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect.

In addition, "the game control means sets a first time saving state [for example, an electric support state (for example, a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state; a time saving state) that shifts after the big hit game for a normal big hit is completed]. It ’s a startable way,
The first time saving state is a time saving state that may be started when the jackpot game ends and shifts to the low probability state.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the game control means may be capable of starting only the first time saving state, or may be capable of starting a state other than the first time saving state. Further, the game control means may always start the first time saving state, or may not start the first time saving state.

Further, the first time saving state may be started when the big hit game ends and shifts only to the low probability state, or the big hit game ends and shifts to a state other than the low probability state. Then, it may be started. Further, the first time saving state may be always started when the big hit game ends and shifts to the low probability state, or may not start when the big hit game ends and shifts to the low probability state. It may be a thing.

Further, "the game control means can start a third time saving state [for example, an electric support state in which a time saving symbol is suddenly displayed and transitions (special figure low probability normal figure high probability state; c time saving state), etc.]. Means,
The third time saving state is a time saving state that may be started when a time saving symbol [for example, "special symbol E" or the like] is displayed as a result of the variable display of the special symbol.
The time saving symbol is a symbol different from the jackpot symbol,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the game control means may be capable of starting only the third time saving state, or may be capable of starting a state other than the third time saving state. Further, the game control means may always start the third time saving state, or may not start the third time saving state.

Further, the third time saving state may be started only when the time saving symbol is displayed as a result of the variation display of the special symbol, or the time saving symbol may be started as a result of the variation display of the special symbol. It may be started in a case other than the case where is displayed. Further, the third time saving state may be started whenever the time saving symbol is displayed as a result of the variation display of the special symbol, or the time saving symbol is displayed as the result of the variation display of the special symbol. It may not be started.

In addition, "when the result of the variation display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times [for example, 950 times, etc.] is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the start of the second time saving state, the first The second time saving state ends,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, when the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the start of the second time saving state, only the second time saving state ends. Or, if the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit after the start of the second time saving state, the state other than the second time saving state will be displayed. You may end. In addition, even if the second time saving state is always terminated when the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit after the second time saving state is started. It is good, and if the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit after the second time saving state is started, the second time saving state may not end. There may be.

In addition, even if the second time saving state ends, if only the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the second time saving state is started. Well, after the second time saving state is started, the second time saving state ends when a result other than the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit. You may.

Further, "The game table is a pachinko machine [for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description,
"Symbol display means capable of executing variable display of special symbols [for example, first special symbol display device 212, second special symbol display device 214, etc.] and
A game control means that can control the game state [for example, CPU 304 of the main control unit 300] and
A look-ahead notice means that can execute a look-ahead notice [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]
It is a game table equipped with
The game control means is a means capable of controlling the first game state [for example, a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, etc.].
The game control means is a means that can be controlled to a second game state [for example, a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state, etc.].
The second gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous than the first gaming state.
A certain condition [for example, 750 times of symbol variation display was executed after the jackpot was completed, or as a result of the symbol variation display of special figure 1, a time saving symbol (“special symbol E”) was suddenly displayed. When the variable display of the special symbol for which [things, etc.] is established (hereinafter, referred to as “a certain special symbol variable display”) is executed, the first gaming state is changed to the second gaming state without a big hit. Migrate and
The look-ahead notice means is a means that does not execute the look-ahead notice regarding the change display of the special symbol whose start is suspended after the start of the certain special symbol variation display is suspended [for example, as shown in FIG. 34. In addition, there will be no pre-reading notice regarding the symbol variation display that is held after the symbol variation display that will shift to play time, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the look-ahead notice means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the look-ahead notice means.

Here, the symbol display means may be capable of executing only the variable display of the special symbol, or may be capable of executing a display other than the variable display of the special symbol. Further, the symbol display means may always execute the variable display of the special symbol, or may not execute the variable display of the special symbol.

Further, the game control means may be capable of controlling only the game state, or may be capable of controlling a state other than the game state. Further, the game control means may always control the game state, or may not control the game state.

Further, the look-ahead notice means may be capable of executing only the look-ahead notice, or may be capable of executing other than the look-ahead notice. Further, the look-ahead notice means may be one that always executes the look-ahead notice, or may not execute the look-ahead notice.

Further, the game control means may be one that can be controlled only in the first game state, or may be controllable in a game state other than the first game state. Further, the game control means may be one that always controls the first game state, or may not be controlled only in the first game state.

Further, the game control means may be one that can be controlled only in the second gaming state, or may be one that can be controlled in a gaming state other than the second gaming state. Further, the game control means may be one that always controls the second gaming state, or may not be controlled only in the second gaming state.

Further, the second gaming state may be more advantageous than only the first gaming state, or may be more advantageous than the gaming states other than the first gaming state. Further, the second gaming state may always be more advantageous than the first gaming state, or may be less advantageous than the first gaming state.

Further, when the variable display of the special symbol that satisfies a certain condition is executed, the transition from the first gaming state to the second gaming state may be performed without becoming a big hit, and a certain condition is satisfied. When the variable display of the special symbol is executed, the game state may be changed from the first game state to a game state other than the second game state without becoming a big hit. Further, when the variable display of the special symbol that satisfies a certain condition is executed, the first gaming state may be surely shifted to the second gaming state without becoming a big hit, and a certain condition is satisfied. When the variable display of the special symbol is executed, it may not shift from the first gaming state to the second gaming state without becoming a big hit.

Further, when the variable display of the special symbol that satisfies a certain condition is executed, it is possible to shift from only the first gaming state to the second gaming state without becoming a big hit, or a certain condition is satisfied. When the variable display of the special symbol is executed, the game state other than the first game state may be changed to the second game state without becoming a big hit. Further, only when the variable display of the special symbol that satisfies a certain condition is executed, the transition from the first gaming state to the second gaming state may be performed without becoming a big hit, and a certain condition is satisfied. In cases other than the case where the variable display of the special symbol is executed, the transition from the first gaming state to the second gaming state may be performed without a big hit.

Further, if the variable display of the special symbol is executed only when a certain condition is satisfied, the first gaming state may be changed to the second gaming state without a big hit, or other than a certain condition. If the variable display of the special symbol is executed even when the condition of is satisfied, the first gaming state may be changed to the second gaming state without becoming a big hit.

Further, the look-ahead advance notice means may not execute only the look-ahead notice regarding the change display of the special symbol whose start is suspended after the start of a certain special symbol variation display is suspended. It is also possible that no notice other than the look-ahead notice regarding the change display of the special symbol whose start is suspended after the start of the special symbol variation display is suspended is not executed. Further, the look-ahead notice means may not always execute the look-ahead notice regarding the change display of the special symbol whose start is suspended after the start of the start of the special symbol variation display is suspended. It may be possible to execute a look-ahead notice regarding the variable display of the special symbol whose start is suspended after the start of the special symbol variable display is suspended.

Further, the look-ahead notice means may not execute the look-ahead notice only for the change display of the special symbol whose start is suspended after the start of a certain special symbol variation display is suspended. It is also possible that the pre-reading notice regarding the variable display of the special symbol other than the variable display of the special symbol whose start is suspended after the start of the special symbol variable display is suspended may not be executed. Further, the pre-reading notice means may not execute the pre-reading notice regarding the variable display of the special symbol whose start is suspended after only the start of a certain special symbol variable display is suspended. It is also possible that the pre-reading notice regarding the variable display of the special symbol whose start is suspended after the start of the variable display of the special symbol other than the special symbol variable display is suspended may not be executed.

Further, "the symbol display means is a means including a first symbol display means [for example, a first special symbol display device 212 or the like] and a second symbol display means [for example, a second special symbol display device 214 or the like]. can be,
The variable display of the special symbol by the second symbol display means (hereinafter, referred to as “second symbol variable display”) is the variable display of the special symbol by the first symbol display means (hereinafter, “first symbol”). It is a symbol variation display that can be executed with priority over "variation display".
The first gaming state is a gaming state in which the first symbol variation display is more likely to be started than the second symbol variation display.
The second gaming state is a gaming state in which the second symbol variation display is more likely to be started than the first symbol variation display.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust by not giving a pre-reading notice to the first symbol change display remaining in the first game state due to the change in the game state. In some cases.

Here, the symbol display means may include only the first symbol display means and the second symbol display means, and the symbol display means other than the first symbol display means and the second symbol display means may also be included. It may include. Further, the symbol display means may always include the first symbol display means and the second symbol display means, or may not include the first symbol display means and the second symbol display means. It may be a thing.

Further, the second symbol variation display may be executed with priority over only the first symbol variation display, or may be executed with priority over the symbol variation display other than the first symbol variation display. It may be possible. Further, the second symbol variation display may always be executed with priority over the first symbol variation display, or may not be executed with priority over the first symbol variation display. There may be.

Further, the first game state may be one in which only the first symbol variation display is easier to start than the second symbol variation display, or the first symbol variation display is easier than the second symbol variation display. The symbol variation display other than the variation display may be easier to start. Further, the first game state may be such that the first symbol variation display is more likely to be started than the second symbol variation display, and the first symbol variation display is easier than the second symbol variation display. The variable display may not be easier to start.

Further, the second game state may be easier to start only in the second symbol variation display than in the first symbol variation display, or the second symbol may be started more easily than the first symbol variation display. The symbol variation display other than the variation display may be easier to start. Further, the second game state may be such that the second symbol variation display is more likely to be started than the first symbol variation display, and the second symbol variation display is easier than the first symbol variation display. The variable display may not be easier to start.

In addition, "The second symbol variation display is more likely to be an advantageous jackpot when it is a jackpot than the first symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIG. 9C, special figure 1 It is more likely to be a 10R probability variation jackpot when it is a jackpot in Special Figure 2 than when it is a jackpot in
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the big hit just before the transition of the game state is pleasing to the player, but there is also a feeling that he wanted the big hit with the advantageous second symbol variation display, so it will not be fanned by excessive production. It may be possible to do so.

Here, the second symbol variation display may be more likely to be an advantageous jackpot only when it becomes a jackpot than the first symbol variation display, and the second symbol may be more likely to be a jackpot than the first symbol variation display. The variable display may be more likely to be an advantageous jackpot in cases other than the case where the jackpot is a jackpot. In addition, the second symbol variation display may be more likely to be an advantageous jackpot than the first symbol variation display, and the second symbol variation may be more likely than the first symbol variation display. The display may not be more likely to be an advantageous jackpot when it is a jackpot.

In addition, only the second symbol variation display may be more likely to be an advantageous jackpot in the case of a jackpot than the first symbol variation display, and the second symbol variation may be more likely than the first symbol variation display. The symbol variation display other than the display may be more likely to be an advantageous jackpot when it is a jackpot.

In addition, "the number of times that the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the way is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the big hit game is completed and the state shifts to the first game state (hereinafter referred to as" the number of fits "). When the first number of times [for example, 750 times, etc.] is reached, the above-mentioned certain condition is satisfied.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, there is a case where the number of times that the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the way is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the big hit game ends and shifts to the first game state becomes the first number of times. Only the condition may be satisfied, or the number of times that the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the way is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the big hit game ends and shifts to the first game state is the first. When the number of times is one, a condition other than a certain condition may be satisfied. In addition, there is a certain condition that the number of times that the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the way is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the big hit game ends and shifts to the first game state becomes the first number of times. May always hold, and the number of times that the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the way is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the big hit game ends and shifts to the first game state is the first When the number of times is reached, a certain condition may not be satisfied.

In addition, when the number of times that the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the way is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the big hit game ends and shifts to the first game state becomes the first number of times. Only a certain condition may be satisfied, and the number of times that the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of order is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the big hit game ends and shifts to the first game state. A certain condition may be satisfied in cases other than the case where is the first number of times.

In addition, there is a case where only the number of times that the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the way is displayed without becoming a big hit after the big hit game ends and shifts to the first game state becomes the first number of times. The condition may be satisfied, or the number of times other than the number of times that the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the way is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the big hit game ends and shifts to the first game state. When is the first number of times, a certain condition may be satisfied.

In addition, there is a case where the number of times that the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the way is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit only after the big hit game ends and shifts to the first game state becomes the first number of times. The condition may be satisfied, or after the jackpot game ends and the game state shifts to a game state other than the first game state, the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the game is continuously displayed without becoming a jackpot. When the number of times becomes the first number, a certain condition may be satisfied. In addition, there is a case where the number of times that the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the way is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after only the big hit game ends and shifts to the first game state becomes the first number of times. The condition may be satisfied, and after the game state other than the big hit game is completed and the game state shifts to the first game state, the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the game is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit. When the number of times becomes the first number, a certain condition may be satisfied.

In addition, "the pre-reading notice means shifts from the symbol variation display executed 10 times before the symbol variation display to shift to the play time to the play time" in the first period [for example, the symbol variation to shift to the play time. It is a means that does not execute the look-ahead notice in [Period until display, etc.]
The first period means that the certain special symbol variation display ends after the execution of the special symbol variation display is started a certain number of times [for example, 10 times, etc.] before the certain special symbol variation display. It is the period until
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the big hit just before the transition of the game state is pleasing to the player, but there is also a feeling that he wanted the big hit with the advantageous second symbol variation display, so it will not be fanned by excessive production. It may be possible to do so.

Here, the look-ahead notice means may not execute only the look-ahead notice in the first period, or may not execute anything other than the look-ahead notice in the first period. Further, the look-ahead notice means may not always execute the look-ahead notice in the first period, or may execute the look-ahead notice in the first period. Further, the look-ahead notice means may not execute the look-ahead notice only in the first period, or may not execute the look-ahead notice in a period other than the first period.

In addition, "The pre-reading notice means is a means capable of executing a plurality of types of pre-reading notices.
The look-ahead notice means is a look-ahead notice of at least one of the plurality of types of look-ahead notices in the first period [for example, a look-ahead notice at the time of winning in which the character of Mr. Machiko shown in FIG. 33 (b) appears]. Is a means of not doing
The first period means that the certain special symbol variation display ends after the execution of the special symbol variation display is started a certain number of times before the certain special symbol variation display [for example, 10 times, etc.]. It is the period until
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the look-ahead notice means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of look-ahead notices, or may be capable of executing other than a plurality of types of look-ahead notices. Further, the look-ahead notice means may always execute a plurality of types of look-ahead notices, or may not execute a plurality of types of look-ahead notices.

Further, the look-ahead notice means may not execute only at least one kind of look-ahead notice among the plurality of types of look-ahead notices in the first period, or may be one that does not execute only one kind of look-ahead notice in the first period. It may not execute anything other than at least one of these pre-reading notices. Further, the look-ahead notice means may not always execute at least one kind of look-ahead notice among the plurality of types of look-ahead notices in the first period, or may be a plurality of types of look-ahead notices in the first period. It may be one that may execute at least one of these pre-reading notices.

Further, the look-ahead notice means may not execute the look-ahead notice of only one of the plurality of types of look-ahead notices in the first period, or may be one of the plurality of types of look-ahead notices in the first period. It may not execute a look-ahead notice of a type other than one type. Further, the look-ahead notice means may not execute at least one kind of look-ahead notice among the plurality of types of look-ahead notice only in the first period, or may be a plurality of types in a period other than the first period. It may not execute at least one kind of look-ahead notice.

Further, "when the first period starts, a certain effect mode [for example, a play time precursor effect mode that starts after the symbol variation display shown in FIG. 35 (b) is started] is started.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, when the first period starts, only a certain effect mode may be started, or when the first period starts, an effect mode other than a certain effect mode may be started. Further, when the first period starts, a certain effect mode may always be started, or when the first period starts, a certain effect mode may not be started.

Further, when only the first period starts, a certain effect mode may be started, or when a period other than the first period starts, a certain effect mode may be started.

Further, "In the first gaming state, when a time-saving symbol [for example," special symbol E "etc.] is displayed as a result of variable display of the special symbol, the above-mentioned certain condition is satisfied.
The time saving symbol is a symbol different from the jackpot symbol,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, in the first gaming state, if the time saving symbol is displayed as a result of the variation display of the special symbol, only a certain condition may be satisfied, or in the first game state, the variation display of the special symbol may be satisfied. As a result, when the time saving symbol is displayed, a condition other than a certain condition may be satisfied. Further, in the first game state, a certain condition may always be satisfied when the time saving symbol is displayed as a result of the variation display of the special symbol, and in the first game state, the result of the variation display of the special symbol. When the time saving symbol is displayed, a certain condition may not be satisfied.

Further, in the first game state, a certain condition may be satisfied only when the time-saving symbol is displayed as a result of the variable display of the special symbol, and in the first game state, the result of the variable display of the special symbol may be satisfied. A certain condition may be satisfied in cases other than the case where the time saving symbol is displayed. Further, a certain condition may be satisfied when the time saving symbol is displayed as a result of the variable display of the special symbol only in the first gaming state, and the special symbol may be satisfied even in the gaming state other than the first gaming state. A certain condition may be satisfied when the time saving symbol is displayed as a result of the variable display of.

Further, "The game table is a pachinko machine [for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description,
"Symbol display means capable of executing variable display of special symbols [for example, first special symbol display device 212, second special symbol display device 214, etc.] and
A game control means that can control the game state [for example, CPU 304 of the main control unit 300] and
An effect means capable of executing a plurality of effects [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, etc.] and
It is a game table equipped with
The game control means is a means capable of controlling a low probability state [for example, a special figure low probability state, etc.] and a high probability state [for example, a special figure high probability state, etc.].
The high-probability state is a state in which the probability that the result of the variation display of the special symbol becomes a big hit is higher than that of the low-probability state.
The game control means is a means capable of starting a second time saving state [for example, play time (b time saving state), etc.].
The second time-saving state is the number of times that the result of the variation display of the special symbol that is out of the way is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the big hit game is completed and the state shifts to the low probability state (hereinafter, "fitting"). When the number of times (referred to as "number of times") becomes the first number of times [for example, 750 times, etc.], it is a time saving state that may shift.
One of the plurality of effects is the second effect,
The second effect includes at least information on the second time saving state [for example, information on the number of times the symbol variation is displayed until the play time, information on the number of start times between special prizes (TS), etc. shown in FIG. 18A]. It is a suggestive production
The second effect may be executed in the notice mode [for example, as shown in FIG. 37 (c), the display mode of the information regarding the number of symbol variation display times up to the play time is changed and the symbol being executed is being executed. Big hit notice regarding variable display has been made, etc.],
By executing the second effect in the above-mentioned notice mode, it is notified that there is a possibility of a big hit.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the production means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a characteristic in the production means.

Further, according to this game table, by making the suggestion effect function as a notice, it may be possible to always pay attention to the upper part until the second time saving state.

Here, the symbol display means may be capable of executing only the variable display of the special symbol, or may be capable of executing a display other than the variable display of the special symbol. Further, the symbol display means may always execute the variable display of the special symbol, or may not execute the variable display of the special symbol.

Further, the game control means may be capable of controlling only the game state, or may be capable of controlling a state other than the game state. Further, the game control means may always control the game state, or may not control the game state.

Further, the effect means may be one that can execute only a plurality of effects, or may be capable of executing a method other than the plurality of effects. Further, the effect means may be one that always executes a plurality of effects, or may not execute a plurality of effects.

Further, the game control means may be able to control only the low-probability state and the high-probability state, or may be able to control the state other than the low-probability state and the high-probability state. Further, the game control means may be one that always controls the low-probability state and the high-probability state, or may not be controlled to the low-probability state and the high-probability state.

Further, the high-probability state may be a state in which only the probability that the result of the variation display of the special symbol becomes a big hit is higher than that in the low-probability state, or the result of the variation display of the special symbol is a big hit than the low-probability state. It may be in a state where the probability other than the probability of becoming is high. In addition, the high-probability state may be a state in which the probability that the result of the variation display of the special symbol will be a big hit is always higher than that in the low-probability state, and the result of the variation display of the special symbol is a big hit than the low-probability state. It may not be in a state where the probability of becoming is high.

Further, the game control means may be capable of starting only the second time saving state, or may be capable of starting a state other than the second time saving state. Further, the game control means may always start the second time saving state, or may not start the second time saving state.

In addition, in the second time saving state, only the number of times that the result of the variation display of the special symbol that is out of the way is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the big hit game ends and shifts to the low probability state is the first. It may shift when the number of times is reached, or after the jackpot game ends and shifts to the low probability state, the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of order is continuously displayed without becoming a jackpot. It may shift when the number of times other than the number of times becomes the first number. In addition, after the big hit game ends and shifts to the low probability state, the number of times that the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the way is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit is always changed to the first number. It may be present, or when the number of times that the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the way is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit after the big hit game ends and shifts to the low probability state becomes the first number, it shifts. It may not be the one that may not be.

Further, the second effect may suggest only the information regarding the second time saving state, or may suggest information other than the information regarding the second time saving state. Further, the second effect may always suggest information on the second time saving state, or may not suggest information on the second time saving state.

Further, the second effect may be executed only in the notice mode, or the second effect may be executed in a mode other than the notice mode. Further, the second effect may always be executed in the notice mode, or the second effect may not be executed in the notice mode.

Further, it may be notified only that there is a possibility of a big hit by executing the second effect in the notice mode, or it becomes a big hit by executing the second effect in the notice mode. Other than the possibility, it may be notified. In addition, it may be notified that there is a possibility of a big hit by executing the second effect in the notice mode, or it becomes a big hit by executing the second effect in the notice mode. It may not be notified that there is a possibility.

In addition, "the mode of the second effect changes to the notice mode during the execution of the special symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIG. 37 (c), the symbol variation display up to the play time during the symbol variation display". The display mode of information about the number of times has changed],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the mode of the second effect may be changed only to the notice mode during the execution of the variable display of the special symbol, or the mode of the second effect is other than the notice mode during the execution of the variable display of the special symbol. It may also change in mode. Further, the mode of the second effect may always change to the notice mode during the execution of the variable display of the special symbol, and the mode of the second effect does not change to the notice mode during the execution of the variable display of the special symbol. There may be cases.

In addition, "By executing the second effect in the above-mentioned notice mode, it is notified that the result of the variable display of the special symbol being executed may be a big hit.
One of the plurality of effects is a pre-reading notice effect [for example, a hold notice due to the display of the Sabohani icon shown in FIG. 37 (a)].
The certain look-ahead notice effect is started before the change display of the special symbol (hereinafter, referred to as "notice target symbol change display") in which the second effect is executed in the notice mode is started. It is started during the execution of the variable display of the special symbol, and is also executed during the execution of the variable display of the target symbol [For example, as shown in FIG. 37 (c), the icon of Sabohani is displayed as a variable icon and is also executed. The display mode of the information related to the number of times the symbol variation is displayed up to the play time has changed, and a big hit notice regarding the running symbol variation display has been given, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, there are cases where it is possible to excite the game with the expectation that a combination of the second effects according to the advance notice mode will be performed when a certain look-ahead advance notice effect is started.

Here, by executing the second effect in the notice mode, it may be notified only that the result of the variable display of the special symbol being executed may be a big hit, or the second effect in the notice mode may be notified. By executing the effect of, it may be notified that the result of the variable display of the special symbol being executed may be a big hit. In addition, by executing the second effect in the notice mode, it may be notified that the result of the variable display of the special symbol being executed may be a big hit, or the second effect in the notice mode may be notified. By executing the effect, it may not be notified that the result of the variable display of the special symbol being executed may be a big hit.

Further, by executing the second effect in the notice mode, it may be notified that only the result of the variable display of the special symbol being executed may be a big hit, or the second effect in the notice mode may be notified. By executing the effect, it may be notified that a result other than the result of the variable display of the special symbol being executed may be a big hit. In addition, it may be notified that the result of the variable display of the special symbol being executed may be a big hit only by executing the second effect in the notice mode, or the second effect in the notice mode. Other than the execution of the effect, it may be notified that the result of the variable display of the special symbol being executed may be a big hit.

Further, it may be notified that the result of the variable display of the special symbol being executed may be a big hit only when the second effect is executed in the notice mode, and the second effect in the notice mode may be notified. Other than the execution of the effect, it may be notified that the result of the variable display of the special symbol being executed may be a big hit. Further, it may be notified that the result of the variable display of the special symbol being executed may be a big hit by executing only the second effect in the notice mode, or the second effect in the notice mode. By executing an effect other than the effect, it may be notified that the result of the variable display of the special symbol being executed may be a big hit.

Further, by executing the second effect only in the notice mode, it may be notified that the result of the variable display of the special symbol being executed may be a big hit, or in a mode other than the notice mode. By executing the second effect, it may be notified that the result of the variable display of the special symbol being executed may be a big hit.

Further, a certain look-ahead notice effect is started during execution of the special symbol variation display that is started before the start of the special symbol variation display in which the second effect is executed in the notice mode, and is subject to the notice. It may be executed only during the execution of the symbol variation display, or the special symbol variation display that is started before the special symbol variation display that the second effect is executed in the notice mode is started is being executed. It may be executed at a time other than the execution of the notice target symbol variation display. Further, a certain look-ahead notice effect is started during execution of the special symbol variation display that is started before the start of the special symbol variation display in which the second effect is executed in the notice mode, and is subject to the notice. It may be always executed during the execution of the symbol variation display, or the special symbol variation display that is started before the special symbol variation display that the second effect is executed in the advance notice mode is being executed is being executed. It may be started at, and may not be executed even during the execution of the notice target symbol variation display.

Further, a certain look-ahead notice effect is started only during the execution of the change display of the special symbol that is started before the change display of the special symbol in which the second effect is executed in the notice mode is started, and the notice is given. It may be executed even during the execution of the target symbol variation display, or the second effect is executed in the notice mode except during the execution of the special symbol variation display that is started before the special symbol variation display is started. It may be executed even during the execution of the notice target symbol variation display.

Further, a certain look-ahead notice effect is started during execution of the special symbol variation display which is started only before the special symbol variation display in which the second effect is executed in the notice mode is started, and the notice is given. It may be executed even during the execution of the target symbol variation display, or the special symbol variation display that is started other than before the start of the special symbol variation display in which the second effect is executed in the notice mode is being executed. It may be executed even during the execution of the notice target symbol variation display.

Further, "" information on the second time saving state "means" information on the number of times of variation display of the special symbol until the number of times of fitting becomes the first number of times [for example, shown in FIG. 18A. Information on the number of times the symbol changes are displayed until the play time] ”.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "the second effect may be executed in a normal mode [for example, a display mode of displaying the number of symbol variation display times up to the play time shown in FIG. 37 (b)].
The notice mode is a mode in which at least one of the color, size, and display area modes is different from the normal mode.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the second effect may be performed only in the normal mode, or the second effect may be performed in a mode other than the normal mode. Further, the second effect may always be performed in the normal mode, or the second effect may not be performed in the normal mode.

Further, only the second effect may be executed in the normal mode, or the effects other than the second effect may be executed in the normal mode.

In addition, "when the result of the variation display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times [for example, 950 times, etc.] is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the start of the second time saving state, the first The second time saving state is over,
The second effect is not executed in the period from the end of the second time saving state to the big hit [for example, after shifting to the play time and the end of the play time, the big hit It will not shift to play time again until it becomes],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, when the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the start of the second time saving state, only the second time saving state ends. Or, if the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit after the start of the second time saving state, the state other than the second time saving state will be displayed. You may end. In addition, even if the second time saving state is always terminated when the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit after the second time saving state is started. It is good, and if the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit after the second time saving state is started, the second time saving state may not end. There may be.

In addition, even if the second time saving state ends, if only the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the second time saving state is started. Well, after the second time saving state is started, the second time saving state ends when a result other than the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit. You may.

Further, it is not necessary that only the second effect is executed in the period from the end of the second time saving state to the big hit, and from the end of the second time saving state to the big hit. It is not necessary that an effect other than the second effect is executed during the period of. In addition, the second effect does not necessarily have to be executed during the period from the end of the second time saving state to the big hit, and from the end of the second time saving state to the big hit. The second effect may be performed during the period of.

In addition, the second effect does not have to be executed only during the period from the end of the second time saving state to the big hit, and from the end of the second time saving state to the big hit. It is not necessary that the second effect is executed even in a period other than the period of. In addition, the second effect does not have to be executed during the period from the end of only the second time reduction state to the big hit, and after the game state other than the second time reduction state ends. It is not necessary that the second effect is executed in the period until the big hit.

In addition, "the second effect is not executed in the period from the start of the second time saving state to the big hit [for example, as shown in FIG. 25 (w), the play time ends. Then, the information about the number of times the symbol changes are displayed until the play time is deleted, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, it is not necessary that only the second effect is executed in the period from the end of the second time saving state to the big hit, and the big hit is obtained after the second time saving state ends. It is not necessary that an effect other than the second effect is executed during the period up to. In addition, the second effect does not necessarily have to be executed during the period from the end of the second time saving state to the big hit, and from the end of the second time saving state to the big hit. The second effect may be performed during the period of.

In addition, the second effect does not have to be executed only during the period from the end of the second time saving state to the big hit, and from the end of the second time saving state to the big hit. It is not necessary that the second effect is executed even in a period other than the period of. In addition, the second effect does not have to be executed during the period from the end of only the second time reduction state to the big hit, and after the game state other than the second time reduction state ends. It is not necessary that the second effect is executed in the period until the big hit.

Further, "The second effect is an effect that is started when the big hit game ends and shifts to the low probability state [for example, as shown in FIG. 23 (c), the big hit game ends and the time is shortened a. When the state (special figure low probability state) is entered, information on the number of times the symbol changes are displayed up to the play time is displayed],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the second effect may be started only when the jackpot game ends and shifts to the low probability state, or other than when the jackpot game ends and shifts to the low probability state. It may also be initiated in some cases. In addition, the second effect may be started whenever the jackpot game ends and shifts to the low probability state, or may not start when the jackpot game ends and shifts to the low probability state. May be.

In addition, "the game control means sets a first time saving state [for example, an electric support state (for example, a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state; a time saving state) that shifts after the big hit game for a normal big hit is completed]. It ’s a startable way,
The first time saving state is a time saving state that may be started when the jackpot game ends and shifts to the low probability state.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the game control means may be capable of starting only the first time saving state, or may be capable of starting a state other than the first time saving state. Further, the game control means may always start the first time saving state, or may not start the first time saving state.

Further, the first time saving state may be started when the big hit game ends and shifts only to the low probability state, or the big hit game ends and shifts to a state other than the low probability state. Then, it may be started. Further, the first time saving state may be always started when the big hit game ends and shifts to the low probability state, or may not start when the big hit game ends and shifts to the low probability state. It may be a thing.

Further, "the game control means can start a third time saving state [for example, an electric support state in which a time saving symbol is suddenly displayed and transitions (special figure low probability normal figure high probability state; c time saving state), etc.]. Means,
The third time saving state is a time saving state that may be started when the time saving symbol is displayed as a result of the variable display of the special symbol.
The time saving symbol is a symbol different from the jackpot symbol,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the game control means may be capable of starting only the third time saving state, or may be capable of starting a state other than the third time saving state. Further, the game control means may always start the third time saving state, or may not start the third time saving state.

Further, the third time saving state may be started only when the time saving symbol is displayed as a result of the variation display of the special symbol, or the time saving symbol may be started as a result of the variation display of the special symbol. It may be started in a case other than the case where is displayed. Further, the third time saving state may be started whenever the time saving symbol is displayed as a result of the variation display of the special symbol, or the time saving symbol is displayed as the result of the variation display of the special symbol. It may not be started.

Further, "The game table is a pachinko machine [for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

The following will be added, including what has been explained so far.

(Appendix 0)
A symbol display means that can execute variable display of special symbols,
A game control means that can control the game state,
It is a game table equipped with
The game control means is a means that can be controlled into a low probability state and a high probability state.
The high-probability state is a state in which the probability that the result of the variation display of the special symbol is a big hit is higher than that of the low-probability state.
The game control means is a means capable of starting a second time saving state.
The second time saving state is the number of times that the result of the variation display of the special symbol that is continuously lost without becoming a big hit is displayed after the big hit game ends and shifts to the low probability state (hereinafter, "" It is a time-saving state that may shift when the number of fits is the first.
After the second time saving state is started, the second time saving state ends when the result of the variation display of the special symbol that is out of the second number of times is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit.
The second time saving state is not started from the end of the second time saving state until a big hit.
A game table characterized by that.

FIG. 38 is a front view of an enclosed pachinko machine to which the present invention can be applied.

In the enclosed pachinko machine 900 shown in FIG. 38, a predetermined number of game media (for example, game balls) are circulated inside the game table. That is, the game medium launched from the launching means 901 into the gaming area 902 is discharged from the gaming area 902 and can be supplied to the launching means 901 again. Further, a display means 903 for displaying information on the number of game media (prize balls, rental balls, total number of balls held, etc.) and other information is arranged below the game area 902 on the front of the game table. The upper plate 126 and the lower plate 128 shown in 1 are not provided.

In addition, the mode in which the above-mentioned display means 903 is further provided on the upper plate 126 of the above-mentioned pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 may be adopted, and further, the mode in which the touch panel is provided on the display means 903. You may. That is, the touch panel provided on the display means 903 can function as an operating means. Then, the effect related to the operation of the effect button 136 may be executed by one touch operation, the continuous stroke operation, or the long press operation by the touch panel, or when the long press auto continuous press function is in the effective state, the touch panel. May be configured to perform a pseudo-continuous hitting operation on the touch panel while the touch panel is continuously touched. Further, it may be configured so as not to enable the long press auto continuous striking function. Further, in some productions, the long press auto continuous striking function may be enabled. In other words, the long-press auto-striking function may be activated on the touch panel, may not be activated, may be configured so that there are many effects to be activated, or may be configured so that there are few effects. .. Further, there are a plurality of effects by the continuous hitting operation on the touch panel, and when the touch panel is used, the long press auto continuous hitting function may be configured so as not to be effective in many cases, or may be configured to be small in number. ..

As described above, the pachinko machine 900 shown in FIG. 38 encloses a ball and circulates the enclosed ball in the pachinko machine to use the enclosed ball as a launching ball and pays out the ball. May be executed by credit.

Next, a slot machine (rotating machine) as a gaming table applicable to the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. 39. Here, FIG. 39 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 1000 applicable to the present invention as viewed from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 39 includes a main body 1001 and a front door 1002 that is attached to the front of the main body 1001 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 1001. Inside the center of the main body 1001 (not shown in FIG. 39), three reels (left reel 1010, middle reel 1011 and right reel 1012) in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged are stored on the outer peripheral surface of the slot machine 1000. It is configured to rotate internally. These reels 1010 to 1012 are rotationally driven by a driving means such as a stepping motor.

In this embodiment, an appropriate number of symbols are printed on the strip-shaped members at equal intervals, and the strip-shaped members are attached to a predetermined circular tubular frame material to form each reel 1010 to 1012. When viewed from the player, approximately three symbols on the reels 1010 to 1012 are displayed in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 1013, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. Then, by rotating each reel 1010 to 1012, the combination of symbols that can be seen by the player changes. That is, each reel 1010 to 1012 functions as a display means for variably displaying a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display means, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be adopted in addition to the reel. Further, in the present embodiment, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 1000, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

On the back surface of each reel 1010 to 1012, a reel backlight (not shown) for illuminating each symbol displayed on the symbol display window 1013 is arranged. It is desirable that the reel backlight is shielded for each symbol so that the individual symbols can be evenly illuminated. Inside the slot machine 1000, an optical sensor (not shown) including a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit is provided in the vicinity of each reel 1010 to 1012, and the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit of this optical sensor are provided. A light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the spaces. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the position of the symbol on the reel in the rotation direction is determined, and the reels 1010 to 1012 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the winning line.

The winning line indicator lamp 1020 is a lamp indicating a valid winning line 1014. The valid winning line is predetermined by the number of medals bet as a game medium. There are 5 winning lines 1014. For example, if one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line is valid, and if two medals are bet, the upper horizontal winning line and the lower horizontal winning line are added. If three medals are valid and three medals are bet, the five lines with the addition of the right-down winning line and the upper-right winning line will be valid as the winning line. The number of winning lines 1014 is not limited to 5 lines, and for example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line, the upper horizontal winning line, the lower horizontal winning line, and the right. Five lines, a down winning line and an upper right winning line, may be valid as winning lines. Hereinafter, a valid winning line may be referred to as a valid line.

The notification lamp 1023 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus) has been internally won in the internal lottery described later, or that the bonus game is in progress. The game medal insertable lamp 1024 is a lamp for notifying the player that the game medal can be inserted. The re-game lamp 1022 informs the player that the current game can be re-played (no need to insert a medal) when the re-game, which is one of the winning roles in the previous game, is won. It is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 1028 is a lamp for directing.

The medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (called credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. In this embodiment, a maximum of three medals are inserted each time the medal insertion button 1030 is pressed, two medals are inserted when the medal insertion button 1031 is pressed, and 3 when the medal insertion button 1032 is pressed. It is designed to be thrown in. Hereinafter, the medal insertion button 1032 is also referred to as a MAX medal insertion button. The game medal insertion lamp 1029 lights up a number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when a predetermined number of medals are inserted, the game start operation for notifying that the game start operation is possible. The lamp 1021 lights up.

The medal insertion slot 1041 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals at the start of the game. That is, the medal can be inserted electronically by pressing the medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032, or the actual medal can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion port 1041. Is. The stored number display 1025 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) numerically. The payout number display 1027 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning some winning combination. In the present embodiment, the stored number display 1025, the game information display 1026, and the payout number display 1027 are composed of a 7-segment (SEG) display.

The start lever 1035 is a lever-type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 1010 to 1012. That is, when a desired number of medals are inserted into the medal insertion port 1041 or the medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032 are operated to operate the start lever 1035, the reels 1010 to 1012 start rotating. The operation on the start lever 1035 is called the game start operation.

The stop button unit 1036 is provided with stop buttons 1037 to 1039 as an example of the operating means. The stop buttons 1037 to 1039 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 1010 to 1012 that have started to rotate by operating the start lever 1035, and are associated with each reel 1010 to 1012. Hereinafter, the operation for the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the final stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. The reel that is the target of the first stop operation is called the first stop reel, the reel that is the target of the second stop operation is called the second stop reel, and the reel that is the target of the third stop operation is called the third stop reel. A light emitting body may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 1037 to 1039, and when the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 can be operated, the light emitting body can be turned on to notify the player.

The medal return button 1033 is a button for removing medals by pressing the button when the inserted medals are jammed. The checkout button 1034 is a button for settling medals and bet medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000 and discharging them from the medal payout outlet 1055. The door key hole 1040 is a hole for inserting a key for unlocking the front door 1002 of the slot machine 1000. The medal payout outlet 1055 is a payout exit for paying out medals.

On the right side of the medal insertion button 1032, a chance button 1100 is provided as an example of the operating means. The chance button 1100 can be operated in relation to the operation of the reels 1010 to 1012, or can be operated in relation to the display of the liquid crystal display device 1057. Further, the chance button 1100 can take a plurality of states like the pachinko machine 100 according to the above embodiment, and the state may be changed during the operation valid period of the chance button 1100.

The information display button unit 1050 is provided with an information display button 1046. The information display button 1046 is, for example, an operation button for calling a user menu (for example, a menu for setting game history information of an individual player), and is composed of a plurality of buttons. In this embodiment, the information display button 1046 corresponds to an operating means.

A title panel 1062 for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps is provided at the lower part of the stop button unit 1036, and the title panel lamp 1064 is a lamp for lighting the title panel 1062. At the bottom of the title panel 1062, a medal payout outlet 1055 and a medal tray 1061 are provided.

The sound hole 1081 is a hole for outputting the sound of the speaker provided inside the slot machine 1000 to the outside. The side lamps 1044 provided on the left and right parts of the front door 1002 are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. An effect device 1060 is arranged on the upper part of the front door 1002, and a sound hole 1043 is provided on the upper part of the effect device 1060. The effect device 1060 includes a shutter (shielding device) 1063 composed of two right shutters 1063a and a left shutter 1063b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) arranged behind the shutter 1063. When the right shutter 1063a and the left shutter 1063b are opened horizontally in front of the liquid crystal display device 1057, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) is displayed in front of the slot machine 1000 (game). It has a structure that appears on the person's side).

Even if it is not a liquid crystal display device, it may be configured to be able to display various production images and various game information. For example, a multi-segment display (7-segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, and a plasma display. , A reel (drum), or a display device including a projector and a screen. Further, the display screen has a square shape, and the entire display screen is configured to be visible to the player. In the case of the present embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but it may be square. Further, it is also possible to provide an ornament (not shown) on the periphery of the display screen so that the display screen looks irregular as a result of a part of the periphery of the display screen being hidden by the ornament. In the case of this embodiment, the display screen is a flat surface, but may have a curved surface.

The game console according to the present invention is shown in FIG. 40A, "a bill is inserted into the bill insertion slot 2002, a lottery is executed based on the bet 2004 and start 2006 operations, and the lottery result is displayed on the lottery result display device 2008. However, at the time of winning, the number of privilege coins is added to the number of remaining credits, and when cashout 2009 is selected, the receipt issuing machine 2010 issues a receipt with a code corresponding to the number of remaining credits. It may be.

Further, as shown in FIG. 3B, a mobile phone 3000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data that realizes the present invention, and as shown in FIG. 3C, electronic data that realizes the present invention. The present invention may be applied to a portable game machine 4000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data, and a home video game machine 5000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data according to the present invention.

More specifically, the mobile phone 3000 in FIG. 3B has an operation unit operated by the player, a data acquisition unit that acquires data related to the game through the mobile phone line, and data related to the acquired game (book). It includes a storage unit that stores electronic data) that realizes the invention, and a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

The portable game machine 4000 in FIG. 6C has an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit for acquiring data related to a game from a predetermined storage medium (DVD or the like), and data related to the acquired game (the present invention). It is provided with a storage unit that stores electronic data) that realizes the above, and a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit. In the home video game machine 5000 shown in FIG. 6D, an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit for acquiring data related to a game from a predetermined storage medium (DVD or the like), and data related to the acquired game ( It includes a storage unit that stores electronic data) that realizes the present invention, and a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

Further, as shown in FIG. 6E, it may be applied to a data server 6000 that stores electronic data that realizes the present invention. In some cases, electronic data realizing the present invention may be downloaded from the data server 6000 to the home video game machine 5000 shown in FIG. 6D via an Internet line.

Further, the present invention can be applied to execute a game even in a game program in which the operation of an actual machine such as a pachinko machine is simulated for a home-use game machine. In that case, as the recording medium for recording the game program, a DVD-ROM, a CD-ROM, an FD (flexible disk), or any other recording medium can be used.

Further, the present invention has given an example of a pachinko machine and a slot machine as a game table, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be applied to an arrange ball game machine, a rock game machine, a smart ball, and the like.

In addition, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention merely list the most suitable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what has been done. In addition, even if the constituent requirements are included only in the description of the embodiment, the embodiment, the modified example, the various examples, the appendices, etc. described above, the constituent requirement may be the other embodiment or the embodiment. It may be applied to a modified example, various examples, an appendix, and the like. That is, unless there is a factor that hinders the application, the constituent requirements contained only in the description of the embodiment, the embodiment, the modification, the various examples, the appendix, etc. are applied to other embodiments, the embodiment, and the modification. Even if it is applied to examples, various examples, and appendices, it holds as one cohesive technical idea.

Hereinafter, with reference to FIGS. 41 to 61, a game table to which the present invention can be applied (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine or a spinning game machine such as a slot machine 100) will be described in detail. As a general rule, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 41 to 61 are used only for the explanations using FIGS. 41 to 61, and even when overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, FIGS. 41 to 41 to 61 are used. In the description using FIG. 61, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 41 to 61 are prioritized.
<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. 41. The figure is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side).

The pachinko machine 100 is a game table on which a player can obtain a profit when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and launches an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door with a ball storage plate 108, and the like. The device 110 and the game board 200 are provided on the front surface (player side) thereof.

The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertically rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (island equipment or the like) provided in a game machine installation shop.

The main body 104 is a door member provided inside the outer frame 102, having a locking function, and rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112 as a base body of a vertically rectangular gaming machine. .. Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space portion 114 inside. A clerk at a store (game store) in which the pachinko machine 100 is installed can open and close the main body 104, and is provided with a main body opening sensor 1041 for detecting that the main body 104 has been opened.

The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104, which is the front side of the pachinko machine 100, via a hinge portion 112 so as to have a locking function and can be opened and closed. Is a door member having an opening. A clerk at a game store can also open and close the front frame door 106, and a front frame door sensor 1061 for detecting that the front frame door 106 has been opened is also provided. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening, and the speaker 120, the left frame lamp 122L, the right frame lamp 122R, and the upper frame lamp 122U are provided on the front side. Is installed. A space in which the game area 124 is provided is divided between the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. The front frame door 106 corresponds to an example of a door body. In this embodiment, a lamp whose light source is an LED is also referred to as a lamp.

The door 108 with a ball storage plate is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a locking function and to be opened and closed. The door 108 with a ball storage plate is opened by pushing an opening lever 1081 that can be operated with the front frame door 106 open. Further, a door sensor 1082 with a ball storage plate that detects that the door 108 with a ball storage plate has been opened is also provided. The door 108 with a ball storage plate 126 can store a plurality of game balls (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “balls”) and is provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110. A ball removal button 130 for ejecting the game balls stored in the ball storage plate 126 from the ball storage plate 126 by the player's operation, and a game ball guided to the launching device 110 by the player's operation on the game board. A ball launching handle 134 that launches into the game area 124, an effect button 136 that changes the effect mode of various effect devices by the operation of the player, and a button lamp 138 that is built in the effect button 136 and emits light of the effect button 136. , A ball lending operation button 140 that gives a ball lending instruction to a card unit (CR unit) installed in a game store. Further, although not shown in FIG. 41, a return operation button for instructing the card unit to return the player's balance is also provided on the right side of the ball lending operation button 140. Further, it also has an operation key unit 190 in which a cross key and an enter button are arranged.

The launching device 110 is attached below the main body 104, and has a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching mallet 148 that hits the game ball with the tip of the launching rod 146. , Equipped with. While the ball launching handle 134 is continuously launched by the player, the launching device 110 launches the game ball into the game area 124 of the game board every predetermined firing period (for example, 0.6 seconds). It fires at the target and corresponds to an example of a firing means.

FIG. 42 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 41 as viewed from the back side.

The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, and is located at a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls and below the ball tank 150, at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 for guiding the ball falling through the formed communication hole to the payout device 152 located on the right side of the back surface is arranged.

The payout device 152 is composed of a tubular member, and includes a payout motor (not shown), a sprocket, and a payout sensor inside the payout device 152. The payout device 152 is removable, and when mounted at a predetermined position, it connects to the downstream end of the tank rail 154.

The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor, and temporarily retains the game ball that has flowed down into the payout device 152 after passing through the tank rail 154, and drives the payout motor to rotate by a predetermined angle. As a result, the temporarily stagnant game balls are sent out one by one below the payout device 152. That is, the payout device 152 is a kind of ball feeding device that applies a driving force to the game ball and conveys the game ball.

The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is passing, either a high or low signal is passed, and when the game ball is not passing. The signal of either high or low is output to the payout control unit 600 (see FIG. 44). The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor is configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) and reach the ball storage dish 126 arranged on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 has a predetermined value. Based on the fact that the granting condition is satisfied, the player is given (paid out) an amount of game value (game ball) according to the granting condition by this configuration.

On the left side of the drawing of the payout device 152, there is a main board case 158 for accommodating the main board 156 constituting the main control unit 300 (see FIG. 44) that performs control processing of the entire game, and processing information generated by the main control unit 300. Based on the processing information generated by the first sub-board case 162 and the first sub-control unit 400 that house the first sub-board 160 constituting the first sub-control unit 400 (see FIG. 44) that performs control processing related to the effect. A second sub-board case 166 that houses a second sub-board 164 that constitutes a second sub-control unit 500 (see FIG. 44) that performs control processing related to the effect, and a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to payout of game balls (see FIG. 44). A payout board case 172 for accommodating a payout board 170 including an error release switch 168 that constitutes (see FIG. 44) and cancels an error by an operation of a game clerk, and a launch control unit 630 that performs control processing related to launching a game ball (FIG. 44). A power switch that constitutes a launch board case 176 that houses the launch board 174 that constitutes (see), a power control unit 660 that supplies power to various electrical game devices (see FIG. 44), and turns the power on and off by the operation of a game clerk. A power supply board case 184 that houses a power supply board 182 including a 178 and a RAM clear switch 180 that outputs a RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300 by being operated when the power is turned on, and a signal between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit. The interface unit 606 for transmitting and receiving the above is arranged.

Further, in the present embodiment, the setting change key 192, the setting change button 194, and the accessory ratio / setting display 196 are provided on the main board 156. In the present embodiment, when the setting change key 192 is operated on the condition that the RAM clear switch 180 is pressed when the power is turned on, the setting change mode can be set to at least one of a plurality of settings having different jackpot probabilities. Can be migrated to. In the setting change mode, the current setting is displayed on the accessory ratio / setting display 196, and the clerk can change the setting by pressing the setting change button 194 while checking this. Even if the RAM clear switch 180 is not pressed when the power is turned on, the setting may be changed when the setting change key 192 is operated when the power is turned on.

The accessory ratio / setting display 196 is a 7-segment LED board mounted on the main board 156 and arranged inside the main board case 158, and is attached in a manner visible to the clerk. As shown in FIG. 411 (A), the accessory ratio / setting display 196 has two-digit 7-segment LEDs arranged one above the other and a one-digit seven-segment LED modularized on the right side. The accessory ratio monitor is an indicator for notifying the accessory ratio (YH) and the continuous accessory ratio (RY), and the setting monitor is a monitor for confirming the current setting. The accessory ratio / setting display 196 is composed of, for example, a single-color LED of red, but may be capable of emitting light in three colors of red, green, and orange, or may be a full-color LED. At least a part of the accessory ratio / setting display 196 may be provided on the game board 200, for example, so that the player can see it.

Further, in the present embodiment, the DIP switch board 198 is arranged on the back surface of the first sub-board case 162. Details of the DIP switch board 198 will be described later.

FIG. 43A is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. Here, the arrows d2 and d3 indicate the directions in which the pachinko machine 100 is fixed at the installation location. The arrow d2 indicates the width direction (sometimes referred to as the left-right direction) of the pachinko machine 100, and the left hand may be referred to as the left and the right hand may be referred to as the right in front view. The arrow d3 indicates the height direction (sometimes referred to as the vertical direction) of the pachinko machine 100, and the higher one may be referred to as the upper one and the lower one may be referred to as the lower one. Although not shown in FIG. 43, in the depth direction (sometimes referred to as the front-rear direction) of the pachinko machine 100, the front side to be the player side may be referred to as the front side or the front side, and the back side may be referred to as the rear side. Or it may be called the back side.

The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 by using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104.

Various structures can be adopted for the mounting structure of the game board 200 to the main body 104. For example, the front left side portion 200a of the game board 200 is inserted into the front view left side (hinge portion 112 side) of the main body 104, and here. It is possible to adopt a structure in which the game board 200 is rotated around the center of rotation and the right side portion 200b of the game board 200 is pressed against the main body 104 to be set. Such a structure can improve workability. In some cases.

The game board 200 is a unit in which various parts are attached to the game board 201 which is a plate-shaped main body. The game board 201 is made of, for example, resin, and its surface (front surface) constitutes a decorative surface on which a character or the like of the pachinko machine 100 is displayed. The decorative surface may be formed, for example, by pasting a sheet on which a character of the pachinko machine 100 or the like is printed. A vibration sensor SR3 is arranged at the lower right of the game plate 201. When it is detected by the vibration sensor SR3, error processing (for example, notification by an image or sound, game stop that makes it impossible to continue the game, etc.) can be performed. The vibration sensor SR3 may be another fraud detection sensor such as a magnetic sensor.

The outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are arranged on the game board 200 to form a game area 124 in which the game ball can roll. A part of the outer rail 202 is formed by a rail member 209 that can be attached to and detached from the main body 104. Of the game area 124, the area between the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 forms a guide area 201a for guiding the launched game ball.

An area other than the game area 124 of the game board 200 may be referred to as a non-game area. The gaming area 124 and the non-gaming area can be distinguished from each other with the outer rail 202 as a boundary. Further, the area inside the area through which the game ball passes with the firing intensity of the game ball maximized can be called at least the game area 124. The game area 124 may include an area through which the game ball does not pass due to the presence of the effect device or the like in the game area 124. The game area 124 may be referred to as a flow-down area at the point where the game ball flows down during the game, and the non-game area may be referred to as a non-flow-down area at the point where the game ball does not flow down during the game except for maintenance and accidents. The entire area of the game area 124 may be referred to as a flow-down area, but an area in which the game ball does not flow down due to the presence of an effect device or the like may be referred to as a non-flow-down area.

A decorative symbol display device 208 is arranged at substantially the center of the game area 124. The decorative design display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for the decorative design and the effect, and is configured by a liquid crystal display device (LCD: Liquid Crystal Display) in the present embodiment. The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas of a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a and the middle symbol display area 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Further, the positions and sizes of the display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, and 208d can be freely changed in the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative pattern display device 208, it may be configured to be able to display various effects and various game information even if it is not a liquid crystal display device. For example, a dot matrix display device may be used. , 7-segment display device, organic EL (ElectroLuminessence) display device, reel (drum) type display device, leaf type display device, plasma display, and other display devices including a projector may be adopted.

A main control lamp board 254 is provided below the game area 124.

FIG. 43B is an enlarged view of various lamps mounted on the main control lamp board 254.

As shown in FIG. 43B, the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, and the normal symbol hold lamp 216 are on the main control lamp board 254. , The special symbol 1 hold lamp 218, the special symbol 2 hold lamp 220, the high-accuracy middle lamp RK, the electric support middle lamp RD, the right-handed lamp RM, and the round display lamp RR are arranged. Hereinafter, a normal symbol may be referred to as a "normal symbol" and a special symbol may be referred to as a "special symbol".

The normal figure display device 210 is a display device for displaying a normal figure, and in this embodiment, it is composed of two vertical LEDs. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying special figures, and in the present embodiment, they are each composed of two upper and lower stages, for a total of eight LEDs.

The normal figure holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of holding normal figure variable games (details will be described later), and in the present embodiment, the normal figure variable games are held up to a predetermined number (for example, four). It is possible to do. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 is a lamp for indicating the number of special figure variable games being held, and in the present embodiment, it is possible to hold up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of special figure variable games. It is supposed to be. Further, the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 is a lamp for indicating the number of special figure variable games held, and in the present embodiment, the special figure variable games are held up to a predetermined number (for example, four). Is possible.

Further, the high-probability middle lamp RK is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high-probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur, or that the game state is in a high-probability state. The electric support medium lamp RD is a lamp for indicating that the variation display time of a normal symbol is shortened and the blade member 2311 of the electric tulip (electric chew), which will be described later, is in an electric support state where it is easy to open for a long time. .. The right-handed indicator lamp RM is a lamp for indicating that the player is in a jackpot game state, a probability change state, and an electric support state, and is in a state where the player can obtain the benefit by hitting the right side. The round display lamp RR is a lamp for indicating the number of rounds in the big hit game related to the big hit when the big hit is made.

The game board 200 shown in FIG. 43A is provided with a warp device 242 and a stage 244 in a rollable area of the game ball. The warp device 242 discharges the game ball that has entered the warp inlet 242a provided on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 from the warp outlet 242b to the stage 244. The stage 244 is provided below and in front of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is a stage in which the game ball passing through the warp device 242 shows movements such as reciprocating motion and rotational motion. In this stage 244, the game ball reciprocates or rotates, so that the residence time of the game ball becomes long.

Further, in the upper part of the game area 124, the first effect movable body 7 is arranged supported by the main body 104. The first effect movable body 7 is provided with a rectangular light emitting unit 71 in which a plurality of light emitting diodes capable of emitting light in full color are arranged. Further, on the right side of the game area 124, a second effect movable body 8 that imitates the right arm of a person is arranged. The second effect movable body 8 is composed of an upper arm portion 81 and a forearm portion 82, and has an upper arm motor (not shown) that rotates the upper arm portion at the shoulder position and a forearm portion (not shown) that rotates the forearm portion at the elbow position. It includes a motor and a finger motor (not shown) that bends and stretches five fingers. The second effect movable body 8 is moved by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor with the front of the decorative symbol display device 208 as a movable area.

As shown in FIG. 43 (a), a part of the upper part of the game area 124 is covered with the decorative cover 203. Further, the upper right portion of the game area 124 is covered with the decorative upper right cover 205, and the normal drawing start port 228 is arranged at the back (rear side) of the decorative upper right cover 205. The normal drawing start port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124, and in the present embodiment, the right side of the game board 200. One is arranged in. The balls that have passed through the starting port 228 are not discharged to the game island side, but when they enter, a predetermined number (for example, one) of prize balls are paid out and the entered game balls are ejected. It may be guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and discharged to the game island side. When the predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the normal drawing start port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts the normal drawing variation game by the normal drawing display device 210.

Further, in the present embodiment, one first special drawing start port 230 is arranged in the lower center of the game board 200. A star-shaped effect lamp 206 is arranged directly below the first special drawing start port 230. Further, a sub liquid crystal display device 207 is arranged on the left side of the first special drawing start port 230. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the start port 230 of the first special figure, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 42 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, 4) of balls are stored as prize balls. At the same time as discharging to the plate 126, the special figure variation game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. The ball that has entered the first special figure start port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. Further, in the present embodiment, the attacker unit 23 is provided in the lower right portion of the game area 124, and the attacker unit 23 is also separately provided with the electric chew type first special figure start port. Hereinafter, the first special figure start port 230 provided in the lower center of the game board 200 is referred to as the first special figure start port (fixed) 230, and the first special figure start of the electric chew type separately provided in the attacker unit 23. The mouth may be referred to as the first special figure starting port (variable) 231 to distinguish between the two. The blade member 2311 of the first special figure start port (variable) 231 advances and retreats in the front-rear direction, forms a ball passage in the advanced state, and is in a difficult-to-win state, and in the retracted state, the winning is easy. In the following description, the advancement of the blade member 2311 may be referred to as closing, and the retracting of the blade member 2311 may be referred to as opening. Further, a light emitting diode (not shown) capable of emitting light in full color is also arranged in the attacker unit 23.

Further, in addition to the first special figure starting port (variable) 231, the attacker unit 23 is also provided with a second special drawing starting port 232, a first variable winning opening 234, and a second variable winning opening 235. These variable winning openings may be referred to as "attackers". The first door member 2341 of the first variable winning opening (attacker) 234 advances and retreats in the front-rear direction, forms a ball passage in the advanced state, and is in a difficult-to-win state, and in the retracted state, the winning is easy. In the following description, the advancement of the first door member 2341 may be referred to as closing, and the retracting of the first door member 2341 may be referred to as opening. The second door member 2351 of the second variable winning opening (attacker) 235 also advances and retreats in the front-rear direction, but unlike the first door member 2341, in the advanced state, it is in a state where it is easy to win a prize while forming a ball passage, and it retreats. If you do, it will be difficult to win a prize. In the following description, the advancement of the second door member 2351 may be referred to as opening, and the retracting of the second door member 2351 may be referred to as closing.

Due to the arrangement of the first special drawing start port (fixed) 230 provided in the lower center shown in FIG. 43 (a), it is difficult for a game ball to enter the ball when hitting right. .. On the other hand, in the central portion of the stage 244 described above, there is a special route 244a that facilitates the ball that has reached the stage 244 to enter the first special figure start port (fixed) 230 provided at the lower center of the game board 200. It is provided. It is also possible to aim at the first special drawing start port (fixed) 230 from the left side without going through the stage 244. Therefore, the first special figure start port (fixed) 230 provided at the lower center of the game board 200 is a start port where a ball can be expected to enter by hitting left.

Further, although not shown, the game area 124 is provided with a plurality of general winning openings. When a ball enters the general winning opening, a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects it, and assuming that the general winning opening has won a prize, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, 4) of balls is used as a winning ball. It is discharged to the ball storage dish 126. The ball that has entered the general winning opening is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

In addition, in the game area 124, a disk-shaped ball striking direction changing member 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails are arranged, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, any winning opening or starting is provided. An out port 240 is provided for guiding the ball that did not win a prize to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

In this pachinko machine 100, the player supplies the balls stored in the ball storage plate 126 to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the player's operation handle, and launches the rod. And, it is launched into the game area 124 through the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 by the launching mallet. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 flows downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail, etc., and wins in various winning openings or starting openings, whichever winning opening or The out port 240 is reached without winning a prize at the start port or only by passing through the start port 228. Further, in the present embodiment, a discharge ball receiving port (not shown) for receiving all the game balls discharged from the game board 200 is formed at the lower side of the space 114 of the main body 104 so as to open upward. An out-ball detection sensor SWout that detects the passage of a game ball received at the discharge ball receiving port is provided at a predetermined position on the main body 104. The out-ball detection sensor SWout may be provided on the game board 200 side. In the present embodiment, all the game balls discharged from the game board 200 (including the game balls discharged from the out port 240 and the game balls winning in various winning openings) are accepted by the discharge ball receiving port. Although it is configured to be discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 100 via a predetermined discharge passage, only the game balls discharged from the out port 240 may pass through the out ball detection sensor SWout.

Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 44. The figure shows a functional block diagram of the control unit. The control units of the pachinko machine 100 are roughly classified into a main control unit 300 that controls a central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter, simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. The first sub-control unit 400 that performs control, the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the commands transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and the main control unit 300 according to the commands transmitted by the main control unit 300. It is configured to include a payout control unit 600 that controls the payout of the game ball, a launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of the game ball, and a power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supply to the pachinko machine 100. There is.

First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing a control program and various data, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a time. A counter timer 312 for measuring the number of times, etc., a WDT314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing, and a random number value generation circuit (counter circuit) 318 (assuming that this circuit has two counters built-in). Is installed. Other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this point is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock. Further, the random number value generation circuit 318 is used as a hardware random number counter that fluctuates a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time a clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 316a is received. Although the random number value generation circuit 318 is built in the basic circuit 302, it may be connected to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the basic circuit 302 receives signals output from a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball passing through each start port, a winning port, and a variable winning port, and various sensors 320 including a ball storage plate full tank sensor. A sensor circuit 322 for receiving and outputting the amplification result and the comparison result with the reference voltage to the CPU 304, the random number value generation circuit 318, etc. in the basic circuit 302, and a predetermined symbol display device, for example, the first special figure display device 212. A drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the second special figure display device 214, a drive circuit 326 for performing display control of a predetermined symbol display device, for example, a normal figure display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example,). , General figure hold lamp 216, special figure 1 hold lamp 218, special figure 2 hold lamp 220, high accuracy middle lamp RK, electric support middle lamp RD, right-handed lamp RM, round display lamp RR, etc.) Drive circuit 330 and a drive means for driving a predetermined movable member, for example, a blade member 2311 of the first special figure start port (variable) 231 as an ordinary electric accessory, and a first variable prize as a special electric accessory. It is connected to a drive circuit 334 for controlling various solenoids 332 including a drive means for driving the first door member 2341 of the port 234 and the second door member 2351 of the second variable winning opening 235. In this example, the crystal oscillator 316a and the random number value generation circuit 318 are separately provided, but the crystal oscillator 316a may be included in the random number value generation circuit 318.

When the ball detection sensor detects that the ball has won a prize in the first special figure starting ports 230 and 231, the sensor circuit 322 sends a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the random number value generation circuit 318 in the basic circuit 302. Output to. The random number value generation circuit 318 that received this signal latches the value at that timing of the counter corresponding to the first special figure start ports 230 and 231 and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value corresponding to the special figure 1. Stored in the register. Further, when the random number value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the ball has won the second special figure start port 232, the value at that timing of the counter corresponding to the second special figure start port 232 is similarly set. Latch and store the latched value in the built-in counter value storage register corresponding to FIG.

Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 passes through the information output circuit 336 and an external terminal board (not shown) to an external hall computer (not shown). The game information (for example, the game state) of the pachinko machine 100 is output to the information input circuit 350 provided in the above.

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300, and the voltage monitoring circuit 338 provides the voltage value of the power supply. Is less than a predetermined value (9V in this example), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on, and the CPU 304 is provided from the start signal output circuit 340. When the start signal is input, the game control is started (the main process of the main control unit, which will be described later, is started).

Further, the main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600, respectively. 1 Communication with the sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is possible. The information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 is unidirectional communication, and the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 is bidirectional communication. The main control unit 300 is configured so that signals such as commands can be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400, but the first sub control unit 400 is configured so that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted to the main control unit 300. is doing. However, the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 may be configured to be performed by two-way communication. Further, the payout control unit 600 is configured so that a signal such as a command can be transmitted to the main control unit 300, but is configured so that a signal such as a command cannot be transmitted from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300. May be good.

Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that mainly controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. It is equipped with a serial communication control circuit 424. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. Further, a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various effect data is connected to the basic circuit 402. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs. Further, the ROM 406 may be provided in the basic circuit 402. The serial communication control circuit 424 connects the game board lamp drive circuit 440 for controlling the game board lamp 442 and the game board frame lamp drive circuit 450 for controlling the game board frame lamp 452. Then, lighting control is performed by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 440 and the game underframe lamp drive circuit 450. The game board lamp 442 includes a star-shaped effect lamp 206, a light emitting unit 71 provided in the first effect movable body 7, a light emitting diode (not shown) arranged in the attacker unit 23, and the like. There is. Further, the game table frame lamp 452 includes a left frame lamp 122L, a right frame lamp 122R, an upper frame lamp 122U, a button lamp 138 for emitting the effect button 136, and the like.

Further, the basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC (S-ROM) 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and an amplifier), an upper first effect movable body 7 shown in FIG. 43 (a), and a second on the right side. A drive circuit 422 for controlling the drive of various effect devices such as the effect movable body 8, a sensor circuit 428, and a volume switch 163 for adjusting the volume output from the speaker 120 are connected. The sensor circuit 428 is a basic circuit based on detection signals from various movable body sensors 430 that detect the current position of various effect devices and the button sensor 426 that detects the pressing of various buttons constituting the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 190. Output to 402.

Next, the second sub-control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives a control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. ing. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a memory 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 512 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. VDP (VDP) that reads out the image data or the like stored in the ROM 506 based on the signal from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518, and displays the image on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub liquid crystal display device 207. It is equipped with a video display processor) 516. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. Further, a ROM 506 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for displaying an image, and the like are stored is connected to the basic circuit 502. In the present embodiment, the memory 508 is used as the temporary storage area, and the memory 508 is composed of a recording medium (for example, EEPROM, flash memory, etc.) capable of holding the storage state even when the power supply is cut off. Thereby, for example, the information for displaying the display related to the jackpot history can be retained even when the main control unit 300 is initialized or the setting is changed. A RAM whose stored information volatilizes when the power is cut off may be used.

Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and a prize ball or a ball rental ball based on a control signal output by the payout sensor 604. Detects whether or not the payout of is completed. Further, the payout control unit 600 communicates with the card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606. In addition, the payout control unit 600 pays out prize ball information indicating that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls has been paid out and a predetermined number (for example, 25) of loan balls. The ball rental information or the like indicating that is output to the information input circuit 350 via an external terminal board (not shown). Further, a frame sensor 605 is connected to the payout control unit 600. The frame sensor 605 includes a main body opening sensor 1041 that detects that the main body 104 has been opened, a front frame door sensor 1061 that detects that the front frame door 106 has been opened, and the like, and includes the main body 104 and the front frame door. When the 106 is open, these sensors detect it and output an open signal. When the payout control unit 600 outputs the release signal from the frame sensor 605, the payout control unit 600 outputs the door opening information to the main control unit 300.

The launch control unit 630 is an operation of the ball launch handle 134 by the player, which is output by a control signal output by the payout control unit 600 to instruct launch permission or stop, and a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134. Control of the launch solenoid 632 that drives the launch rod 146 and the launch mallet 148 based on the control signal that indicates the launch intensity according to the amount, and the ball feed device 634 that supplies the ball from the ball storage dish 126 to the launch device 110. Take control.

The power supply control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and converts each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the payout device 152, and the like. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 is a power storage circuit (for example, 10 days) for supplying power to a predetermined component (for example, RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the power supply from the outside is cut off. , Capacitor). In this embodiment, the power supply control unit 660 supplies power to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub-control unit 500 with a predetermined voltage, and the payout control unit 600 launches the main control unit 300 and the second sub-control unit 500. Although the control unit 630 is supplied with the power supply of the predetermined voltage, the power supply of the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device through another power supply path.

Next, using FIGS. 45 (a) to 45 (d), the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the normal figure display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of special drawings and general drawings to be used will be explained.

The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first start port sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that the ball has entered the special figure 1 start ports 230 and 231, and the special figure 2 start port 232 has a ball. The special figure 2 variable game is started on condition that the second start port sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that the ball has entered. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the first special figure display device 212 blinks some of the eight lamps (for example, the first lower lamp from the left). "Variation display" (special figure fluctuation game) is performed. Further, when the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special figure display device 214 blinks a part of the eight lamps (for example, the first lower lamp from the left). 2 variable display ”(special figure variable game) is performed. Then, when the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special figure display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 2. After that, the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of the special figure 2. Hereinafter, the variation display from the start of this "variation display of the special figure 1 or 2" to the stop display of the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1 or 2 may be referred to as the variation display of the special figure. The variable display of this special figure may be continuously performed multiple times.

Further, in the present embodiment, the specification for starting the variable display of the special figure in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 regardless of whether or not one special figure performs the variable display of the other special figure (such as this). Pachinko machines with various specifications are sometimes called "simultaneous fluctuation machines").

FIG. 45A shows an example of the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1. In FIG. 45 (a), four types of special figures, "special figure A" to "special figure D", are shown. In FIG. 45A, a white portion in the figure indicates a lamp that is turned off, and a black portion indicates a lamp that is turned on.

In the present embodiment, two types of jackpot symbols (“Special Figure A” and “Special Figure B”) are prepared as the stop symbol modes of Special Figure 1. "Special figure A" is a 6-round (R) normal jackpot symbol, and when "special figure A" is stopped and displayed, the game shifts to a jackpot game state in which the first variable winning opening 234 opens, and the jackpot game ends. After that, the control state becomes the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state. Further, "special figure B" is a 6R probability variable big hit symbol, and when "special figure B" is stopped and displayed, the first variable winning opening 234 shifts to a big hit game state in which the first variable winning opening 234 opens, and control is performed after the big hit game is completed. The state becomes a special figure high probability normal figure low probability state. In this embodiment, two types of jackpot symbols are prepared, but it goes without saying that three or more types of jackpot symbols may be prepared. In addition, a big hit may be prepared in which it is practically difficult to win a prize in some rounds (for example, it is difficult to win a prize due to a short opening).

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, whether or not it is a big hit in the special figure variable game is determined by a lottery of hardware random numbers, and whether it is a normal big hit or a probabilistic big hit is decided by a lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the normal jackpot and the probability variation jackpot is whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (probability variation jackpot) or low (normal jackpot) in the next special figure fluctuation game. Hereinafter, the state in which the probability of winning this jackpot is high is referred to as a special figure high probability state (hereinafter, may be referred to as "special figure probability change" or simply "probability change"), and the state in which the probability is low is referred to as a special figure. It is called a low probability state. In this embodiment, as will be described later, there is almost no difference in the jackpot probability between the special figure low probability state and the special figure high probability state, and the special figure fluctuates between the special figure low probability state and the special figure high probability state. The times are configured to vary greatly. In addition, after the jackpot game is completed, the time may be shortened (electric support state). Here, the electric support state is a predetermined state in which the player's advantage is higher than that of the non-electric support state by shortening the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure fluctuation game to the start of the next big hit. It refers to the state. The time saving will be described in detail later, but the time saving state is referred to as a normal figure high probability state (hereinafter, may be referred to as “normal figure probability change”), and the state not in the normal time saving state is referred to as a normal figure low probability state. In this way, the electric support state (time saving state) is started on condition that the jackpot game is completed. Strictly speaking, the "electric support state" is a state related to a normal figure, and the "time saving state" is a state related to a special figure or a state related to a normal figure and a special figure. A time saving flag is prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, and when the time saving flag is set to ON, it is in the electric support state and is in the normal high probability state. In the high-probability state of the normal figure, it is easier to win the variable game of the normal figure than in the low-probability state of the normal figure (probability change of the normal figure). For example, the winning probability of the normal-figure variable game is 0/100 (that is, it is always out of order) in the normal-figure low-probability state (non-electric support state), whereas the normal-figure high-probability state (electric support state). ) Increases to 100/100 (that is, it always hits). In addition, the fluctuation time of the normal map fluctuation game is shorter in the electric support state than in the non-electric support state (normal map variation and shortness). For example, in the non-electric support state, the fluctuation time of the normal figure variation game of 10 seconds is shortened to 2 seconds in the electric support state. Further, in the electric support state, the opening time in one opening of the blade member 2311 of the special figure 1 starting port (variable) 231 tends to be longer than in the non-electric support state (extension of the electric chew opening period). For example, in the non-electric support state, the electric chew opening period of 0.5 seconds is extended to 2 seconds in the electric support state. Further, in the electric support state, the blade member 2311 is more likely to open than in the non-electric support state (the number of times the electric chew is opened increases). For example, the blade member 2311, which opens only once in the non-electric support state for each winning of the normal drawing start port 228, opens twice in the electric support state (opens for 2 seconds, closes for 1 second, and closes for 2 seconds again). Open). By extending the electric chew opening period and increasing the number of times the electric chew is opened, the probability of entering the special figure 1 starting port (variable) 231 increases. The time saving flag is set to off during the jackpot game. Therefore, the non-electric support state is maintained during the jackpot game. This is because the game ball is picked up by the electric chew with a small number of prize balls, especially in the big hit game, and the prize of the game ball to the first variable winning opening 234 or the second variable winning opening 235 is reduced. This is because there may be a disadvantage. In the present embodiment, in the electric support state (time saving state), the probability change of the normal figure, the change of the normal figure, the extension of the opening period of the electric chew, and the increase of the number of times of opening the electric chew are all performed. If any one of them is performed, the player's advantage will be high, and the electric support state (time saving state) may be set. Alternatively, if either the extension of the electric chew opening period or the increase in the number of times of opening the electric chew is performed, the probability of entering the special figure 1 starting port (variable) 231 is increased, and the electric support state (time saving state) is established. May be good. In the non-electric support state, it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the special figure 1 starting port (variable) 231 than in the electric support state. As described above, the special figure 1 starting port (variable) 231 changes into a winning difficult state in which the game ball is difficult to enter and a winning easy state in which the game ball is easy to enter. The entrance of the special figure 1 starting port (variable) 231 is in a state where it is easy to win a prize for a longer period of time in the electric support state than in the non-electric support state. In the present embodiment, when "special figure A" is stopped and displayed, the electric support state is maintained for 50 times of the special figure variable game after the end of the big hit game to be performed thereafter, and the electric support state is maintained at the 51st time. It shifts to the support state (low probability state in the normal figure). On the other hand, when a big hit without electric support (“Special Figure B”) is won, the state does not shift to the electric support state after the big hit game is completed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the "special figure A" is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state after the big hit game is completed. Further, when the "special figure B" is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes the special figure high probability normal figure low probability state after the big hit game is completed.

Further, in the present embodiment, for the special figure 1, a small hit symbol (“special figure C”) is prepared in addition to the big hit symbol. When a small hit is made with "Special Figure C", the second door member 2351 of the second variable winning opening 235 opens for 0.06 seconds 12 times after the symbol is stopped. The opening time and the number of times of opening the second door member 2351 can be set as appropriate. In the small hit game, when a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) enter the second variable winning opening 235, or when a predetermined amount of game value (predetermined number of balls) is acquired, the small hit game Is completed, and the second door member 2351 is not opened after that. During the small hit game, it shifts to the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. The small hit is a hit in which the control state does not change before and after the small hit game, and after the small hit game ends, the control state returns to the control state before the start of the small hit game.

In the present embodiment, as described above, since the machine is a simultaneous variable machine, there may be a situation in which the special figure 2 is displaying the fluctuation when the special figure 1 becomes a small hit and the game shifts to the small hit game. .. In this case, when a small hit occurs in Special Figure 1, the variation display of Special Figure 2 is interrupted, and when the small hit game related to the small hit ends, the variation display of Special Figure 2 is restarted. In addition, when the special figure 1 becomes a big hit and shifts to the big hit game, the special figure 2 is in a variable display, or when the special figure 2 becomes a big hit and shifts to the big hit game, the special figure 1 changes and displays. In this case, if one special figure becomes a big hit, the variable display of the other special figure is forcibly terminated, the result of the variable display is discarded, and the result of the deviation is displayed. It will be.

Further, in the present embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a lost symbol. "Special figure D" is a lost pattern.

FIG. 45B shows an example of the stop symbol mode of the special figure 2. In FIG. 45 (b), five types of special figures from "special figure a" to "special figure e" are shown, and three types of special figures are jackpot symbols ("special figure a" to "special figure a" to "special figure e". Figure c "). "Special figure a" is a 6R normal jackpot symbol, and when "special figure a" is stopped and displayed, it shifts to a jackpot game state in which the first variable winning opening 234 is opened, and after the jackpot game is completed, it is in a control state. Is in the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state. Further, "special figure b" is a 6R probability variable big hit symbol, and when "special figure b" is stopped and displayed, the first variable winning opening 234 shifts to a big hit game state in which the first variable winning opening 234 is opened, and control is performed after the big hit game is completed. The state becomes a special figure high probability normal figure low probability state. The "special figure c" is a 10R probability variable big hit symbol, and when the "special figure c" is stopped and displayed, the first variable winning opening 234 opens to a big hit game state, and after the big hit game is completed, The control state becomes the special figure high probability normal figure low probability state. It should be noted that a jackpot that is practically difficult to win in some rounds (for example, it is difficult to win due to a short opening) may be prepared. Further, in Special Figure 2, three types of jackpot symbols are prepared, but three or more types of jackpot symbols may be prepared.

Further, also in the special figure 2, a small hit symbol (“special figure d”) is prepared in addition to the big hit symbol. When a small hit is made with "special figure d", the second door member 2351 of the second variable winning opening 235 opens for 0.06 seconds only once after the symbol is stopped. Here, when compared with the small hit symbol of Special Figure 1 (“Special Figure C”), the small hit in Special Figure 1 (Special Figure 1) is compared to the case of small hit in Special Figure 2 (“Special Figure d” is stopped and displayed). When "Fig. C" is stopped and displayed), more game balls can easily enter the second variable winning opening 235, and more balls can be obtained. In other words, the small hit of Special Figure 2 does not give a ball, but the small hit of Special Figure 1 gives a ball. The opening time and the number of times of opening the second door member 2351 can be set as appropriate.

Further, also in Special Figure 2, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a lost symbol. "Special figure e" is a lost pattern.

FIG. 45 (c) shows an example of a decorative pattern. There are 10 types of decorative patterns of the present embodiment, "decoration 1" to "decoration 10". A ball has won a prize in the special figure 1 start port (fixed) 230, the special figure 1 start port (variable) 231 or the special figure 2 start port 232, that is, the special figure 1 start port (fixed) 230 or the special figure 1 start port. On condition that the first start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the (variable) 231 or that the second start port sensor has detected that the ball has entered the special figure 2 start port 232. , "Decoration 1"-> "Decoration 2"-> "Decoration 3"-> ... In some cases, "variable display of decorative symbols" is performed, in which the display is switched in the order of "decoration 9" → "decoration 10" → "decoration 1" → ... That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 variablely displays the decorative symbol separately from the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214. Then, the stop symbol mode, which is a combination of decorative symbols, is stopped and displayed. In the present embodiment, in the normal game state and the electric support state in which the special figure 1 is mainly displayed in a variable manner, the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner in accordance with the variable display in the special figure 1, and the special figure 2 is mainly displayed. In the probabilistic state in which the variation display is performed, the variation display of the decorative symbol is performed in accordance with the variation display of the special figure 2. On the other hand, in the normal game state and the electric support state, even if the variation display of the special figure 2 is performed, the variation display of the decorative symbol is not performed, and the symbol variation display is performed only on the fourth symbol and the second special symbol display device 214, which will be described later. In the probabilistic state, even if the variation display of the special figure 1 is performed, the variation display of the decorative symbol is not performed, and the symbol variation display is performed only on the fourth symbol and the first special symbol display device 212.

A mode other than the case where the first special figure display device 212 confirms and notifies the 6R probability variation jackpot in the normal game state or the electric support state, and the case where the second special figure display device 214 confirms that the 10R probability variation jackpot is in the probability variation state. In the case of notifying a big hit or a small hit, there are 3 decorative symbols having the same numbers other than "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" and "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The combination of the decorative patterns arranged side by side (for example, "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1", "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4", etc.) is stopped and displayed. Further, when a 6R probability variation jackpot (“special figure B”) is definitely notified by the first special figure display device 212 in the normal game state or the electric support state, the 10R probability variation jackpot (“special figure B”) is confirmed by the second special figure display device 214 in the probability variation state. In the case of confirming that it is the special figure c)), "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" or "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Further, in the case of notifying the lost symbol of "special symbol D" or "special symbol e", a combination of decorative symbols other than the combination of decorative symbols described so far (for example, dispersal) is provided in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Eye) is stopped and displayed.

Hereinafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display from the start of this "variable display of the decorative symbol" to the stop display of the stop symbol mode of the decorative symbol is the variable display of the decorative symbol (in the case of "decorative symbol variable display"). There is also.). The variable display of the decorative symbol is performed by being controlled by the second sub-control unit 500.

FIG. 45 (d) shows an example of the stop symbol mode of the normal drawing. There are two types of stop display modes of the normal figure of the present embodiment: a hit symbol "Public figure A" and a missed symbol "Public figure B". Based on the fact that the gate sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that the ball has passed through the normal figure start port 228, the normal figure display device 210 alternately lights two LEDs arranged one above the other. Perform "variable display" (normal map variable game). Then, after the fluctuation time has elapsed, one of the hit symbols "Fu-zu A" and the out-of-order symbol "Fu-zu B" is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 45 (d), the white portion in the figure indicates the location of the lamp to be turned off, and the black portion indicates the location of the lamp to be turned on.

Hereinafter, the display from the start of this "variation display of the normal map" to the stop display of the stop symbol mode of the normal map may be referred to as the variable display of the normal map.

<Main control unit main processing>
Next, with reference to FIG. 46, the main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 44 will be described. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main processing of the main control unit.

The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 44 stores a special figure random value, a special figure round determination random value, a special figure electric support determination random value, a special symbol symbol determination random value, and the like. Further, the RAM 308 is provided with a random number counter that generates these various random number values. Further, the RAM 308 stores the number of reserved special figures, the random value of winning special figures, the results of various determinations (lottery), and the like. Hereinafter, the area for storing the reserved number of the special figure in the RAM 308 may be referred to as the reserved number storage area for the special figure. Furthermore, the RAM 308 is provided with a start information storage unit for special figures divided into a maximum number of areas (4 in this example) in which the start of the winning / failing determination (lottery) can be suspended. A random number storage area for ordinary drawings is also provided. As will be described later, in the start information storage unit for the special figure, a plurality of types of start information are set as one set, and these start information are stored in each set in the winning order (holding order) for each area.

As described above, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 44 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which the start signal is input starts resetting by reset interruption and executes the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 46 according to the control program stored in the ROM 306 in advance.

In step S101, the initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, the stack initial value is set (temporarily set) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, the interrupt mask is set, the I / O 310 is initialized, the initial settings of various variables stored in the RAM 308 are set, and the WDT314 is set. Allow the operation of and set the initial value. In this embodiment, the WDT 314 is set to a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms as an initial value.

In step S103, the value of the counter of WDT314 is cleared, and the time measurement by WDT314 is restarted.

In step S105, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage value of the power supply supplied by the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 via the second sub control unit 500 by the voltage monitoring circuit 338. Monitors whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output when is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment). Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects the power interruption), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect the power interruption), the step returns to step S103. Proceed to S107. Even if the predetermined value (9V) is not reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

In step S107, the initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process of setting a numerical value for setting a cycle for executing the timer interrupt process of the main control unit, which will be described later, in the timer circuit 312 in the timer circuit 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, etc.) A process for outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub-control unit 400), a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

In step S109, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before the power is cut off (before the power is cut off), and when the state before the power is cut off is not returned (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is initialized). ) Proceeds to the processing after step S113 in order to execute the initialization processing.

If it is not determined that the state before the power failure is restored (step S109; No), the cause is whether the RAM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board 182 shown in FIG. 42 is operated by a clerk of a game store or the like. Whether or not it is determined (step S113). That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear signal transmitted when the RAM clear switch 180 is operated is ON (indicating that the operation has been performed). When it is determined that the RAM clear signal is ON (step S113; Yes), it is determined whether or not the setting change key 192 is operated to the ON side (step S115), and the setting change key 192 is operated to the ON side. If it is determined that the case is true (step S115; Yes), the setting change process is executed (step S117).

When the setting change process is executed, the 7-segment corresponding to the setting monitor on the accessory ratio / setting display 196 blinks indicating "1", indicating that the setting can be changed. In this state, each time the setting change button 194 is pressed, the 7-segment of the setting monitor is incremented, and the setting change button 194 is pressed while the 7-segment corresponding to the setting monitor indicates "6". Then, it returns to "1". In the present embodiment, at least one of settings 1 to 6 having different jackpot probabilities can be selected, and the setting is made by operating the setting change key 192 to the OFF side after changing to the desired setting. Is confirmed. At this time, the setting value displayed on the setting monitor is deleted. After that, after the setting is confirmed, the set value can be redisplayed on the setting monitor for a certain period of time (for example, 5 seconds) by operating the setting change button 194. In the present embodiment, the set value is displayed on the setting monitor of the accessory ratio / setting display 196, but for example, it may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 or notified by voice output. good. Further, in the present embodiment, the 6-step setting of the settings 1 to 6 is set, but the setting may be other than the 6-step setting, or the setting may not be changed. Further, in the present embodiment, the initial value of the setting displayed on the setting monitor is set to "1", but the setting value before the power is cut off is retained and the retained setting value is displayed. May be good.

Further, in step S113, when it is not determined that the RAM clear signal is ON (step S113; No), or when it is not determined in step S115 that the setting change key 192 is operated to the ON side (step S113; No). Step S115; No), the process proceeds to step S119 without executing the setting change process of step S117.

In step S119, the initialization process is executed so as to bring the basic circuit 302 into the initial state (step S119). Here, when the RAM clear signal is ON, the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and when the power status information is not information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 (for example,). A checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in (all areas) to a register having a 1-byte structure whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0). Is determined (whether the checksum result is normal or not), and when the checksum result is other than a specific value (for example, 0) (when the checksum result is abnormal). Executes the initialization process to bring the pachinko machine 100 into the initial state. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition is set, the stack initial value is set in the stack pointer (this setting), and all the storage areas of the RAM 308 are initialized. In the present embodiment, the set value set in the setting change process (step S117) is retained even when the initialization is performed. Further, here, a normal return command and a setting command indicating the setting selected in step S117 are set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S119) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and is the same as the power recovery command described later in step S233 of the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300. , Is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S121, after setting the interrupt prohibition, the basic random number initial value update process is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, two initial value generation random number counters for generating the initial values of the normal figure winning random number counter and the special figure random number value counter are updated. For example, assuming that the numerical range that can be taken as the normal figure winning random number value is 0 to 99, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the general figure winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 100, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are updated in the same manner. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S121 except during the timer interrupt process that starts at a predetermined cycle.

On the other hand, in step S111, the power recovery process is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 is read at the time of power interruption, and the stack pointer is reset (this setting). Further, when the power is cut off, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 is read, reset to each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. After that, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the stack pointer and the register after the resetting, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power is turned off. That is, the process is restarted from the instruction following the instruction (predetermined in step S121) that was performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power failure. Further, the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 42 is provided with a transmission information storage area. In this step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the state has returned to the state when the power was turned off, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, which will be described later.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 47. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the timer interrupt process of the main control unit.

The main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 44 includes a timer circuit 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (once every 4 ms in this embodiment), and the main control is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. Part timer interrupt processing is started at a predetermined cycle.

In step S201, the timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

In step S203, the WDT314 is periodically (this) so that the count value of the WDT314 does not exceed the initial setting value (32.8 ms in the present embodiment) and the WDT interrupt does not occur (so as not to detect an abnormality in the process). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every about 2 ms, which is the cycle of interrupting the main control unit timer.

In step S205, the input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update process, detection signals of various sensors 320 shown in FIG. 44 including various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals, and various types are sent to the RAM 308. It is stored in the signal state storage area provided separately for each sensor 320. Taking the detection signal of the ball detection sensor as an example, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected in the timer interrupt processing (about 4 ms before) two times before is stored in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor. Read from the previous detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308, store this information in the detection signal storage area before the previous two times divided in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor, and perform the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before). ), The information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor is read out from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor, and this information is read out from the above-mentioned previous detection signal storage area. Remember in. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-mentioned detection signal storage area this time.

Further, in step S205, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned two-time detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared, and each of them is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor of the above matches the winning determination pattern information. While one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor, this main control unit timer interrupt process, which repeats activation at a very short interval of about 2 ms, is activated several times. Therefore, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S205 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the above-mentioned two-time detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal two times before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection and noise of the ball detection sensor, if the detection signal is stored twice in succession after no detection signal, it is determined that a prize has been won. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 44 stores prize determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no detection signal two times before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time). In this step S205, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is the predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, there is no detection signal two times before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time. (Information indicating that), the general winning opening, the first variable winning opening 234, the second variable winning opening 235, the first special figure starting port (fixed) 230, and the first special drawing starting port (variable). ) 231 and the second special figure start port 232, or the normal figure start port 228 is determined to have passed. That is, it is determined that the balls have entered the general winning openings, these variable winning openings 234, 235, and these starting openings 230, 231, 232, 228. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three times in the first start port sensor that detects the entry of the ball into the first special figure start port (fixed) 230 matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the first 1 It is determined that the special figure start port (fixed) 230 has won a prize, that is, the game medium passing through the predetermined area has been detected, and the subsequent processing associated with the winning of the first special figure start port (fixed) 230 is performed. However, if the information on the presence or absence of the detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the processing associated with the subsequent winning of the first special figure start port (fixed) 230 is not performed. Branch to subsequent processing. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores the winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal two times before, no detection signal last time, and no detection signal this time). After it is determined that there has been a prize once, it is not determined that there was a prize until the information on the presence or absence of the detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the prize judgment clear pattern information, and the prize judgment is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information.

In step S207 and step S209, the basic random number initial value update process and the basic random number update process are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S121 is updated, and then the normal figure winning random number value and the normal figure winning random number value used by the main control unit 300 are used. The random number counter for generating each special figure random number value is updated. For example, assuming that the numerical range that can be taken as the normal figure winning random number value is 0 to 99, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the general figure winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 100, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has gone around as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a winning random number value that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 99, and the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as the initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for generating the winning random number value, and the general figure is used. The initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to set it in the random number counter for generating the winning random value and to determine that the random number counter for generating the winning random value has made one round next. I will do it. In addition to the above-mentioned initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the winning random number of the normal figure has made one round next, it is determined that the random number counter for generating the special figure random number has made one round. The RAM 308 is provided with an initial value storage area for this purpose.

In step S211 the effect random number update process is performed. In this effect random number update process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number value used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

In step S213, the timer update process is performed. In this timer update process, a symbol is displayed on the normal symbol display symbol update timer, the first special symbol display device 212, and the second special symbol display device 214 for measuring the time for displaying the symbol on the normal symbol display device 210 in a fluctuating / stopped manner. Various types including a special symbol display symbol update timer for timing the fluctuation / stop display time, a timer for timing a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined open time, a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, etc. Update the timer.

In step S215, the winning opening counter update process is performed. In this winning opening counter update process, when there is a prize in the winning openings 234, 235 and the starting openings 230, 231, 232, the winning ball number storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each winning opening or each starting opening is stored. The value is read, 1 is added, and the original prize ball number storage area is set.

Further, in step S217, the winning prize acceptance process is performed. In the prize reception process, if a predetermined condition is satisfied, a plurality of types of start information are acquired. The plurality of types of start information acquired here are stored as one set of start information in a vacant area of the start information storage unit provided in the RAM 308 according to the winning order (holding order).

In step S219, which is executed following step S217, the payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information to be output to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. 44 are composed of 1 byte, and the strobe information (when on, it indicates that the data is set) and the bit 6 are set in bit 7. Power-on information (when on, indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4 to 5 this time processing type for encryption (0 to 3), and bits 0 to 3 encrypted. The number of payout requests after chemical processing is shown.

In step S221, the normal map state update process is performed. This normal map state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal map state. For example, in the normal figure state update process in the middle of the normal figure fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned normal figure display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the two LEDs constituting the normal symbol display device 210 are turned on and off alternately. Drive control is performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a variable display of the normal map (normal map variable game).

In addition, in the normal figure state update process at the timing when the normal figure fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the normal figure display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), when the hit flag is on, the hit symbol is displayed. The lighting / extinguishing drive control of the two LEDs constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is performed so as to be a mode, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured so as to display a lost symbol. Controls the lighting and extinguishing of the two LEDs. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings not only in the normal figure state update process but also in various processes. Here, the lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and a setting indicating that the normal drawing stop display is in progress is performed in the setting area. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines one of the hit symbol (normal symbol A shown in FIG. 45 (d)) and the lost symbol (normal symbol B shown in FIG. 45 (d)). Display. After that, for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the normal figure stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display. With this setting, the confirmed and displayed symbol is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the normal map variation game is notified to the player.

If the result of the normal map fluctuation game is a hit, the normal map hit flag is turned on, as will be described later. When the normal figure hit flag is on, in the normal figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the normal figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 A solenoid for opening / closing the blade member 2311 of the first special drawing start port (variable) 231 (various solenoids 332 shown in FIG. 44) is set in the setting area while the normal drawing is in operation and during a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). A signal for holding the blade member 2311 in the open state is output, and information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the blade opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

Further, in the normal drawing state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the attacker unit has a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 msec). A signal for holding the blade member 2311 in the closed state is sent to a solenoid (a part of various solenoids 332 shown in FIG. 44) for opening / closing the blade member 2311 of the first special drawing start port (variable) 231 provided in the 23. At the same time as outputting, information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

Further, in the normal figure state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the setting area of the RAM 308 is set to be inactive. do. Further, if the result of the normal map fluctuation game is a loss, the normal map loss flag is turned on as described later. When this normal figure loss flag is on, even in the normal figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the value of the normal figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). Set the setting area of the RAM 308 to be inactive. In the normal map state update process when the normal map is not operating, the process proceeds to the next step S223 without doing anything.

In step S223, the drawing-related lottery process is performed. In this normal figure-related lottery process, the normal figure variable game and the opening / closing control of the first special figure start port (variable) 231 are not performed (the state of the normal figure is not operating), and the normal figure is on hold. When the number of fluctuating games is 1 or more, the result of the fluctuating game is won or not won by a random number lottery based on the random number value stored in the above-mentioned random number storage area. A hit determination is made to determine whether or not, and if a winner is to be won, the hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. In case of unsuccessful, set the hit flag to off. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, the value of a predetermined random number counter is acquired as the normal figure timer random number value, and based on the acquired normal figure timer random number value, the normal figure display device 210 is used from among a plurality of fluctuation times. One time for variable display of the figure is selected, and this variable display time is stored in the normal figure fluctuation time storage area provided in the RAM 308 as the normal figure fluctuation display time. It should be noted that the number of reserved normal figure variable games is stored in the normal figure reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and each time a hit determination is made, the number of reserved normal figure variable games is calculated. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is stored again in this reserved number storage area. Also, the random value used for the hit judgment is deleted.

Subsequently, the special figure look-ahead process (step S224) is executed. In the special figure pre-reading process, the main control unit 300 pre-reads the increased start information in each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, predetermines the stop symbol and the fluctuation time before the hit / fail determination process, and predetermines. The result (special figure look-ahead result) is stored in the look-ahead result storage unit in the RAM 308.

Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In this special figure 2 state update process, one of the following plurality of processes is performed according to the state of special figure 2.

For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), a predetermined one of the eight LEDs constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is specified. The lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed by repeating the lighting / extinguishing of the LED. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variable game). Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and then the process is terminated. If the number of time reductions stored in the time reduction storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of time reductions.

Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as a 10R jackpot flag, a 6R jackpot flag, a small hit flag, a missed flag, a special figure probability fluctuation flag, and a normal figure probability fluctuation flag. These flags are set on or off based on the determined stop symbol in the special figure 2 related lottery process described later. In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation display time elapses (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), for example, the 10R jackpot flag is on, and the special figure When the probability fluctuation flag is on and the timer probability fluctuation flag is off, the special figure c and 6R jackpot flags shown in FIG. 45 (b) are on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, and the timer probability fluctuation flag is off. In the case, special figure b, 6R jackpot flag is on, special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, normal figure probability fluctuation flag is on, special figure a, small hit flag is on, special figure d, loss When the flag is on, the lighting / extinguishing drive control of the LEDs constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is performed so that each mode of the special figure e is obtained, and the special figure 2 stop display is being displayed in the setting area of the RAM 308. Make settings to indicate that. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 has a 10R probability variable big hit symbol (special figure e), a 6R probability variable big hit symbol (special figure b), a 6R normal big hit symbol (special figure a), and a small hit symbol (special figure a). The final display of any one of the symbol d) and the lost symbol (special symbol e) is performed. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, which is a simultaneous fluctuation machine, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 may be performed during the fluctuation display of the special figure 2, but the fluctuation display time of the special figure 2 has elapsed. When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing, the lottery result is discarded in the special figure 1 and the missed symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing of the jackpot symbol display of the special figure 2, regardless of the lottery result of the special figure 1. Will be done. Further, when the variation display of the special figure 1 is performed during the variation display of the special figure 2, and the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing when the variation display time of the special figure 2 elapses, the special figure 2 is displayed. The progress of the variation display time of the special figure 1 is interrupted at the timing of the small hit symbol display of, and as a result, from the start of the variation display of the special figure 1 until the symbol of the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed. The time is extended by the time from the stop display of the small hit symbol of Special Figure 2 to the end of the small hit game.

After that, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. With this setting, the confirmed display of the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. Further, if the number of time reductions stored in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 0 and the time reduction flag is on, the time reduction flag is turned off. Furthermore, the time saving flag is turned off even during the big hit game (during the special game state).

Further, in FIG. 2, a symbol for additionally storing predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and the variable display is stopped. The special figure 2 identification information indicating that the information is present is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in the command data described later, and then the process is terminated.

Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on as described later. When this jackpot flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 In addition to setting the special figure 2 in operation in the setting area, the player waits for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image for notifying the player to start the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. Therefore, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined opening period (for example, 29 seconds) , Or a solenoid for opening / closing drive of the first door member 2341 of the first variable winning opening 234 (until the winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected in the first variable winning opening 234) (shown in FIG. 44). A signal for holding the first door member 2341 in the open state (retracted state) is output to (a part of various solenoids 332), and information indicating the opening period is output to the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Set. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the large winning opening opening setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the first door member 2341 in the closed state (advanced state) is output to the solenoid (a part of various solenoids 332 shown in FIG. 44) for opening / closing the first door member 2341 of the first variable winning opening 234. At the same time, information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the large winning opening closing setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process in which the opening / closing control of the door member is repeated a predetermined number of times (10 rounds or 6 rounds in this example embodiment) and started at the end timing, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds) That is, in order to set to wait for a period during which the image for notifying the player that the jackpot by the decorative symbol display device 208 is finished is displayed, the effect standby is performed in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Set the information indicating the period. Further, if the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of this big hit game, the time reduction number of times (for example, 50 times) is set in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and the time reduction number is provided in the RAM 308. Turn on the time saving flag. If the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is set to off, the time reduction number of times is not set in the time reduction number storage unit, and the time reduction flag is not turned on. If the special figure probability fluctuation flag is set to on, the probability variation flag provided in the RAM 308 is turned on at the same time as the end of the big hit game.

The term "time reduction" as used herein means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player because the time from the end of the jackpot in the special figure variable game to the start of the next jackpot is shortened. When the time saving flag is set to on, it is in the high probability state of the normal map (probability change of the normal map). In the high-probability state of the normal figure, the probability of winning in the variable game of the normal figure is higher than in the low-probability state of the normal figure. In addition, the fluctuation time of the normal-figure variable game is shorter in the normal-figure high-probability state than in the normal-figure low-probability state (normal-figure variation). Further, in the high-probability state of the normal drawing, the opening time in one opening of the blade member 2311 of the special drawing 1 starting port (variable) 231 tends to be longer (extension of the electric chew) than in the low-probability state of the normal drawing. In addition, in the high-probability state of the normal drawing, the blade member 2311 is more likely to open than in the low-probability state of the normal drawing. The state in which any of these normal figure probability change, normal figure change short, and electric chew spread is set is called the electric support (starting mouth winning support by electric tulip) state.

Further, as described above, the time saving flag is set to off during the big hit game (during the special game state). Therefore, during the jackpot game, the low probability state of the normal figure is maintained. This is because if the probability is high during the jackpot game, a predetermined number of the first variable winning openings 234 will be entered during the jackpot game, and the special figure 1 starting opening (variable) 231 will be reached before the game balls enter. There is a problem that many game balls enter and the number of game balls that can be acquired during the big hit (the number of balls that come out) increases and the gambling property increases, and this is to solve this problem. Is. In this embodiment, since the number of prize balls for winning the special figure 1 starting port (variable) 231 is "1", the number of balls released during the big hit game does not substantially increase, so that the big hit You may leave the time saving flag on even during the game.

Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end effect period ends (the timing when the value of the effect standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 does not operate in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set inside.

The example of the big hit game using the first variable winning opening 234 has been described above, but the same applies to the small hit game using the second variable winning opening 235.

Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of order, the out-of-order flag is turned on. When this off flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 non-operating is set. In the special figure 2 state update process in the case where the special figure 2 is not operating, the process proceeds to the next step S227 without doing anything.

Subsequently, the special figure state update process (special figure 1 state update process) for the special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In this special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the above-mentioned special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of special figure 1. Since each process performed in this special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which "special figure 2" of the content explained in the above-mentioned special figure 2 state update process is replaced with "special figure 1", the description thereof will be described. Omit. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

When the special figure state update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, the special figure-related lottery process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed this time. In the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229), the variable game of special figure 2 is not performed, the state of special figure 2 is inactive, and neither the big hit game of special figure 1 nor the big hit game of special figure 2 is performed. In addition, the earliest special figure 2 winning random value and special figure 2 random value in the special figure 2 random value storage area are used on the condition that the number of special figure 2 variable games held is 1 or more. Is executed. In the lottery process related to the special figure 1, the variable game of the special figure 1 is not performed, the state of the special figure 1 is not operating, the big hit game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is not performed, and the lottery process is held. It is executed using the earliest special figure 1 winning random value and the special figure 1 random value in the special figure 1 random value storage area on the condition that the number of special figure 1 variable games is 1 or more. .. That is, in the present embodiment, the special figure 1 can start the variable game regardless of whether or not the special figure 2 is in the variable game, and in the special figure 2, the special figure 1 is in the variable game. It is configured so that a variable game can be started regardless of the presence or absence (simultaneous variable machine).

The notification of the result of the hit / fail determination of the special figure variation game by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and in the present embodiment, in the probabilistic state, the special figure 2 starting port 232 is won. The notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on is given priority over the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the special figure 1 start port (fixed) 230 and the special figure 1 start port (variable) 231. And in the time saving state, the notification of the lottery result based on the winning of the special figure 1 starting port (fixed) 230 and the special drawing 1 starting port (variable) 231 is notified of the lottery based on the winning of the special drawing 2 starting port 232. It is given priority over the notification of the lottery result. However, if the lottery result of the special figure 1 variable game in the probabilistic state becomes a big hit, the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the special figure 2 start port 232 is notified, or once the special figure 2 is started. The notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the mouth 232 is interrupted, and the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the special figure 1 starting port (fixed) 230 and the special figure 1 starting port (variable) 231 is executed. May occur. In addition, when the lottery result of the special figure 2 variable game in the normal game state and the time saving state is a big hit, a lottery based on winning a prize in the special figure 1 start port (fixed) 230 and the special figure 1 start port (variable) 231. In parallel with the notification of the lottery result of, or by interrupting the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the special figure 1 start port (fixed) 230 and the special figure 1 start port (variable) 231 to start special figure 2. Notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the mouth 232 may be executed.

In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process in step S229, the main control unit 300 starts the special figure 2 start information (special figure 2 start information) from the earliest (most previously stored) holding position in the special figure 2 random value storage area. (Fig. 2 Winning random number value and special figure 2 set of random value) is acquired, and ROM 306 is based on the acquired special figure 2 winning random value in the start information and the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag in RAM 308. The hit / fail judgment table stored in is used to determine whether to make a big hit, a small hit, or a miss (hit / fail judgment). Next, the main control unit 300 uses the special figure determination table stored in the ROM 306 based on the special figure 2 random value in the acquired special figure 2 start information and the determined hit / fail determination result, etc. The symbol to be stopped and displayed after the fluctuation display (stop symbol) is determined. Next, the main control unit 300 is stored in the ROM 306 based on, for example, the determined hit / fail determination result, the stop symbol, the number of special figures 2 held at the time of the hit / fail determination, the acquired random number value for determining the special figure fluctuation time, and the like. The variation display time (timer number) of the special figure 2 is determined using various tables.

After extracting the earliest special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, the main control unit 300 erases the earliest special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, and at the same time, the special figure 2 start information is deleted from the special figure 2 random value storage area. FIG. 2 Special figure 2 of the reserved number storage area The reserved number is subtracted by 1. At this time, the special figure 2 start information extracted from the special figure 2 random value storage area is stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above determination is made based on the special figure 2 start information stored in this temporary area. You may do so.

After the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) as described above, the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) is performed in the same manner. The order of the special figure 1 related lottery process and the special figure 2 related lottery process may be reversed.

In the above description, the above-mentioned special figure state update process and special figure-related lottery process are performed independently for special figure 1 and special figure 2, so that a plurality of special figures can be changed at the same time. The lottery process and the variable game regarding the holding of the other special figure may not be performed according to the state of one special figure. In the present embodiment, as will be described later, when a plurality of special figures are changed at the same time, the decorative symbol display device 208 is made to display an effect according to the variable display of the special figure 1 in the normal game state and the time saving state. On the other hand, the effect display is not performed for the variable display of the special figure 2, and in the probabilistic state, the decorative symbol display device 208 is made to perform the effect display according to the variable display of the special figure 2, while the variable display of the special figure 1 is performed. Although the effect display is not performed, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a plurality of areas for displaying the lottery results of each special figure, or a plurality of decorative symbol display devices for displaying the lottery results of each special figure. May be provided and each lottery result may be displayed separately. Further, when the fluctuations related to a plurality of special figures are performed at the same time, the lottery result of the special figure whose fluctuation is stopped first may affect the lottery result of the special figure whose fluctuation is stopped later.

In step S233 following step S231, the command setting transmission process is performed. In this command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of, for example, 16 bits, the bits 15 are strobe information (when it is on, it indicates that data is set), and the bits 11 to 14 are. Command type (In this example, basic command, winning opening winning command, out ball command, launch position command, special figure fluctuation start command, special figure fluctuation stop command, special figure stop type command (special figure 1 and special figure 2) A command sent at the start of fluctuation, which specifies whether one of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed first), the special figure hit start command, the special figure hit end command, and the big prize opening Command, jackpot round number specification command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, look-ahead result information command, setting command, and other information that can identify the type of command), bits 0 to 10 are command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type) ).

Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off in the above-mentioned command transmission process. In addition, if the command type is a special figure fluctuation start command, the command data includes information indicating various big hit flags, small hit flags, missed flags, timer numbers selected in the special figure related lottery process, and the like. In the form, when the special symbol variation start command is set, the stop symbol information that can specify the stop symbol is included. In the case of the special figure fluctuation stop command, the values of various big hit flags, small hit flags, missed flags, etc. are included, and in the case of the command for specifying the number of big hit rounds, the number of big hit rounds, etc. are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, the command data includes device information, whether or not the special figure 1 start port (fixed) 230 has won a prize, whether or not special figure 1 start port (variable) 231 has won a prize, and special figure 2 start. It includes whether or not a prize is given to the mouth 232, whether or not a first variable winning mouth 234 is won, and whether or not a second variable winning mouth 235 is won. In the case of the look-ahead result information command, the command data includes information such as the types of special figures 1 and 2, the number of look-aheads stored in the look-ahead number storage area, and the stop symbol stored in the look-ahead result storage unit. If it is a setting command, it includes setting information and so on.

Further, in the above-mentioned rotation start setting transmission process, the command data is selected by the various big hit flags, small hit flags, missed flag values, special figure 1 related lottery process, and special figure 2 related lottery process stored in the RAM 308. Set the timer number, the information indicating the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game held, and the like. In the above-described rotation stop setting transmission process, information indicating various big hit flags, small hit flags, missed flag values, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data.

In the above-mentioned winning effect setting transmission process, the command data is output to the decorative symbol display device 208, the sub liquid crystal display device 207, various lamps (442,452), and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period stored in the RAM 308. The effect control information, the information indicating the number of the reserved special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game, etc. are set. In the above-mentioned end effect setting transmission process, the command data is output to the decorative symbol display device 208, the sub liquid crystal display device 207, various lamps (442,452), and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period stored in the RAM 308. The effect control information, the information indicating the number of the reserved special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game, etc. are set. In the above-mentioned large winning opening opening setting transmission process, information indicating the number of jackpot rounds stored in the RAM 308, the number of special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games held, and the like are set in the command data. In the above-mentioned large winning opening closing setting transmission process, information indicating the number of jackpot rounds stored in the RAM 308, the number of special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games held, and the like are set in the command data.

Further, in this step S233, the general command special figure hold increase process is also performed. In this general command special figure hold increase processing, special figure identification information (information indicating special figure 1 or special figure 2) and notice information (advance notice information, false notice information) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308 in the command data. Either advance notice information or no advance notice information) is set.

The first sub-control unit 400 can determine the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300 depending on the command type included in the received output schedule information, and is included in the output schedule information. It becomes possible to determine the effect control content based on the information of the command data.

In step S235 following step S233, the external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350, which is separate from the pachinko machine 100, via the information output circuit 336.

In step S237 following step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read out, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a ball storage dish full tank error is monitored. do. When a front frame door opening error or a ball storage dish full tank error is detected, a device indicating the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or a ball storage dish full tank error in the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. Set the information. In addition, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the first special drawing start port (variable) 231 and the first variable winning port 234 and the second variable winning opening 235, or via drive circuits 324, 326, and 330. The display data to be output to the general drawing display device 210, the special drawing 1 display device 212, the special drawing 2 display device 214, the various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the payout control unit 600 via the output port of the I / O 310.

In step S239 following step S237, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, the timer interrupt end process is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, and the like, and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 46 is performed. Return to. On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the state at the time of power interruption at the time of power recovery is saved as recovery data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and power interruption processing such as initialization of the input / output port is performed. After that, the HALT state is reached.

Next, it is used in the general drawing-related lottery process (step S223), the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229), and the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) in the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 47. The determination table will be described with reference to FIG. 48. Here, FIG. 48 (a) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the table for determining whether or not the normal figure is correct, and FIG. 48 (b) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the table for determining whether or not the special figures 1 and 2 are correct. Yes, FIG. 48 (c) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the special drawing determination sorting table.

The table for determining whether or not the normal figure is correct or not shown in FIG. 48A is a table for determining whether or not the normal figure is correct or not, which is used at the time of determining whether or not the normal figure is correct. This table is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. As shown in FIG. 48 (a), when this hit / fail determination table is used, there is no hit value in the low probability state of the normal figure, that is, the probability of hit is 0%, and the normal figure is shown in the normal figure. In the high probability state, the range in which random numbers can be taken is 0 to 65535, and the winning value is 0 to 65535. That is, the probability of winning is 65536/65536 (that is, 100%). In addition, in the low probability state of the normal figure (when the time reduction is not activated), the hit may be made with a certain probability (for example, 1%), and in the high probability state of the normal figure (when the time reduction is activated), it is constant. The probability of (for example, 1%) may be different.

The special figure 1 and 2 hit / miss determination table shown in FIG. 48 (b) is a table referred to when the hit / fail judgment of the special figures 1 and 2 is performed, and which of the settings 1 to 6 is used. Select the record to be referenced depending on whether it is in the special figure low probability state or the special figure high probability state. This table is also stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

In the special figure low probability state of setting 1, the big hit is selected with a probability of 329/65536 (about 1/200) as a result of the winning / failing judgment of the big hit lottery of special figure 1 and special figure 2, and in the special figure high probability state, the big hit is selected. As a result of the winning / failing determination of the big hit lottery of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2, the big hit is selected with a probability of 330/65536 (about 1/199).

In the special figure low probability state of setting 2, the big hit is selected with a probability of 341/65536 (about 1/193) as a result of the winning / failing judgment of the big hit lottery of special figure 1 and special figure 2, and in the special figure high probability state, the big hit is selected. As a result of the winning / failing determination of the big hit lottery of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2, the big hit is selected with a probability of 342/65536 (about 1/192).

In the special figure low probability state of setting 3, the big hit is selected with a probability of 363/655536 (about 1/181) as a result of the winning / failing judgment of the big hit lottery of special figure 1 and special figure 2, and in the special figure high probability state, the big hit is selected. As a result of the winning / failing determination of the big hit lottery of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2, the big hit is selected with a probability of 364/65536 (about 1/180).

In the special figure low probability state of setting 4, the big hit is selected with a probability of 375/65536 (about 1/175) as a result of the winning / failing judgment of the big hit lottery of special figures 1 and 2, and in the special figure high probability state, the big hit is selected. As a result of the winning / failing determination of the big hit lottery of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2, the big hit is selected with a probability of 377/65536 (about 1/174).

In the special figure low probability state of setting 5, the big hit is selected with a probability of 451/65536 (about 1/146) as a result of the winning / failing judgment of the big hit lottery of special figures 1 and 2, and in the special figure high probability state, the big hit is selected. As a result of the winning / failing determination of the big hit lottery of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2, the big hit is selected with a probability of 452/65536 (about 1/145).

In the special figure low probability state of setting 6, a big hit is selected with a probability of 701/65536 (about 1/94) as a result of the winning / failing judgment of the big hit lottery of special figures 1 and 2, and in the special figure high probability state, the big hit is selected. As a result of the winning / failing determination of the big hit lottery of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2, the big hit is selected with a probability of 703/65536 (about 1/93).

Further, regardless of any of the settings 1 to 6, and regardless of whether the special figure is in the high probability state or the special figure low probability state, as a result of the winning / failing determination of the big hit lottery of the special figure 1, 6580/65536 A small hit that opens and closes 12 times is selected with a probability (about 1/10), and a small hit that opens and closes once is selected with a probability of 6580/65536 (about 1/10) as a result of the winning / failing judgment of the big hit lottery shown in FIG. Will be done. It should be noted that the small hit may be prevented from occurring in the special figure 1 and the small hit (the small hit opened 12 times and the small hit opened once) may be generated only in the special figure 2. Moreover, the probability of a small hit may be made different for each setting.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in any of the settings 1 to 6, the jackpot probability in the special figure high probability state is slightly higher than the jackpot probability in the special figure low probability state, but it is equated with almost the same probability. It is set to be profitable. Further, in the present embodiment, the jackpot probability differs depending on the setting, and the higher the setting, the easier the jackpot is, and the lower the setting, the more difficult the jackpot is. Therefore, the lower the setting, the less likely it is to be a big hit, but when shifting to the probabilistic state, the number of small hits tends to occur more than in the high setting, and it may be possible to have different game characteristics.

In the present embodiment, the jackpot probability is set to be almost the same in the special figure high probability state and the special figure low probability state in any of the settings, but the major difference is the variation display time of special figure 2. Be done. In the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 in the special figure high probability state is selected, for example, from 1 to 5 seconds. In the special figure high probability state, when a right-handed hit is made, a large number of game balls can easily enter the second special figure start port 232, and a large number of fluctuation displays of the special figure 2 can be performed, and as a result, a large number of variations can be displayed. , The mechanism is such that the frequency of small hits increases. In the present embodiment, it can be said that the frequency of small hits increases in the special figure high probability state, so it may be called "small hit rush". In addition, in the state where the number of reserved symbol variation displays of special figure 2 is four (full tank), the time required to digest all the symbol variation displays of special figure 2 is longer than the time required for one special figure 1. Since it takes longer to digest the symbol variation display, it is less likely that a big hit will occur in Special Figure 1. On the other hand, as the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 in the special figure low probability state, for example, the fluctuation time of 580 seconds is selected. Therefore, in the special figure low probability state, if you hit right, the frequency of entering the special figure 2 start port 232 and the small hit probability do not change, but the time until the result of the variation display of special figure 2 is displayed is approximately. Since it is every 10 minutes, even if you hit right, it is practically disadvantageous for the player. The fluctuation time of the special figure 2 in the special figure low probability state is set to 580 seconds in the case of a miss and a small hit, but the fluctuation time in the case of a big hit is shorter than that, for example. It is set to 227 seconds.

FIG. 48C shows an example of a distribution table for determining a special figure, and as described above, a stop symbol is determined based on the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 or 2 is correct or not. This table is also stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. In this special figure determination sorting table, a random number range corresponding to the stop symbol mode of the special figure (see FIGS. 45 (a) and 45 (b)) is defined for each hit / fail determination result.

First, if the result of the special figure 1 hit / fail judgment is a big hit, either one of "special figure A" and "special figure B" is selected. As described above, "Special Figure A" is a 6R normal jackpot opened by the first variable winning opening 234, and "Special Figure B" is a 6R probability variable jackpot opened by the first variable winning opening 234. Each selection rate is 1/2 regardless of the setting.

Further, if the result of the special figure 1 hit / fail determination is a small hit, "special figure C" is selected. As described above, "Special Figure C" is a small hit in which the second variable winning opening 235 repeats short opening up to 12 times.

Next, if the result of the special figure 2 hit / fail determination is a big hit, any one of "special figure a" to "special figure c" is selected. As described above, "Special Figure a" is a 6R normal jackpot opened by the first variable winning opening 234, and "Special Figure b" is a 6R probability variable jackpot opened by the first variable winning opening 234. "Special figure c" is a 10R probability variation jackpot opened by the first variable winning opening 234. Each selection rate is 60/100 for "special figure a", 5/100 for "special figure b", and 35/100 for "special figure c" regardless of the setting.

Further, if the result of the special figure 2 hit / fail determination is a small hit, "special figure d" is selected. As described above, "Special Figure d" is a small hit in which the second variable winning opening 235 is short-opened once.

Next, the processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described. FIG. 49A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. First, in step S301 of FIG. 49 (a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step S301. In this initialization process, the initial setting of the input / output port, the initialization process of the storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

In step S303 following step S301, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305. .. In step S305, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S307 following step S305, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 determines whether or not a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

In step S309 following step S307, the effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S307, processing such as reading the production data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when the production data needs to be updated, the production data is updated.

In step S311 following step S309, the chance button control process is performed. In the chance button control process, the operation of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 190 is detected, and the effect data updated in step S309 is converted into the effect data according to the operation of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 190 according to the detection result. Perform the process to change to.

In step S313 following step S311, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control process, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

In step S315 following step S313, the lamp control process is performed. In the lamp control process, if there is a command to various lamps 442,452 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the game board lamp drive circuit 440 and the game underframe lamp drive circuit 450. do. In this way, the button lamp 138 that emits the effect button 136, the star-shaped effect lamp 206, the light emitting unit 71 provided in the first effect movable body 7, and the light emitting diode (not shown) arranged in the attacker unit 23. Light emission control is performed.

In step S317 following step S315, the movable body control process is performed. For example, if there is a command to the upper first effect movable body 7 shown in FIG. 43 (a) or the second effect movable body 8 arranged on the right side in the effect data read in step S309, This command is output to the drive circuit 422.

In step S319 following step S317, information transmission processing is performed. In the information transmission process, if there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S309, a setting is made to output this control command. Then, the process returns to step S303.

FIG. 49B is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit command reception interrupt processing (strobe interrupt processing) executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal from the main control unit 300. In step S331 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

FIG. 49 (c) is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined with this timer interrupt as an opportunity. Execute in the cycle of. In step S341 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 of the first sub-control unit main process and stored in the original timer variable storage area. do. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

In step S343 following step S341, the control command is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 set in the information transmission process (step S319) of the first sub-control unit main process, and the random value value for other effects is updated. And so on.

Next, the processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described. FIG. 50A is a flowchart of the main process executed by a CPU (not shown) of the second sub-control unit 500. First, in step S401 of FIG. 50A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step S401. In this initialization process, initial setting of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in RAM (not shown), and the like are performed.

In step S403 following step S401, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S405. .. In step S405, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S407 following step S405, command processing is performed. The CPU of the second sub-control unit 500 determines whether or not a command has been received from the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S409 following step S407, the effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S407, the effect data (effect data displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 or effect data displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 207) corresponding to this command is stored in the ROM (. Processing such as reading from (not shown) is performed, and when it is necessary to update the effect data, the effect data is updated.

In step S411 following step S409, image control processing is performed. In the image control process, if there is an instruction to VDP516 in the effect data read in step S409, this instruction is output to VDP516 (details will be described later). Then, the process returns to step S403.

FIG. 50B is a flowchart of a command reception interrupt process executed by the CPU of the second sub-control unit 500. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub-control unit 500 detects a strobe signal from the first sub-control unit 400. In step S431 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM.

FIG. 50C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process executed by the CPU of the second sub-control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined with this timer interrupt as an opportunity. Execute in the cycle of. In step S441 of the timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM described in step S403 of the second sub-control unit main process and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S403, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S443, which is next to step S441, other effects such as updating the random value for effect are performed.

FIG. 50D is a flowchart of the image control process in step S411 of the second sub-control unit main process. In step S451, a transfer instruction for image data (movie data and texture data described later) is given. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the designation of the drawing area of the frame buffer 1 and the frame buffer 2 of the VRAM 518. As a result, the one-frame image stored in the frame buffer not designated in the drawing area is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 or the sub liquid crystal display device 207. Next, the CPU 504 sets the ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 506), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 518), and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 516 based on the position information table, and then the image from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518. Set the command to instruct the start of data transfer. The VDP 516 transfers the image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on the instruction set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 516 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

In step S453 next to step S451, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from VDP516 is input, and if the transfer end interrupt signal is input (step S453: Yes), the process proceeds to step S455. If not (step S453: No), it waits for the transfer end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S455, parameters are set based on the effect scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the frame buffer 1 or 2 of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S451, the CPU 504 information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis of the VRAM 518, image size). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), etc.) are instructed to VDP516. The VDP 516 sets parameters according to the attributes based on the instructions stored in the attribute registers.

In step S457 following step S455, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to the instruction of the CPU 504.

In step S459 following step S457, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 516 is input based on the end of drawing the image, and if the generation end interrupt signal is input (step S459: Yes), The process proceeds to step S461, and if not (step S459: No), the process waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S461, the scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images are generated is incremented (+1) to end the process.

Next, a specific configuration of the accessory ratio / setting display 196 and the DIP switch board 198 will be described with reference to FIG. 51. Here, FIG. 51 (A) is a diagram showing an example of a specific configuration of the accessory ratio / setting display 196, and FIG. 51 (B) is a diagram showing an example of a specific configuration of the DIP switch board 198. Is.

As described above, the accessory ratio / setting display 196 is configured to include the accessory ratio monitor and the setting monitor, and the accessory ratio monitor includes the continuous accessory ratio (RY) and the accessory ratio (the accessory ratio (RY)). YH) is displayed, and the setting monitor is displaying the current setting value.

Here, the continuous bonus ratio is due to the operation of the bonus when the bonus is continuously operated among the number of game balls (that is, safe balls) to be acquired (that is, the first in the jackpot game). It refers to the ratio of the number of game balls acquired by opening the variable winning opening 234 and winning a prize. It should be noted that the ratio of the number of game balls acquired by winning the first variable winning opening 234 to the number of out balls may be used. The bonus ratio is the number of game balls (that is, safe balls) to be acquired due to the operation of the bonus (that is, the first special figure starting port (variable) 231 and the first variable winning opening 234 and the first variable winning opening 234. 2 The ratio of the number of game balls acquired by opening the variable winning opening 235 and winning a prize). The first variable winning opening 234, the second variable winning opening 235, the first special figure starting port (fixed) 230, the first special drawing starting port (variable) 231 and the second special drawing starting port 232 with respect to the number of out balls. And may be the ratio of the number of game balls obtained by winning a prize in the general winning opening.

In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the continuous accessory ratio exceeds 60% as a result of calculating the continuous accessory ratio, the double-digit 7-segment LED displaying the continuous accessory ratio is blinked and then displayed. Outputs a security signal (RY). Here, the security signal (RY) is an error signal output when the continuous accessory ratio exceeds 60%, and is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336. It may be output from a test terminal that can be mounted on the main board 156. As a result, the type application test for the gaming machine may be smoothly performed.

In addition, as a result of calculating the accessory ratio, if it is determined that the accessory ratio exceeds 70%, the double-digit 7-segment LED displaying the accessory ratio is blinked, and then the security signal (YH) is displayed. ) Is output. Here, the security signal (YH) is an error signal output when the accessory ratio exceeds 70%, and is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

In the present embodiment, when the continuous accessory ratio or the accessory ratio exceeds the upper limit of the normal value, the predetermined 7-segment LED is blinked, but for example, the emission color is changed. May be good.

As shown in FIG. 51 (B), eight DIP switches are arranged on the DIP switch board 198. Each DIP switch is connected to the first sub-board 160, and the position of each DIP switch can be read when the power is turned on to change the appearance probability of the effect. The appearance rate, the rush rate of the production mode, and the like can be set.

In the pachinko machine 100 described above, the attacker of the second variable winning opening 235 was not opened in the big hit game, but was opened only in the small hit game, but a big hit opened by the attacker of the second variable winning opening 235 was prepared. You may. For example, as the jackpot of Special Figure 2, instead of the attacker of the first variable winning opening 234, a 3R jackpot (substantially 1R jackpot) opened by the attacker of the second variable winning opening 235, a 6R jackpot, or the like may be prepared. ..

Further, although the small hits are prepared for both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the small hits may be provided only for the special figure 2. That is, only in the special figure 2, the second variable winning opening 235 may be provided with a small hit that repeats a short opening a certain number of times (for example, 12 times) and a small hit that opens only once. .. By doing so, in the special figure high probability normal figure low probability state, the special figure 1 starting port (variable) 231 is not in the winning easy state, and the attacker of the first variable winning opening 234 is in the winning difficult state. If the attacker of the 2 variable winning opening 235 is also in a difficult state to win, most of the right-handed game balls enter the 2nd special figure starting opening 232 and win a big hit or a small hit in the special figure 2 variable game. be able to. In particular, since the winning probability of the small hit game is higher than the winning probability of the big hit game (for example, about 10 times higher), the second variable winning opening 235 has a maximum number of times (for example, 12 times). It is easy to win a small hit that repeats short opening, and you can expect to earn a ball in this small hit game.

Next, a specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 41 will be described.

FIG. 52 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of the effect centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 41.

FIG. 52 shows the decorative symbol display device 208. The first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal symbol display device 210, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, the special figure 2 hold lamp 220, and the normal figure hold lamp 216 are not shown. (The same applies to the example shown in FIG. 59).

Further, FIG. 52 shows a star-shaped effect lamp 206, which is one of the game board lamps 442.

Further, on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 52 (a), the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 1-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. The background here is a white background with no pattern, but the default background image is displayed. Also in the following description, when the background is a white background and there is no pattern, the default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. In addition, various background images different from the default background image (for example, a background image depending on the mode) may be displayed. In addition, a mini symbol is displayed in the upper left of the display area, and variable display and stop display are performed according to the decorative symbol displayed in the center of the display screen.

The decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 in the upper right corner. The fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 is an area for notifying whether or not the symbol is changing (or the symbol is stopped) and notifying the number of holds, and the hold of special figure 1 is on the upper left of the display area. A number display area is provided, and a reserved number display area shown in Special FIG. 2 is provided at the lower left. Further, a symbol changing notification area of special figure 1 is provided in the upper right of the display area, and a symbol changing notification area of special drawing 2 is provided in the lower right. In addition, a notification area during symbol change of the general map and a hold number display area of the general map may be further provided. The numerical value shown in the hold number display area of the special figure 1 is consistent with the hold number shown in the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, and the numerical value shown in the hold number display area of the special figure 2 is the hold lamp 220 of the special figure 2. Consistent with the number of holds indicated by. Further, in the symbol changing notification area of special figure 1, while the symbol of special figure 1 is stopped, for example, if it is a big hit, it is stopped and displayed as "○", and if it is a small hit, it is displayed as "△". Is displayed as a stop, and if it is off, it is displayed as a stop with "x". Further, during the symbol variation display of the special figure 1, the display of "-" blinks, and it may be possible to recognize that the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is being performed. The display in the symbol changing display area of Special Figure 2 is the same as the display in the symbol changing display area of Special Figure 1, and this is a display mode corresponding to the symbol changing display and the stop display of Special Figure 2. Changes. By changing the display mode, lighting mode, and blinking mode of the fourth symbol, or by changing the display mode of the numerical value displayed in the hold number display area, a pre-reading notice and a notice regarding the running symbol change display can be given. You may go. The same applies to the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284 described above up to the example shown in FIG. 59.

Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a variable icon display area 280 at the lower center of the effect display area 208d. In the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon corresponding to the currently performed symbol variation is displayed.

Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 52 is a normal game state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state). The decorative symbol display device 208 in the normal game state is provided with a hold icon display area 281 of special figure 1 on the left side of the variable icon display area 280 (the same applies to the example shown in FIG. 59). In the decorative symbol display device 208 in the normal game state, the designation of the hold icon display area of the special figure 2 is omitted, but the hold icon display area of the special figure 2 may be provided.

In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of holdings in Special Figure 1 is represented by the number of lights of the holding lamp 218 in Special Figure 1 and the numerical value shown in the holding number display area in Special Figure 1, as well as the number of holding icons in Special Figure 1, and is represented by the number of holding icons in Special Figure 2. The number of holdings is represented by the number of lights of the holding lamp 220 of the special figure 2 and the numerical value shown in the holding number display area of the special figure 2. It should be noted that it may also be represented by the number of hold icons in Special Figure 2. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning prize) may be referred to as a first hold icon, the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon, and so on. In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the hold icons are displayed side by side, and the hold icon on the right side has the older hold icon.

In FIG. 52A, two hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and the hold icons h11 and h12 of the two special figures 1 are both displayed. , It is displayed in the default display mode (normal display mode).

FIG. 53 is a diagram showing a display mode of the hold icon displayed on the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 41. All of the hold icons shown in FIG. 53 are round, but they may be transformed from this round shape, for example, they may be transformed into a character icon.

FIG. 53A shows a hold icon for display mode A (default display mode). The display mode A (default display mode) is a non-patterned and white display mode. On the drawing, white is represented by hatching that faces diagonally downward to the left. The hold icon suggests the expectation of a big hit of the look-ahead notice depending on the display mode. That is, it suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit in the symbol variation display performed by digesting the hold represented by the hold icon. Display mode A (default display mode) suggests that the jackpot expectation is 5%. It may be suggested that the jackpot expectation is 0%. Alternatively, the default display mode may not indicate the expectation of a big hit in the first place.

FIG. 53B shows the hold icon of the display mode B. The display mode B is a non-patterned and green display mode. On the drawing, green is represented by hatching that faces diagonally downward to the right. This display mode B suggests that the jackpot expectation is 25%.

FIG. 53 (c) shows the hold icon of the display mode C. Display mode C is a non-patterned and red display mode. On the drawing, red is represented by diagonal cross-hatching. This display mode C suggests that the jackpot expectation is 50%.

FIG. 53 (d) shows the hold icon of the display mode D. The display mode D is a display mode composed of green and yellow polka dots (maker pattern) on a white background. In the drawing, yellow is represented by vertical hatching. This display mode D is a display mode that symbolizes the pachinko machine manufacturer (company) that manufactured the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 41. That is, when looking at this second display mode, many players imagine a specific pachinko machine manufacturer, and it can be said that the display mode is such that the pachinko machine manufacturer can be recognized. In other words, it is a display mode that is famous for use by a particular pachinko machine manufacturer. Further, it can be said that it is a display mode peculiar to the pachinko machine manufacturer, and if the pachinko machine manufacturer is the same, it can be said that the same manufacturer pattern is commonly used across a plurality of models. This second display mode is referred to as a maker pattern. There are multiple maker patterns such as animal patterns, animal patterns, plant patterns such as floral patterns and fruits, fireworks patterns, striped patterns (striped patterns), plaid patterns (lattice patterns), and other geometric patterns. A repeating pattern or the like in which the constituent units of the above are regularly (or irregularly) arranged can be mentioned. Further, since the maker pattern is a pattern expressed using a plurality of colors, it is included in "color" in a broad sense. In some cases, one specific color symbolizes the pachinko machine manufacturer, and in this case, it is the manufacturer's color. This second display mode suggests that the jackpot expectation is 75%. In addition to the pachinko machine manufacturer, the pachinko machine sales maker (company) may be used, and the model (model pattern) may be used instead of the maker.

FIG. 53 (e) shows the hold icon of the display mode E. The display mode E is a rainbow-colored display mode. This rainbow color is a mode in which each of the seven colors (red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple) constituting the rainbow is displayed by continuously changing the display color one by one. However, here, it refers to a mode in which the seven colors constituting the rainbow are displayed by dividing the display area at a time. On the drawing, this rainbow color is represented by cross-hatching of vertical and horizontal lines. This display mode E suggests that the jackpot expectation is 100%. That is, it suggests that the jackpot is confirmed.

As the display mode F, a display mode that is unpatterned and gold and suggests that the jackpot expectation is 70% may be further prepared.

The higher the expectation of the jackpot, the lower the frequency of appearance of the five display modes described above, but the frequency of appearance is lower in the display mode D (maker pattern) than in the display mode E (rainbow color). May be good. That is, the hold icon of the display mode D (manufacturer pattern) may appear the least frequently.

Further, the five display modes shown in FIG. 53 are also used for the variable icon in which the hold icon changes, and function as a notice (normal notice) of the variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variable icon.

Further, the star-shaped effect lamp 206 provided directly below the first special figure start port (fixed) 230 can emit light in a light emitting mode indicating the display mode of the hold icon and the variable icon.

At the right end of FIG. 53, the light emitting mode of the star-shaped effect lamp 206 is shown. The effect lamp 206 can emit light in a light emitting mode A (white light emitting mode) representing the display mode A (default display mode) of the hold icon and the variable icon. Further, the effect lamp 206 can also emit light in a light emitting mode B (green light emitting mode) representing the display mode B (green display mode) of the hold icon and the variable icon. Further, the effect lamp 206 can also emit light in a light emitting mode C (red light emitting mode) representing the display mode C (red display mode) of the hold icon and the variable icon. Further, the effect lamp 206 can also emit light in a light emitting mode D (rainbow-colored light emitting mode) representing the display mode E (rainbow-colored display mode) of the hold icon and the variable icon. The rainbow-colored light emitting mode of the effect lamp 206 is a mode in which the seven colors constituting the rainbow are emitted and displayed by dividing the light emitting region at a time. These light emission modes also suggest the same jackpot expectations as the display modes of the hold icon and the variable icon.

Strictly speaking, the colors displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208, that is, the colors of the hold icon and the variable icon, and the emission color of the effect lamp 206 are different because the display medium is different. Both colors are also described as being included in the same or similar range.

On the other hand, the effect lamp 206 does not have a light emitting mode indicating the second display mode (maker pattern) of the hold icon and the variable icon, and the effect lamp 206 emits light in the same or similar light emitting mode as the maker pattern. There is no.

As the light emitting mode E, a golden light emitting mode, which suggests that the jackpot expectation is 70%, may be further prepared.

Further, in other display (for example, background display of the title) on the decorative symbol display device 208, the display mode may be used as shown in FIG. 53. In other displays, the expectation of the jackpot may be suggested by the display mode, and the display mode in the other display may be irrelevant to the expectation of the jackpot.

Further, the display on the sub liquid crystal display device 207 (for example, a kimono of a lord) may also be displayed using the display mode shown in FIG. 53 excluding the second display mode (manufacturer pattern). Also in the display on the sub-liquid crystal display device 207, the expected degree of jackpot may be suggested depending on the display mode, or may be irrelevant to the expected degree of jackpot.

Further, lamps other than the effect lamp 206 (the game board lamp 442 and the game underframe lamp 452 shown in FIG. 44) can also emit light in a light emitting mode representing other display modes other than the second display mode. For example, the light emitting unit 71 provided in the first effect movable body 7 and the light emitting diode (not shown) arranged in the attacker unit 23 can also emit white, green, red, and rainbow colors. As for the rainbow color, in addition to the case where the seven colors constituting the rainbow are emitted and displayed by dividing the light emitting area at a time, the emitted colors are continuously changed one by one and each of the seven colors constituting the rainbow is displayed. It may be displayed as a light emission. Such rainbow-colored change light emission may also be performed as the light emission mode D of the effect lamp 206. The light emitting mode of the lamps other than the effect lamp 206 may also suggest the same jackpot expectation as the display mode of the hold icon and the variable icon, and the light emitting mode of the lamps other than the effect lamp 206 may indicate the jackpot expectation. It may be a light emitting mode unrelated to.

Further, it is also used as the color of the decorative body except for the display mode D (maker pattern) and the display mode E (rainbow color).

FIG. 54 is a diagram showing a decorative body included in the second effect movable body 8.

In the second production movable body 8 that imitates the right arm of a person, four fingers excluding the fifth finger (pinkie) serve as a decorative body. All of these four fingers are difficult to see when bent, but when extended, the decoration provided on the palm side becomes visible.

FIG. 54A shows a second effect movable body 8 in which the fourth finger (ring finger) 824 is extended while the forearm portion 82 is lifted. In the second effect movable body 8 shown in FIG. 54 (a), decoration A (white) is applied to the palm side of the fourth finger 824. That is, it is painted white.

FIG. 54B shows the second effect movable body 8 in which the third finger (middle finger) 823 is extended while the forearm portion 82 is lifted. In the second effect movable body 8 shown in FIG. 54 (b), decoration B (green) is provided on the palm side of the third finger 823. That is, it is painted green.

FIG. 54 (c) shows the second effect movable body 8 in which the second finger (index finger) 822 is extended while the forearm portion 82 is lifted. In the second effect movable body 8 shown in FIG. 54 (c), decoration C (red) is applied to the palm side of the second finger 822. That is, it is painted red.

FIG. 54 (d) shows the second effect movable body 8 in which the first finger (thumb) 821 is extended while the forearm portion 82 is lifted. In the second effect movable body 8 shown in FIG. 54 (d), decoration D (gold) is applied to the palm side of the first finger 821. That is, it is painted in gold.

In the second effect movable body 8, nothing is decorated on the palm side of the fifth finger (pinkie) 825.

Strictly speaking, the color displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 and the color of the decorative body are different in hue because the display medium is different, but these colors are included in the same or similar range. Explain as if.

In addition, each decoration applied to the second effect movable body 8 suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit, like the hold icon and the variable icon. Therefore, it is suggested that when the 4th finger (ring finger) 824 is extended, the expectation of the jackpot is 5%, and when the 3rd finger (middle finger) 823 is extended, the expectation of the jackpot is 25%. It is suggested that there is, and it is suggested that the expectation of the jackpot is 50% when the second finger (index finger) 822 is extended, and the expectation of the jackpot when the first finger (thumb) 821 is extended. Is suggested to be 70%.

On the other hand, as the decorative body, the decorative body of the manufacturer pattern and the rainbow-colored decorative body are not provided. Therefore, the notice by the decorative body does not give a high-probability notice with a jackpot expectation of 75% or more.

As with the hold icon and the variable icon, the expected degree of the jackpot is suggested, but the value of the expected degree may be different from the value of the hold icon and the variable icon. For example, decoration B (green) may be 30%, decoration C (red) may be 60%, and decoration D (gold) may be 90%.

Returning to FIG. 52 and continuing the description, in FIG. 52, in order to make it easy to understand that the four hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, they are not actually displayed. The hold icon is also shown with a dotted line.

On the other hand, the numerical value shown in the hold number display area of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 is 0, and there is no hold of the special figure 2. This is because, as described above, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 52 is the normal game state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state), so that the fluctuation display time of special figure 2 is almost always ( This is because it is extremely long (for example, 500 seconds), and it does not make much sense to win the special figure 2 starting port 232. In the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 in FIG. 52, the numerical value shown in the hold number display area of the special figure 2 remains 0, and the fourth symbol of the special figure 2 remains the stop display of “x”. ..

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the hold icon display area of the special figure on which the display result is easily displayed in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed according to the control state (game state). That is, in the present embodiment, when the control state is the normal gaming state or the electric support state (special figure low probability normal figure high probability state), as described above, the display result of special figure 1 is likely to be displayed. , As shown in FIG. 52A, when the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is displayed in the effect display area 208d and the control state is the probability change state (special figure high probability normal figure low probability state). On the contrary, the hold icon display area of the special figure 2 is displayed.

Although not shown here, the default display mode of the hold icon of the special figure 2 is the same as the default display mode of the hold icon of the special figure 1, but may be different.

Further, the effect lamp 206 shown in FIG. 52A is lit in the default light emitting mode (white light emitting mode) which is the light emitting mode representing the display mode of the hold icons h11 and h12.

In the present embodiment, the symbol variation display of the special symbol is started in the order of variation start in the special symbol display device → start of variation display of the fourth symbol → start or erase of the movement animation of the hold icon → start of variation of the decorative symbol. However, this order may change.

In FIG. 52 (b), the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started. That is, the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, the variation display of the fourth symbol and the mini symbol is also started, the movement of the hold icon is finished, and the variation display of the decorative symbol is also started. The numerical value shown in the hold number display area of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 is 1, and the display of “−” is started blinking in the fourth symbol of the special figure 1. Further, the hold icon is shifted to the right by one, and the hold icon h11, which was the first hold icon until then, is displayed as the change icon h0 in the change icon display area 280.

In FIG. 52 (c), one ball is won in the first special figure start port (fixed) 230, and the hold icon of special figure 1 is increasing. The increased hold icon is displayed in red (display mode C) at the display position of the second hold icon h12, and functions as a look-ahead notice. A directing sound (appearing sound) represented by an eighth note is output from the speaker 120 in accordance with the timing of starting the display of the red (display mode C) hold icon h12. Further, in response to the increase in the hold represented by the red (display mode C) hold icon h12, the number of star-shaped effect lamps 206 that have been emitting light in the default light emission mode (white light emission mode) has increased. The mode changes to light emitting mode C (red light emitting mode) representing the display mode of the hold icon h12 representing the hold. That is, the light emitting mode of the effect lamp 206 is a light emitting mode having the same or similar color as the red color of the hold icon h12. The timing of starting the display of the red (display mode C) hold icon h12 and the timing of changing the star-shaped effect lamp 206 to the light emission mode C may be the same, or the hold icon h12 may be earlier. Alternatively, the effect lamp 206 may be faster (the same applies to the example shown in FIG. 59). In the figure, the size of the hold icon h12 and the size of the effect lamp 206 are shown to be about the same, but in reality, the effect lamp 206 is larger. Therefore, the effect lamp 206 is more conspicuous than the hold icon h12, and if the change timing of the effect lamp 206 is earlier, the jackpot expectation degree suggested by the red color may be given to the player more strongly. The numerical value shown in the hold number display area of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 is increased by one to 2.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 52 (d), the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 3-Decoration 5-Decoration 8" is stopped and displayed. Further, in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed by "x", and the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed by the combination of "358". The star-shaped effect lamp 206 continues to emit light in the light emitting mode C (red light emitting mode).

In FIG. 52 (e), the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is restarted, and the decorative symbol is variable display. The numerical value shown in the hold number display area of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 is 1, and the display of “−” is started blinking in the fourth symbol of the special figure 1. The red (display mode C) hold icon is moved by one and displayed at the display position of the first hold icon (hold icon h11). Further, the star-shaped effect lamp 206 continues to emit light in the light emitting mode C (red light emitting mode).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 52 (f), the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 8-Decoration 1-Decoration 4" is stopped and displayed. Further, in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed by "x", and the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed by the combination of "814". The star-shaped effect lamp 206 continues to emit light in the light emitting mode C (red light emitting mode).

In FIG. 52 (g), the hold represented by the red (display mode C) hold icon is digested, and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started. That is, the decorative symbol is variablely displayed, and the red (display mode C) hold icon is displayed as the red (display mode C) variable icon h0 in the variable icon display area 280. Further, the star-shaped effect lamp 206 still continues to emit light according to the light emitting mode C. The numerical value shown in the hold number display area of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 becomes 0, and the display of “−” is started blinking in the fourth symbol of the special figure 1.

In FIG. 52 (h), the reach state is entered in the variable display of the decorative symbol, and in FIG. 52 (i), the background image is switched from the default background image to non-display, and the variable icon display area 280 and the special figure 1 are shown. The hold icon display area 281 has disappeared. That is, in FIG. 52 (i), the red (display mode C) variable icon h0 is hidden, and the star-shaped effect lamp 206 is also turned off in response to the non-display of the variable icon h0. In FIGS. 52 to 57, the state in which the effect lamp 206 is turned off is represented by a plain state without hatching. The timing at which the variable icon h0 is hidden and the timing at which the star-shaped effect lamp 206 is turned off may be the same, the variable icon h0 may be earlier, or the effect lamp 206 may be earlier. It may be (the same applies to the example shown in FIG. 59). The fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 is displayed. Further, the variable display of the decorative symbol, which has been performed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, has been moved to the lower right corner and reduced. On the other hand, the mini design on the upper left is continuously displayed.

In FIG. 52 (j), it has developed into a super reach. The reach title LT1 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 52 (j). The display of the reach title LT1 here is described as "jii reach" in black characters on a green background display. In this reach title LT1, the background is the same color as or similar to green, which suggests the expectation of a big hit with a hold icon or decoration, but as shown in FIG. 60, the reach title LT1 of "Ji Reach" As the background color, a color other than green is not selected. That is, it can be said that the type of background color of the reach title LT1 does not suggest the degree of expectation of a big hit, and this green color does not indicate the degree of expectation of a big hit.

The grandfather character appears in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 52 (k), and then the animation of the grandfather character is displayed. Following the animation display of the grandfather character, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 52 (l) displays the grandfather character that appears to be depressed. Further, in the variable display of the decorative symbol reduced and displayed in the lower right corner, the fluctuation of the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 3-Decoration 4" is displayed. Although the display of the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 remains off, the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 and the mini symbol are displayed. As for the mini symbols, the variable display is continuously performed for all the symbols until the symbols are confirmed and displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 52 (m), the reduced display at the lower right returns to the original size, and the decorative symbols are combined with the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. Is displayed as stopped. Here, the combination of the lost decorative patterns of "Decoration 4-Decoration 3-Decoration 4" is stopped and displayed. Further, in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed by "x", and the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed by the combination of "434". In FIG. 52 (m), the background is hidden, but in reality, a background image different from the default is displayed.

The star-shaped effect lamp 206, which is turned off in response to the non-display of the variable icon h0, maintains the off state until the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed, but until it develops into super reach (FIG. 52 (j)). The light emission according to the light emission mode C may be continued (until the timing). Alternatively, the light emission according to the light emission mode C may be continued until the background display is switched and the variation display of the decorative symbol reduced and displayed in the lower right corner starts to fluctuate (until the timing of FIG. 52 (l)). Further, the light emission according to the light emission mode C may be continued until the final display of the decorative symbol is performed (until the timing of FIG. 52 (m)).

The example shown in FIG. 52 described above is an example in which the display mode of the hold icon is related to the light emission mode of the star-shaped effect lamp 206, which is one of the game board lamps 442.

FIG. 55 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of an effect in which the display mode of the variable icon and the display mode of the background in the display of the reach title are related.

FIG. 55 also shows the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect lamp 206. On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 55 (a), the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 1-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed.

Further, in FIG. 55 (a), one hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 has a default display mode. It is displayed. Further, the effect lamp 206 shown in FIG. 55 (a) is lit in the default light emitting mode A (white light emitting mode) which is the light emitting mode representing the display mode of the hold icon h11.

In FIG. 55 (b), the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started. That is, the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, the variation display of the fourth symbol and the mini symbol is also started, the movement of the hold icon is finished, and the variation display of the decorative symbol is also started. The numerical value shown in the hold number display area of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 has changed from 1 to 0, and the “−” display has started blinking in the fourth symbol of the special figure 1. Further, the hold icon is shifted to the right by one, and the hold icon h11, which has been in the display position of the first hold icon until then, is displayed as the change icon h0 in the change icon display area 280. When the hold icon h11, which is the default display mode, is displayed in the variable icon display area 280, that is, when the display mode changes to the variable icon h0, the display mode changes to the display mode D (manufacturer pattern), and the variable icon h0 is displayed. It is displayed in aspect D (manufacturer pattern). The variable icon h0 changed to the display mode D (manufacturer pattern) usually functions as a notice. A production sound (change sound) represented by quarter notes is output from the speaker 120 in accordance with the display start timing (timing of change in display mode) of the variation icon h0 of the display mode D (manufacturer pattern). Further, the star-shaped effect lamp 206 that has been emitting light in the default light emitting mode A (white light emitting mode) has a light emitting mode C (red) in response to the appearance of the variable icon h0 in the display mode D (maker pattern). (Emission mode) has changed. That is, the effect lamp 206 has changed to a light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode representing the display mode of the variable icon h0, and does not emit light in a light emitting mode having the same or similar pattern as the display mode D (maker pattern). .. More specifically, the effect lamp 206 has changed to a light emitting mode that suggests an expectation degree lower than the jackpot expectation degree suggested by the display mode D of the variable icon h0. The effect lamp 206 may be changed to a light emitting mode (light emitting mode D (rainbow color)) that suggests a higher expectation level than the jackpot expectation level suggested by the display mode D of the variable icon h0, or the hold icon. The color may be emitted in a color not used in the or variable icon, or the color used in the hold icon or the variable icon may be emitted in a different emission mode (for example, red). Flashing with light, etc.). Further, the display start timing of the variable icon h0 and the change timing of the effect lamp 206 may be simultaneous, the variable icon h0 may be earlier, or the effect lamp 206 may be earlier. (The same applies to the example shown in FIG. 59). In the figure, the size of the variable icon h0 and the size of the effect lamp 206 are also described to the same extent as the hold icon, but in reality, the effect lamp 206 is larger. Therefore, if the effect lamp 206 is more conspicuous than the variable icon h0 and the change timing of the effect lamp 206 is earlier, the player first recognizes the jackpot expectation indicated by the red color, and then the variable icon. By looking at the maker pattern of h0, the expectation of big hits will be further increased. Further, in the effect lamp 206, by not emitting light in the same or similar pattern as the display mode D (maker pattern), the rarity of the maker pattern with high expectation is improved, and the expectation and special feeling of the maker pattern are improved. Can be enhanced.

In FIG. 55 (c), the reach state is entered in the variable display of the decorative symbol, and in FIG. 55 (d), the background image is switched from the default background image to non-display, and the variable icon display area 280 and the special figure 1 are shown. The hold icon display area 281 has disappeared. That is, in FIG. 55 (d), the variable icon h0 of the display mode D (maker pattern) is hidden, and the star-shaped effect lamp 206 is also turned off in response to the non-display of the variable icon h0. The fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 is displayed. Further, the variable display of the decorative symbol, which has been performed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, has been moved to the lower right corner and reduced. On the other hand, the mini design on the upper left is continuously displayed.

In FIG. 55 (e), it has developed into a super reach (swordsman reach). The reach title LT2 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 55 (e). The display of the reach title LT2 here is written in black letters on a rainbow-colored background display as "Swordsman Reach". That is, the same display mode as that used as the display mode of the hold icon and the variable icon is also used for the background display of the reach title LT2, suggesting the degree of expectation of a big hit. Further, the first effect movable body 7 arranged above the decorative symbol display device 208 is lowered to a position overlapping the display screen on the front side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the rectangular light emitting unit 71 arranged in the first effect movable body 7 is lit in a rainbow-colored light-emitting mode D (rainbow-colored light-emitting mode). That is, the light emitting unit 71 of the first effect movable body 7 emits light in the same or similar light emitting mode as the rainbow color of the background display of the reach title LT2, suggesting the degree of expectation of a big hit. Further, the background display of the reach title LT2 may be a display mode representing the display mode E (rainbow color), which is a display mode of the hold icon or the variable icon. That is, the background display of the reach title LT2 is the same as or similar to the display mode E (rainbow color), and is one color from the display mode E (rainbow color) used as the display mode of the hold icon or the variable icon, for example. Even if the shape of the display area is slightly different, if the player can imagine the display mode E (rainbow color), the display mode will be similar to the display mode E (rainbow color) (FIG. 57 (j) described later). The same applies to the reach title LT3 in.

As shown in FIG. 60 (a), the background color of the reach title LT2 is selected from "white", "red", "maker pattern", and "rainbow color", and is "white". The expectation of the jackpot is "20%", the expectation of the jackpot of "red" is "35%", the expectation of the jackpot of "maker pattern" is "75%", and the expectation of the jackpot of "rainbow color" is " It is "100%". That is, unlike the above-mentioned "jii reach", the degree of expectation of a big hit is suggested depending on the type of background color of the reach title LT2.

Further, as shown in FIG. 60 (b), the emission color of the light emitting unit 71 is selected from "white", "red", and "rainbow color", and the degree of expectation of a big hit of "white". The expectation of the jackpot of "20%" and "red" is "45%", and the expectation of the jackpot of "rainbow color" is "100%". That is, unlike the type of background color of the reach title LT2, the "maker pattern" is not set for the type of emission color of the light emitting unit 71. The background color of the reach title LT2 and the emission color of the light emitting unit 71 may be related (same color) to each other. However, even in that case, the "maker pattern" is not set as the emission color of the light emitting unit 71, and the light is emitted in another color (for example, "gold lighting" or "gold lighting" or "gold lighting" instead of the "maker pattern". Set "blinking red").

In the state shown in FIG. 55 (e), the descending first effect movable body 7 does not overlap the background display in the reach title LT2, but the position where the first effect movable body 7 overlaps the background display. If the display mode of the background display is the manufacturer's pattern, it will only descend to a position that does not overlap the background display. Furthermore, not only the background display but also the hold icon and the variable icon of the maker pattern are configured so that the effect movable body is not covered.

The display mode of the background display in the reach title LT2 may be a maker pattern, but the light emitting unit 71 in the first effect movable body 7 cannot be lit in the light emitting mode representing the maker pattern, and in addition, It may not be possible to turn on the light even in the rainbow-colored light emitting mode. In such a case, the light emitting unit 71 may remain extinguished or may emit light in a light emitting mode representing red.

The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 55 (f) has started displaying an animation of a duel scene between the main character, the lord, and the swordsman who plays the enemy role. This animation continues until FIG. 55 (i). In FIG. 55 (i), the hero's lord defeats the swordsman who plays the enemy role, and in the variable display of the decorative pattern displayed in the lower right corner, the fluctuation of the combination of the decorative patterns of "Decoration 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 4" Is displayed. Although the display of the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 remains off, the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 and the mini symbol are displayed. As for the mini symbols, the variable display is continuously performed for all the symbols until the symbols are confirmed and displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 55 (j), the reduced display at the lower right returns to the original size, and the decorative symbols are combined with the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. Is displayed as stopped. Here, the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 4" is stopped and displayed. Further, in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed with "◯", and the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed with the combination of "444". In FIG. 55 (j), the background is hidden, but in reality, a background image different from the default is displayed.

FIG. 56 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of an effect in which an animation is displayed on a sub-liquid crystal display device by a zone effect.

FIG. 56 also shows the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect lamp 206. On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 56 (a), the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 1-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Further, the effect lamp 206 shown in FIG. 56A is in a state of being turned off. In addition, FIG. 56 also displays a sub liquid crystal display device 207 arranged on the left side of the first special figure start port (fixed) 230. The sub liquid crystal display device 207 shown in FIG. 56A is in a state in which nothing is displayed.

Further, in FIG. 56A, two hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and these two hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed. Both are displayed in the default display mode.

In FIG. 56B, the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started. That is, the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, the variation display of the fourth symbol and the mini symbol is also started, and the movement of the hold icon is finished. The hold icon is shifted to the right by one, and the hold icon h11, which was the first hold icon until then, remains the default display mode in the variable icon display area 280 in this example. Is displayed as. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 56 (b), variable display of decorative symbols is started in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. The zone title ZT representing the title of the zone effect is displayed so as to overlap the variable display of the symbol, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is difficult to see. The display of the zone title ZT is written in red letters on an oval blue plain background as "training zone". In this zone title ZT, the "training zone" is described in the same or similar color as red, which indicates the degree of expectation of a big hit with a hold icon or decoration. However, this red color does not indicate the degree of expectation of a big hit. That is, when this zone title ZT is displayed, it is always written as "training zone" in red letters, and is not written as "training zone" in other colors. Neither the character color of the reach title LT1 shown in FIG. 52 (j) nor the character color of this zone title ZT suggests the expectation of a big hit, but the character color indicates the expectation of a big hit. It may be suggested. On the other hand, the maker pattern only suggests the expectation of a big hit, and does not suggest the expectation of a big hit. Therefore, the maker pattern may be used for displaying various settings that can be changed by the player on the game console (for example, the tone from the speaker 120, the game mode, etc.), the number of games played, and the number of consecutive villas for big hits. do not have. When the maker pattern is displayed, the degree of expectation of a big hit is always suggested, and a big hit can be expected with a fairly high probability. If a manufacturer with a high expectation is used when the expectation of a big hit is not suggested, the player misunderstands that the expectation of a big hit is high and expects it excessively. If the degree is not suggested, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the expectation of the big hit is high by not using the manufacturer's pattern with high expectation, and the expectation is excessively fueled. That can be alleviated.

In FIG. 56 (b) in which the zone title ZT described above is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, the animation of the zone effect is started to be displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 207, and the main character wearing a red kimono An animation of the lord training in swordsmanship is displayed. As shown in Fig. 60 (c), the color of this lord's kimono is selected from "white", "green", "red", and "rainbow color", and is a big hit of "white". Expectation is "20%", "green" jackpot expectation is "30%", "red" jackpot expectation is "45%", "rainbow color" jackpot expectation is "100%" It has become. In addition, it is not displayed in "Manufacturer pattern". This animation continues until FIG. 56 (i). The numerical value shown in the hold number display area of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 shown in FIG. 56 (b) is changed from 2 to 1, and "-" is displayed in the fourth symbol of the special figure 1. Has started blinking.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 56 (c), the background display is switched to the background display of the wilderness, which is the background display of the training zone. The background display of this wilderness continues until FIG. 56 (i). Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 56 (c), the variation display of the decorative symbol performed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c can be visually recognized. .. Further, in FIG. 56 (c), one ball is won in the first special figure start port (fixed) 230, and the hold icon of special figure 1 is increasing. The increased hold icon h12 is displayed in green (display mode B) at the display position of the second hold icon, and functions as a look-ahead notice. A directing sound (appearing sound) represented by sixteenth notes is output from the speaker 120 in accordance with the timing of starting the display of the green (display mode B) hold icon h12. In this example, the effect lamp 206 does not turn on in response to the increase in the hold represented by the green (fifth display mode) hold icon h12, and the effect lamp 206 remains off. The numerical value shown in the hold number display area of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 is increased by one to 2.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 56 (d), the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 3-Decoration 5-Decoration 8" is stopped and displayed. Further, in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed by "x", and the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed by the combination of "358". The star-shaped production lamp 206 remains off.

In FIG. 56 (e), the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is restarted, and the decorative symbol is variable display. The numerical value shown in the hold number display area of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 is 1, and the display of “−” is started blinking in the fourth symbol of the special figure 1. The green (display mode B) hold icon is moved by one and displayed at the display position of the first hold icon (hold icon h11). Further, the star-shaped effect lamp 206 remains extinguished.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 56 (f), the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 8-Decoration 1-Decoration 4" is stopped and displayed. Further, in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed by "x", and the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed by the combination of "814". The star-shaped production lamp 206 is still off.

In FIG. 56 (g), the hold represented by the green (display mode B) hold icon is digested, and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started. That is, the decorative symbol is variablely displayed, and the green (display mode B) hold icon is displayed as the green (display mode B) variable icon h0 in the variable icon display area 280. The star-shaped effect lamp 206, which has been turned off, responds to the start of the symbol variation display by the first special figure display device 212 based on the hold represented by the green (display mode B) hold icon that has been displayed so far. , Starts light emission in the light emitting mode B (green light emitting mode) representing green (display mode B). That is, the effect lamp 206 starts emitting light in the same or similar color as the green color of the variable icon h0. In this example, the effect lamp 206 does not start emitting light until the fluctuation subject to the notice is started. The timing of starting the display of the green (display mode B) variable icon h0 and the timing of starting the light emission of the star-shaped effect lamp 206 by the light emitting mode B may be the same, or the variable icon h0 is earlier. Alternatively, the production lamp 206 may be faster. The numerical value shown in the hold number display area of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 becomes 0, and the display of “−” is started blinking in the fourth symbol of the special figure 1.

In FIG. 56 (h), the reach state is entered in the variable display of the decorative symbol, but in this example, it does not develop into the super reach, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 56 (i), "decoration 4-decoration" The combination of the missing decorative symbols of "3-Decoration 4" is stopped and displayed. Further, in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed by "x", and the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed by the combination of "434". Further, the green (fifth display mode) variation icon h0 is hidden when the symbol variation display by the first special symbol display device 212 ends. The end timing of the symbol variation display and the timing of hiding the variation icon h0 may be simultaneous, the symbol variation display may be earlier, or the variation icon h0 may be earlier. Further, the effect lamp 206 is also turned off according to the non-display of the green (display mode B) variable icon h0.

The effect executed by the sub-liquid crystal display device 207 (second display means) is not limited to the display of the animation of the zone effect described above, and various effects may be performed. For example, when the decorative pattern that has been temporarily stopped and displayed in the pseudo continuous notice is changed again, the lord is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 207, and the color of the kimono of the lord suggests the expectation of a big hit. You may. Even in this case, it should not be displayed in "Manufacturer pattern". That is, the sub liquid crystal display device 207 does not display the "maker pattern" under any circumstances. In this way, by not displaying the "maker pattern" in the sub liquid crystal display device 207, the rarity of the maker pattern with high expectation can be improved, and the expectation and special feeling of the maker pattern can be enhanced. .. In addition, "pseudo continuous notice" means a notice that the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and then changed again during the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to one big hit lottery. This is a notice that the variable display and the temporary stop display may be displayed multiple times.

FIG. 57 is a diagram showing a stepwise example of an effect in which the display mode of the hold icon and the light emission mode of the star-shaped effect lamp 206 are related and further super reach is performed.

FIG. 57 also shows the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect lamp 206. On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 57 (a), the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 1-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed.

Further, in FIG. 57A, two hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and these two hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed. Both are displayed in the default display mode.

Further, the effect lamp 206 shown in FIG. 57A is lit in the default light emitting mode (white light emitting mode) which is the light emitting mode representing the display mode of the hold icons h11 and h12.

In FIG. 57 (b), the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started. That is, the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, the variation display of the fourth symbol and the mini symbol is also started, the movement of the hold icon is finished, and the variation display of the decorative symbol is also started. The numerical value shown in the hold number display area of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 has changed from 2 to 1, and in the fourth symbol of the special figure 1, the display of “−” has started blinking. Further, the hold icon is shifted to the right by one, and the hold icon h11, which was the first hold icon until then, is displayed as the change icon h0 in the change icon display area 280.

In FIG. 57 (c), one ball is won in the first special figure start port (fixed) 230, and the hold icon of special figure 1 is increasing. The increased hold icon is displayed in red (display mode C) at the display position of the second hold icon h12, and functions as a look-ahead notice. A directing sound (appearing sound) represented by an eighth note is output from the speaker 120 in accordance with the timing of starting the display of the red (display mode C) hold icon h12. Further, as in the example shown in FIG. 52, in this example as well, the star-shaped effect lamp 206 that has been emitting light in the default light emitting mode (white light emitting mode) has a display mode of the hold icon h12 indicating the increased hold. It changes to the light emitting mode C (red light emitting mode) representing. The numerical value shown in the hold number display area of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 is increased by one to 2.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 57 (d), the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 3-Decoration 5-Decoration 8" is stopped and displayed. Further, in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed by "x", and the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed by the combination of "358". The star-shaped effect lamp 206 continues to emit light according to the light emitting mode C.

In FIG. 57 (e), the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is restarted, and the decorative symbol is variable display. The numerical value shown in the hold number display area of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 is 1, and the display of “−” is started blinking in the fourth symbol of the special figure 1. The red (display mode C) hold icon is moved by one and displayed at the display position of the first hold icon (hold icon h11). When the hold icon that was red (display mode C) is displayed at the display position of the first hold icon, the display mode changes to display mode D (maker pattern), and the hold icon h11 is displayed in display mode D (maker pattern). ) Is displayed. A production sound (change sound) represented by quarter notes is output from the speaker 120 in accordance with the change timing of the display mode of the hold icon. On the other hand, the effect lamp 206 that has been emitting light in the red light emitting mode (light emitting mode C) maintains the light emitting mode, and the light emitting mode does not change even if the display mode of the hold icon changes. The light emitting mode of the effect lamp 206, which is more conspicuous than the hold icon, does not change, but when viewed closely, the hold icon h11 of the display mode D (manufacturer pattern), which has the lowest appearance frequency, is displayed, and the player who discovered this is displayed. May greatly improve the interest of the game. In addition, in response to the change of the hold icon h11 to the display mode D (maker pattern), the effect lamp 206 also has a light emission mode different from the light emission mode representing the display mode D (maker pattern) (for example, light emission mode F (gold color). (Emission mode)) may change.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 57 (f), the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 8-Decoration 1-Decoration 4" is stopped and displayed. Further, in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed by "x", and the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed by the combination of "814". The hold icon h11 is displayed in the display mode D (manufacturer pattern), and the effect lamp 206 continues to emit light in the light emitting mode C.

In FIG. 57 (g), the hold represented by the hold icon h11 in the display mode D (maker pattern) is digested, and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 57 (g), the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, and the hold icon h11 is displayed as the variable icon h0 in the variable icon display area 280. In this example, when the hold icon h11 which was the display mode D (manufacturer pattern) is displayed in the variable icon display area 280, that is, when the display mode changes to the variable icon h0, the display mode changes to the display mode E (rainbow color). , The variable icon h0 is displayed in the display mode E (rainbow color). The variable icon h0 in the display mode E (rainbow color) functions as a normal notice for confirming the jackpot. Even in accordance with the change timing of the display mode of the hold icon here, the effect sound (change sound) represented by the half note is output from the speaker 120. Further, in response to the appearance of the variation icon h0 of the display mode E (rainbow color), the star-shaped effect lamp 206 that has been emitting light in the light emission mode C so far has a light emitting mode D representing the rainbow color (display mode E). It changes to (rainbow-colored light emission mode). That is, light emission in the same or similar color as the rainbow color of the variable icon h0 is started. The numerical value shown in the hold number display area of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 becomes 0, and the display of “−” is started blinking in the fourth symbol of the special figure 1.

In this example, the display mode is changed from the display mode D (maker pattern) to the display mode E (rainbow color), but the display mode is changed from the display mode D (maker pattern) to the display mode E (rainbow color). There is no change (change rate is 0%), and display mode E (display mode E (default display mode, display mode B, display mode C, display mode F) only from other display modes (default display mode, display mode B, display mode C, display mode F) except display mode D (manufacturer pattern). It may be changed to rainbow color). Alternatively, the rate of change from the other display mode to display mode E (rainbow color) may be higher than the rate of change from display mode D (maker pattern) to display mode E (rainbow color).

In FIG. 57 (h), the reach state is entered in the variable display of the decorative symbol, and in FIG. 57 (i), the background image is switched from the default background image to non-display, and the variable icon display area 280 and the special figure 1 are shown. The hold icon display area 281 has disappeared. In FIG. 57 (i), the variable icon h0 of the display mode E (rainbow color) is hidden, but the star-shaped effect lamp 206 continues to emit light according to the light emission mode D (rainbow color light emission mode). As described above, the effect lamp 206 may continue to emit light even if the variable icon h0 is hidden, only when the effect lamp 206 emits light in the light emitting mode D (rainbow-colored light emitting mode) in which the jackpot is confirmed. The effect lamp 206 may continue to emit light or may be turned off based on the result of the effect lottery, regardless of the mode of light emission. The fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 is displayed. Further, the variable display of the decorative symbol, which has been performed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, has been moved to the lower right corner and reduced. On the other hand, the mini design on the upper left is continuously displayed.

In FIG. 57 (j), it has developed into a super reach (Den reach). The star-shaped effect lamp 206 continues to emit light in the light emitting mode D (rainbow color). Further, the reach title LT3 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 57 (j). The display of the reach title LT3 here is written in black letters on a rainbow-colored background display as "Den reach". As shown in FIG. 60 (a), the background color of the reach title LT3 is selected from "white", "red", "maker pattern", and "rainbow color", and is "white". The expectation of the jackpot is "20%", the expectation of the jackpot of "red" is "35%", the expectation of the jackpot of the manufacturer pattern is "75%", and the expectation of the jackpot of "rainbow color" is "100". % ”. That is, unlike the above-mentioned "jii reach", the degree of expectation of a big hit is suggested depending on the type of background color of the reach title LT3. Further, the light emitting mode D (rainbow-colored light emitting mode), which is the light emitting mode of the effect lamp 206, is the same as or similar to the display mode of the background display in the reach title LT3.

An animation of the character of the palace is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 57 (k), and the character of the palace that looks proud is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 57 (l). ing. Further, in the variable display of the decorative symbol reduced and displayed in the lower right corner, the fluctuation of the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 4" is displayed. Although the display of the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 remains off, the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 and the mini symbol are displayed. As for the mini symbols, the variable display is continuously performed for all the symbols until the symbols are confirmed and displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 57 (m), the reduced display at the lower right returns to the original size, and the decorative symbols are combined with the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. Is displayed as stopped. Here, the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 4" is stopped and displayed. Further, in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed with "◯", and the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed with the combination of "444". In FIG. 57 (m), the background is hidden, but in reality, a background image different from the default is displayed.

In the example shown in FIG. 57, the effect lamp 206, which continued to emit light in the light emitting mode D (rainbow color) even when the super reach (rainbow color) was started, emits light in the light emitting mode D (rainbow color) even during the super reach. Is continued, and even if the combination of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed, the light emission is further continued, and the light emission in the light emission mode D (rainbow color) is continued until the subsequent big hit game start effect is started. The effect lamp 206 may be turned off at the end of the symbol variation display by the first special figure display device 212.

FIG. 58 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of an effect in which the display mode of the hold icon and the display mode of the decorative body included in the second effect movable body 8 are related.

FIG. 58 also shows the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, in FIG. 58, the star-shaped effect lamp 206 is not shown, and instead, the second effect movable body 8 arranged on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown. As for the effect lamp, as described above, the light emitting mode may be changed according to the display mode of the hold icon or the variable icon to emit light. Alternatively, in this example, the effect lamp 206 may remain extinguished or may remain in the default light emitting mode (white light emitting mode).

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 58 (a), the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 1-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Further, in FIG. 58A, one hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 has a default display mode. It is displayed.

The second effect movable body 8 shown in FIG. 58 (a) is located at the initial position. The second effect movable body 8 located at the initial position does not overlap the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 from the front side, and is located at a position avoiding the display screen, whether it is the upper arm portion 81 or the forearm portion 82. It is facing downwards.

In FIG. 58 (b), the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started. That is, the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, the variation display of the fourth symbol and the mini symbol is also started, the movement of the hold icon is finished, and the variation display of the decorative symbol is also started. The numerical value shown in the hold number display area of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 has changed from 1 to 0, and the “−” display has started blinking in the fourth symbol of the special figure 1. Further, the hold icon is shifted to the right by one, and the hold icon h11, which has been in the display position of the first hold icon until then, is displayed as the change icon h0 in the change icon display area 280. The hold icon h11, which was the default display mode, remains in the default display mode even if it changes to the variable icon h0.

The second effect movable body 8 shown in FIG. 58 (b) remains in the initial position.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 in which the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the button effect is started. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 58 (c) displays an operation promotion notification image 136P that prompts the user to press the effect button 136 within the valid period. In the operation promotion notification image 136P, an image 136P1 of the effect button 136 and a remaining time display bar 136P2 indicating the remaining time of the valid period are displayed on the right side of the character image of the lord. The variable display of the decorative symbol is hidden by the operation promotion notification image 136P, but the player can recognize that the special symbol is changing by the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284 or the like. .. The display position of the decorative symbol may be moved to a position that does not overlap with the operation promotion notification image 136P so that the decorative symbol is not hidden.

In the remaining time display bar 136P2 shown in FIG. 58 (d), the valid period is reduced, and in FIG. 58 (e), the player presses the effect button 136. When the effect button 136 is pressed within the valid period, the success / failure result of the button effect is notified. In this example, if the display mode of the variable icon h0 is ranked up, it is successful, and in the variable icon display area 280 shown in FIG. 58 (f), the variable icon changed from the default display mode to the display mode C (red). h0 is displayed. That is, the button production has been successful, and the normal notice has started. A directing sound (changed sound) represented by an eighth note is output from the speaker 120 in accordance with the change timing of the display mode of the variable icon h0. Further, the button lamp 138 of the effect button 136 may also emit light in a red light emitting mode. If the button effect fails, the display mode of the variable icon h0 does not change even if the effect button 136 is pressed within the valid period. In addition to this, in the button production, a notice of entering the reach state may be notified if it succeeds.

As shown in FIG. 58 (f), even if the success / failure result of the button effect is notified, the second effect movable body 8 is still in the initial position, but as shown in FIG. 58 (g). When the reach state is entered in the variable display of the decorative symbol, the second effect movable body 8 starts the operation. That is, the upper arm portion 81 starts to rotate upward, and the forearm portion 82 also starts to rotate upward. As a result, the second effect movable body 8 starts to overlap a part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 from the front side. In the following FIG. 58 (h), the background image is switched from the default background image to non-display, and the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 disappear. As a result, the variable icon h0 in the display mode C (red) is also hidden. The upper arm portion 81 of the second effect movable body 8 rotates further upward, and the forearm portion 82 is greatly lifted. The fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 is displayed. Further, the variable display of the decorative symbol, which has been performed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, has been moved to the lower right corner and reduced. On the other hand, the mini design on the upper left is continuously displayed.

In FIG. 58 (i), it has developed into a super reach (Den reach). The reach title LT4 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 58 (i). The display of the reach title LT4 here is written in black letters on a red background display as "Den reach". Further, in the second effect movable body 8 shown in FIG. 58 (i), the forearm portion 82 vibrates while the forearm portion 82 is lifted high, and the second finger (index finger) 822 is further extended, and the decoration C (red). Is visible. This decoration C is a display mode showing red, and is the same as or similar to the display mode C (red), which is the display mode of the variable icon h0 changed by the button effect. The decoration on the second finger (index finger) 822 also suggests the expectation of a big hit. In this example, the display mode of the background display in the reach title LT4 and the display mode of the decorative body of the second effect movable body 8 are the same or similar display modes, but may be different display modes.

Further, the background display of the reach title LT4 may be a display mode representing red. That is, the background display of the reach title LT4 is the same as or similar to the display mode C (red), and has a color slightly different from the display mode C (red), which is a display mode of the hold icon or the variable icon, for example. However, if the player can imagine the display mode C (red), the display mode is similar to the display mode C (red).

An animation of the character of the palace is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 58 (j), and the second effect in which the second finger (index finger) 822 is extended while the forearm 82 is lifted high. The movable body 8 has started a return operation toward the initial position. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 58 (k), the character of the palace that looks proud is displayed, and the second effect movable body 8 has returned to the initial position. Further, in the variable display of the decorative symbol reduced and displayed in the lower right corner, the fluctuation of the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 4" is displayed. Although the display of the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 remains off, the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 and the mini symbol are displayed. As for the mini symbols, the variable display is continuously performed for all the symbols until the symbols are confirmed and displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 58 (l), the reduced display at the lower right returns to the original size, and the decorative symbols are combined with the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. Is displayed as stopped. Here, the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 4" is stopped and displayed. Further, in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed with "◯", and the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed with the combination of "444". In FIG. 58 (l), the background is hidden, but in reality, a background image different from the default is displayed.

FIG. 59 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of an effect similar to the effect in which the second effect movable body 8 shown in FIG. 58 operates, and the differences from the example of the effect shown in FIG. 58 will be mainly described. ..

FIGS. 59 (a) to 59 (e) are the same as those of FIGS. 58 (a) to 58 (e), and the button effect is executed.

The button effect was also successful in FIG. 59 (f), and the variable icon h0 changed from the default display mode to the display mode D (maker pattern) is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. Further, in accordance with the change timing of the display mode of the variable icon h0, the effect sound (change sound) represented by a quarter note is output from the speaker 120. The button lamp 138 of the effect button 136 does not emit light in a light emitting mode representing the manufacturer's pattern, but may emit light in a red light emitting mode.

In the following FIG. 59 (g), as in FIG. 58 (g), the second effect movable body 8 has started to operate as it has entered the reach state in the variable display of the decorative symbol. For example, when the variable icon h0 is displayed in the display mode B (green), the second effect movable body 8 may not operate and may still remain stationary at the initial position. That is, when the display mode D (maker pattern) is displayed, the operation effect of the second effect movable body 8 is more likely to be performed than when the display mode B (green) is displayed. You may. Further, when the display mode D (manufacturer pattern) is displayed, the second effect movable body is displayed as compared with the display mode C (red) shown in FIG. 58 (g). The operation effect of 8 may be easily performed. That is, it is preferable that the higher the expectation of the big hit, the easier it is for the operation effect of the second effect movable body 8 to be performed. When the display mode D (manufacturer's pattern) is displayed, the operation effect of the second effect movable body 8 may be performed without fail.

In FIG. 59 (h), the background image is switched from the default background image to non-display as in FIG. 58 (h). In this example, the variable icon h0 of the display mode D (maker pattern) is also hidden. It has become. Further, as in FIG. 58 (h), the forearm portion 82 of the second effect movable body 8 is greatly raised.

In FIG. 59 (i), it has evolved into a super reach (Den reach), and the reach title LT5 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The display of the reach title LT5 here is written in black characters as "Den reach" on the background display of the manufacturer's pattern. Further, in the second effect movable body 8 shown in FIG. 59 (j), the forearm portion 82 vibrates in a state where the forearm portion 82 is lifted high, similarly to the second effect movable body 8 shown in FIG. 58 (j). Further, the second finger (index finger) 822 is extended. As a result, the decoration C becomes visible, but the decoration C has a display mode D (manufacturer pattern) which is a display mode showing red and is a display mode of the variable icon h0 changed by the button effect. Is a different form of decoration. That is, the decoration is one step lower in terms of the expectation of a big hit. The first finger (thumb) 821 may be extended so that the decoration D (see FIG. 54 (e)) having a 70% expectation of a big hit can be visually recognized. However, even in this case, it is lower than the jackpot expectation (75%) suggested by the display mode D (manufacturer's pattern). Since the player can see the variable icon h0 of the display mode D (maker pattern) having the lowest appearance frequency, and can also see the maker pattern in the display mode of the background display in the reach title LT5. The feeling is sufficiently hot, and in some cases, the decoration of the second production movable body 8 can calm the player's feelings a little.

The background display of the reach title LT5 may be a display mode representing the display mode D (manufacturer pattern), which is a display mode of the hold icon or the variable icon. That is, the background display of the reach title LT5 has the same or similar mode as the maker pattern, and for example, the shape of the polka dots is slightly different from the display mode D (maker pattern) which is the display mode of the hold icon or the variable icon. Even if there is, if the player can imagine the display mode D (maker pattern), the display mode will be similar to the display mode D (maker pattern).

Subsequent FIGS. 59 (i) to (l) are the same as those of FIGS. 58 (i) to (l), and the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 4" is Stop is displayed and it becomes a big hit.

FIG. 60A is a diagram showing a reach title background color determination table stored in ROM 506 of the second sub-control unit 500.

In the effect control process (step S409) shown in FIG. 50A, the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 determines the background color using the reach title background color determination table shown in FIG. 60A. At this time, as described above, green is always selected as the background color of the reach title LT1 of "Ji Reach", and this background color does not indicate the degree of expectation of a big hit. On the other hand, the background color of the reach title LT2 of "Swordsman Reach" and the background color of the reach title LT3 (LT4) of "Den Reach" suggest the degree of expectation of a big hit, and the CPU 504 is the first sub-control unit 400. Determine the background color based on the command received from. Both the reach title LT2 of "Swordsman Reach" and the reach title LT3 of "Den Reach" include the maker pattern in the background color. In both reach titles LT2 and LT3, a common one is used as the relationship between the background color and the jackpot expectation degree, but different ones may be used.

FIG. 60B is a diagram showing an emission color determination table stored in ROM 406 of the first sub-control unit 400.

In the effect control process (step S309) shown in FIG. 49 (a), the CPU 0404 of the first sub-control unit 400 uses the emission color determination table shown in FIG. 60 (b) to emit light in the first effect movable body 7. The emission color of 71 is determined. The emission color of the light emitting unit 71 suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit, and the CPU 404 determines the emission color based on the command received from the main control unit 300. The emission colors are white, red, and rainbow colors, and the emission colors of the manufacturer's pattern are not prepared. Further, the degree of expectation of a big hit suggested by the red emission color and the degree of expectation of a big hit suggested by the red background color of the reach title described above are different in magnitude of the degree of expectation. Further, the magnitude of the expectation is different from the jackpot expectation suggested by the red display mode in the hold icon and the variable icon described with reference to FIG. 53.

FIG. 60 (c) is a diagram showing a kimono color determination table of the lord stored in ROM 506 of the second sub-control unit 500.

This determination table serves as a table for determining the color of the kimono of the lord displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 207 in the zone effect described with reference to FIG. 56. Similar to the determination of the background color described above, the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 determines the kimono of the lord based on the command received from the first sub-control unit 400 in the effect control process (step S409) shown in FIG. 50 (a). Determine the color of. At this time, the determination table shown in FIG. 60 (c) is used. As described above, since the maker pattern is not displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 207, the maker pattern is not prepared as the color of the kimono of the lord. The color of the lord's kimono also suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit.

In the above description, the effect sounds such as the appearance sound of the hold icon and the variable icon and the change sound of the display mode are output from the speaker 120, but the shortest 16th note corresponds to the display mode B (green). A production sound is output (FIG. 56 (c)), and a short production sound of eighth notes is output corresponding to the display mode C (red) (FIG. 52 (c), FIG. 57 (c), FIG. 58 (Fig. 58). f)), a long quarter note production sound is output corresponding to the display mode D (maker pattern) (FIGS. 55 (b), 57 (e), 59 (f)), and the display mode E ( The longest production sound of the half note was output corresponding to (rainbow color) (Fig. 57 (g)). That is, the higher the expectation of the jackpot, the longer the output time of the production sound is output. Although the effect sound was different for each display mode, the display mode in which the expectation of the jackpot was relatively high (display mode D and the display mode E higher than 50%) and the display in which the expectation of the jackpot was relatively low were displayed. The effect sound may be different depending on the mode (display mode B and display mode C of 50% or less). That is, a special effect sound may be output only when the expectation of the big hit is relatively high. Furthermore, only the appearance sound of the hold icon and the variable icon of the display mode D (maker pattern) and the change sound to the display mode D (maker pattern) are output as a specific effect sound different from that of the other display modes. You may try to do it. The specific effect sound here may be an effect sound related to the display mode D (maker pattern) or an effect sound representing the display mode D (maker pattern). For example, when the maker pattern is an animal pattern, the specific effect sound may be an effect sound. , The bark of the animal with the animal pattern may be output as a specific production sound.

Further, in the above description, the character color of the reach title LT1 shown in FIG. 52 (j) and the character color of the zone title ZT shown in FIG. 56 (b) do not suggest the degree of expectation of a big hit, and conversely. , The background display of the reach title LT2 shown in FIG. 55 (e), the background display of the reach title LT3 shown in FIG. 57 (j), the background display of the reach title LT4 shown in FIG. 58 (i), and the background display of the reach title LT4 shown in FIG. 59 (i). The background display of the reach title LT5 suggested the degree of expectation of a big hit. However, the display mode of the title characters may indicate the expectation of the jackpot, and in this case, the title characters are displayed in different display modes according to the expectation of the jackpot. .. On the contrary, the background display of the title may not suggest the degree of expectation of a big hit. In this case, the background display of the title is always displayed in the same display mode.

Furthermore, in addition to the display mode of the title character and background display, the display mode of the cut-in notice display character, background display, and frame display, or the display mode of the dialogue notice character, background display, and balloon line display are the hold icon and the display mode. The display mode (color or pattern) of the variable icon may indicate the degree of expectation of a big hit. For example, in these notices, the display of the second display mode (manufacturer pattern) appears. On the other hand, the display of the second display mode (maker pattern) does not appear during the demonstration production.

Further, during the big hit game, the light emitting means (effect lamp 206, the light emitting unit 71 of the first effect movable body 7, the game board lamp 442 such as a light emitting diode (not shown) arranged in the attacker unit 23, the left frame lamp 122L, The right frame lamp 122R, the upper frame lamp 122U, the game table frame lamp 452 such as the button lamp 138, etc.) may emit light in a rainbow-colored light emitting mode. Therefore, the rainbow-colored light emitting mode (light emitting mode D) may not suggest the degree of expectation of a big hit unless the symbol variation is displayed. Even during the big hit game, the light emitting means does not emit light in a light emitting mode representing the maker pattern (display mode D).

Further, the appearance frequency of the maker pattern may be higher in the second gaming state (for example, the special figure high probability state) than in the first gaming state (for example, the special figure low probability state). Further, the appearance frequency of the maker pattern may be a specification that cannot be changed depending on the setting operation of the player, but if the specification can be changed in the custom mode, the first mode (for example, the non-custom mode (normal mode)). )) In the second mode (for example, custom mode), the appearance frequency of the manufacturer pattern may be higher.

Further, if the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment is hit right in the special figure low probability state, it takes a long time until the result of the variation display of the special figure 2 is displayed, which is disadvantageous to the player. The maker pattern may appear in the special figure high probability state where the small hit rush can be expected without appearing. Alternatively, in the 1-type and 2-type mixer that wins a V prize via a small hit, the maker pattern does not appear in the variable production in which the small hit is won in the normal game state, and the small hit is won in the short-time game state. In the variable production, there is a possibility that the maker pattern may appear.

Further, although the maker pattern has the lowest appearance frequency, the appearance frequency may be the same as the appearance frequency of the rainbow color. Alternatively, the frequency of appearance of the maker pattern may be lower than the frequency of appearance of red but higher than the frequency of appearance of rainbow color. As described above, the frequency of appearance may be changeable depending on the setting operation of the player.

Further, what has been displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 207, or may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 207 instead of the decorative symbol display device 208.

Further, as a display means instead of the sub liquid crystal display device 207, a transparent or translucent light guide plate (second display means) covering the game board 200 or the game area 124 is installed in front of the game board 200 or the game area 124. You may. This light guide plate is an optical member that emits light incident from the side toward the front, and the light emitting mode can be switched according to the color of the incident light. It is possible to display a pattern. Even when the light guide plate is used instead of the sub liquid crystal display device 207, the manufacturer's pattern is not displayed.

Further, in the explanations of FIGS. 52 to 59, the expectation of the jackpot may be expressed (may not be expressed), white, green, red, gold, rainbow, and the manufacturer's pattern that always expresses the expectation of the jackpot. Although it is described using blue, which does not represent the degree of expectation of a big hit, other colors and patterns may be used respectively.

Further, when the display mode of the hold icon or the variable icon is changed, the display mode D (manufacturer pattern) is not changed from the default display mode, while the display mode E (rainbow color) is changed from the default display mode. It may change, and in this case, the display mode D (maker pattern) may be changed only from the display mode C (red), or the display mode C (red) may change. And it may be possible to change from the display mode B (green). On the contrary, the default display mode may not be changed to the display mode E (rainbow color), while the default display mode may be changed to the display mode D (maker pattern). good. In this case, the display mode E (rainbow color) may be changed only from the display mode C (red), or may be changed from the display mode C (red) and the display mode B (green). May be possible. Further, the display mode D (manufacturer pattern) may be changed from the display mode C (red) and the display mode B (green) in addition to the default display mode.

As described above, various effects using colors have been described, but the predetermined colors displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 (the background display of the reach title, the hold icon, the variable icon, and the predetermined color displayed by the zone title). ), Light emitting means (effect lamp 206, light emitting unit 71 of the first effect movable body 7, game board lamp 442 such as a light emitting diode (not shown) arranged in the attacker unit 23, left frame lamp 122L, right frame lamp 122R. , The upper frame lamp 122U, the game table frame lamp 452 such as the button lamp 138), the predetermined color displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 207 (the kimono of the lord), and the second effect movable body. Strictly speaking, the predetermined color of the decoration of the decorative body included in 8 has a different hue in each display because the display medium and the effect are different.

However, even if the colors are slightly different, if the player can imagine that the color is a "predetermined color" (for example, red), the "predetermined color" of each display represents the same "predetermined color". It can be said that they are the same or similar "predetermined colors".

FIG. 61 is an external perspective view of a slot machine to which the present invention can be applied as viewed from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 1000 includes a main body 1001 and a front door 1002 that is attached to the front of the main body 1001 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 1001. Inside the center of the main body 1001 (not shown in FIG. 61), three reels (left reel 1010, middle reel 1011 and right reel 1012) in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged on the outer peripheral surface are stored, and the slot machine 1000 It is configured to rotate internally. These reels 1010 to 1012 are rotationally driven by a driving means such as a stepping motor.

In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 61, an appropriate number of symbols are printed on the strip-shaped members at equal intervals, and the strip-shaped members are attached to a predetermined circular tubular frame member to form each reel 1010 to 1012. .. When viewed from the player, approximately three symbols on the reels 1010 to 1012 are displayed in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 1013, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. Then, by rotating each reel 1010 to 1012, the combination of symbols that can be seen by the player changes. That is, each reel 1010 to 1012 functions as a display means for variably displaying a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display means, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be adopted in addition to the reel. Further, in the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 61, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 1000, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

On the back surface of each of the reels 1010 to 1012, a backlight (not shown in FIG. 61) for illuminating each symbol displayed on the symbol display window 1013 is arranged. It is desirable that the backlight is shielded for each symbol so that the individual symbols can be evenly illuminated. Inside the slot machine 1000, an optical sensor (not shown) including a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit is provided in the vicinity of each of the reels 1010 to 1012, and the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit of this optical sensor are provided. A light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the spaces. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the position of the symbol on the reel in the rotation direction is determined, and the reels 1010 to 1012 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the winning line.

The winning line indicator lamp 1020 is a lamp indicating a valid winning line 1014. The valid winning line is predetermined by the number of medals bet as a game medium. There are 5 winning lines 1014. For example, if one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line is valid, and if two medals are bet, the upper horizontal winning line and the lower horizontal winning line are added. If three medals are valid and three medals are bet, the five lines with the addition of the right-down winning line and the upper-right winning line will be valid as the winning line. The number of winning lines 1014 is not limited to 5 lines, and for example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line, the upper horizontal winning line, the lower horizontal winning line, and the right. Five lines, a down winning line and an upper right winning line, may be valid as winning lines.

The notification lamp 1023 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus) has been internally won in the internal lottery, or that the bonus game is in progress. The game medal insertable lamp 1024 is a lamp for notifying the player that the game medal can be inserted. The re-game lamp 1022 informs the player that the current game can be re-played (no need to insert a medal) when the re-game, which is one of the winning roles in the previous game, is won. It is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 1028 is a lamp for directing.

The bet buttons 1030 to 1032 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 61, a maximum of three bets are inserted each time the bet button 1030 is pressed, two are inserted when the bet button 1031 is pressed, and two are inserted when the bet button 1032 is pressed. Three cards are to be thrown in. Hereinafter, the bet button 1032 is also referred to as a MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 1029 lights up a number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when a predetermined number of medals are inserted, the game start operation for notifying that the game start operation is possible. The lamp 1021 lights up.

The medal slot 1034 is a slot for the player to insert medals at the start of the game. That is, the medal can be inserted electronically by pressing the bet buttons 1030 to 1032, or the actual medal can be inserted (inserted operation) from the medal insertion slot 1034. be. The stored number display 1025 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. The game information display 1026 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) numerically. The payout number display 1027 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning some winning combination.

The start lever 1035 is a lever-type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 1010 to 1012. That is, when a desired number of medals are inserted into the medal insertion port 1034 or the bet buttons 1030 to 1032 are operated to operate the start lever 1035, the reels 1010 to 1012 start rotating. The operation on the start lever 1035 is called the game start operation. In this slot machine 1000, based on the operation of the start lever 1035, an internal lottery process is executed in which a lottery is performed to determine which of the plurality of types of combinations is won, and the slot machine 1000 is operated. It is determined whether the player is in a relatively advantageous state or a relatively disadvantageous state.

The stop button unit 1036 is provided with stop buttons 1037 to 1039. The stop buttons 1037 to 10310 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 1010 to 1012 that have started to rotate by operating the start lever 1035, and are associated with the reels 1010 to 1012. Hereinafter, the operation for the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the last stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. A light emitting body may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 1037 to 1039, and when the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 can be operated, the light emitting body can be turned on to notify the player.

The medal return button 1033 is a button for removing medals by pressing the button when the inserted medals are jammed. The settlement button 1043 is a button for settlement of medals and bet medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000 and ejecting them from the medal payout outlet 1055. The door key hole 1040 is a hole for inserting a key for unlocking the front door 1002 of the slot machine 1000. The medal payout outlet 1055 is a payout exit for paying out medals.

Further, in the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 61, the same operation key unit 1090 as the operation key unit 181 provided in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 41 is provided between the MAX bet button 1032 and the medal insertion slot 1034. ing. This operation key unit 1090 also has a cross key, an OK button, and a cancel button. Further, next to the operation key unit 1090, the same effect button 1091 as the chance button 136 provided in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 41 is provided, and this effect button 1091 is also a button lamp (not shown). It emits light.

The sound hole 1060 is a hole for outputting the sound of the speaker provided inside the slot machine 1000 to the outside. The side lamps 1044 provided on the left and right parts of the front door 1002 are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. An effect device 1080 is arranged on the upper part of the front door 1002. The effect device 1080 includes a door (shutter) member 1063 composed of two right doors 1063a and a left door 1063b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 1057 arranged on the back side of the door member 1063. It has the same effect movable body 1058 as the second effect movable body 8 provided in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 41, and the two right doors 1063a and the left door 1063b are horizontally outside in front of the liquid crystal display device 1057. When opened, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) appears in front of the slot machine 1000 (on the player side), and the effect movable body 1058 also appears on the right side. Light emitting diodes (not shown) capable of emitting full color light are arranged on the right door 1063a and the left door 1063b. Further, the effect movable body 1058 shown in FIG. 61 also includes the decorative body described with reference to FIG. 54. It should be noted that the device may be configured to be capable of displaying various production images and various game information even if it is not a liquid crystal display device, and includes, for example, a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, a plasma display, or a projector and a screen. It may be a display device or the like. In addition, the display screen has a square shape, and the entire display screen is visible to the player. In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 61, the display screen is a rectangular flat surface, but it may be a square flat surface. Further, it is also possible to provide an ornament (not shown) on the periphery of the display screen so that the display screen looks irregular as a result of a part of the periphery of the display screen being hidden by the ornament. Further, the display screen may have a curved surface.

In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 61, a sub liquid crystal display device may be provided separately from the liquid crystal display device 1057.

The liquid crystal display device 1057 and / and the sub-liquid crystal display device display display modes A to E in a title character display, a title background display, a notice background display, a notice frame display, a notice character display, and the like. Used. That is, the display of the maker pattern of the display mode D is also used. In the slot machine 1000, each display of the display mode A to the display mode E is a suggestion image suggesting the degree of expectation of transition to the AT state and the degree of expectation of bonus acquisition. Further, the side lamp 1044, the light emitting diodes (not shown) arranged on the right door 1063a and the left door 1063b, the button lamps (not shown) for causing the effect button 1091 to emit light, and the like can emit light in the light emitting modes A to E. However, it does not emit light in the light emitting mode representing the manufacturer's pattern.

The present invention can also be applied to an enclosed pachinko machine. In the enclosed pachinko machine, a predetermined number of game media (for example, game balls) are circulated inside the game table. That is, the game medium launched from the launching means into the gaming area can be discharged from the gaming area and supplied to the launching means again. Further, a display means for displaying information on the number of game media (prize balls, rental balls, total number of balls held, etc.) and other information is arranged below the game area on the front of the game table, and is shown in FIG. 41. The ball storage dish 126 shown is not provided. This enclosed pachinko machine encloses a ball and circulates the enclosed ball inside the pachinko machine. The enclosed ball is used as a launching ball, and the payout of the ball is executed by credit. It may be.

According to the above description
Suggestion image [for example, hold icon, variable icon, title character display] suggesting the degree of expectation that the player will be advantageous [for example, the degree of expectation of a big hit, the degree of expectation of transitioning to the AT state, the degree of expectation of acquiring a bonus, etc.] , Title background display, notice background display, notice frame display, notice character display, etc.] and display means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, sub liquid crystal display device 207, liquid crystal display device 1057, etc.] ,
Light emitting means capable of emitting light in a plurality of light emitting modes [For example, for a game board such as an effect lamp 206, a light emitting unit 71 of the first effect movable body 7, and a light emitting diode (not shown) arranged in an attacker unit 23 shown in FIG. 43. Lamp 442 (see FIG. 44), left frame lamp 122L, right frame lamp 122R, upper frame lamp 122U, button lamp 138 and other game table frame lamps 452 (see FIG. 44) shown in FIG. Side lamps 1044, right door 1063a and left door 1063b (not shown light emitting diodes, effect buttons 1091 not shown), etc.]
It is a game table equipped with
The display means displays the suggested image in the first display mode [for example, the white display mode shown in FIGS. 53 (a) and 60 (a), the green display mode shown in FIG. 53 (b), and FIG. 53 ( c), the red display mode shown in FIG. 60 (a), etc.]
The display means can display the suggestion image in a second display mode [for example, a display mode of green and yellow polka dots (maker pattern) on a white background shown in FIGS. 53 (d) and 60 (a)]. It is a thing
The second display mode is a display mode that suggests that the degree of expectation is higher than that of the first display mode [for example, 75%].
The light emitting means is a first light emitting mode showing the first display mode [for example, a white light emitting mode shown in FIGS. 53 (a) and 60 (b), and a green light emitting mode shown in FIG. 53 (b). It may emit light in the mode, the red light emitting mode shown in FIGS. 53 (c), 60 (b), etc.].
The light emitting means may not emit light in the second light emitting mode [for example, a light emitting mode having green and yellow polka dots on a white background] representing the second display mode.
[For example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 41 and the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 61]. 』\
Was explained.

According to this game table, the rarity of the second display mode, which has a high degree of expectation, may be improved, and the expectation and special feeling of the second display mode may be enhanced.

The degree of expectation may be a big hit expectation.

Further, the light emitting means may be a board lamp or a frame lamp. Alternatively, it may be a light emitting body provided in an accessory such as a movable means.

Further, even if the first light emitting mode is slightly different from the first display mode, it is sufficient that the relationship with the first display mode is generally recognized. Further, the light emitting means does not emit light in a light emitting mode in which a relationship with the second display mode is generally recognized.

Further, the display means can display the suggested image in the fourth display mode, and the display suggesting that the first display mode has a higher degree of expectation than the fourth display mode. It may be an embodiment. The fourth display mode may be a normal display mode, that is, a default display mode. The fourth display mode may be a display mode that suggests that the expectation level is lower than that of the first display mode, or is a display mode that suggests that the expectation level is 0%. It may be a display mode which does not suggest the degree of expectation.

also,
"The display means can display the suggested image in the third display mode [for example, the rainbow-colored display mode shown in FIGS. 53 (e) and 60 (a)].
The third display mode is a display mode that suggests that the degree of expectation is higher than that of the second display mode [for example, 100%].
The light emitting means may emit light in a third light emitting mode [for example, the rainbow-colored light emitting mode shown in FIGS. 53 (e) and 60 (b)] representing the third display mode. ,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

also,
"The first light emitting mode is the same as or similar to the first display mode, and is
The second light emitting mode is the same as or similar to the second display mode.
The third light emitting mode is the same as or similar to the third display mode.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

The first light emitting mode is a light emitting mode related to the first display mode, the second light emitting mode is a light emitting mode related to the second display mode, and the third light emitting mode is related to the second display mode. The light emitting mode may be a light emitting mode related to the third display mode.

For example, if the first light emitting mode and the first display mode are only differences due to the difference between the light emitting means and the display means, the first light emitting mode is the first light emitting mode. It can be said that the light emitting mode is the same as the display mode, and the third light emitting mode is the same light emitting mode as the third display mode.

also,
"The second display mode is a display mode using a plurality of colors [for example, yellow and green].
The third display mode is also a display mode using a plurality of colors [for example, seven colors constituting the rainbow (red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, purple)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

also,
"The third display mode is a display mode that suggests that the degree of expectation is 100%.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

For example, the third display mode may be a display mode that suggests a jackpot confirmation.

also,
"The second display mode is a display mode [for example, a maker pattern or a maker color] that symbolizes a manufacturing company or a sales company of a game table.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

The second display mode may be a display mode in which the manufacturing company or the sales company of the game console can be recognized.

According to the above description
Suggestion image [for example, hold icon, variable icon, title character display] suggesting the degree of expectation that the player will be advantageous [for example, the degree of expectation of a big hit, the degree of expectation of transitioning to the AT state, the degree of expectation of acquiring a bonus, etc.] , Title background display, notice background display, notice frame display, notice character display, etc.] Liquid crystal display device 1057 etc.]
Movable means in which the player side is a movable area rather than the display means [For example, the first effect movable body 7 and the second effect movable body 8 shown in FIG. 43, the right door 1063a and the left door 1063b shown in FIG. Body 1058] and
It is a game table equipped with
The display means displays the suggested image in the first display mode [for example, the white display mode shown in FIGS. 53 (a) and 60 (a), the green display mode shown in FIG. 53 (b), and FIG. 53 ( c), the display mode in red shown in FIG. 60 (a)].
The display means can display the suggestion image in a second display mode [for example, a display mode of green and yellow polka dots (maker pattern) on a white background shown in FIGS. 53 (d) and 60 (a)]. It is a thing
The second display mode is a display mode that suggests that the degree of expectation is higher than that of the first display mode [for example, 75%].
The movable means is a first decoration according to a display mode showing the first display mode [for example, a white decoration shown in FIG. 54 (a), a green decoration shown in FIG. 54 (b), or a green decoration shown in FIG. 54 (c). ) Shown in red decoration]
The movable means does not include a second decoration according to the display mode representing the second display mode [for example, decoration of a green and yellow polka dot pattern (maker pattern) on a white background] [for example, FIG. 54. reference],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

According to this game table, the rarity of the second display mode, which has a high degree of expectation, may be improved, and the expectation and special feeling of the second display mode may be enhanced. Further, since the movable means in which the player side is a movable area rather than the display means does not include the second decoration, it is possible to prevent a misunderstanding that the second display mode has appeared, which is expected. It is possible to reduce excessive agitation of the feeling.

The degree of expectation may be a big hit expectation.

Further, the movable means may be an effect movable means (accessory).

Further, even if the first decoration is slightly different from the first display mode, the relationship with the first display mode may be generally recognized. Further, the movable means is not provided with a decoration generally recognized to be related to the second display mode.

The decoration may be a part painted with a color or a pattern. That is, it may be a portion where the color or pattern does not change. Alternatively, it may be a portion that displays a color or pattern (a liquid crystal display device, a light emitting diode, or the like), or may be a portion that can display different colors or patterns.

Further, the display means can display the suggested image in the fourth display mode, and the display suggesting that the first display mode has a higher degree of expectation than the fourth display mode. It may be an embodiment. The fourth display mode may be a normal display mode, that is, a default display mode. The fourth display mode may be a display mode that suggests that the expectation level is lower than that of the first display mode, or is a display mode that suggests that the expectation level is 0%. It may be a display mode which does not suggest the degree of expectation.

also,
"The display means can display the suggested image in the third display mode [for example, the rainbow-colored display mode shown in FIGS. 53 (e) and 60 (a)].
The third display mode is a display mode that suggests that the degree of expectation is higher than that of the second display mode [for example, 100%].
The movable means does not include a third decoration [for example, a rainbow-colored decoration] according to a display mode representing the third display mode [see, for example, FIG. 54].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

The movable means is provided with a first portion [for example, a second finger (index finger) 822] on which the display according to the display mode representing the first display mode is displayed, and the movable means is provided. Can take a state in which the first part is invisible to the player and a state in which the first part is visible to the player, and the movable means represents the second display mode. A second portion on which the display according to the display mode is displayed may not be provided. Further, the movable means may not be provided with a third portion in which the display according to the display mode representing the third display mode is displayed (see FIG. 54).

also,
"The first decoration is a decoration having the same or similar display mode as the first display mode.
The second decoration is a decoration having the same or similar display mode as the second display mode.
The game table is characterized in that the third decoration is a decoration having the same or similar display mode as the third display mode. 』\
Was also explained.

The first decoration is a decoration according to a display mode related to the first display mode, and the second decoration is a decoration according to a display mode related to the second display mode. The third decoration may be a decoration according to the display mode related to the third display mode.

For example, if the first decoration and the first display mode are only differences due to a difference in media such as the movable means and the display means, the first decoration is the first display mode. It can be said that the display mode is the same as that of.

Further, the second display mode is a display mode using a plurality of colors, and the third display mode may also be a display mode using a plurality of colors.

Further, the third display mode may be a display mode suggesting that the degree of expectation is 100%.

also,
"The movable means displays the suggestion image of the second display mode more than when the suggestion image of the first display mode is displayed on the display means [for example, FIG. 58 (g)]. If this is the case [for example, FIG. 59 (g)], it is easier to move.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

also,
"The second display mode is a display mode that symbolizes the manufacturing company or the sales company of the game console.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

The second display mode may be a display mode in which the manufacturing company or the sales company of the game console can be recognized.

The actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention merely list the most suitable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what has been done. Further, even if the constituent requirements are included only in the description of the embodiment, the embodiment, the modified example, the various examples, etc. described above, the constituent requirement can be changed to another embodiment, the embodiment, the modified example, or the like. And various examples. That is, unless there is a factor that hinders the application, the constituent requirements included only in the description of the embodiment, the embodiment, the modification, the various examples, etc. Even if it is applied to various examples, it holds as one cohesive technical idea.

Hereinafter, with reference to FIGS. 62 to 84, a game table to which the present invention can be applied (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine or a spinning game machine such as a slot machine 100) will be described in detail. As a general rule, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 62 to 84 are used only for the explanations using FIGS. 62 to 84, and even when overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, FIGS. 62 to 62 to 84 are used. In the description using FIG. 84, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 62 to 84 are prioritized.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. 62. FIG. 62 is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side).

The pachinko machine 100 is a game table on which a player can obtain a profit when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and launches an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door with a ball storage plate 108, and the like. The device 110 and the game board 200 are provided on the front surface (player side) thereof.

The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertically rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (island equipment or the like) provided in a game machine installation shop.

The main body 104 is a door member provided inside the outer frame 102, having a locking function, and rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112 as a base body of a vertically rectangular gaming machine. .. Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space portion 114 inside. A clerk at a store (amusement store) in which the pachinko machine 100 is installed can open and close the main body 104, and a main body opening sensor 104S for detecting that the main body 104 has been opened is provided.

The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104, which is the front side of the pachinko machine 100, via a hinge portion 112 so as to have a locking function and can be opened and closed. Is a door member having an opening 116. A clerk at a game store can also open and close the front frame door 106, and a front frame door sensor 106S for detecting that the front frame door 106 has been opened is also provided. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin in the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A space in which the game area 124 is provided is divided between the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. In this embodiment, a lamp whose light source is an LED is also referred to as a lamp.

The door 108 with a ball storage plate is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a locking function and to be opened and closed. The door 108 with a ball storage plate is opened by pushing an release lever 1080 that can be operated with the front frame door 106 open. Further, a door sensor 1082 with a ball storage plate that detects that the door 108 with a ball storage plate has been opened is also provided. The door 108 with a ball storage plate is an upper plate 126 that can store a plurality of game balls (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “balls”) and is provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110. , The lower plate 128 that stores the game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, the ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the operation of the player, and the player's A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to the game ball collection container (commonly known as a dollar box) by operation, and a game board that guides the game balls to the launching device 110 by the operation of the player. The ball launching handle 134 that launches into the game area 124, the effect button 136 that changes the effect mode of the various effect devices 2 to 4 (see FIG. 64) by the operation of the player, and the effect button 136 that is built into the effect button 136. A chance button lamp 138 that makes the button 136 emit light, a ball lending operation button 140 that gives a ball lending instruction to the card unit (CR unit) installed in the game store, and an instruction to return the player's balance to the card unit. It is provided with a return operation button 142 for performing the above, and a ball lending display unit 144 for displaying the balance of the player and the state of the card unit. Further, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 62 is provided with a lower plate full tank detection sensor (not shown) that detects that the lower plate 128 is full due to the game ball. Further, the operation key unit 190 is also provided.

The launching device 110 is attached below the main body 104, and has a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching mallet 148 that hits the game ball with the tip of the launching rod 146. , Equipped with. While the ball launching handle 134 is continuously launched by the player, the launching device 110 launches the game ball into the game area 124 of the game board every predetermined firing period (for example, 0.6 seconds). It fires at the target and corresponds to an example of a firing means.

The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 by using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104. Note that the specific configuration of the game area 124 is not shown in FIG. 62, and the specific configuration is shown in FIG.

FIG. 63 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 62 as viewed from the back side.

The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, and is located at a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls and below the ball tank 150, at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 for guiding the ball falling through the formed communication hole to the payout device 152 located on the right side of the back surface is arranged.

The payout device 152 is composed of a tubular member, and includes a payout motor (not shown), a sprocket, and a payout sensor inside the payout device 152. The payout device 152 is removable, and when mounted at a predetermined position, it connects to the downstream end of the tank rail 154.

The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor, and temporarily retains the game ball that has flowed down into the payout device 152 after passing through the tank rail 154, and drives the payout motor to rotate by a predetermined angle. As a result, the temporarily stagnant game balls are sent out one by one below the payout device 152. That is, the payout device 152 is a kind of ball feeding device that applies a driving force to the game ball and conveys the game ball.

The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is passing, either a high or low signal is passed, and when the game ball is not passing. The signal of either high or low is output to the payout control unit 600 (see FIG. 65). The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor is configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) and reach the upper plate 126 arranged on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 is provided with a predetermined value. Based on the condition being satisfied, the player is given (paid out) an amount of game value (game ball) according to the grant condition by this configuration.

On the left side of the drawing of the payout device 152, there is a main board case 158 for accommodating the main board 156 constituting the main control unit 300 (see FIG. 65) that performs control processing of the entire game, and processing information generated by the main control unit 300. Based on the processing information generated by the first sub-board case 162 and the first sub-control unit 400 that house the first sub-board 160 constituting the first sub-control unit 400 (see FIG. 65) that performs control processing related to the effect. A second sub-board case 166 that houses a second sub-board 164 that constitutes a second sub-control unit 500 (see FIG. 65) that performs control processing related to the effect, and a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to payout of game balls (see FIG. 65). A payout board case 172 for accommodating a payout board 170 including an error release switch 168 that constitutes (see FIG. 65) and cancels an error by an operation of a game clerk, and a launch control unit 630 that performs control processing related to launching a game ball (FIG. 65). A power switch that constitutes a launch board case 176 that houses the launch board 174 that constitutes (see), a power control unit 660 that supplies power to various electrical game devices (see FIG. 65), and turns the power on and off by the operation of a game clerk. A power supply board case 184 that houses a power supply board 182 including a 178 and a RAM clear switch 180 that outputs a RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300 by being operated when the power is turned on, and a signal between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit. The CR interface unit 606 for transmitting and receiving the above is arranged.

Further, in the present embodiment, the setting change key 192, the setting change button 194, and the accessory ratio / setting display 196 are provided on the main board 156. In the present embodiment, when the setting change key 192 is operated on the condition that the RAM clear switch 180 is pressed when the power is turned on, the setting change mode can be set to at least one of a plurality of settings having different jackpot probabilities. Can be migrated to. In the setting change mode, the current setting is displayed on the accessory ratio / setting display 196, and the clerk can change the setting by pressing the setting change button 194 while checking this. Even if the RAM clear switch 180 is not pressed when the power is turned on, the setting may be changed when the setting change key 192 is operated when the power is turned on.

The accessory ratio / setting display 196 is a 7-segment LED board mounted on the main board 156 and arranged inside the main board case 158, and is attached in a manner visible to the clerk. As shown in FIG. 71 (A), the accessory ratio / setting display 196 has two-digit 7-segment LEDs arranged one above the other and a one-digit seven-segment LED modularized on the right side. The accessory ratio monitor is an indicator for notifying the accessory ratio (YH) and the continuous accessory ratio (RY), and the setting monitor is a monitor for confirming the current setting. The accessory ratio / setting display 196 is composed of, for example, a single-color LED of red, but may be capable of emitting light in three colors of red, green, and orange, or may be a full-color LED. At least a part of the accessory ratio / setting display 196 may be provided on the game board 200, for example, so that the player can see it.

Further, in the present embodiment, the DIP switch board 198 is arranged on the back surface of the first sub-board case 162. Details of the DIP switch board 198 will be described later.

FIG. 64 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. Here, arrows d1 to d3 indicate directions in a state where the pachinko machine 100 is fixed at the installation location. The arrow d1 indicates the depth direction (sometimes referred to as the front-rear direction) of the pachinko machine 100, the front side may be referred to as the front or the front, and the back side may be referred to as the back or the rear. The arrow d2 indicates the width direction (sometimes referred to as the left-right direction) of the pachinko machine 100, and the left hand may be referred to as the left and the right hand may be referred to as the right in front view. The arrow d3 indicates the height direction (sometimes referred to as the vertical direction) of the pachinko machine 100, and the higher one may be referred to as the upper one and the lower one may be referred to as the lower one.

The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 by using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104.

Various structures can be adopted for the mounting structure of the game board 200 to the main body 104. For example, the front left side portion 200a of the game board 200 is inserted into the front view left side (hinge portion 112 side) of the main body 104, and here. It is possible to adopt a structure in which the game board 200 is rotated around the center of rotation and the right side portion 200b of the game board 200 is pressed against the main body 104 to be set. Such a structure can improve workability. In some cases.

The game board 200 is a unit in which various parts are attached to a plate-shaped main body 201. The main body 201 is made of resin, for example, and its surface (front surface) constitutes a decorative surface on which a character or the like of the pachinko machine 100 is displayed. The decorative surface may be formed, for example, by pasting a sheet on which a character of the pachinko machine 100 or the like is printed. A vibration sensor SR3 is arranged at the lower right of the main body 201. When it is detected by the vibration sensor SR3, error processing (for example, notification by an image or sound, game stop that makes it impossible to continue the game, etc.) can be performed. The vibration sensor SR3 may be another fraud detection sensor such as a magnetic sensor.

The outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are arranged on the game board 200 to form a game area 124 in which the game ball can roll. A part of the outer rail 202 is formed by a rail member 209 that can be attached to and detached from the main body 104. Of the game area 124, the area between the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 forms a guide area 201a for guiding the launched game ball.

An area other than the game area 124 of the game board 200 may be referred to as a non-game area. The gaming area 124 and the non-gaming area can be distinguished from each other with the outer rail 202 as a boundary. Further, the area inside the area through which the game ball passes with the firing intensity of the game ball maximized can be called at least the game area 124. The game area 124 may include an area through which the game ball does not pass due to the presence of the effect device or the like in the game area 124. The game area 124 may be referred to as a flow-down area at the point where the game ball flows down during the game, and the non-game area may be referred to as a non-flow-down area at the point where the game ball does not flow down during the game except for maintenance and accidents. The entire area of the game area 124 may be referred to as a flow-down area, but an area in which the game ball does not flow down due to the presence of an effect device or the like may be referred to as a non-flow-down area.

A decorative symbol display device 208 is arranged at substantially the center of the game area 124. Below the game area 124, a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol hold lamp 216, a first special symbol hold lamp 218, and the like. A second special symbol holding lamp 220 and the like are arranged. Hereinafter, a normal symbol may be referred to as a "normal symbol" and a special symbol may be referred to as a "special symbol".

The decorative design display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for the decorative design and the effect, and is configured by a liquid crystal display device (LCD: Liquid Crystal Display) in the present embodiment. The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas of a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a and the middle symbol display area 208b. , And the right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Further, the positions and sizes of the display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, and 208d can be freely changed in the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative pattern display device 208, it may be configured to be able to display various effects and various game information even if it is not a liquid crystal display device. For example, a dot matrix display device may be used. , 7-segment display device, organic EL (ElectroLuminessence) display device, reel (drum) type display device, leaf type display device, plasma display, and other display devices including a projector may be adopted.

The normal figure display device 210 is a display device for displaying a normal figure, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in the present embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying special figures, and are composed of 7-segment LEDs in the present embodiment.

The normal figure holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of holding normal figure variable games (details will be described later), and in the present embodiment, the normal figure variable games are held up to a predetermined number (for example, four). It is possible to do. The first special figure holding lamp 218 is a lamp for indicating the number of special figure changing games held, and in this embodiment, holding up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of special figure changing games. It is possible. Further, the second special symbol holding lamp 220 is a lamp for indicating the number of special figure changing games being held, and in the present embodiment, the special figure changing games are held up to a predetermined number (for example, four). It is possible.

In addition, a time-saving medium lamp TL, a right-handed indicator lamp RL, and a high-accuracy medium lamp HL are also arranged. The time-saving medium lamp TL is a lamp for indicating that the variation display time of the normal drawing is shortened and the blade member 232a of the electric tulip (electric chew), which will be described later, is in a time-saving gaming state in which it is easy to open for a long time. The right-handed indicator lamp RL is a lamp for indicating that the player is in a jackpot game state or a time-saving game state and is in a state where the player can obtain the benefit by hitting the right side. The high-probability middle lamp HL is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high-probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur, or that the game state is in a high-probability state.

Around the decorative symbol display device 208, there are predetermined ball entrances, for example, general winning openings 226a and 226b, a normal drawing starting port 228, a first special drawing starting port 230, and a second special drawing starting port 232. , A variable winning opening 234 is arranged.

One or a plurality of general winning openings 226a and 226b are provided on the left and right sides of the game area 124, respectively. Here, the general winning opening arranged on the left side of the game area 124 is referred to as a general winning opening 226a, and the general winning opening arranged on the right side of the game area 124 is referred to as a general winning opening 226b. When a ball enters the general winning opening 226a, a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects it, and assuming that the general winning opening 226a has won a prize, the payout device 152 is driven to win a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls. When the ball is discharged into the upper plate 126 as a ball and enters the general winning opening 226b, a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects it, and assuming that the general winning opening 226b has won a prize, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (not shown). For example, one) ball is discharged to the upper plate 126 as a prize ball. The balls discharged to the upper plate 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and with these configurations, the prize balls are paid out to the player based on the winning. In the present embodiment, the game ball that has entered the general winning opening 226a and the game ball that has entered the general winning opening 226b are detected by different ball detection sensors. Further, when a plurality of general winning openings 226a are provided on the left side of the game area 124, even if the ball passages for guiding the entered game balls are merged and detected by one common ball detection sensor. Alternatively, it may be detected by different sphere detection sensors. Further, when a plurality of general winning openings 226b are provided on the right side of the game area 124, even if the ball passages for guiding the entered game balls are merged and detected by one common ball detection sensor. Alternatively, it may be detected by different sphere detection sensors. The balls that have entered the general winning openings 226a and 226b are guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

The normal drawing start port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124, and in the present embodiment, the right side of the game board 200. One is arranged in. The ball that has passed through the starting port 228 is not discharged to the game island side, unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226. When the predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the normal drawing start port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts the normal drawing variation game by the normal drawing display device 210.

In the present embodiment, only one starting port 230 for the first special figure is arranged at the lower center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects the entry of balls into the first special drawing start port 230, the payout device 152, which will be described later, is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 3) of balls are used as prize balls in the upper plate 126. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. The ball that has entered the first special figure start port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. In the case of the present embodiment, due to the arrangement of the first special figure starting port 230, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the first special figure starting port 230 when hitting to the right. Then, in the present embodiment, the specification is such that the variation display of the special figure 2 is started in preference to the special figure 1 (a pachinko machine having such a specification may be called a "special 2 priority variable machine" or the like). Has been done.

The second special figure start port 232 is composed of an electric tulip (electric chew), is arranged below the first special figure start port 230, has a blade member 232a that can be opened and closed on the left and right, and closes the blade member 232a. It is impossible for the ball to enter the inside, and when the normal figure variation game is won and the normal figure display device 210 stops and displays the hit symbol, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the start port 232 of the second special figure, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, 3) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure start port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. In the case of the present embodiment, due to the arrangement of the normal drawing start port 228 (by a game nail (not shown)), it is difficult for the game ball to enter the normal drawing start port 228 when hitting to the left. .. Therefore, in principle, the player does not win the game of changing the normal figure during left-handed hitting, and therefore, in principle, the blade member 232a does not open or close. On the other hand, in the case of hitting to the right, since the game ball can be expected to enter the normal drawing start port 228, the blade member 232a may open and close by winning the normal drawing variable game. That is, it can be said that there is almost no possibility of winning the second special figure starting port 232 during the left-handed hit, but there is a possibility of winning the second special figure starting port 232 during the right-handed hit.

The variable winning opening 234 is called a large winning opening or an attacker, and in this embodiment, only one is arranged on the lower right side of the game board 200. This variable winning opening 234 includes a door member 234a that can be opened and closed, and it is impossible for a ball to enter while the door member 234a is closed. When displayed, the door member 234a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval (for example, opening time 29 seconds, closing time 1.5 seconds) and a predetermined number of times (for example, 2, 3, or 10 times). When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls as prize balls to the upper plate 126.

In the present embodiment, the variable winning opening 234 and the general winning opening 226b are integrally configured in the ball entry unit U1 and can be detachably attached to the main body 201 of the game board 200. The ball entry unit U1 is further provided with a V shutter VS and a V passage switch VC. The V-passing switch VC opens upward so that the game ball can pass from top to bottom. This V-passing switch VC detects a passing game ball. The V-shutter VS is arranged above the V-passing switch VC and advances and retreats in the front-rear direction by a solenoid. This solenoid is included in the various solenoids 332 described above, and is driven by the drive circuit 334. When the V-shutter VS is advanced (corresponding to the closed state), the game ball cannot pass through the V-passing switch VC, and when the V-shutter VS is retracted (corresponding to the open state), the game ball is V. It becomes possible to pass through the pass switch VC. A game ball that has entered the variable winning opening 234 and has passed through a ball detection sensor (not shown) is guided to the front side, then rolls to the V shutter VS, passes through the V pass switch VC, and cannot pass. It may be guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100. The V-passing switch VS is included in the various sensors 320 described above, and is configured so that a detection signal is input to the sensor circuit 322. In the present embodiment, when the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 detects the passage of the game ball through the V passage switch VC, it is determined that the V prize has been won.

In the present embodiment, the V-shutter VS is maintained in a closed state (advanced state) from the start of the jackpot game to a specific round (for example, the final round), and the V-shutter VS is opened (backward) in the specific round. , V prize can be obtained. If the V prize can be obtained, the control state shifts to the special figure high probability state after the big hit game ends, and if the V prize cannot be obtained, the control state is the special figure low probability state after the big hit game ends. Remains. That is, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the transition to the special figure high probability state is determined by the game ball passing through the V passage switch VS.

Further, in the game area 124, a plurality of disk-shaped ball striking direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails are arranged, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, any winning opening or starting opening is provided. There is also an out port 240 for guiding the balls and the like that did not win the prize to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging them to the game island side.

In this pachinko machine 100, the player supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the player's operation handle, and drives the launch rod and the launch rod. It is launched into the game area 124 by passing through the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 by the launching mallet. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 flows downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail, or the like, and starts at the winning openings (general winning openings 226a, 226b, variable winning openings 234). Win a prize at the mouth (1st special figure start port 230, 2nd special figure start port 232), without winning any prize port or start port, or just pass through the normal figure start port 228. Reach 240. Further, in the present embodiment, a discharge ball receiving port (not shown) for receiving all the game balls discharged from the game board 200 is formed at the lower side of the space 114 of the main body 104 so as to open upward. An out-ball detection sensor SWout that detects the passage of a game ball received at the discharge ball receiving port is provided at a predetermined position on the main body 104. The out-ball detection sensor SWout may be provided on the game board 200 side. All the game balls discharged from the game board 200 (including the game balls discharged from the out port 240 and the game balls winning in various winning openings) are accepted by the discharge ball receiving port and pass through a predetermined discharge passage. It is configured to be discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 100 via the pachinko machine 100.

Further, the effect device 2 is arranged in the upper part of the game area 124, the effect device 3 is arranged in the lower part, and the effect device 4 is arranged on the left side and the right side, respectively. In the case of the present embodiment, these effect devices 2 to 4 are supported by the main body 104.

Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 65. The figure shows a functional block diagram of the control unit. The control units of the pachinko machine 100 are roughly classified into a main control unit 300 that controls a central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter, simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. The first sub-control unit 400 that performs control, the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the commands transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and the main control unit 300 according to the commands transmitted by the main control unit 300. It is configured to include a payout control unit 600 that controls the payout of the game ball, a launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of the game ball, and a power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supply to the pachinko machine 100. There is.

First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing a control program and various data, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a time. A counter timer 312 for measuring the number of times, etc., a WDT314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing, and a random number value generation circuit (counter circuit) 318 (assuming that this circuit has two counters built-in). Is installed. Other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this point is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock. Further, the random number value generation circuit 318 is used as a hardware random number counter that fluctuates a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time a clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 316a is received. Although the random number value generation circuit 318 is built in the basic circuit 302, it may be connected to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the basic circuit 302 receives signals output from a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball passing through each start port, a winning port, and a variable winning port, and various sensors 320 including a lower plate full tank sensor. Then, the sensor circuit 322 for outputting the amplification result and the comparison result with the reference voltage to the CPU 304, the random number value generation circuit 318, etc. in the basic circuit 302, and a predetermined symbol display device, for example, the first special figure display device 212 or the first 2. A drive circuit 324 for controlling the display of the special figure display device 214, a drive circuit 326 for performing display control of a predetermined symbol display device, for example, a normal figure display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example,). A drive circuit 330 for controlling the display of the normal figure hold lamp 216, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, the special figure 2 hold lamp 220, the high-accuracy middle lamp, etc.) and a predetermined movable member, for example, as an ordinary electric accessory. No. 2 special figure The various solenoids 332 including the driving means for driving the blade member 232a of the starting port 232, the door member 234a for the variable winning opening 234 as a special electric accessory, the driving means for driving the V shutter VS, and the like. A drive circuit 334 for control is connected. In this example, the crystal oscillator 316a and the random number value generation circuit 318 are separately provided, but the crystal oscillator 316a may be included in the random number value generation circuit 318.

When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that the ball has won the first special figure start port 230, the sensor circuit 322 sends a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the random number value generation circuit 318 in the basic circuit 302. Output. Upon receiving this signal, the random number value generation circuit 318 latches the value at that timing of the counter corresponding to the first special figure start port 230, and the latched value is the built-in counter corresponding to the first special figure start port 230. Stored in the value storage register. Further, when the random number value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the ball has won the second special figure start port 232, the value at that timing of the counter corresponding to the second special figure start port 232 is similarly set. Latch and store the latched value in the built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the second special figure start port 232.

Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 passes through the information output circuit 336 and an external terminal board (not shown) to an external hall computer (not shown). The game information (for example, the game state) of the pachinko machine 100 is output to the information input circuit 350 provided in the above.

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300, and the voltage monitoring circuit 338 provides the voltage value of the power supply. Is less than a predetermined value (9V in this example), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on, and the CPU 304 is provided from the start signal output circuit 340. When the start signal is input, the game control is started (the main process of the main control unit, which will be described later, is started).

Further, the main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600, respectively. 1 Communication with the sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is possible. The information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 is unidirectional communication, and the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 is bidirectional communication. The main control unit 300 is configured so that signals such as commands can be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400, but the first sub control unit 400 is configured so that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted to the main control unit 300. is doing. However, the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 may be configured to be performed by two-way communication. Further, the payout control unit 600 is configured so that a signal such as a command can be transmitted to the main control unit 300, but is configured so that a signal such as a command cannot be transmitted from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300. May be good.

Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that mainly controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. It is equipped with a serial communication control circuit 424. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. Further, a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various effect data is connected to the basic circuit 402. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs. Further, the ROM 406 may be provided in the basic circuit 402. The serial communication control circuit 424 connects the game board lamp drive circuit 440 for controlling the game board lamp 442 and the game board frame lamp drive circuit 450 for controlling the game board frame lamp 452. Then, lighting control is performed by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 440 and the game underframe lamp drive circuit 450.

Further, the basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC (S-ROM) 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and the amplifier), a drive circuit 422 for controlling the drive of the effect devices 2 to 4, and a sensor circuit. The 428 and the volume switch 163 for adjusting the volume output from the speaker 120 are connected. The sensor circuit 428 receives detection signals from various movable body sensors 430 that detect the current positions of the effect devices 2 to 4 and the like, and button sensors 426 that detect the pressing of various buttons constituting the effect buttons 136 and the operation key unit 190. Output to the basic circuit 402.

Next, the second sub-control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives a control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. ing. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a memory 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 512 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. A VDP (video display processor) that reads out image data or the like stored in ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518, and displays the image on the decorative symbol display device 208. It is equipped with 516. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. Further, a ROM 506 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for displaying an image, and the like are stored is connected to the basic circuit 502. In the present embodiment, the memory 508 is used as the temporary storage area, and the memory 508 is composed of a recording medium (for example, EEPROM, flash memory, etc.) capable of holding the storage state even when the power supply is cut off. Thereby, for example, the information for displaying the display related to the jackpot history can be retained even when the main control unit 300 is initialized or the setting is changed. A RAM whose stored information volatilizes when the power is cut off may be used.

Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and a prize ball or a ball rental ball based on a control signal output by the payout sensor 604. Detects whether or not the payout of is completed. Further, the payout control unit 600 communicates with the card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the CR interface unit 606. In addition, the payout control unit 600 pays out prize ball information indicating that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls has been paid out and a predetermined number (for example, 25) of loan balls. The ball rental information or the like indicating that is output to the information input circuit 350 via an external terminal board (not shown). Further, a frame sensor 605 is connected to the payout control unit 600. The frame sensor 605 includes a main body opening sensor 1044 that detects that the main body 104 has been opened, a front frame door sensor 106S that detects that the front frame door 106 has been opened, and the like, and includes the main body 104 and the front frame door. When the 106 is open, these sensors detect it and output an open signal. When the payout control unit 600 outputs the release signal from the frame sensor 605, the payout control unit 600 outputs the door opening information to the main control unit 300.

The launch control unit 630 is an operation of the ball launch handle 134 by the player, which is output by a control signal output by the payout control unit 600 to instruct launch permission or stop, and a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134. Control of the launch solenoid 632 that drives the launch rod 146 and the launch mallet 148, and control of the ball feed device 634 that supplies the ball from the upper plate 126 to the launch device 110 based on the control signal that indicates the launch intensity according to the amount. I do.

The power supply control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and converts each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the payout device 152, and the like. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 is a power storage circuit (for example, 10 days) for supplying power to a predetermined component (for example, RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the power supply from the outside is cut off. , Capacitor). In this embodiment, the power supply control unit 660 supplies power to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub-control unit 500 with a predetermined voltage, and the payout control unit 600 launches the main control unit 300 and the second sub-control unit 500. Although the control unit 630 is supplied with the power supply of the predetermined voltage, the power supply of the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device through another power supply path.

Next, using FIGS. 66A to 66D, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the normal figure display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of special drawings and general drawings to be used will be explained.

The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first start port sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that the ball has entered the special figure 1 start port 230, and the ball enters the special figure 2 start port 232. The special figure 2 variable game is started on condition that the second start port sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that the ball has been hit. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the first special figure display device 212 repeats the lighting of all seven segments and the lighting of one central segment in the "variable display of special figure 1" (special figure 1). Fluctuating game) is performed. Further, when the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special figure display device 214 repeats the lighting of all seven segments and the lighting of one central segment, "variable display of special figure 2" ( Special figure variable game) is performed. Then, when the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special figure display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 2. After that, the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of the special figure 2. Hereinafter, the variation display from the start of this "variation display of the special figure 1 or 2" to the stop display of the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1 or 2 may be referred to as the variation display of the special figure. The variable display of this special figure may be continuously performed multiple times.

FIG. 66A shows an example of the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1. In FIG. 66 (a), three types of special figures, "special figure a" to "special figure c", are shown. In FIG. 66A, the white portion in the figure indicates the location of the segment that is extinguished, and the black portion indicates the location of the segment that is lit.

In the present embodiment, two types of jackpot symbols (“special figure a” and “special figure b”) are prepared as the stop symbol modes of the special figure 1. "Special figure a" is a 3 round (R) probability change jackpot symbol that is scheduled to acquire probability variation, and "special figure b" is a 3R normal jackpot symbol that does not have a chance to acquire probability variation. As described above, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the probability variation acquisition (transition to the special figure high probability state) is determined by the game ball passing through the V passage switch VS. When the special figure a is stopped and displayed on the first special figure display device 212, the V shutter VS opens (retracts) and the game ball passes through the V passage switch VS when entering the third round, which is the final round of the big hit game. It will be possible. If the game ball passes through the V-pass switch VS (if a V prize is won), the control state shifts to the special figure high probability state after the big hit game ends, and the big hit game shifts to the special figure high probability state. It is maintained while the symbol variation display of the special figure is performed 120 times after the end. In the present embodiment, if the V-shutter VS is opened, there is a sufficient time to maintain the open state, and there is a high possibility that the game ball will pass through the V-passing switch VS. It can be said that it is a big hit scheduled (the same applies to "Special Figure A" and "Special Figure B" described later). On the other hand, when the special figure b is stopped and displayed on the first special figure display device 212, the V shutter VS does not open even if the player enters the third round, which is the final round of the big hit game, and the game ball passes through the V pass switch VS. Nothing is done (V prize cannot be won), and the control state remains in the special low probability state after the big hit game is completed. As described above, it was necessary to win a V prize for the transition to the special figure high probability state, but the transition to the normal figure high probability state is started on condition that the big hit game is completed. That is, if a big hit is made, the state shifts to the normal figure high probability state after the big hit game ends, and in the shifted normal figure high probability state, even if the symbol variation display of the special figure is the special figure a after the big hit game ends. For example, it is maintained 120 times, and in the case of special figure b, it is maintained for 50 times.

Further, in the present embodiment, one type of lost symbol (“special symbol c”) is prepared as the stop symbol mode of the special diagram 1.

FIG. 66B shows an example of the stop symbol mode of the special figure 2. In FIG. 66 (b), four types of special figures from "special figure A" to "special figure D" are shown, and two kinds of special figures are jackpot symbols ("special figure A" and "special figure A"). Figure B "). "Special figure A" is a 10R probability variation jackpot symbol that is scheduled to acquire probability variation, and "special figure B" is a 2R probability variation jackpot symbol that is scheduled to acquire probability variation. That is, if the special figure A wins the V prize in the 10th round, the control state shifts to the special figure high probability state and the normal figure high probability state after the big hit game ends, and after the big hit game ends, the special figure A The state is maintained while the symbol variation display of is performed 120 times. If the special figure B wins a V prize in the second round, the control state shifts to the special figure high probability state and the normal figure high probability state after the big hit game ends, and the special figure symbol after the big hit game ends. The state is maintained as long as the variation display is performed 120 times.

Further, in the present embodiment, two types of lost symbols (“Special Figure C” and “Special Figure D”) are prepared as the stop symbol modes of Special Figure 2. "Special figure C" is the same general lost symbol as "special figure c", but "special figure D" is a special symbol called a time saving symbol, which will be described in detail later.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the determination of whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot in the special figure variation game is performed by a lottery of hardware random numbers, and the determination of the jackpot symbol to be stopped is performed by a lottery of software random numbers. In addition, in the special figure 2 variable game for a specific period, whether or not the "sudden time reduction" is won is determined by a lottery of hardware random numbers, and if the "sudden time reduction" is won, the second special figure is displayed. The "time saving symbol" is stopped and displayed on the device 214. Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, after the jackpot game is completed, the game shifts to the normal high probability state. The high-probability state of the normal figure is called a time-saving game state (electric support state). Here, the time-saving game state is a predetermined state in which the player's advantage is higher than that of the non-time-saving game state by shortening the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variable game to the start of the next big hit. It refers to the state. Strictly speaking, the "electric support state" is a state related to a normal figure, and the "time saving game state" is a state related to a special figure or a state related to a normal figure and a special figure. A time saving flag is prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, and when the time saving flag is set to ON, it is a time saving game state and a normal high probability state. In the high-probability state of the normal figure, it is easier to win the variable game of the normal figure than in the low-probability state of the normal figure (probability change of the normal figure). For example, the winning probability of the normal-figure variable game is 1/100 in the normal-figure low-probability state (non-time-saving game state), whereas it increases to 99/100 in the normal-figure high-probability state (time-saving game state). In addition, in the time-saving game state, the fluctuation time of the normal-figure variable game is shorter than that in the non-time-saving game state (normal-time-reduced game state). For example, in the non-time-saving game state, the fluctuation time of the normal map variation game of 10 seconds is shortened to 2 seconds in the time-saving game state. Further, in the time-saving game state, the opening time in one opening of the blade member 232a of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 tends to be longer than in the non-time-saving gaming state (extension of the electric chew opening period). For example, in the non-time-saving game state, the electric chew opening period of 0.2 seconds is extended to 2 seconds in the time-saving game state. Further, in the time-saving game state, the blade member 232a is more likely to open than in the non-time-saving game state (the number of times the electric chew is opened increases). For example, the blade member 232a, which opens only once in the non-time-saving game state for each winning of the normal drawing start port 228, opens twice in the time-saving game state (opens for 2 seconds, closes for 1 second, and closes for 2 seconds again). Open). By extending the electric chew opening period and increasing the number of times the electric chew is opened, the probability of entering the special figure 2 starting port 232 increases. The time saving flag is set to off during the jackpot game. Therefore, during the jackpot game, the non-time saving game state is maintained. This is because the game ball is picked up by the electric chew with a small number of prize balls, especially in the big hit game, and if the prize of the game ball to the variable winning opening (attacker) 234 is reduced, the player may be disadvantaged. Because there is. In addition, in this embodiment, when it is simply described as "non-time saving game state", it is excluded during the big hit game.

In the present embodiment, in the time-saving game state, all of the normal figure probability change, the normal figure change short, the extension of the electric chew opening period, and the increase in the number of times of electric chew opening are performed, but at least one of these is performed. If this is done, the player's advantage will be high, and the player may be in a time-saving game state. In this case, in each of the time saving game states of a time saving, b time saving, and c time saving, which will be described later, the execution is changed among the normal figure probability change, the normal figure change short, the extension of the electric chew opening period, and the increase in the number of times the electric chew is opened. May be good. For example, in the case of a time reduction, the normal figure probability change, the normal figure change short, the extension of the electric chew opening period, and the increase in the number of times of electric chew opening are all performed. , Extension of the electric chew opening period, and increase in the number of times of electric chew opening may be executed. Alternatively, if either the electric chew opening period is extended or the number of times the electric chew is opened is increased so that the probability of entering the special figure 2 starting port 232 is increased, the game may be in a time-saving game state. In the non-time-saving game state, it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the special figure 2 starting port 232 than in the time-saving game state. As described above, the special figure 2 starting port 232 changes into a winning difficult state in which the game ball is difficult to enter and a winning easy state in which the game ball is easy to enter. The entrance of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is in a state where it is easier to win a prize for a longer period of time in the time-saving game state than in the non-time-saving game state. As described above, in the present embodiment, when "special figure a", "special figure A", and "special figure B" are stopped and displayed, the special figure changes 120 times after the jackpot game to be performed thereafter. The time-saving game state (normal figure high probability state) is maintained until the display is performed, and at the 121st time, the game shifts to the non-time saving game state (normal figure low probability state). In addition, when the "special figure b" is stopped and displayed, the time-saving game state (normal figure high probability state) is maintained until the variable display of the special figure is performed 50 times after the end of the big hit game to be performed thereafter. At the second time, it shifts to the non-time saving game state (normal figure low probability state). In the present embodiment, the jackpot symbols of all the special figures are set to shift to the time-saving game state after the end of the jackpot game, but even if a jackpot symbol (non-time-saving jackpot symbol) that does not shift to the time-saving game state is provided. Often, when a jackpot is achieved with a non-time-saving jackpot symbol, the game may remain in the non-time-saving game state without shifting to the time-saving game state after the end of the jackpot game. Further, a small hit symbol may be prepared in addition to the big hit symbol. In the small hit game, the door member 234a of the variable winning opening 234 operates a predetermined time (for example, twice), and the door member 234a operates once. The open state is maintained for a maximum of 0.1 seconds per operation. In the opening of the door member 234a in the small hit, for example, when the game ball enters a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) in the first opening, or a predetermined amount of game value (predetermined number of balls) is acquired. If you do, the second and subsequent openings will not be performed. During the small hit game, it shifts to the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. The small hit is a hit in which the control state does not change before and after the small hit game, and after the small hit game ends, the control state returns to the control state before the start of the small hit game.

FIG. 66 (c) shows an example of a decorative pattern. There are 11 types of decorative patterns of the present embodiment, "decoration 1" to "decoration 11". The first starting port sensor has detected that the ball has entered the special drawing 1 starting port 230 or the special drawing 2 starting port 232, that is, the ball has entered the special drawing 1 starting port 230, or the special drawing 2 Each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, provided that the second start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the start port 232. "Decoration 1"-> "Decoration 2"-> "Decoration 3"-> ... "Decoration 9"-> "Decoration 10"-> "Decoration 1"-> ... "Variable display of symbols" is performed. That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 variablely displays the decorative symbol separately from the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214. Then, the stop symbol mode, which is a combination of decorative symbols, is stopped and displayed.

When notifying that it is a normal jackpot (3R normal jackpot of "special figure b"), a combination of decorative symbols in which three decorative symbols of the same number are lined up in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, "decoration"). 1-Decoration 1-Decoration 1 "," Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2 ", etc.) are stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when notifying the probability variation jackpot (3R probability variation jackpot of "special figure a", 10R probability variation jackpot of "special figure A", 2R probability variation jackpot of "special figure B"), the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are displayed. "Decoration 3-Decoration 3-Decoration 3" or "Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Further, in the case of notifying the lost symbol of "special symbol c" or "special symbol C", a combination of decorative symbols other than the combination of decorative symbols described above (for example, dispersal) is provided in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Eye) is stopped and displayed. Further, when notifying that the winner is suddenly won in a short time, three "decoration 11" are displayed side by side instead of the combination of "decoration 1" to "decoration 10".

Hereinafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display from the start of this "variable display of the decorative symbol" to the stop display of the stop symbol mode of the decorative symbol may be referred to as the variable display of the decorative symbol. The variable display of the decorative symbol is performed by being controlled by the second sub-control unit 500.

FIG. 66 (d) shows an example of the stop symbol mode of the normal drawing. There are two types of stop display modes of the normal figure of the present embodiment: a hit symbol "Public figure A" and a missed symbol "Public figure B". Based on the fact that the gate sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that the ball has passed through the normal figure start port 228, the normal figure display device 210 lights up all seven segments and one segment in the center. Performs "variable display of normal map" (variable game of normal map) that repeats lighting. Then, after the fluctuation time has elapsed, one of the hit symbols "Fu-zu A" and the out-of-order symbol "Fu-zu B" is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 66 (d), the white portion in the figure indicates the location of the segment that is extinguished, and the black portion indicates the location of the segment that is lit.

Hereinafter, the display from the start of this "variation display of the normal map" to the stop display of the stop symbol mode of the normal map may be referred to as the variable display of the normal map.

<Main control unit main processing>
Next, the main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 65 will be described with reference to FIG. 67. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main processing of the main control unit.

The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 65 stores a special figure random number value, a special figure round determination random number value, a special figure electric support determination random number value, and a special symbol symbol determination random number. Further, the RAM 308 is provided with a random number counter that generates these various random number values. Further, the RAM 308 stores the number of reserved special figures, the random value of winning special figures, the results of various determinations (lottery), and the like. Hereinafter, the area for storing the reserved number of the special figure in the RAM 308 may be referred to as the reserved number storage area for the special figure. Furthermore, the RAM 308 is provided with a start information storage unit for special figures divided into a maximum number of areas (4 in this example) in which the start of the winning / failing determination (lottery) can be suspended. A random number storage area for ordinary drawings is also provided. As will be described later, in the start information storage unit for the special figure, a plurality of types of start information are set as one set, and these start information are stored in each set in the winning order (holding order) for each area.

As described above, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 65 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which the start signal is input reset-starts by reset interrupt and executes the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 67 according to the control program stored in the ROM 306 in advance.

In step S101, the initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, the stack initial value is set (temporarily set) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, the interrupt mask is set, the I / O 310 is initialized, the initial settings of various variables stored in the RAM 308 are set, and the WDT314 is set. Allow the operation of and set the initial value. In this embodiment, the WDT 314 is set to a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms as an initial value.

In step S103, the value of the counter of WDT314 is cleared, and the time measurement by WDT314 is restarted.

In step S105, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage value of the power supply supplied by the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 via the second sub control unit 500 by the voltage monitoring circuit 338. Monitors whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output when is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment). Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects the power interruption), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect the power interruption), the step returns to step S103. Proceed to S107. Even if the predetermined value (9V) is not reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

In step S107, the initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process of setting a numerical value for setting a cycle for executing the timer interrupt process of the main control unit, which will be described later, in the timer circuit 312 in the timer circuit 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, etc.) A process for outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub-control unit 400), a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

In step S109, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before the power is cut off (before the power is cut off), and when the state before the power is cut off is not returned (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is initialized). ) Proceeds to the processing after step S113 in order to execute the initialization processing.

If it is not determined that the state before the power failure is restored (step S109; No), the cause is whether the RAM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board 182 shown in FIG. 63 is operated by a clerk of a game store or the like. Whether or not it is determined (step S113). That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear signal transmitted when the RAM clear switch 180 is operated is ON (indicating that the operation has been performed). When it is determined that the RAM clear signal is ON (step S113; Yes), it is determined whether or not the setting change key 192 is operated to the ON side (step S115), and the setting change key 192 is operated to the ON side. If it is determined that the case is true (step S115; Yes), the setting change process is executed (step S117).

When the setting change process is executed, the 7-segment corresponding to the setting monitor on the accessory ratio / setting display 196 blinks indicating "1", indicating that the setting can be changed. In this state, each time the setting change button 194 is pressed, the 7-segment of the setting monitor is incremented, and the setting change button 194 is pressed while the 7-segment corresponding to the setting monitor indicates "6". Then, it returns to "1". In the present embodiment, at least one of settings 1 to 6 having different jackpot probabilities can be selected, and the setting is made by operating the setting change key 192 to the OFF side after changing to the desired setting. Is confirmed. At this time, the setting value displayed on the setting monitor is deleted. After that, after the setting is confirmed, the set value can be redisplayed on the setting monitor for a certain period of time (for example, 5 seconds) by operating the setting change button 194. In the present embodiment, the set value is displayed on the setting monitor of the accessory ratio / setting display 196, but for example, it may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 or notified by voice output. good. Further, in the present embodiment, the 6-step setting of the settings 1 to 6 is set, but the setting may be other than the 6-step setting, or the setting may not be changed. Further, in the present embodiment, the initial value of the setting displayed on the setting monitor is set to "1", but the setting value before the power is cut off is retained and the retained setting value is displayed. May be good.

Further, in step S113, when it is not determined that the RAM clear signal is ON (step S113; No), or when it is not determined in step S115 that the setting change key 192 is operated to the ON side (step S113; No). Step S115; No), the process proceeds to step S119 without executing the setting change process of step S117.

In step S119, the initialization process is executed so as to bring the basic circuit 302 into the initial state (step S119). Here, when the RAM clear signal is ON, the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and when the power status information is not information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 (for example,). A checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in (all areas) to a register having a 1-byte structure whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0). Is determined (whether the checksum result is normal or not), and when the checksum result is other than a specific value (for example, 0) (when the checksum result is abnormal). Executes the initialization process to bring the pachinko machine 100 into the initial state. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition is set, the stack initial value is set in the stack pointer (this setting), and all the storage areas of the RAM 308 are initialized. In the present embodiment, the set value set in the setting change process (step S117) is retained even when the initialization is performed. Further, here, a normal return command and a setting command indicating the setting selected in step S117 are set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S119) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and is the same as the power recovery command described later in step S233 of the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300. , Is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S121, after setting the interrupt prohibition, the basic random number initial value update process is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, two initial value generation random number counters for generating the initial values of the normal figure winning random number counter and the special figure random number value counter are updated. For example, assuming that the numerical range that can be taken as the normal figure winning random number value is 0 to 99, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the general figure winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 100, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are updated in the same manner. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S121 except during the timer interrupt process that starts at a predetermined cycle.

On the other hand, in step S111, the power recovery process is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 is read at the time of power interruption, and the stack pointer is reset (this setting). Further, when the power is cut off, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 is read, reset to each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. After that, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the stack pointer and the register after the resetting, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power is turned off. That is, the process is restarted from the instruction following the instruction (predetermined in step S121) that was performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power failure. Further, the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 63 is provided with a transmission information storage area. In this step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the state has returned to the state when the power was turned off, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, which will be described later.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 68. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the timer interrupt process of the main control unit.

The main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 65 includes a timer circuit 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (once every 4 ms in this embodiment), and the main control is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. Part timer interrupt processing is started at a predetermined cycle.

In step S201, the timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

In step S203, the WDT314 is periodically (this) so that the count value of the WDT314 does not exceed the initial setting value (32.8 ms in the present embodiment) and the WDT interrupt does not occur (so as not to detect an abnormality in the process). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every about 2 ms, which is the cycle of interrupting the main control unit timer.

In step S205, the input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update process, detection signals of various sensors 320 shown in FIG. 65 including various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals, and various types are sent to the RAM 308. It is stored in the signal state storage area provided separately for each sensor 320. Taking the detection signal of the ball detection sensor as an example, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected in the timer interrupt processing (about 4 ms before) two times before is stored in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor. Read from the previous detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308, store this information in the detection signal storage area before the previous two times divided in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor, and perform the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before). ), The information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor is read out from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor, and this information is read out from the above-mentioned previous detection signal storage area. Remember in. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-mentioned detection signal storage area this time.

Further, in step S205, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned two-time detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared, and each of them is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor of the above matches the winning determination pattern information. While one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor, this main control unit timer interrupt process, which repeats activation at a very short interval of about 2 ms, is activated several times. Therefore, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S205 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the above-mentioned two-time detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal two times before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection and noise of the ball detection sensor, if the detection signal is stored twice in succession after no detection signal, it is determined that a prize has been won. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 65 stores prize determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no detection signal two times before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time). In this step S205, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is the predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, there is no detection signal two times before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time. If it matches with (information indicating that), the ball enters the general winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, the first special drawing starting port 230, and the second special drawing starting port 232, or the normal drawing starting opening 228. It is judged that there was a passage of. That is, it is determined that the winning openings 234 and 226 and the starting openings 230, 232 and 228 have been awarded. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three times in the first start port sensor that detects the entry of the ball into the first special figure start port 230 matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the first special figure It is determined that the starting port 230 has won a prize, that is, the game medium passing through the predetermined area has been detected, and the processing associated with the subsequent winning of the first special figure starting port 230 is performed. If the presence / absence information does not match the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the process branches to the subsequent processing without performing the processing associated with the subsequent winning of the first special figure start port 230. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores the winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal two times before, no detection signal last time, and no detection signal this time). After it is determined that there has been a prize once, it is not determined that there was a prize until the information on the presence or absence of the detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the prize judgment clear pattern information, and the prize judgment is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information.

In step S207 and step S209, the basic random number initial value update process and the basic random number update process are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S121 is updated, and then the normal figure winning random number value and the normal figure winning random number value used by the main control unit 300 are used. The random number counter for generating each special figure random number value is updated. For example, assuming that the numerical range that can be taken as the normal figure winning random number value is 0 to 99, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the general figure winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 100, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has gone around as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a winning random number value that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 99, and the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as the initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for generating the winning random number value, and the general figure is used. The initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to set it in the random number counter for generating the winning random value and to determine that the random number counter for generating the winning random value has made one round next. I will do it. In addition to the above-mentioned initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the winning random number of the normal figure has made one round next, it is determined that the random number counter for generating the special figure random number has made one round. The RAM 308 is provided with an initial value storage area for this purpose.

In step S211 the effect random number update process is performed. In this effect random number update process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number value used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

In step S213, the timer update process is performed. In this timer update process, a symbol is displayed on the normal symbol display symbol update timer, the first special symbol display device 212, and the second special symbol display device 214 for measuring the time for displaying the symbol on the normal symbol display device 210 in a fluctuating / stopped manner. Various types including a special symbol display symbol update timer for timing the fluctuation / stop display time, a timer for timing a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined open time, a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, etc. Update the timer.

In step S215, the winning opening counter update process is performed. In this winning opening counter update process, when there is a winning in the winning openings 234, 226 and the starting openings 230 and 232, the value of the prize ball number storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each winning opening or each starting opening is displayed. Read and add 1 to set in the original prize ball number storage area.

Further, in step S217, the winning prize acceptance process is performed. In the prize reception process, if a predetermined condition is satisfied, a plurality of types of start information are acquired. The plurality of types of start information acquired here are stored as one set of start information in a vacant area of the start information storage unit provided in the RAM 308 according to the winning order (holding order).

In step S219, which is executed following step S217, the payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information to be output to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. 65 are composed of 1 byte, and the strobe information (when on, it indicates that the data is set) and the bit 6 are set in bit 7. Power-on information (when on, indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4 to 5 this time processing type for encryption (0 to 3), and bits 0 to 3 encrypted. The number of payout requests after chemical processing is shown.

In step S221, the normal map state update process is performed. This normal map state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal map state. For example, in the normal figure state update process in the middle of the normal figure fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned normal figure display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off Drive control is performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a variable display of the normal map (normal map variable game).

Further, in the normal figure state update process at the timing when the normal figure fluctuation display time elapses (the timing when the value of the normal figure display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), when the hit flag is on, the hit symbol is displayed. The 7-segment LED that constitutes the normal symbol display device 210 is controlled to turn on / off so as to be in the mode, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured so as to display the lost symbol. Controls the lighting and extinguishing of the 7-segment LED. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings not only in the normal figure state update process but also in various processes. Here, the lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and a setting indicating that the normal drawing stop display is in progress is performed in the setting area. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines one of the hit symbol (normal symbol A shown in FIG. 66 (d)) and the lost symbol (normal symbol B shown in FIG. 66 (d)). Display. After that, for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the normal figure stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display. With this setting, the confirmed and displayed symbol is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the normal map variation game is notified to the player.

If the result of the normal map fluctuation game is a hit, the normal map hit flag is turned on, as will be described later. When this normal figure hit flag is on, in the normal figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the normal figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 The blade member 232a is open to the solenoid (332) for opening / closing the blade member 232a of the second special figure start port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds) while setting the normal drawing operation in the setting area. In addition to outputting the signal held in the RAM 308, information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the blade opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

Further, in the normal drawing state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the blade member has a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 msec). A signal for holding the blade member 232a in the closed state is output to the solenoid (332) for driving the opening / closing of the 232a, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

Further, in the normal figure state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the setting area of the RAM 308 is set to be inactive. do. Further, if the result of the normal map fluctuation game is a loss, the normal map loss flag is turned on as described later. When this normal figure loss flag is on, even in the normal figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the value of the normal figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). Set the setting area of the RAM 308 to be inactive. In the normal map state update process when the normal map is not operating, the process proceeds to the next step S223 without doing anything.

In step S223, the drawing-related lottery process is performed. In this normal figure-related lottery process, the normal figure variable game and the open / closed control of the second special figure start port 232 are not performed (the state of the normal figure is not operating), and the normal figure variable game is held. When the number is 1 or more, it is determined whether the result of the normal figure fluctuation game is won or not won by the random number lottery based on the normal figure winning random number value stored in the above-mentioned random number value storage area. If the winning is determined, the hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. In case of unsuccessful, set the hit flag to off. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, the value of a predetermined random number counter is acquired as the normal figure timer random number value, and based on the acquired normal figure timer random number value, the normal figure display device 210 is used from among a plurality of fluctuation times. One time for variable display of the figure is selected, and this variable display time is stored in the normal figure fluctuation time storage area provided in the RAM 308 as the normal figure fluctuation display time. It should be noted that the number of reserved normal figure variable games is stored in the normal figure reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and each time a hit determination is made, the number of reserved normal figure variable games is calculated. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is stored again in this reserved number storage area. Also, the random value used for the hit judgment is deleted.

Subsequently, the special figure look-ahead process (step S224) is executed. In the special figure pre-reading process, the main control unit 300 pre-reads the increased start information in each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, predetermines the stop symbol and the fluctuation time before the hit / fail determination process, and predetermines. The result (special figure look-ahead result) is stored in the look-ahead result storage unit in the RAM 308.

Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In this special figure 2 state update process, one of the following plurality of processes is performed according to the state of special figure 2.

For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is turned on and off. The lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed repeatedly. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variable game). Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and then the process is terminated.

Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as a 10R jackpot flag, a 2R jackpot flag, a missed flag, a special figure probability fluctuation flag, and a normal figure probability fluctuation flag. These flags are set on or off based on the determined stop symbol in the special figure 2 related lottery process described later. In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation display time elapses (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), for example, when the 10R jackpot flag is on. Is special figure B when the special figure A and 2R jackpot flags shown in FIG. 66 (b) are on, special figure C when the loss flag is on, and special figure when the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is on. D The lighting / extinguishing drive control of the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is performed so as to be in each mode, and the setting area of the RAM 308 is set to indicate that the special figure 2 stop display is in progress. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 has a 10R probability variation jackpot symbol (special diagram A), a 2R probability variation jackpot symbol (special diagram B), a lost symbol (special symbol C), and a time saving symbol (special diagram D). Confirmation display of any one of the symbols is performed.

After that, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. With this setting, the confirmed display of the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. If the number of time reductions stored in the time reduction storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of time reductions, and if the subtraction result is 1 to 0, the time reduction flag is turned off. .. Furthermore, the time saving flag is turned off even during the big hit game (during the special game state).

Further, in FIG. 2, a symbol for additionally storing predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and the variable display is stopped. The special figure 2 identification information indicating that the information is present is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in the command data described later, and then the process is terminated.

If the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on. When the jackpot flag is on, the RAM 308 is set in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). In order to set the special figure 2 in operation in the area and wait for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period of displaying an image notifying the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started. In the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308, information indicating the winning effect period is set. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined opening period (for example, 29 seconds) , Or until the winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected in the variable winning opening 234. A signal for holding the member 234a in the open state is output, and information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the large winning opening opening setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member 234a in the closed state is output to a solenoid (a part of various solenoids 332) for driving the opening / closing of the door member 234a of the variable winning opening 234, and a timer for managing the door closing time provided in the RAM 308. Set the storage area with information indicating the closure period. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the large winning opening closing setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process in the final round of the jackpot with probability variation (10 rounds in the special figure A, 2 rounds in the special figure B), the V shutter is used for a predetermined opening period (for example, 10 seconds). A signal for holding the V-shutter VS in the open state is output to the solenoid for driving the opening and closing of the VS (a part of various solenoids 332), and the opening period is set in the storage area of the timer for managing the V-shutter opening time provided in the RAM 308. Set the information to be shown. Then, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the V-shutter opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the solenoid for opening / closing the V-shutter VS (V-shutter VS) A signal for holding the V-shutter VS in the closed state is output to (a part of various solenoids 332). Further, when the game ball passes through the V passage switch VC, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is turned on. In addition, in order to wait for a period (V winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds)) of displaying an image notifying the player that the game ball has passed the V passage switch VC and acquired the probability change, the RAM 308 is used. In the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided, information indicating the V winning effect period is set. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the V winning effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area. On the other hand, when the game ball does not pass through the V passage switch VC, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is not turned on.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process in which the opening / closing control of the door member 234a is repeated a predetermined number of times (excluding the first time, 9 rounds or 1 round) and started at the end timing, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds) ) That is, in order to set to wait for the period during which the image for notifying the player that the jackpot by the decorative symbol display device 208 is finished is displayed, the effect is produced in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Set the information indicating the waiting period.

If the 10R jackpot flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of this jackpot game, the time reduction number of times (120 times) is set in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and the time reduction flag provided in the RAM 308 is set. Turn on. Even when the 2R jackpot flag is set to on, at the same time as the end of this jackpot game, the time reduction number of times (120 times) is set in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and the time reduction flag provided in the RAM 308 is set. Turn on. If the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, the time saving number (950 times) is set in the time saving number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and the time saving flag provided in the RAM 308 is turned on.

The term "time reduction" as used herein means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player because the time from the end of the jackpot in the special figure variable game to the start of the next jackpot is shortened. When the time saving flag is set to on, it is in the high probability state of the normal map (probability change of the normal map). In the high-probability state of the normal figure, the probability of winning in the variable game of the normal figure is higher than in the low-probability state of the normal figure. In addition, the fluctuation time of the normal-figure variable game is shorter in the normal-figure high-probability state than in the normal-figure low-probability state (normal-figure variation). Further, in the high-probability state of the normal drawing, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 tends to be longer than in the low-probability state of the normal drawing (electric chew opening). In addition, in the high-probability state of the normal drawing, the pair of blade members 232a are more likely to open than in the low-probability state of the normal drawing. The state in which any of these normal figure probability change, normal figure change short, and electric chew spread is set is called the electric support (starting mouth winning support by electric tulip) state.

Further, as described above, the time saving flag is set to off during the big hit game (during the special game state). Therefore, during the jackpot game, the low probability state of the normal figure is maintained. This is because if the probability is high during the big hit game, a predetermined number of variable winning holes 234 will be inserted into the variable winning opening 234 during the big hit game, and many game balls will be inserted into the special drawing 2 starting port 232 until the game balls enter. This is to solve the problem that the number of game balls that can be acquired during a big hit may increase and the gambling property may increase.

Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end effect period ends (the timing when the value of the effect standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 does not operate in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set inside.

Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of order, the out-of-order flag is turned on. When this off flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 non-operating is set. In the special figure 2 state update process in the case where the special figure 2 is not operating, the process proceeds to the next step S227 without doing anything.

Subsequently, the special figure state update process (special figure 1 state update process) for the special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In this special figure 1 state update process, one of the following plurality of processes is performed according to the state of special figure 1.

For example, in the special figure 1 state update process in the middle of the special figure 1 fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned special figure 1 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure 1 display device 212 is turned on and off. The lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed repeatedly. By performing this control, the special figure 1 display device 212 performs the variable display of the special figure 1 (special figure 1 variable game). Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and then the process is terminated.

Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as a 3R jackpot flag A, a 3R jackpot flag B, and a missed flag. These flags are set on or off based on the determined stop symbol in the special figure 1 related lottery process described later. In the special figure 1 state update process that starts at the timing when the special figure 1 variation display time elapses (the timing when the value of the special figure 1 display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), for example, when the 3R jackpot flag A is on. 1 is displayed so that the special figure a and the 3R jackpot flag B shown in FIG. 66A are in the special figure b, and the special figure c is displayed when the miss flag is on. The lighting / extinguishing drive control of the 7-segment LED constituting the device 212 is performed, and the setting area of the RAM 308 is set to indicate that the special figure 1 stop display is in progress. By performing this control, the special figure 1 display device 212 determines any one of the 3R probability variation big hit symbol (special figure a), the 3R normal big hit symbol (special figure b), and the lost symbol (special figure c). Display.

After that, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 1 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. With this setting, the confirmed display of the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is notified to the player. If the number of time reductions stored in the time reduction storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of time reductions, and if the subtraction result is 1 to 0, the time reduction flag is turned off. .. Furthermore, the time saving flag is turned off even during the big hit game (during the special game state).

Further, in FIG. 1, a symbol for additionally storing predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and the variable display is stopped. The special figure 1 identification information indicating that the information is present is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in the command data described later, and then the process is terminated.

If the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on. When the jackpot flag is on, the RAM 308 is set in the special figure 1 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 1 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). In order to set the area to be in operation of the special figure 1 and to wait for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period of displaying an image notifying the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started. In the storage area of the special figure 1 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308, information indicating the winning effect period is set. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 1 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 1 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined opening period (for example, 29 seconds) , Or until the winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected in the variable winning opening 234. A signal for holding the member 234a in the open state is output, and information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the large winning opening opening setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 1 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member 234a in the closed state is output to a solenoid (a part of various solenoids 332) for driving the opening / closing of the door member 234a of the variable winning opening 234, and a timer for managing the door closing time provided in the RAM 308. Set the storage area with information indicating the closure period. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the large winning opening closing setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, if the 3R jackpot flag A is set to ON, in the special figure 1 state update process in the final round (3 rounds), the solenoid for opening / closing the V shutter VS (for example, 10 seconds) (for example, 10 seconds) A signal for holding the V-shutter VS in the open state is output to (a part of various solenoids 332), and information indicating the release period is set in the storage area of the V-shutter open time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Then, in the special figure 1 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the V-shutter opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the solenoid for opening / closing the V-shutter VS (V-shutter VS) A signal for holding the V-shutter VS in the closed state is output to (a part of various solenoids 332). Further, when the game ball passes through the V passage switch VC, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is turned on. In addition, in order to wait for a period (V winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds)) of displaying an image notifying the player that the game ball has passed the V passage switch VC and acquired the probability change, the RAM 308 is used. In the storage area of the special figure 1 standby time management timer provided, information indicating the V winning effect period is set. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the V winning effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area. On the other hand, when the game ball does not pass through the V passage switch VC, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is not turned on.

Further, in the special figure 1 state update process in which the opening / closing control of the door member is repeated a predetermined number of times (two rounds excluding the first time) and started at the end timing, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a decorative symbol display device. In order to set to wait for a period during which an image for notifying the player that the jackpot by 208 is to be completed is displayed, information indicating the effect waiting period is displayed in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Set. If the 3R jackpot flag A is set to ON, at the same time as the end of this jackpot game, the time reduction number (120 times) is set in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and the time reduction provided in the RAM 308 is set. Turn on the flag. Even when the 3R jackpot flag B is set to on, at the same time as the end of this jackpot game, the time reduction number (50 times) is set in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and the time reduction provided in the RAM 308 is set. Turn on the flag. In the special figure 1 state update process, the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is not set to on.

Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 1 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end effect period ends (the timing when the value of the effect standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 1 does not operate in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set inside.

Further, if the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order, the out-of-order flag is turned on. When this off flag is on, even in the special figure 1 state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 1 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). In the setting area of the RAM 308, the non-operating state of Special Figure 1 is set. In the special figure 1 state update process in the case where the special figure 1 is not operating, the process proceeds to the next step S229 without doing anything.

When the special figure state update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, the special figure-related lottery process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed this time. Here, too, the special figure-related lottery process for the special figure 2 (special figure 2 related lottery process) is performed first (step S229), and then the special figure-related lottery process for the special figure 1 (special figure 1 related lottery process). ) (Step S231). In the special figure 2 related lottery process, the variable game of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is not performed, and the states of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are both inactive and are on hold. It is executed using the earliest special figure 2 winning random value and the special figure 2 random value in the special figure 2 random value storage area on the condition that the number of variable games is 1 or more. In the special figure 1 related lottery process, the variable game of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is not performed, and the states of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are both inactive and are on hold. It is executed using the earliest special figure 1 winning random value and the special figure 1 random value in the special figure 1 random value storage area on the condition that the number of variable games is 1 or more.

Regarding these special figure-related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery process before the special figure 1 related lottery process, so that the start condition of the special figure 2 variable game and the special figure 1 variation Even if the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, the special figure 2 variable game does not start the change because the special figure 2 variable game is changing first. Further, when the number of holdings of the special figure 2 variable game is 1 or more, the lottery process or the variable game related to the holding of the special figure 1 variable game is not performed. Further, the decoration symbol display device 208 notifies the result of the winning / failing determination of the special figure variation game by the first sub-control unit 400, and the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is performed. , Special figure 1 The lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the starting port 230 is notified with priority. In this example embodiment, the special figure variable game (special figure 2 variable game in this example) having a high advantage is given priority over the special figure variable game (special figure 1 variable game in this example) having a low advantage. Therefore, it may be easy to make a difference in the advantage of the gaming state.

In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process in step S229, the main control unit 300 starts the special figure 2 start information (special figure 2 start information) from the earliest (most previously stored) holding position in the special figure 2 random value storage area. Fig. 2 Winning random number value and special figure 2 set of random value) is acquired, and based on the special figure 2 winning random number value in the acquired special figure 2 start information, etc., the winning / failing determination table stored in the ROM 306 is used. Determine whether to make a big hit or a miss (hit / fail judgment). In addition, even in the judgment of whether or not the result is shown in Special Figure 1, it is determined whether the hit is a big hit or a miss. Next, the main control unit 300 uses the special figure determination table stored in the ROM 306 based on the special figure 2 random value in the acquired special figure 2 start information and the determined hit / fail determination result, etc. The symbol to be stopped and displayed after the fluctuation display (stop symbol) is determined. Next, the main control unit 300 is stored in the ROM 306 based on, for example, the determined hit / fail determination result, the stop symbol, the number of special figures 2 held at the time of the hit / fail determination, the acquired random number value for determining the special figure fluctuation time, and the like. The variation display time (timer number) of the special figure 2 is determined using various tables.

After extracting the earliest special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, the main control unit 300 erases the earliest special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, and at the same time, the special figure 2 start information is deleted from the special figure 2 random value storage area. FIG. 2 Special figure 2 of the reserved number storage area The reserved number is subtracted by 1. At this time, the special figure 2 start information extracted from the special figure 2 random value storage area is stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above determination is made based on the special figure 2 start information stored in this temporary area. You may do so.

After the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) as described above, the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) is performed in the same manner. The order of the special figure 1 related lottery process and the special figure 2 related lottery process may be reversed.

In the above explanation, the special figure 2 variable game having a high advantage is started with priority over the special figure 1 variable game having a low advantage, and the hold of the special figure 2 is digested with priority over the hold of the special figure 1. The special figure 2 priority fluctuation is taken as an example, but the special figure 1 variable game having a low advantage is started with priority over the special figure 2 variable game having a high advantage, and the reservation of the special figure 1 is held in the special figure 2. It may be a special figure 1 priority change that is digested in preference to a hold. In addition, without giving priority to either the high-advantageous special figure 2 variable game or the low-advantage special figure 1 variable game, the special figure variable game related to the holding of each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is started and won a prize. It may be a variation in the starting opening winning order that starts in order. In the change in the starting order winning order, the maximum number of holds is eight regardless of the special figures 1 and 2, so it is compared with the priority change in which the maximum number of holds is 4 in each of the special figures 1 and 2. Then, it may be possible to raise the upper limit of the number of holds.

Further, in the above description, it is assumed that the lottery process and the variable game regarding the holding of the other special figure are not performed according to the state of one special figure, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the above-mentioned special figure state update By performing the processing and the special drawing-related lottery processing independently for the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2, a plurality of special figures may be configured to be changed at the same time. Further, when a plurality of special figures are changed at the same time in this way, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a plurality of areas for displaying the lottery results of each special figure, or the lottery results of each special figure are displayed. A plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided to display the lottery results separately, or the display of 1 may be configured to display the lottery results of a plurality of special figures. Further, when the fluctuations related to a plurality of special figures are performed at the same time, the lottery result of the special figure whose fluctuation is stopped first may affect the lottery result of the special figure whose fluctuation is stopped later.

In step S233 following step S231, the command setting transmission process is performed. In this command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of, for example, 16 bits, the bits 15 are strobe information (when it is on, it indicates that data is set), and the bits 11 to 14 are. Command type (In this example, basic command, symbol fluctuation start command, symbol fluctuation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number specification command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, look-ahead result information command, The command type can be specified such as a setting command), and bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off in the above-mentioned command transmission process. If the command type is the symbol change start (rotation start) command, the command data includes information indicating various jackpot flags, missed flags, timer numbers selected in the special figure-related lottery process, etc. In the case of the (rotation stop) command, the values of various jackpot flags and missed flags are included, and in the case of the command for specifying the number of jackpot rounds, the number of jackpot rounds is included. When the command type indicates a basic command, the command data includes device information, whether or not the special figure 1 starting port 230 has won a prize, whether or not special figure 2 starting port 232 has won a prize, whether or not a variable winning port 234 has won a prize, etc. including. In the case of the look-ahead result information command, the command data includes information such as the types of special figures 1 and 2, the number of look-aheads stored in the look-ahead number storage area, and the stop symbol stored in the look-ahead result storage unit. If it is a setting command, it includes setting information and so on.

Further, in the above-mentioned rotation start setting transmission process, the command data is selected by the various big hit flags, small hit flags, missed flag values, special figure 1 related lottery process, and special figure 2 related lottery process stored in the RAM 308. Set the timer number, the information indicating the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game held, and the like. In the above-described rotation stop setting transmission process, information indicating the values of various jackpot flags, missed flags, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data.

In the above-mentioned prize-winning effect setting transmission process, the command data includes the effect control information stored in the RAM 308 and output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the prize-winning effect period, and the reserved special figure. 1 Variable game or special figure 2 Set information indicating the number of variable games. In the above-mentioned end effect setting transmission process, the command data includes the effect control information stored in the RAM 308 and output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, and the reserved special figure. 1 Variable game or special figure 2 Set information indicating the number of variable games. In the above-mentioned large winning opening opening setting transmission process, information indicating the number of jackpot rounds stored in the RAM 308, the number of special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games held, and the like are set in the command data. In the above-mentioned large winning opening closing setting transmission process, information indicating the number of jackpot rounds stored in the RAM 308, the number of special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games held, and the like are set in the command data.

Further, in this step S233, the general command special figure hold increase process is also performed. In this general command special figure hold increase processing, special figure identification information (information indicating special figure 1 or special figure 2) and notice information (advance notice information, false notice information) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308 in the command data. Either advance notice information or no advance notice information) is set.

The first sub-control unit 400 can determine the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300 depending on the command type included in the received output schedule information, and is included in the output schedule information. It becomes possible to determine the effect control content based on the information of the command data.

In step S235 following step S233, the external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350, which is separate from the pachinko machine 100, via the information output circuit 336.

In step S237 following step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read out, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a lower plate full tank error is monitored. .. When a front frame door opening error or a lower plate full tank error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the lower plate full tank error. Set. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 and the variable winning opening 234, and the normal drawing display device 210 and the special drawing 1 display device 212 are controlled via the drive circuits 324, 326 and 330. , The display data to be output to the special figure 2 display device 214, various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the payout control unit 600 via the output port of the I / O 310.

In step S239 following step S237, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, the timer interrupt end process is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, and the like, and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 67 is performed. Return to. On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the state at the time of power interruption at the time of power recovery is saved as recovery data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and power interruption processing such as initialization of the input / output port is performed. After that, the HALT state is reached.

Next, the processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described. FIG. 69A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. First, in step S301 of FIG. 69A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step S301. In this initialization process, the initial setting of the input / output port, the initialization process of the storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

In step S303 following step S301, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305. .. In step S305, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S307 following step S305, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 determines whether or not a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

In step S309 following step S307, the effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S307, processing such as reading the production data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when the production data needs to be updated, the production data is updated.

In step S311 following step S309, the chance button control process is performed. In the chance button control process, the operation of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 190 is detected, and the effect data updated in step S309 is converted into the effect data according to the operation of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 190 according to the detection result. Perform the process to change to.

In step S313 following step S311, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control process, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

In step S315 following step S313, the lamp control process is performed. In the lamp control process, if there is a command to various lamps 442,452 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the game board lamp drive circuit 440 and the game underframe lamp drive circuit 450. do.

In step S317 following step S315, the movable body control process is performed. For example, if there is an instruction to the effect devices 2 to 4 in the effect data read in step S309, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 422.

In step S319 following step S317, information transmission processing is performed. In the information transmission process, if there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S309, a setting is made to output this control command. Then, the process returns to step S303.

FIG. 69B is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit command reception interrupt processing (strobe interrupt processing) executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal from the main control unit 300. In step S331 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

FIG. 69 (c) is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined with this timer interrupt as an opportunity. Execute in the cycle of. In step S341 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 of the first sub-control unit main process and stored in the original timer variable storage area. do. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

In step S343 following step S341, the control command is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 set in the information transmission process (step S319) of the first sub-control unit main process, and the random value value for other effects is updated. And so on.

Next, the processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described. FIG. 70A is a flowchart of the main process executed by a CPU (not shown) of the second sub-control unit 500. First, in step S401 of FIG. 70A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step S401. In this initialization process, initial setting of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in RAM (not shown), and the like are performed.

In step S403 following step S401, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S405. .. In step S405, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S407 following step S405, command processing is performed. The CPU of the second sub-control unit 500 determines whether or not a command has been received from the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S409 following step S407, the effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S407, processing such as reading the effect data (effect data by the decorative symbol display device 208) corresponding to this command from the ROM (not shown) is performed to update the effect data. If is necessary, the effect data is updated.

In step S411 following step S409, image control processing is performed. In the image control process, if there is an instruction to VDP516 in the effect data read in step S409, this instruction is output to VDP516 (details will be described later). Then, the process returns to step S403.

FIG. 70B is a flowchart of a command reception interrupt process executed by the CPU of the second sub-control unit 500. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub-control unit 500 detects a strobe signal from the first sub-control unit 400. In step S431 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM.

FIG. 70C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process executed by the CPU of the second sub-control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined with this timer interrupt as an opportunity. Execute in the cycle of. In step S441 of the timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM described in step S403 of the second sub-control unit main process and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S403, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S443, which is next to step S441, other effects such as updating the random value for effect are performed.

FIG. 70D is a flowchart of the image control process in step S411 of the second sub-control unit main process. In step S451, a transfer instruction for image data (movie data and texture data described later) is given. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the designation of the drawing area of the frame buffer 1 and the frame buffer 2 of the VRAM 518. As a result, the one-frame image stored in the frame buffer not designated in the drawing area is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, the CPU 504 sets the ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 506), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 518), and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 516 based on the position information table, and then the image from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518. Set the command to instruct the start of data transfer. The VDP 516 transfers the image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on the instruction set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 516 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

In step S453 next to step S451, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from VDP516 is input, and if the transfer end interrupt signal is input (step S453: Yes), the process proceeds to step S455. If not (step S453: No), it waits for the transfer end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S455, parameters are set based on the effect scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the frame buffer 1 or 2 of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S451, the CPU 504 information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis of the VRAM 518, image size). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), etc.) are instructed to VDP516. The VDP 516 sets parameters according to the attributes based on the instructions stored in the attribute registers.

In step S457 following step S455, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to the instruction of the CPU 504.

In step S459 following step S457, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 516 is input based on the end of drawing the image, and if the generation end interrupt signal is input (step S459: Yes), The process proceeds to step S461, and if not (step S459: No), the process waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S461, the scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images are generated is incremented (+1) to end the process.

Next, a specific configuration of the accessory ratio / setting display 196 and the DIP switch board 198 will be described with reference to FIG. 71. Here, FIG. 71 (A) is a diagram showing an example of a specific configuration of the accessory ratio / setting display 196, and FIG. 71 (B) is a diagram showing an example of a specific configuration of the DIP switch board 198. Is.

As described above, the accessory ratio / setting display 196 is configured to include the accessory ratio monitor and the setting monitor, and the accessory ratio monitor includes the continuous accessory ratio (RY) and the accessory ratio (the accessory ratio (RY)). YH) is displayed, and the setting monitor is displaying the current setting value.

Here, the continuous winning combination ratio is due to the operation of the winning combination when the winning combination is continuously operated out of the number of game balls (that is, safe balls) to be acquired (that is, variable winning during the big hit game). It refers to the ratio of the number of game balls obtained by opening the mouth 234 and winning a prize. In addition, the ratio of the number of game balls acquired by winning a prize in the variable winning opening 234 to the number of out balls may be used. In addition, the bonus ratio means that the number of game balls (that is, safe balls) to be acquired is due to the operation of the bonus (that is, the second special figure start opening 232 and the variable winning opening 234 are opened to win a prize. It refers to the ratio of the number of game balls acquired by.

In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the continuous accessory ratio exceeds 60% as a result of calculating the continuous accessory ratio, the double-digit 7-segment LED displaying the continuous accessory ratio is blinked and then displayed. Outputs a security signal (RY). Here, the security signal (RY) is an error signal output when the continuous accessory ratio exceeds 60%, and is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336. It may be output from a test terminal that can be mounted on the main board 156. As a result, the type application test for the gaming machine may be smoothly performed.

In addition, as a result of calculating the accessory ratio, if it is determined that the accessory ratio exceeds 70%, the double-digit 7-segment LED displaying the accessory ratio is blinked, and then the security signal (YH) is displayed. ) Is output. Here, the security signal (YH) is an error signal output when the accessory ratio exceeds 70%, and is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

In the present embodiment, when the continuous accessory ratio or the accessory ratio exceeds the upper limit of the normal value, the predetermined 7-segment LED is blinked, but for example, the emission color is changed. May be good.

As shown in FIG. 71 (B), eight DIP switches are arranged on the DIP switch board 198. Each DIP switch is connected to the first sub-board 160, and the position of each DIP switch can be read when the power is turned on to change the appearance probability of the effect. The appearance rate, the rush rate of the production mode, and the like can be set.

Subsequently, the game characteristics of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 62 will be described, although there are some overlaps with those described so far.

FIG. 72 (a) is a table summarizing the types of jackpots and the game state after the jackpot game.

First, in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 62, when setting 1 is selected in the setting change process (step S117) shown in FIG. 67, the jackpot probability with a low probability of the special figure becomes 1/320, and the special figure The jackpot probability with high probability is 1/91. When setting 2 is selected, the jackpot probability with the special figure low probability is 1/315, and the jackpot probability with the special figure high probability is 1/90. When setting 3 is selected, the jackpot probability with the special figure low probability is 1/310, and the jackpot probability with the special figure high probability is 1/88. When setting 4 is selected, the jackpot probability with the special figure low probability is 1/305, and the jackpot probability with the special figure high probability is 1/87. When setting 5 is selected, the jackpot probability with the special figure low probability is 1/300, and the jackpot probability with the special figure high probability is 1/85. When setting 6 is selected, the jackpot probability with the special figure low probability is 1/295, and the jackpot probability with the special figure high probability is 1/84. The larger the setting value, the easier it is to win a big hit.

Further, while the probability of winning a map with a low probability of a map is 1/100, the probability of winning a map with a high probability of a map is 99/100.

Further, as shown in FIG. 72 (a), in the special figure 1, the breakdown of the special figure a and the special figure b is equal (50% each), and in the special figure 2, the breakdown of the special figure A and the special figure B. Is 7: 3.

Further, in the special figure a of the special figure 1, the V shutter VS is opened only in the third round, which is the final round, and the game ball can pass through the V passing switch VC. When the game ball passes through this V passage switch VC (when the probability variation operation area is ON), the probability variation is attached, so that the game state after the big hit game ends becomes the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state. This state is maintained while the symbol variation display of the special figure is performed 120 times. On the other hand, when the game ball does not pass through the V-pass switch VC (when the probability variation operation area is OFF), the game state after the big hit game ends is a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state, and this state is , The symbol variation display of the special figure is maintained for 120 times.

In the special figure b of the special figure 1, the V shutter VS does not open even in the third round, which is the final round, and therefore, the game ball does not pass through the V passage switch VC. Therefore, the game state after the jackpot game is completed is limited to the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state, and this state is maintained while the special figure symbol variation display is performed 50 times.

In the special figure A of the special figure 2, the V shutter VS is opened only in the 10th round, which is the final round, and the game ball can pass through the V passing switch VC. In the special figure B, the V shutter VS is opened only in the second round, which is the final round, and the game ball can pass through the V passing switch VC. In both the special figure A and the special figure B, when the game ball passes through the V passage switch VC (when the probability variation operation area is ON), the game state after the big hit game ends is the special figure high probability normal figure. It becomes a high-probability state, and this state is maintained while the symbol variation display of the special figure is performed 120 times. On the other hand, when the game ball does not pass through the V-pass switch VC (when the probability variation operation area is OFF), the game state after the big hit game ends is a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state, and this state is , The symbol variation display of the special figure is maintained for 120 times.

After the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state or the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state is maintained a predetermined number of times, the state shifts to the normal state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state). The time saving that starts after the big hit game is said to be a time saving.

FIG. 72B is a diagram showing a game flow of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 62.

In the normal state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state), it is recommended to launch the game ball toward the left side area of the game area in order to aim at the special figure 1 starting port 230. That is, in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, even if the ball is entered into the normal figure start port 228, the player hardly wins the normal figure variable game and should not make a right-handed hit. The ball should be fired towards the left area (left-handed). The normal state is a non-time saving game state.

On the other hand, in a time-saving game state such as a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state or a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, it is easy to win the normal figure variable game. It is recommended to launch the game ball toward the right area where the starting port 228 is provided. That is, as shown in the breakdown of FIG. 72 (a), in Special Figure 1, the probability of obtaining a jackpot with probability variation (Special Figure a) is 50%, whereas in Special Figure 2, there is a probability variation. The probability of getting a big hit is 100%. Further, the number of times the time-saving game state is maintained after the big hit game may be 50 times in the special figure 1, whereas it is always 120 times in the special figure 2. Therefore, since it is easier for the player to obtain a jackpot that is advantageous to the player in the special figure 2 than in the special figure 1, the second special figure start opening 232 should be won and the big hit in the special figure 2 should be aimed at. .. Therefore, the player should shoot the game ball toward the right region (right-handed).

Further, in the case of a big hit game, in order to aim at the variable winning opening 234, the game ball is fired (right-handed) toward the right area where the variable winning opening 234 is provided in the game area. Become. FIG. 72 (b) shows that after the jackpot game is completed, the time-saving game state may be maintained 120 times or 50 times.

Further, in FIG. 72 (b), when the special figure is not hit even once while the symbol variation display of the special figure is performed 950 times in the special figure low probability state (time saving game state, non-time saving gaming state). That is, when the special figure is lost 950 times continuously, the time saving game state is maintained while the symbol variation display of the special figure is performed 1100 times. The period during which the time-saving game state is maintained as a result of the special figure loss being continued a predetermined number of times is called the play time, and this time reduction is called the b time reduction. b The time-saving game state can be shifted only once before the first hit after the power is turned on, and after the big hit, it can be shifted only once before the next big hit. Therefore, if the special figure loss of 950 times continues in the b time reduction game state, the b time reduction game state is not newly transferred to the b time reduction game state, and the b time reduction game state so far is continued, and the special figure loss of 1100 times occurs. If it is continuous, it shifts to the non-time saving game state (normal state). The count of the number of consecutive losses, which is a condition for shifting to the b time-saving game state, also includes the number of consecutive losses in the a time-saving game state and the c time-saving game state described later.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 66 (a) and 66 (b), the time-saving symbol may be stopped and displayed only in the symbol variation display of the special figure 2. The time-saving game state in which the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed and the transition is made is called c time-saving. This time-saving symbol is the hold of special figure 2 remaining at the end of the time-saving game state (special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, special figure low probability normal figure high probability state) (hereinafter, "special figure 2 remaining"). In the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 performed as a result of being digested in the non-time saving game state, there is a case where the c time is shortened. c When the time saving is won, the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 214 (see FIG. 64), and the decorative symbol display device 208 shows the "decoration 11" (time saving decorative symbol) shown in FIG. 66 (c). ) Are displayed side by side. Then, while the symbol variation display of the special figure is performed 950 times, the time-saving game state (special figure low probability normal figure high probability state) is maintained. That is, it shifts to the c time saving game state without going through the big hit game. The probability of winning suddenly in a short time is 1/90. In addition, the special figure 2 remaining hold at the time when the time-saving game state started after the big hit game ends, and the special figure 2 at the time when the b time-saving game state when the 950 times special figure loss is continuously started are finished. In addition to the remaining hold, there is a possibility that the special figure 2 remaining hold at the time when the time saving game state started by suddenly winning the time saving may be suddenly won again in the time saving.

Further, in the present embodiment, the time saving symbol may be won even in the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state, and b time saving game state. Also in this case, the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special figure display device 214 (see FIG. 64). However, on the decorative symbol display device 208, three "decoration 11" (decorative symbols for shortening the working hours) shown in FIG. .. Then, in the present embodiment, since the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state and the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state and the b time short game state are prioritized over the c time saving game state, the second special figure display device 214 Even if the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed, the time saving symbol is invalidated and the c time saving game state is not shifted to.

Furthermore, even if you hit right in the non-time saving game state, win the normal figure fluctuation game with a probability of 1/100, and win the second special figure start port 232 (electric chew), if you win in c time saving There is, and it shifts to the c time saving game state without being invalidated. That is, not only the special figure 2 remaining hold but also a new special figure 2 hold may shift to the c time saving game state. In addition, it may be extremely difficult (impossible) to win a prize in the second special figure start port 232 (electric chew) in the non-time saving game state. For example, even if the game ball enters the normal figure start port 228, the normal figure variable game may not be won, or even if the normal figure variable game is won, the opening pattern of the blade member 232a may be set. The opening pattern may be an extremely difficult (impossible) opening pattern to win a prize in the second special figure starting port 232 (electric chew).

In addition, the conditions for transitioning to the b time-saving game state are all satisfied by losing all in the c-time-saving game state (becoming a special figure loss 950 times in a row), and the transition from the c-time-saving game state to the b-time-saving game state is made. In some cases.

In the present embodiment, the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special figure display device 214 even in the special figure high-probability normal figure high-probability state, the special figure low-probability normal-figure high-probability state, and the time-saving game state. However, the stop display may not be displayed. That is, the stop display may not be performed except for the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 in the non-time saving game state.

Subsequently, a specific example of the progress of the game in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 62 will be described.

FIG. 73 is a diagram showing a stepwise example in which the time-saving game state ends and shifts to the non-time-saving game state shortly before the time-saving game state ends.

In each figure shown in FIG. 73, a decorative symbol display device 208, a time saving medium lamp TL, a right-handed display lamp RL, and a high accuracy medium lamp HL are shown. Each lamp represents a lighting state in black and a lighting state in white (the same applies to the example shown in FIG. 83). Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 73A is provided with a fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 in the upper right corner. The fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 is an area for notifying whether or not the symbol is changing (or the symbol is stopped) and notifying the number of holds, and the number of holds of special figure 1 is displayed in the upper left part. An area is provided, and a reserved number display area of special figure 2 is provided at the lower left. Further, a symbol changing notification area of special figure 1 is provided in the upper right part, and a symbol changing notification area of special drawing 2 is provided in the lower right part. In addition, a notification area during symbol change of the general map and a hold number display area of the general map may be further provided. The numerical value shown in the hold number display area of the special figure 1 is consistent with the hold number shown in the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, and the numerical value shown in the hold number display area of the special figure 2 is the hold lamp 220 of the special figure 2. Consistent with the number of holds indicated by. Further, in the symbol changing notification area of special figure 1, while the symbol of special figure 1 is stopped, for example, if it is a big hit, it is stopped and displayed as "○", and if it is out of the way, it is displayed as "x". Stop is displayed. Further, during the symbol variation display of the special figure 1, the display of "-" blinks, and it may be possible to recognize that the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is being performed. The display in the symbol changing display area of Special Figure 2 is the same as the display in the symbol changing display area of Special Figure 1, and this is a display mode corresponding to the symbol changing display and the stop display of Special Figure 2. Changes. By changing the display mode, lighting mode, and blinking mode of the fourth symbol, or by changing the display mode of the numerical value displayed in the hold number display area, a pre-reading notice and a notice regarding the running symbol change display can be given. You may go. The fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284 described above is the same up to the example shown in FIG. 83.

Further, on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 73 (a), the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 1-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. In addition, a mini symbol is displayed in the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, and variable display and stop display are performed according to the decorative symbol displayed large in the center of the display screen.

Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a variable icon display area 280 at the lower center of the effect display area 208d. In the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon corresponding to the currently performed symbol variation is displayed. In FIG. 73A, since the symbol variation display of the special figure is completed, the variation icon disappears and is hidden.

The control state (gaming state) shown in FIG. 73A is a time-saving gaming state. More specifically, it is a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state. The short-time medium lamp TL shown in FIG. 73 (a) is on, and the high-accuracy medium lamp HL is off. Further, as described with reference to FIG. 72 (b), right-handed striking is recommended in the time-saving game state, and the right-handed striking indicator lamp RL shown in FIG. 73 (a) is also lit. In addition, a right-handed first display RH1 for urging right-handed is displayed on the left side of the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284 of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 73 (a). This right-handed first display RH1 is a display that continues to be displayed even when the symbol variation display of the special figure ends during the time-saving game state, and continues to be displayed even when the demo screen is displayed. The right-handed display lamp RL also continues to light even after the transition to the demo screen.

The time-saving game state in FIG. 73 (a) is a time-saving game state (a time-saving game state) in which the big hit game is completed and started without the game ball passing through the V-passing switch VC, or 950 times of special figure loss is continuous. This is the time-saving game state (b time-saving game state) that was started. The background of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 73 (a) is the background of the castle town showing the time-saving game state. Further, the state in FIG. 73A is a state in which the time-saving game state shifts to the non-time-saving game state when the symbol variation display of the special figure is performed four more times. In the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 73 (a), the characters "remaining 4" are displayed as the time-saving game state remaining number display indicating that the time-saving game state continues only four times. In addition, the time-saving game state (a time-saving game state) when the big hit game is completed and started, the time-saving game state where 950 times special figure loss is continuously started (b time-saving game state), and suddenly the time is shortened and started. The background in the decorative symbol display device 208 may be different depending on the time-saving game state (c time-saving game state), and the display mode of the time-saving game state remaining number display may be different. Further, the background in the decorative symbol display device 208 may be different between the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state and the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state, and the display mode of the time saving game state remaining number display is also different. May be good.

Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 in the time-saving game state, the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2 is displayed on the left side of the variable icon display area 280.

In the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, the hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 2 is displayed. The number of holds in special figure 2 is represented by the number of lights of the hold lamp 220 in special figure 2 and the numerical value shown in the hold number display area of special figure 2, as well as the number of hold icons in special figure 2. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning prize) may be referred to as a first hold icon, the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon, and so on. In the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, the hold icons are displayed side by side, and the hold icon (hold icon on the right side) closer to the variable icon display area 280 becomes the hold icon with the older prize.

In FIG. 73A, three hold icons h21, h22, and h23 of the special figure 2 are displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, and the hold icons h11, h12, of these three special figures 2 are displayed. All of h23 are displayed in the default display mode (normal display mode). The default display mode is a round, unpatterned and white display mode. On the drawing, white is represented by hatching that faces diagonally downward to the left. The hold icon suggests the expectation of a big hit of the look-ahead notice depending on the display mode. That is, it suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit in the symbol variation display performed by digesting the hold represented by the hold icon. The default display mode suggests that the jackpot expectation is 5%. It may be suggested that the jackpot expectation is 0%. Alternatively, the default display mode may not indicate the expectation of a big hit in the first place. In the following description, if it is the default display mode, the description to that effect may be omitted.

In addition, in FIG. 73A, in order to make it easy to understand that the four hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, the hold icons that are not actually displayed are also shown by dotted lines. ..

In FIG. 73 (b), the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is started. That is, in this figure, the symbol variation in the second special symbol display device 214 (see FIG. 64), which is not shown, is started, the variation display of the fourth symbol and the mini symbol is also started, the movement of the hold icon is finished, and the decoration is completed. The variable display of the symbol has also started. The numerical value shown in the hold number display area of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 is 2, and the display of “−” is started blinking in the fourth symbol of the special figure 2. Further, the hold icon is shifted to the right by one, and the hold icon h21, which has been the first hold icon until then, is displayed as the change icon h0 in the change icon display area 280. The display mode of this variable icon is also the default display mode (round, non-patterned and white display mode). In addition, the time-saving game state remaining number display displayed in the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 is reduced by one to display "remaining 3".

Further, when the symbol variation display of the special figure is started, the display of the music selection display MC capable of selecting the music output from the speaker 120 is started on the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2. NS. In the music selection display MC displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 73 (b), the music name of "music 1" is displayed, and here, music 1 is output from the speaker 120 (not shown). The music output will be described in detail in FIGS. 78 and 78 and thereafter.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 73 (c), the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 3-Decoration 5-Decoration 8" is stopped and displayed. Further, in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed with "x", and the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed with the combination of "358". The music selection display MC disappears once every time the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and is restarted every time the variable display of the decorative symbol is started.

In FIG. 73 (d), the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is restarted, and the decorative symbol is variable display. The numerical value shown in the hold number display area of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 is 1, and the display of “−” is started blinking in the fourth symbol of the special figure 2. Further, the hold icon is shifted to the right side by one, and only one hold icon h21 is displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2. In addition, the time-saving game state remaining number display displayed in the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 is reduced by one to display "remaining 2".

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 73 (e), the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 8-Decoration 1-Decoration 4" is stopped and displayed. Further, in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed by "x", and the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed by the combination of "814".

In FIG. 73 (f), the symbol variation display of the last special symbol capable of maintaining the time-saving gaming state is started, and the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. The numerical value shown in the hold number display area of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 becomes 0, and the display of “−” is started blinking in the fourth symbol of the special figure 2. Further, the hold icon is shifted to the right side by one, and no hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, and the number of holds is 0. Further, the hold icon h21 in the default display mode, which has been the first hold icon until then, is displayed as the change icon h0 in the change icon display area 280. The variable icon h0 shown in FIG. 73 (f) is a red display mode different from the default display mode. On the drawing, red is represented by diagonal cross-hatching. The variation icon h0 in the red display mode suggests that the expectation of a big hit in the currently performed symbol variation display is 50%, and a so-called normal notice is executed. Further, the right-handed first display RH1 is continuously displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and next to the right-handed first display RH1 is a symbol variation display of the last special symbol capable of maintaining the time-saving gaming state. The characters "LAST" are displayed. Although the time-saving game state remaining number display displayed in the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 has disappeared and is hidden, it may be displayed as "remaining 1". Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 73 (f), the display of the right-handed second display RH2 that encourages right-handed display in a display mode different from that of the right-handed first display RH1 has been started. In the right-handed second display RH2, it is written that the hold of the special figure 2 is stored aiming at the second special figure start port 232 (electric chew) in the figure of the arrow pointing to the right. This is a notification that it is recommended to acquire the special figure 2 remaining hold that suddenly leads to the time saving winning. At the stage of FIG. 73 (f), the number of reservations in the special figure 2 is 0, but even if the number of reservations in the special figure 2 is full (4), the right-handed second display RH2 is displayed. Further, the speaker 120 also has started a right-handed notification (voice output of "right-handed to save the hold") for prompting the right-handed hit and accumulating the hold of the special figure 2. Further, the music 1 is continuously output from the speaker 120. While the right-handed notification sound is being output, the output sound of the music 1 may be lowered, or the music 1 may be completely muted. Right-handed second display Whether it is right-handed notification by RH2 or right-handed notification from the speaker 120, execution is started when the symbol variation display of the last special figure that can maintain the time-saving game state is started. .. The display start timing of the right-handed second display RH2 may be the same as the start timing of the variation display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation display of the last special symbol, or the variation display of the decorative symbol is started. It may be the timing after that. Further, the start timing of the right-handed notification from the speaker 120 may be the same as the start timing of the variation display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation display of the last special symbol, or the variation display of the decorative symbol is started. It may be the timing after that, or it may be the timing after the symbol variation in the second special symbol display device 214 (see FIG. 64) (see FIG. 64), which is not shown, is started and before the variation display of the decorative symbol is started. good.

In FIG. 73 (g), the second special figure start port 232 has won two prizes, and the number of reservations in special figure 2 has increased by two, and the number of reservations in special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / number of reservation display area 284 has been increased. The numerical value shown is 2, and two hold icons h21 and h22 are displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2.

In FIG. 73 (h), the reach state is entered in the variable display of the decorative symbol. In addition, there is one more prize at the 2nd special figure start port 232, and the hold of special figure 2 is increased by 1, and the numerical value shown in the hold number display area of special figure 2 in the 4th symbol / hold number display area 284 is 3. Therefore, the third hold icon h23 is also displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2.

In the example shown in FIG. 73, although it entered the reach state in FIG. 73 (h), it did not develop into super reach, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. The combination of the decorative symbols of "4" is stopped and displayed. Further, in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed by "x", and the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed by the combination of "434". Further, in the upper center of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 73 (i), the character "end" indicating that the symbol variation display of the last special symbol capable of maintaining the time saving game state has ended is displayed. .. When the symbol variation display of the last special figure is completed, the right-handed first display RH1 and the right-handed second display RH2 that have been displayed up to that point disappear and disappear. In addition, the right-handed notification that has been output from the speaker 120 up to that point has also ended. It should be noted that these end timings may be at the same time as the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, or may be after the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol. Alternatively, it may be the timing after the end of the symbol variation display of the last special symbol and before the end of the variation display of the decorative symbol, or the timing before the end of the symbol variation display of the last special symbol. May be good. The number of reservations in Special Figure 2 has finally reached four, and the tank is full. The numerical value shown in the hold number display area of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 shown in FIG. 73 (i) is 4, and the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2 has a fourth hold icon. h24 is also displayed.

In addition, the right-handed second display RH2 is hidden (erased) in response to the accumulation of four reservations of special figure 2, and a display suggesting that four reservations of special figure 2 are accumulated (indication). For example, a character display indicating that the tank is full on hold, a character display indicating that the product is ready, etc.) may be performed. In this case, if four reservations of special figure 2 are not accumulated by the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the right-handed second display RH2 is hidden according to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol. You can do it (delete it).

In FIG. 73 (j), the state shifts from the time-saving game state to the non-time-saving game state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state). The short-time medium lamp TL shown in FIG. 73 (j) is off, and the high-accuracy medium lamp HL is also off. When shifting from the time-saving game state to the non-time-saving game state, if the hold of special figure 2 remains, the special figure 2 remaining hold is preferentially digested because it is the special figure 2 priority variable machine. As described above, there is a possibility that the time-saving symbol shown in FIG. 66 (c) is stopped and displayed only in the symbol variation display of special figure 2 performed as a result of the remaining reservation of special figure 2 being digested in the non-time-saving game state. .. During the period in which the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is performed as a result of the remaining hold of the special figure 2 being digested in the non-time saving gaming state (hereinafter referred to as "pull-back period"), the background of the decorative symbol display device 208 is It becomes a dedicated background. In this example, an animation in which the main character, the lord, is running is displayed, and the character display of one-shot reversal is displayed.

Further, in the pullback period, since the remaining hold of the special figure 2 is exhausted, the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2 is in a time-saving gaming state in order to more clearly notify how many more holds of the special figure 2 are left. It is continuously displayed from. The hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 may be displayed together, or neither the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 nor the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2 may be displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 73 (j), the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, and three hold icons h21 to h23 are displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2. The numerical value shown in the hold number display area of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 is also 3, and the display of “−” is started blinking in the fourth symbol of the special figure 2.

Further, as described with reference to FIG. 72 (b), left-handed striking is recommended in the non-time-saving game state, the right-handed striking indicator lamp RL shown in FIG. 73 (j) is also turned off, and the decoration shown in FIG. 73 (j) is turned off. The right-handed first display RH1 is also not displayed on the symbol display device 208. However, during the pullback period, the left-handed notification that prompts the left-handed player is regulated even in the non-time-saving game state.

As shown in FIG. 73 (j), even if the state is changed from the time-saving game state to the non-time-saving game state, the left-handed notification is not executed during the pullback period. In FIG. 73 (k), the right-handed hitting so far is continued, and the game ball is launched toward the right side area of the game area 124. The same applies when the player changes from right-handed to left-handed, but happens to be right-handed. In the non-time-saving game state, when it is detected that the game ball has passed through the normal drawing start port 228 provided in the right side region, left-handed notification (left-handed second display LH2) is executed (FIG. 74 (m) etc.). In FIG. 73 (l), it was detected that the game ball passed through the starting port 228 of the normal drawing, but the left-handed notification was not executed. This is because, as explained with reference to FIG. 66 (a), the special figure 1 does not have a time saving symbol, and when a left-handed hit is made, the time-saving cannot be suddenly obtained. Not recommended. However, right-handed hitting is not recommended because it is extremely rare to win a prize at the special figure 2 starting port 232 when hitting right-handed. After all, it is a good idea not to fire the game ball during this pullback period.

It should be noted that the left-handed notification is not executed even during the restoration display when a power failure occurs during the pullback period and the vehicle is restored. Further, even if it is detected that the game ball has passed through the starting port 228 during this restoration, the left-handed notification is not executed. On the other hand, if a power failure occurs in a non-time-saving game state that is not a pullback period, and it is detected that the game ball has passed the normal drawing start port 228 during the recovery display when the game is restored, a left-handed notification is executed. .. The left-handed notification during the recovery display may be notified by a left-handed display and a left-handed notification sound, as in the case of the left-handed notification described later in FIG. 74 or the like, or a notification that only displays the left-handed display. It may be a notification that only notifies a left-handed notification sound. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 73 (m), the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 4-Decoration 1" was stopped and displayed, and the winner was not suddenly won in a short time. Further, in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed by "x", and the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed by the combination of "541".

In FIG. 73 (n), the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is restarted, and the decorative symbol is variable display. In the fourth symbol of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284, the display of “−” has started blinking. In FIG. 73 (n), the number of the remaining reservations in the special figure 2 is reduced by one, and the numerical value shown in the hold number display area of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 becomes 2, and the special figure 2 Two hold icons h21 and h22 are displayed in the hold icon display area 282.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 73 (o), the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 4-Decoration 5" is stopped and displayed, and even here, the winner was not suddenly won in a short time. Further, in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed by "x", and the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed by the combination of "245".

FIG. 74 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 73 step by step.

In FIG. 74 (a) following from FIG. 73 (o), the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is started, and the decorative symbol is variable display. In the fourth symbol of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284, the display of “−” has started blinking. In FIG. 74 (a), the number of the remaining reservations of the special figure 2 is reduced by one again, and the numerical value shown in the hold number display area of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 becomes 1, and the special figure Only one hold icon h21 is displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of 2.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 74 (b), the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 1-Decoration 9-Decoration 5" is stopped and displayed, and even here, the winner was not suddenly won in a short time. Further, in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed by "x", and the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed by the combination of "195".

In FIG. 74 (c), the last special figure 2 remaining hold symbol variable display is started, and the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. In the 4th symbol of the special figure 2 in the 4th symbol / hold number display area 284, the blinking of "-" is started, the numerical value shown in the hold number display area of the special figure 2 becomes 0, and the hold of the special figure 2 is held. No hold icon is displayed in the icon display area 282.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 74 (d), the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 6-Decoration 1" is stopped and displayed. rice field. Further, in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed by "x", and the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed by the combination of "261". The pullback period ends with FIG. 74 (d). In this example, the pullback period is the period of FIGS. 73 (j) to 74 (d). The pullback period is a period in which the length differs depending on the number of remaining special figures 2 and the length of time for displaying the symbol variation of each special figure.

In FIG. 74 (e), the background of the decorative symbol display device 208 has changed due to the end of the pullback period. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 74 (e) displays a background (a white background with no pattern) representing a non-time saving game state. Further, when the pullback period is completed, the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is displayed on the right side of the variable icon display area 280 instead of the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2.

Further, when the pullback period ends, the left-handed first display LH1 for prompting left-handed is displayed over the left-handed notification period. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 74 (e), the left-handed first display LH1 is displayed on the variable display of the decorative symbol. The display mode of the left-handed first display LH1 is a display mode in which the character left-handed is written in a figure in which a left-pointing arrow is deformed. Further, the speaker 120 also starts a left-handed notification (voice output of "please left-handed") for prompting left-handed. In FIG. 74 (e), the pending symbol variation display of the remaining special figure 1 is started, and the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. In the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284, the “−” display starts blinking, and the numerical value shown in the hold number display area of the special figure 1 is 0. Further, no hold icon is displayed in the newly displayed hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1.

The player sees the left-handed first display LH1, starts left-handed, and aims at the special figure 1 starting port 230. In FIG. 74 (f), the hold of the special figure 1 is increased by two, the numerical value shown in the hold number display area of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 becomes 2, and the hold icon display of the special figure 1 is displayed. Two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the area 281.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 74 (g), the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 9-Decoration 2-Decoration 3" is stopped and displayed. Further, in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed by "x", and the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed by the combination of "923". Further, the number of reservations of the special figure 1 is further increased by one, and the numerical value shown in the hold number display area of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 becomes 3, and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 becomes. The third hold icon h13 is also displayed.

In FIG. 74 (h), a new symbol variation display of special figure 1 is started, and the decorative symbol is variable display. The numerical value shown in the hold number display area of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 is 2, and the display of “−” is started blinking in the fourth symbol of the special figure 1. Further, the hold icon is shifted to the left side by one, and two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1. Even if the symbol variation display of the new special figure 1 is started, the left-handed first display LH1 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, but the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 74 (i) shows the left-handed first display LH1. The left-handed first display LH1 disappears and is hidden. The left-handed notification period, which starts when the pullback period ends, is a predetermined period with a predetermined time length, and may end within one symbol variation display depending on the time length of the symbol variation display of the special symbol. For example, it may be displayed over a plurality of symbol variation displays. The left-handed notification period may be terminated by displaying the symbol variation a predetermined number of times (for example, once), or may be terminated when a predetermined number (for example, one or four) of the reservations of the special figure 1 are accumulated. You may try to do it. In such a case, the left-handed notification period becomes an indefinite period.

If a power failure occurs and is restored during the left-handed notification period, the execution of the left-handed first display LH1 is continued. Further, the left-handed notification during the left-handed notification period may be performed only by the left-handed first display LH1 or only by the left-handed notification from the speaker 120.

In FIG. 74 (i), the number of holds of special figure 1 is further increased by two, and the numerical value shown in the hold number display area of special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 becomes 4, and the hold icon of special figure 1 is obtained. Four hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed in the display area 281.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 74 (j), the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 7-Decoration 2-Decoration 9" is stopped and displayed. Further, in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed by "x", and the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed by the combination of "729".

In FIG. 74 (k), the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is restarted, and the decorative symbol is variable display. The numerical value shown in the hold number display area of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 is 3, and the display of “−” is started blinking in the fourth symbol of the special figure 1. Further, the hold icon is shifted to the left side by one, and three hold icons h11 to h13 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1.

In FIG. 74 (l), it is detected that the game ball has passed through the normal drawing start port 228. That is, right-handed strike is detected. Then, as shown in FIG. 74 (m), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the left-handed second display LH2 for prompting left-handed. The left-handed second display LH2 is a display in a display mode different from that of the left-handed first display LH1, and is a character display such as "Please return to left-handed". The left-handed second display LH2 is displayed for a certain period each time a right-handed hit is detected. In addition to displaying the left-handed second display LH2, the speaker 120 may perform left-handed notification (for example, return to left-handed).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 74 (n), the left-handed second display LH2 disappears, the hold of the special figure 1 increases again, and the hold number display of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 is displayed. The numerical value shown in the area is 4, and four hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1. In addition, the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 9-Decoration 2-Decoration 4" is stopped and displayed, and in the 4th symbol / reserved number display area 284, the 4th symbol of Special Figure 1 is stopped and displayed with "x". At the same time, the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed in the combination of "924".

FIG. 75 is a diagram showing a stepwise example in which the period length of the pullback period is different from the example shown in FIG. 74. Hereinafter, differences from the example shown in FIG. 74 will be mainly described, and duplicate description may be omitted.

In the example shown in FIG. 74, the number of remaining reservations in FIG. 2 was four, whereas in the example shown in FIG. 75, the number of remaining reservations in FIG. 2 is only one. That is, in FIG. 75 (f), the symbol variation display of the last special figure 2 in which the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is 0 and the time-saving game state can be maintained, and the special figure 2 starting port 232 is won only once. I didn't. As a result, it is shown in the reserved number display area of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 75 (i) at which the symbol variation display of the last special figure is completed. The numerical value is 1, and only one hold icon h21 is displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2. In this state, as shown in FIG. 75 (j), the state shifts from the time-saving game state to the non-time-saving game state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state). In FIG. 75 (j), the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 remaining hold, which has only one, is immediately started, and the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. That is, the pullback period has started. Even during this pullback period, right-handed strikes are detected (Fig. 75 (k)), but left-handed second display LH2 is not executed (Fig. 75 (l)). The display is completed, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 75 (m), the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 4-Decoration 1" is stopped and displayed. Even in this example, I didn't win suddenly in a short time. The pullback period ends with FIG. 75 (m). The pullback period in this example is the period from FIG. 75 (j) to FIG. 75 (m), which is shorter than the pullback period in the example shown in FIG. 74. However, if the period length of the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 remaining hold, which is only one, is very long, the pullback period may be longer than the pullback period of the example shown in FIG. 74. Further, even when the number of remaining reservations in FIG. 2 is two or three, the pullback period may be longer than the pullback period of the example shown in FIG. 74, or shorter than the pullback period of the example shown in FIG. 75. It may be a withdrawal period.

Also in the example shown in FIG. 75, when the pullback period ends, as shown in FIG. is doing. Further, when the pullback period is completed, the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is displayed on the right side of the variable icon display area 280 instead of the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2.

Further, since the pullback period has ended, the display of the left-handed first display LH1 has started. Further, the speaker 120 also starts a left-handed notification (voice output of "please left-handed") for prompting left-handed. In FIG. 75 (n), the pending symbol variation display of the remaining special figure 1 is started, and the variation display of the decorative symbol is also started. In the same figure (o), the variation display of the decorative symbol continues. is doing.

FIG. 76 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 75 step by step.

In FIG. 76 (a) continuing from FIG. 75 (o), the pullback period ends and the first symbol variation display of the special figure 1 ends, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed with "decoration 9-decoration 2-decoration 3". The combination of the lost decorative patterns is displayed as stopped. In this example, from the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 (the display of the left-handed first display LH1 is started) to the end of the symbol variation display, the special figure 1 starting port 230 is awarded a prize. However, I couldn't save the hold of Special Figure 1 because it wasn't done once. Therefore, the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is not started immediately after FIG. 76 (a), and as shown in FIG. 76 (b), the decorative symbol also remains stopped and displayed. Even if the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is not started, the left-handed first display LH1 remains displayed until the left-handed notification period, which is a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds), ends. The left-handed first display LH1 continues to be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 76 (b). During this time, the player continued to hit left and aimed to win the special figure 1 starting port 230, but there was still no prize in the special figure 1 starting port 230, and the left-handed notification period ended soon. The left-handed first display LH1 disappears and disappears (FIG. 76 (c)). Even if the left-handed first display LH1 disappears, there is no prize for the special figure 1 starting port 230, and in FIG. 76 (d), the special figure 1 starting port 230 is finally won, and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is displayed. It is started, and the decorative design also starts to change display.

Even in the example shown in FIG. 76, when it is detected that the game ball has passed through the normal drawing start port 228 (FIG. 76 (g)), as shown in FIG. The left-handed second display LH2 that prompts left-handed is displayed.

FIG. 77 is a diagram showing a stepwise example when there is no pullback period. Hereinafter, differences from the example shown in FIG. 74 will be mainly described, and duplicate description may be omitted.

In the example shown in FIG. 74, the number of remaining reservations in FIG. 2 was four, and in the example shown in FIG. 75, the number of remaining reservations in FIG. 2 was one, whereas in the example shown in FIG. 77, the number of remaining reservations was one. Then, the number of remaining reservations in Special Figure 2 is 0. That is, in FIG. 77 (f), the symbol variation display of the last special figure 2 capable of maintaining the time-saving game state, which started when the number of reserved balls of the special figure 2 is 0, wins the special figure 2 starting port 232 even once. There was no. As a result, it is shown in the reserved number display area of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 77 (i) at which the symbol variation display of the last special figure is completed. The numerical value is 0, and no hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2. In this state, when the state is changed from the time-saving game state to the non-time-saving game state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state), there is no pullback period, and as shown in FIG. 77 (j), the background of the decorative symbol display device 208 is , The background of the castle town, which represents the time-saving game state, changes to a white background with no pattern, which represents the non-time-saving game state. Further, instead of the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is displayed on the right side of the variable icon display area 280. Further, the display of the left-handed first display LH1 has started. Further, the speaker 120 also starts a left-handed notification (voice output of "please left-handed") for prompting left-handed.

In FIG. 77 (j), the pending symbol variation display of the remaining special figure 1 is started, and the variation display of the decorative symbol is also started. In the following figure (k), the symbol of the special figure 1 is started. The variable display is completed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed that the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 9-Decoration 2-Decoration 3" is stopped. In the example shown in FIG. 77, as in the example shown in FIG. 76 above, from the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 (the display of the left-handed first display LH1 is started) to the end of the symbol variation display. During that time, there was no prize in the special figure 1 starting port 230, and the hold of special figure 1 could not be saved. Therefore, the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is not started immediately after FIG. 77 (k), and in this example, the demo display is started after the symbol variation display of the special figure is completed ( Even during (for example, 30 seconds), the special figure 1 starting port 230 has not been awarded once, and the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the demo display. A symbol demo is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 77 (l). In the demo display, the setting menu is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 by operating the effect button 136 shown in FIG. 64. From the setting menu, for example, the volume of the speaker 120 and the brightness of the frame lamp 122 can be adjusted. As shown in FIG. 77 (l), even after shifting to the demo display, the left-handed first display LH1 is continuously displayed until the left-handed notification period elapses.

As shown in FIG. 77 (m), when the left-handed notification period elapses, the left-handed first display LH1 disappears and disappears. In this example, there is still no prize in the special figure 1 starting port 230, and the demo display continues to be displayed. When the game ball is continuously launched while the demo display is displayed and it is detected that the game ball has passed through the normal drawing start port 228 (FIG. 77 (n)), as shown in the figure (o). In the demo display screen, the left-handed second display LH2 that prompts left-handed is displayed. The left-handed notification in the demo display may output a sound together with the display, or may output only the sound instead of the display. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 77, the symbol demo is displayed as the demo display, but the same applies even when the animation demo is displayed.

In addition to the display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the voice output from the speaker 120, the right-handed notification can also be performed by blinking the right lamp of the frame lamp 122. In addition to the display on the decorative symbol display device 208, the left-handed notification can also be performed by outputting voice from the speaker 120 or blinking the left lamp of the frame lamp 122.

Further, the display mode is different between the left-handed first display LH1 during the left-handed notification period and the left-handed second display LH2 displayed when it is detected that the game ball has passed the normal drawing start port 228. , The same display mode may be used. Further, although the display period length of the left-handed first display LH1 and the display period length of the left-handed second display LH2 are different, they may be the same period length.

In addition, the notification of how to hit during recovery due to a power failure is executed depending on the actual game state. For example, in the case of recovery during the pullback period, the left-handed notification is not executed even if the right-handed hit is detected. On the other hand, in the case of recovery during a symbol change of a special figure in a non-time saving game state, if a right-handed hit is detected, a left-handed hit notification is executed.

Next, the selection of music will be described in detail. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 62, the music output from the speaker 120 can be selected by operating the upper button 191 or the lower button 192 of the operation key unit 190 shown in FIG. 62. The music that can be selected depends on whether or not the predetermined conditions are met. In the pachinko machine 100, by pressing the setting change button 194 shown in FIG. 63, it is possible to change the setting values having different jackpot probabilities. Normally, the player does not know which set value is set. Which set value is set is an important concern for the player, and in this pachinko machine 100, the setting suggestion suggesting the set value is made by using the music. The above-mentioned predetermined conditions are not satisfied until a big hit is won in the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 which is performed as a result of the remaining hold of the special figure 2 being digested in the non-time saving game state. Therefore, even if a big hit is won in the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 in the time-saving game state, the predetermined condition is not satisfied. That is, it is a predetermined condition that a big hit is won in the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 performed as a result of being digested in the non-time saving game state.

In addition, as a predetermined condition, instead of making a big hit with the special figure 2 remaining hold, or in addition to making a big hit with the special figure 2 remaining hold, as a result of pre-reading during the hold during the big hit game, the big hit will be made again. There may be a hold (so-called hold villa). Alternatively, the player may win the most advantageous jackpot (for example, the jackpot with the largest number of rounds or the jackpot with the largest number of time reductions). In this pachinko machine 100, the most advantageous jackpot for the player is the special figure A, which is a 10R probability variation jackpot. On the contrary, the jackpot that is the most disadvantageous for the player (for example, the jackpot with the smallest number of rounds (special figure B, which is a 2R probability variation jackpot), or the jackpot with the smallest number of time reductions (special figure b, which is a 3R normal jackpot)). You may win the prize, or you may win the big hit of the 10th consecutive villa.

In addition, instead of the setting suggestion that suggests the setting value, or in addition to the setting suggestion, a song that suggests that there is a hold that becomes a big hit again as a result of pre-reading in the hold during the big hit game (so-called hold consecutive villa). It may be a song that suggests a hit type (for example, whether or not there is a probability change, or a round promotion occurs, etc.), or it suggests that it is a big hit for the 10th consecutive villa. It may be a piece of music. Furthermore, if the suggestion of the game information by the music is the game information that the player cannot normally know, the suggestion content becomes useful.

FIG. 78 (a) is a diagram showing a list of songs that can be selected when a predetermined condition is not satisfied.

When the music can be selected, it is in the jackpot game state, the time-saving game state, and the non-time-saving game state. Music cannot be selected while the special symbol is stopped, and therefore music cannot be selected even during the demo display. However, the music may be selected from the above-mentioned setting menu.

It should be noted that the music may be selectable even when the symbol of the special figure is stopped.

Further, when the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the music suggesting the set value cannot be selected. Therefore, the music that can be selected does not change regardless of which set value (settings 1 to 6) the pachinko machine 100 is set to.

The songs that can be selected when the predetermined conditions are not satisfied are five songs, songs 1 to 5. Music 1 is a default music, and when the RAM is cleared, this music 1 is set. In addition, this music 1 is set every time the game shifts to the non-time saving game state. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 73, the music 1 is still set from the beginning, but if a music other than the music 1 is selected, the music 1 is set at the timing of FIG. 73 (j).

FIG. 78 (b) is a diagram showing a list of songs selected when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The predetermined condition is satisfied when a big hit is won in the symbol variation display of special figure 2 which is performed as a result of the remaining hold of special figure 2 being digested in the non-time saving game state, and one song is selected by an internal lottery during the winning big hit game. The result is selected and set. That is, it is not selected by the player, but is automatically selected by the pachinko machine 100. The selection rate shown in FIG. 78 (b) corresponds to the distribution rate by lottery. Among the songs selected here, songs that suggest setting values are included. The music 6 is not a music that suggests a setting value like the music 1 to 5, but the music 7 is a music that suggests that the setting is 3 or more, and the pachinko machine 100 actually sets the setting to 3 or more. If it is not set, it will not be selected. The music 8 is a music suggesting that the setting is 5 or 6, and is not selected unless the pachinko machine 100 is actually set to the setting 5 or 6. When the pachinko machine 100 is actually set to setting 1 or 2, the music 6 is selected with a 100% probability.

Even after the predetermined condition is satisfied once, the predetermined condition may be satisfied again, and the music is selected by lottery in the same manner even when the predetermined condition is satisfied from the second time onward. When the predetermined conditions are satisfied a plurality of times, the same music may be selected. It is also possible to increase the number of songs so that the songs selected once are not selected.

As described above, the number of songs described with reference to FIG. 78 is an example, and more songs may be used. Even in this case, the number of songs that can be output from the speaker 120 is smaller when the predetermined condition is satisfied than when the predetermined condition is not satisfied. Further, under this relationship, the songs 1 to 5 may include the songs 6 to 8. Further, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, only one song is selected by lottery, but based on the above relationship, a plurality of songs are selected by lottery, and the player finally selects one song. good.

FIG. 79 is a diagram showing a list of songs selected after the predetermined condition is satisfied even once. Note that FIG. 78 (b) is referred to for the jackpot gaming state when the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the jackpot gaming state in FIG. 79 is the jackpot gaming state when the predetermined condition is not satisfied even once. That is.

In the non-time saving game state, as described with reference to FIG. 78 (a), the music 1 to the music 5 can be selected by the player operating the upper button 191 or the lower button 192 of the operation key unit 190. .. Further, if the music 6 is selected by lottery even once in the jackpot game started when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the music 6 is released until the RAM is cleared, and the music 1 to the music 5 are released. Similarly, it can be selected by operating the operation key unit 190. Even if the predetermined condition is satisfied even once and the music 7 or the music 8 is selected, the music 7 and the music 8 are not released in the non-time-saving gaming state and cannot be selected by the operation of the player. That is, when the music 6 is released, when the operation of the upper button 191 is repeated, the music names of the music 1 to the music 6 are displayed in order on the music selection display MC, and the music names of the music 6 are displayed. If the upper button 191 is operated while the button is on, the song title of the song 1 is restored, and the song name of the song 7 or the song name of the song 8 is not displayed on the music selection display MC in the first place.

In the time-saving game state or the jackpot game state in which the predetermined condition is not satisfied (for example, the jackpot game state started by winning the jackpot in the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 in the time-saving game state), songs 1 to 5 Up to this point can be selected by operating the operation key unit 190 in the same manner as in the non-time saving game state. Further, if the music 6 is released, it can be selected by operating the operation key unit 190 in the same manner as the music 1 to the music 5. Further, when the pachinko machine 100 is actually set to the setting 1 or 2, the music 7 and the music 8 are not selected by lottery even if the predetermined conditions are satisfied, so that the music 7 and the music 8 are not released. When the pachinko machine 100 is actually set to the setting 3 or 4, the music 7 may be selected by lottery when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and if it is selected, it is released and the operation key unit 190 is operated. However, since the music 8 is not selected by lottery, it is not released. When the pachinko machine 100 is actually set to the setting 5 or 6, the music 7 or the music 8 may be selected by lottery when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and if selected, the pachinko machine 100 is released and the operation key unit 190. It can be selected by operating. As described above, in the time-saving game state or the big hit game state in which the predetermined conditions are not satisfied, the songs 6 to 8 can be selected by the player after that if they are selected by one lottery. However, if it has not been selected by lottery even once, the player cannot select it. Similarly, when the music 6 is released and the music 7 and the music 8 cannot be selected, the operation of the upper button 191 is repeated, and the music selection display MC displays the music titles of the music 1 to 6. If the up button 191 is operated while the song titles of the songs 6 are displayed in order, the song titles of the song 1 are returned to, and the song titles of the songs 7 and the songs 8 are displayed on the song selection display MC in the first place. There is no such thing.

FIG. 80 is a diagram showing stepwise an example different from the example shown in FIG. 73, which continues from FIG. 73 (h).

Like the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 73 (i), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 80 (a) following FIG. 73 (h) has a loss of "decoration 4-decoration 3-decoration 4". The combination of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed, and the character "end" indicating that the symbol variation display of the last special symbol that can maintain the time-saving game state has ended is displayed.

Further, the third hold icon h23 shown in FIG. 80A has changed from the default display mode to the gold display mode. On the drawing, gold is represented by cross-hatching of vertical and horizontal lines. The hold icon in the golden display mode corresponds to a so-called look-ahead notice that suggests that the expectation of a big hit in the hold symbol variation display represented by the hold icon is 75%.

In FIG. 80 (b), as in FIG. 73 (j), the time-saving game state is shifted to the non-time-saving game state (special figure low-probability normal-figure low-probability state), and the time-saving and medium-time lamp TL is turned off, and the accuracy is high. The middle lamp HL is also off. Further, the background of the decorative symbol display device 208 is changed to a dedicated background in which the character display of one-shot reversal is displayed, and the display of the music selection display MC is started. Music 1 is continuously output from the speaker 120.

Further, the display mode of the first hold icon h21 shown in FIG. 80B is changed from the default display mode to the time saving display mode. This time-saving display mode is a pre-reading notice display mode that suggests that the player will suddenly win the time-saving, and is the default display mode when the game shifts to the non-time-saving game state (special figure 2 has entered the digestion of the remaining hold). It is a display mode changed from the display mode. That is, the look-ahead notice that suggests that the winner will be suddenly won in a short time is started when the pullback period is started. The hold icon in the gold display mode is the second hold icon h22.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 80 (c), the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 4-Decoration 1" is stopped and displayed, and in the following FIG. The symbol variation display is started again, and the decorative symbol is variable display. In the variable icon display area 280, the variable icon h0 in the time saving display mode is displayed, and a normal notice is executed. That is, it is suggested that the expectation of suddenly winning in a short time is 75% in the currently performed symbol variation display. The hold icon in the gold display mode is the first hold icon h21.

In FIG. 80 (e), the time saving symbol (special figure D) shown in FIG. 66 (b) is stopped and displayed on the second special figure display device 214. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 80 (e), the characters of success are displayed, and three "decoration 11" (decorative symbols in a short time) shown in FIG. 66 (c) are stopped and displayed side by side. That is, it is reported that the winner was suddenly won in a short time. However, although he was suddenly won in a short time, he did not win the big hit, so the fourth symbol of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284 is stopped and displayed with "x". Further, the mini-design is stopped and displayed not by the combination of the decoration 11 but by a specific combination of numbers (321). In addition, this specific combination is a combination that stops and displays only when a time-saving symbol that is not stopped and displayed at the time of loss or a big hit is won.

By suddenly winning in a short time, the game shifts to a short time game state without going through the big hit game. The time saving medium lamp TL shown in FIG. 80 (f) is lit, and the background of the decorative symbol display device 208 is the background of the castle town showing the time saving game state. Further, in the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, the characters "remaining 949" are displayed as a display of the remaining number of times of the time-saving game state indicating that the time-saving game state continues 949 times. In addition, the right-handed first display RH1 is displayed and the right-handed display lamp RL is also lit due to the shift to the time-saving game state. In addition, the golden display mode icon, which has been the first hold icon h21, has been changed to the variable icon h0, and the variable display of the decorative symbol has started. The variation icon h0 in the gold display mode is a normal notice suggesting that the expectation of a big hit in the symbol variation display started here is 75%. The music 1 is continuously output from the speaker 120, and the music selection display MC is also started to be displayed.

In FIG. 80 (g), the reach state is entered in the variable display of the decorative symbol. Then, in FIG. 80 (h), the super reach is developed, the hold icon display area 282 and the variable icon display area 280 of the special figure 2 disappear, and the music selection display MC also displays the remaining number of times of the short game state such as "remaining 949". It's gone. In addition, the variable display of the decorative pattern is reduced in the lower right corner. From the speaker 120, the music A dedicated to the super reach is output instead of the music 1 that has been continuously output.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 80 (i), the reduced display at the lower right returns to the original size, and the decorative symbols are displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. The combination is displayed as stopped. Here, the combination of the decorative symbols of the jackpot of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed, and the 2R probability variation jackpot (special figure B) is won. Further, in the 4th symbol / hold number display area 284, the 4th symbol of the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed by "○", and the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed by the combination of "777". The jackpot here is a jackpot in the remaining hold of Special Figure 2, but the predetermined condition is not satisfied because the game is suddenly won in a short time and the game is changed to the short game state.

In FIG. 80 (j), the opening effect of the jackpot game has started, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a character display of congratulations on the jackpot. Further, since the variable winning opening 234 is arranged in the right side region, the right-handed first display RH1 is displayed and the right-handed display lamp RL is also lit. The lamp TL is turned off during the time saving. Further, at the start of the big hit game (during the opening effect), a right-handed second display RH2 for prompting right-handed is also displayed in addition to the right-handed first display RH1. The right-handed second display RH2 is a display mode in which the characters "hit to the right" are displayed between the right-pointing arrows lined up at intervals, and is larger than the right-handed first display RH1. be. In addition, the speaker 120 outputs a right-handed notification voice saying "hit to the right".

Further, since the jackpot game is started without satisfying the predetermined conditions, at least songs 1 to 5 can be selected, and the song selection display MC is displayed except for a part of the period during the jackpot game. A display UD imitating the upper button 191 and the lower button 192 of the operation key unit 190 shown in FIG. 62 is displayed on the music selection display MC, and during the period when the music selection display MC is displayed, the upper button 191 or the music selection display MC is displayed. A song can be selected by operating the lower button 192. The music selection display MC displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 80 (j) displays the music name of "music 1", and the speaker 120 outputs music 1 together with the voice output of the right-handed notification. ing. While the right-handed notification sound is being output, the output sound of the music 1 may be lowered, or the music 1 may be completely muted.

In FIG. 80 (k), the first round has started, and the right-handed second display RH2 has disappeared and is hidden, but the right-handed first display RH1 is still displayed. Further, the right-handed notification sound is not output from the speaker 120, and only the music 1 is output. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208, which has started the first round, displays a musical composition moving image corresponding to the musical composition 1 output from the speaker 120. The music video here is an animation in which the main character, Tonosama, shows swordsmanship along with music 1, and the lyrics of music 1 are also displayed. In addition, the music selection display MC is also displayed.

In FIG. 80 (l), the second round has started. In the 2R probability variation jackpot, the V shutter VS opens in the second round (final round), and the V prize can be obtained. On the decorative symbol display device 208 where the second round has started, the character display "Aim for V" prompting the V passage switch VS to pass the game ball is displayed, and the music movie is continuously displayed. However, the music selection display MC disappears and is hidden. That is, in the round (final round) in which the V prize can be obtained, the music cannot be selected. The speaker 120 continues to output the music 1.

In FIG. 80 (m), the V-winning notification is performed to notify that the game ball has passed through the V-passing switch VS and that the decorative symbol display device 208 has won the V-winning. That is, it is notified that the state will shift to the probabilistic state after the jackpot game is completed. When the V prize notification is performed, the music moving image is hidden, but it may continue to be displayed together with the V prize notification. On the other hand, although the music 1 continues to be output from the speaker 120, the V prize notification sound may be output from the speaker 120 together with the music 1, or the V prize notification sound may be output instead of the music 1. .. In addition, even after winning the V prize, the music cannot be selected until the end of the second round, but as long as the V prize is won, the music can be selected for the remaining period of the two rounds. You may.

In FIG. 80 (n), the end effect of the big hit game is started, and the character display of the big hit end is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the right-handed first display RH1 is continuously displayed during the period of the jackpot game, and is also displayed in this end effect. Further, the music 1 is also continuously output from the speaker 120 during the period of the big hit game, and is also output in this end effect. Further, in the end effect, the display of the music selection display MC is restarted, and the music can be selected by operating the up button 191 or the down button 192. However, the end effect may also be such that the music cannot be selected as in the round in which the V prize can be obtained. In this way, it is not possible to select music during a part of the jackpot game. Further, during the period in which the super reach shown in FIG. 80 (h) is performed, the music cannot be selected. Further, as shown in FIGS. 80 (a), 80 (c), and (i), the music cannot be selected even while the symbol of the special figure is stopped. It should be noted that the music cannot be selected even when the specific mode is set or the setting menu is displayed.

By hitting right during the jackpot game, the second special figure start port 232 is also won, and up to four special figure 2 holds are accumulated. When the jackpot game is completed, the state shifts to the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, the hold of the special figure 2 accumulated up to four is digested, and the variable display is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 80 (o), the background of the castle town showing the time-saving game state is displayed, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. Further, in the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, the characters "remaining 119" are displayed as a display of the remaining number of times of the time-saving game state indicating that the time-saving game state continues 119 times. Further, the short-time medium lamp TL and the high-accuracy medium lamp HL shown in FIG. 80 (o) are also lit. Further, the right-handed first display RH1 is also displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the right-handed display lamp RL is also lit. In addition, the music selection display MC in which the music name of "music 1" is displayed is also displayed, and the music 1 is output from the speaker 120.

FIG. 81 shows step by step an example in which the first hold icon h21 of the hold icons of the special figure 2 at the time when the symbol variation display of the last special figure capable of maintaining the time saving game state is finished is the gold display mode. It is a figure.

In the example shown in FIG. 80, the third hold icon h21 among the hold icons of the special figure 2 at the time when the symbol variation display of the last special figure is completed is the gold display mode, but in this example, the first The hold icon h21 of is a gold display mode. Hereinafter, differences from the example shown in FIG. 80 will be mainly described, and duplicate description may be omitted.

The first hold icon h21 in the golden display mode shown in FIG. 81 (a) has a variable icon h0 in the gold display mode when the digestion of the remaining hold in FIG. 2 is started (when the pullback period is started). (See FIG. 81 (b)).

Here, showing the result of pre-reading, the special figure 2 symbol variation display (the symbol variation display corresponding to the variation icon h0 of the gold display mode) that is currently performed is a jackpot symbol variation display. In addition, in the special figure 2 symbol variation display (symbol variation display corresponding to the first hold icon h21 shown in FIG. 81 (b)), which is started next, the winner is suddenly won in a short time. As a result of this look-ahead, since the jackpot is won in the preceding symbol variation display, the symbol variation display corresponding to the first hold icon h21 is performed in the time-saving game state, and the time-saving game state acquired by the jackpot. In order to give priority to the time-saving game status acquired by the big hit instead of updating the time-saving suddenly, the winning of the time-saving is invalidated. Therefore, unlike the first hold icon h21 shown in FIG. 80 (b), the first hold icon h21 is not displayed in the time saving display mode, and in FIG. 81 (b), the first hold icon h21 is displayed in the default display mode. Has been done. That is, even if the time-saving symbol has a hold scheduled to be won, if there is a hold to win the jackpot before the hold is exhausted, the pre-reading notice for the time-saving symbol is prohibited.

In FIG. 81 (c), the reach state is entered in the variable display of the decorative symbol. Then, in FIG. 81 (d), the music A has evolved into a super reach, and the music A dedicated to the super reach is output from the speaker 120 in place of the music 1 which has been continuously output. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 81 (e), the combination of the decorative symbols of the jackpot of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed, and the 2R probability variation jackpot (special figure B) is won. is doing. The jackpot here is a jackpot in the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 performed as a result of the remaining hold of the special figure 2 being digested in the non-time saving game state, and a predetermined condition is satisfied.

In FIG. 81 (f), the opening effect of the jackpot game is started. Since the predetermined condition is satisfied, the music selection determination display MD is displayed instead of the music selection display MC. In this example, the music title of the music 8 is displayed on the music selection determination display MD, and it is notified that the music 8 has been selected by lottery. Further, the music 8 is output from the speaker 120. The music 8 is a music suggesting that the setting is 5 or 6, and a player who knows this can know that the pachinko machine 100 currently playing is a high setting pachinko machine. Further, the music 8 is a music that may be selected only for the pachinko machine 100 that is actually set to the setting 5 or 6, and is a rare music because the selection rate is low. In some cases, the interest of the game may be improved. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 81 (f) displays a right-handed first display RH1 and a right-handed second display RH2. The right-handed notification voice is also output.

In FIG. 81 (g), the first round has started, and the right-handed second display RH2 has disappeared and is hidden, but the right-handed first display RH1 is still displayed. Further, the right-handed notification sound is no longer output from the speaker 120, and only the music 8 is output. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208, which has started the first round, displays a musical composition moving image corresponding to the musical composition 8 output from the speaker 120. The music video here is an animation in which the loincloth-style bancho decides a pose according to the music 8, and the lyrics of the music 8 are also displayed. The lyrics display of the music 1 without setting suggestion shown in FIG. 80 (k) and FIG. 80 (l) is the character display of the first color (for example, the black character display), but the lyrics display of the music 8 suggesting a high setting. Is a second color character display (for example, gold character display). The lyrics display of the music 7 may be a character display of a third color (for example, a red character display). Further, the music selection determination display MD is also displayed in FIG. 81 (g).

In FIG. 81 (h), the second round has started. In the example of FIG. 81, the character display "Aim for V" is displayed, and although the music moving image is continuously displayed, the music selection determination display MD disappears and is hidden. The speaker 120 continues to output the music 8.

In FIG. 81 (i), the game ball passes through the V passage switch VS, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is notified that the V prize has been won, and the music moving image is hidden. In addition, the music selection decision display MD remains hidden. On the other hand, the music 8 continues to be output from the speaker 120.

In FIG. 81 (j), the end effect of the jackpot game has started, and the display of the music selection determination display MD is resumed. Further, the music 8 is also continuously output from the speaker 120 during the period of the big hit game, and is also output in this end effect.

In FIG. 81 (k), the game shifts to the time-saving game state, the hold of special figure 2 is digested, and the variable display is started. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays the background of the castle town showing the time-saving game state. The variable display of decorative patterns has started. Further, when the predetermined condition is satisfied and the music 8 is selected by lottery, the display of the music selection display MC in which the music name of the music 8 is displayed in the time-saving game state is also started. From the speaker 120, the music 8 is continuously output from the big hit game.

In FIG. 81 (l), the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed the combination of the lost decorative symbols of “Decoration 3-Decoration 5-Decoration 8”. .. The stop-displayed symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is the hold symbol variation display represented by the first hold icon h21 at the time when the digestion of the special figure 2 remaining hold is started (when the pullback period is started). be. As described above, originally, the symbol variation display was suddenly won in a short time, but since the big hit with the time reduction was won first, the time reduction symbol is not stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. , Does not shift to the time-saving game state based on the time-saving symbol. That is, it can be said that the stop display of the time-saving symbol is restricted in the time-saving game state, and the time-saving symbol is a symbol that is stopped and displayed only in the non-time-saving game state. However, the time-saving symbol may be stopped and displayed even in the time-saving game state.

In FIG. 81 (m) continuing from FIG. 81 (l), the number of time-saving game state remaining number display is reduced by one, the character "remaining 118" is displayed, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. In n), the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 8-Decoration 1-Decoration 4" is stopped and displayed.

Further, in FIG. 81 (o), the number of time-saving game state remaining number display is further reduced by one, the character "remaining 117" is displayed, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. The music selection display MC in which the music title of the music 8 is displayed is displayed, and the output of the music 8 is continued from the speaker 120.

FIG. 82 is a diagram showing a stepwise example of operating the operation key unit 190 while the music selection display MC is displayed.

In the examples so far, the operation key unit 190 is not operated even if the music selection display MC is displayed, but in the example shown in FIG. 82, the operation key unit 190 is operated. Hereinafter, differences from the example shown in FIG. 81 will be mainly described, and duplicate description may be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 82 (a), the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 3-Decoration 4" is stopped and displayed, and the symbol variation display of the last special symbol that can maintain the time-saving game state is displayed. Is finished.

In FIG. 82 (b), as in FIG. 73 (j), the time-saving game state is shifted to the non-time-saving game state (special figure low-probability normal-figure low-probability state), and the time-saving and medium-time lamp TL is turned off, and the accuracy is high. The middle lamp HL is also off. Further, the background of the decorative symbol display device 208 is changed to a dedicated background in which the character display of one-shot reversal is displayed, and the display of the music selection display MC in which the music name of the music 1 is displayed has started. Music 1 is output from the speaker 120.

In FIG. 82 (c), the player presses the upper button 191 of the operation key unit 190 once. Then, as shown in FIG. 82 (d), the music title of the music 2 is displayed on the music selection display MC, and the speaker 120 to the music 2 after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed after pressing the upper button 191. Output starts. That is, the music is determined after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed after the operation key unit 190 is operated. If the operation key unit 190 is operated again before the elapse of a predetermined time, the music title of the music on the music selection display MC is also changed, and the music output from the speaker 120 is also changed. Further, even before the elapse of a predetermined time, the music may be determined if the OK button of the operation key unit 190 is pressed.

In FIG. 82 (e), a reach state is entered in the variable display of the decorative symbol, and in the following figure (f), it develops into a super reach, and the speaker 120 replaces the newly set music 2 with a super reach. Dedicated music A is output. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 82 (g), the combination of the decorative symbols of the jackpot of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed, and the 2R probability variation jackpot (special figure B) is won. Then, the predetermined conditions are satisfied.

In FIG. 82 (h), the opening effect of the jackpot game is started. Since the predetermined condition is satisfied, the music selection determination display MD is displayed instead of the music selection display MC. In this example, the music title of the music 6 is displayed on the music selection determination display MD. Further, the music 6 is output from the speaker 120. Music 6 is a music that does not suggest a setting. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 82 (h) displays a right-handed first display RH1 and a right-handed second display RH2. The right-handed notification voice is also output.

In FIG. 82 (i), the first round is started, and the right-handed notification sound is not output from the speaker 120, and only the music 6 is output. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208, which has started the first round, displays a musical composition moving image corresponding to the musical composition 6 output from the speaker 120. The music video here is an animation in which the bancho of the school uniform decides a pose according to the music 6, and the lyrics of the music 6 are also displayed. Further, also in FIG. 82 (i), the music selection determination display MD is displayed.

In FIG. 82 (j), the second round has started. In the example of FIG. 82, the character display "Aim for V" is displayed, and although the music moving image is continuously displayed, the music selection determination display MD disappears and is hidden. The speaker 120 continues to output the music 6.

In this example, the game ball does not pass through the V passing switch VS and the V winning notification is not performed, and in FIG. 82 (k), the end effect of the big hit game is started. In the end effect of the jackpot game, the display of the music selection determination display MD is resumed. Further, the music 6 is also continuously output from the speaker 120 during the period of the big hit game, and is also output in this end effect.

In FIG. 82 (l), the game shifts to the time-saving game state, the hold of special figure 2 is digested, and the variable display is started. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays the background of the castle town showing the time-saving game state. The variable display of decorative patterns has started. Since there was no V prize, the probability change state was not reached, and the high probability middle lamp HL remained off.

Further, when the predetermined condition is satisfied and the music 6 is selected by lottery, the display of the music selection display MC in which the music name of the music 6 is displayed is started in the time-saving game state. Music 6 is continuously output from the speaker 120 from the big hit game.

In FIG. 82 (m), the player presses the upper button 191 of the operation key unit 190 once. Then, as shown in FIG. 82 (n), the music name of the default music 1 is displayed on the music selection display MC, and when the music 1 is determined after a lapse of a predetermined time, the output of the music 1 is output from the speaker 120. It will be started. In this example, the songs 7 and 8 are not released, and the music 6 is returned to the music 1.

In addition, when a specific operation (for example, a pressing operation of the lower button 192, a long pressing operation of the OK button, etc.) is performed during a specific period (for example, the period of the opening effect during the big hit game shown in FIG. 82 (h)), it is predetermined. Even if the condition is not satisfied, the music 6 may be released. Even in this case, it is desirable not to release the setting suggestion music.

FIG. 83 is a diagram showing a stepwise example of operating the operation key unit 190 during a jackpot game started without satisfying a predetermined condition.

FIG. 83A is different from the previous examples of FIG. 81, in which the symbol variation display of the special figure is completed in the non-time saving game state, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with “decoration 4-decoration 3-decoration 4”. The combination of the decorative patterns of the loss is stopped and displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 83 (a), the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is displayed on a white background with no pattern indicating the non-time saving game state. Three hold icons h11 to h13 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and among them, the first hold icon h11 is a gold display mode. Further, the short-time medium lamp TL, the right-handed indicator lamp RL, and the high-accuracy medium lamp HL are all turned off. Further, the music 1 is output from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 83 (a).

In FIG. 83 (b), the pending symbol variation display represented by the first hold icon h11 in the gold display mode is started, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 83 (b), the decorative symbol variation display is started. Has been done. Further, in the variable icon display area 280, the variable icon h0 in the gold display mode is displayed, and a normal notice is given.

In FIG. 83 (c), the reach state is entered in the variable display of the decorative symbol. Then, in FIG. 83 (d), it has evolved into a super reach, and the music A dedicated to the super reach is output from the speaker 120 instead of the music 1. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 83 (e), the combination of the decorative symbols of the jackpot of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed, and the 3R probability variation jackpot (special figure a) is won. There is. Since the big hit here is not the big hit in the special figure 2 remaining hold, the predetermined condition is not satisfied. Further, in this example, this big hit is the first hit, and the predetermined condition has not been satisfied even once after the power is turned on (after the RAM is cleared).

In FIG. 83 (f), the opening effect of the jackpot game is started. Since the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the music selection display MC is displayed instead of the music selection determination display MD. In the music selection display MC shown in FIG. 83 (f), the music name of "music 1" is displayed, and the music 1 is output from the speaker 120 together with the voice output of the right-handed notification.

In FIG. 83 (g), the first round is started, and the right-handed notification sound is not output from the speaker 120, and only the music 1 is output. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a music selection display MC in which the music name of "music 1" is displayed, and also displays a music video in which the main character, the lord, appears according to the music 1. ..

As shown in FIG. 83 (h), the player presses the upper button 191 of the operation key unit 190 four times in the middle of the first round. In the music selection display MC, the display is switched in the order of the music title of the music 2, the music title of the music 3, the music name of the music 4, and the music name of the music 5, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. The music selection display MC in which the music title of the music is displayed is displayed, and the music video with the lyrics display corresponding to the music 5 is displayed. Further, the music 5 is output from the speaker 120.

In FIG. 83 (j), the player presses the upper button 191 of the operation key unit 190 once. On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 83 (k) where the second round is started, a music selection display MC displaying the music name of "music 1" is displayed, and a music with lyrics display corresponding to the music 1 is displayed. The video is displayed. That is, it returns to the music 1 that was output in the first round, and here, the output of the music 1 is restarted from the continuation of the music 1 that was output halfway in the first round. However, each time a song is selected, it may be output from the beginning of the song.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 83 (l) at which the third round of the final round is started, the music selection display MC disappears and the music cannot be selected. The decorative symbol display device 208 continues to display a musical composition moving image with a lyrics display corresponding to the musical composition 1. Further, the music 1 is output from the speaker 120.

In FIG. 83 (m), the game ball passes through the V-passing switch VS, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is notified of the V-winning, and the music moving image is hidden. Also, the music selection display MC remains hidden. On the other hand, the music 1 continues to be output from the speaker 120.

In FIG. 83 (n), the end effect of the jackpot game has started, and the display of the music selection display MC has been resumed. Further, the music 1 is output from the speaker 120.

In FIG. 83 (o), the game shifts to the time-saving game state, the hold of special figure 2 is digested, and the variable display is started. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays the background of the castle town showing the time-saving game state. The variable display of decorative patterns has started. On the decorative symbol display device 208, the music selection display MC in which the music name of "music 1" is displayed is continuously displayed, and the music 1 is also displayed from the speaker 120 from the jackpot game to the non-time saving game state or the time saving game. It is continuously output without interruption when switching to the state. In addition, when switching from the jackpot game to the non-time saving game state or the time saving game state, even if there is no change in the music, the music is not continuously output, and the music is restarted after being interrupted, or the non-time saving. When the game is switched to the game state or the time-saving game state, the output may be re-output from the beginning of the music.

In addition, the predetermined condition regarding the music selection was that the jackpot was won in the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 performed as a result of the remaining hold of the special figure 2 being digested in the non-time saving game state. During the game, the music can be selected as shown in FIGS. 83 (h) and 83 (j), and during the big hit game of the 2R jackpot, the music cannot be selected as shown in FIG. 81 (f) and the like. May be good.

The present invention can also be applied to a so-called type-two-type mixer in which a small hit is made in a time-saving game state and a big hit is obtained by entering the V winning area in the attacker.

In the above description,
"A game table provided with a notification means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, a speaker 120, a frame lamp 122, etc.].
In the non-time-saving gaming state, the notification means is a first notification for prompting the launch of a game ball toward the first game area [for example, a left-handed notification such as a left-handed first display LH1 or a left-handed second display LH2]. ] May be executed,
When the first condition [for example, there are four remaining reservations in FIG. 2] is satisfied when the notification means shifts from the time-saving gaming state to the non-time-saving gaming state.
The first period after the transition from the time-saving game state to the non-time-saving game state [for example, the symbol variation display of special figure 2 performed as a result of the remaining reservation of special figure 2 being digested in the non-time-saving game state is performed. It is a period (pull-back period), and the first notification is not executed in the period of FIG. 73 (j) to FIG. (O) to FIG. 74 (d)] [for example, FIG. 73 (l)]. ,
After the end of the first period, the first notification [for example, the left-handed first display] is extended over the second period [for example, the left-handed notification period of FIGS. 74 (e) to 74 (h)]. LH1 left-handed notification] is executed.
A game table that features that. 』\
Was explained.

According to this game table, it is possible to perform appropriate notification according to the game situation.

In the second period, the first notification is always executed.

Further, the notification means may not execute the first notification even when the power is cut off during the first period and then the power is restored.

also,
"The notification means [for example, the decorative symbol display device 208] has a second condition [for example, only one special figure 2 remaining hold] when shifting from the time-saving gaming state to the non-time-saving gaming state. If so,
In the third period [for example, the period of FIG. 75 (j) to FIG. (M)] shorter than the first period after the transition from the time-saving gaming state to the non-time-saving gaming state, the first notification is given. [For example, FIG. 75 (l)],
After the end of the third period, the first notification [for example, the left-handed notification period of FIGS. 75 (n) to (o) to 76 (b)] For example, the left-handed first display LH1 left-handed notification] is executed.
A game table that features that. 』\
Was also explained.

Also in this game table, it is possible to perform appropriate notification according to the game situation.

also,
"When the first condition and the second condition are not satisfied when the notification means [for example, the decorative symbol display device 208] shifts from the time-saving gaming state to the non-time-saving gaming state [for example, When the remaining hold of special figure 2 is 0], the second period [for example, the period of FIG. 77 (j) to FIG. When one notification [for example, left-handed notification of the left-handed first display LH1] is executed [for example, it may be executed as in the example shown in FIG. 77, or the special figure 2 remaining hold is 2 or 3 In some cases, the left-handed first display LH1 may not be executed immediately],
A game table that features that. 』\
Was also explained.

Also in this game table, it is possible to perform appropriate notification according to the game situation.

also,
"The second starting port [for example, the second special drawing starting port 232] arranged in the second game area [for example, the right side area] and
A second symbol display means [for example, the second special symbol display device 214] capable of executing the second symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display of the special figure 2] based on the winning of the second start port. When,
With
The notification means [for example, the decorative symbol display device 208] sends a second notification [for example, right-handed first display RH1] for prompting the launch of the game ball toward the second game area in the time-saving game state. To do,
The notification means provides a hold number notification [for example, a number notification in the hold number display area of the special figure 2 at the lower left of the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284] indicating the hold number of the second symbol variation display. To do,
The notification means is executing the final second symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as "last second symbol variation display") in the time-saving gaming state [for example, FIGS. 73 (f) to 73 (f) to FIG. h)], a third notification [for example, right-handed second display RH2] is executed, which is a notification mode different from the second notification and prompts the launch of the game ball toward the second game area. Is a thing
The notification means executes the third notification in the final second symbol variation display, while the pending number has been executed before the last second symbol variation display is started. It is executed without changing the notification mode of the notification [for example, FIGS. 73 (f) to 73 (h)].
A game table that features that. 』\
Was also explained.

In the final second symbol variation display, the player loses unless the hold of the second symbol variation display is stored. First, since the hold number notification is executed without changing the notification mode, the player can confirm the hold number of the second symbol variation display. Then, by executing a special notification such as the third notification, it is possible to emphasize the launch of the game ball toward the second gaming area and prevent the player from losing money.

The notification means may always execute the third notification during the execution of the last second symbol variation display.

In addition, the notification means said that in the non-time saving gaming state after the end of the second period, the game ball was detected to be launched toward the second gaming area. It executes one notification,
In the first period, the notification means does not execute the first notification even if it is detected that the game ball is being launched toward the second game area.

also,
"The first start port [for example, the first special figure start port 230] arranged in the first game area [for example, the left side area] and
A first symbol display means [for example, the first special symbol display device 212] capable of executing the first symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display of the special figure 1] based on the winning of the first start port. When,
With
The first symbol display means may stop and display the time-saving symbol [for example, the time-saving symbol (special symbol D) shown in FIG. 66 (b)] in the first symbol variation display in the non-time-saving game state. Is a thing
The second symbol display means may stop and display the time-saving symbol in the second symbol variation display in the non-time-saving gaming state [for example, FIG. 80 (e)].
When the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed in the second symbol variation display, the state shifts to the time-saving game state without going through the jackpot game [for example, FIG. 80 (f)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Even in the same non-time saving game state, in the second symbol variation display, if there is a hold, the time saving symbol may be won, and the time saving game state is returned again as compared with the case where there is no hold. There is a high possibility of migration. Therefore, the first notification is not performed to prevent the player from unnecessarily aiming at the first starting port.

In addition, a look-ahead notice means capable of executing a look-ahead notice suggesting that the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed is provided.
In the pre-reading notice means, a hold that is digested before the hold of the second symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as "second hold") that stops and displays the time-saving symbol is won as a kind of jackpot. If so, the pre-reading notice may not be executed for the second hold.

Further, when the hold to be digested before the second hold is won as the probability variation jackpot, even if the second hold is digested after the jackpot game of the probability variation jackpot, the time reduction based on the time reduction symbol is used. It may not shift to the gaming state.

That is, after the jackpot game of the probabilistic jackpot is completed, the game shifts to the time-saving game state, and even if the second hold is exhausted, the time-saving symbol is not stopped and displayed. Further, when the second hold is exhausted, the time-saving game state is already in effect.

The present invention can also be applied to an enclosed pachinko machine. In the enclosed pachinko machine, a predetermined number of game media (for example, game balls) are circulated inside the game table. That is, the game medium launched from the launching means into the gaming area can be discharged from the gaming area and supplied to the launching means again. Further, a display means for displaying information on the number of game media (prize balls, rental balls, total number of balls held, etc.) and other information is arranged below the game area on the front of the game table, and is shown in FIG. The upper plate 126 and the lower plate 128 shown are not provided.

As described above, this enclosed pachinko machine is used by enclosing a ball and circulating the enclosed ball in the pachinko machine. The enclosed ball is used as a launching ball, and the ball is paid out. It may be executed by credit.

Next, a slot machine (rotating machine) as a gaming table applicable to the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. 84. Here, FIG. 84 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 1000 applicable to the present invention as viewed from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 84 includes a main body 1001 and a front door 1002 that is attached to the front of the main body 1001 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 1001. Inside the center of the main body 1001 (not shown in FIG. 84), three reels (left reel 1010, middle reel 1011 and right reel 1012) in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged are stored on the outer peripheral surface of the slot machine 1000. It is configured to rotate internally. These reels 1010 to 1012 are rotationally driven by a driving means such as a stepping motor.

In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 84, an appropriate number of patterns are printed on the strip-shaped members at equal intervals, and the strip-shaped members are attached to a predetermined circular tubular frame member to form each reel 1010 to 1012. .. When viewed from the player, approximately three symbols on the reels 1010 to 1012 are displayed in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 1013, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. Then, by rotating each reel 1010 to 1012, the combination of symbols that can be seen by the player changes. That is, each reel 1010 to 1012 functions as a display means for variably displaying a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display means, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be adopted in addition to the reel. Further, in the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 84, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 1000, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

On the back surface of each reel 1010 to 1012, a reel backlight (not shown) for illuminating each symbol displayed on the symbol display window 1013 is arranged. It is desirable that the reel backlight is shielded for each symbol so that the individual symbols can be evenly illuminated. Inside the slot machine 1000, an optical sensor (not shown) including a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit is provided in the vicinity of each reel 1010 to 1012, and the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit of this optical sensor are provided. A light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the spaces. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the position of the symbol on the reel in the rotation direction is determined, and the reels 1010 to 1012 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the winning line.

The winning line indicator lamp 1020 is a lamp indicating a valid winning line 1014. The valid winning line is predetermined by the number of medals bet as a game medium. There are 5 winning lines 1014. For example, if one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line is valid, and if two medals are bet, the upper horizontal winning line and the lower horizontal winning line are added. If three medals are valid and three medals are bet, the five lines with the addition of the right-down winning line and the upper-right winning line will be valid as the winning line. The number of winning lines 1014 is not limited to 5 lines, and for example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line, the upper horizontal winning line, the lower horizontal winning line, and the right. Five lines, a down winning line and an upper right winning line, may be valid as winning lines. Hereinafter, a valid winning line may be referred to as a valid line.

The notification lamp 1023 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus) has been internally won in the internal lottery described later, or that the bonus game is in progress. The game medal insertable lamp 1024 is a lamp for notifying the player that the game medal can be inserted. The re-game lamp 1022 informs the player that the current game can be re-played (no need to insert a medal) when the re-game, which is one of the winning roles in the previous game, is won. It is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 1028 is a lamp for directing.

The medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (called credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. In this embodiment, a maximum of three medals are inserted each time the medal insertion button 1030 is pressed, two medals are inserted when the medal insertion button 1031 is pressed, and 3 when the medal insertion button 1032 is pressed. It is designed to be thrown in. Hereinafter, the medal insertion button 1032 is also referred to as a MAX medal insertion button. The game medal insertion lamp 1029 lights up a number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when a predetermined number of medals are inserted, the game start operation for notifying that the game start operation is possible. The lamp 1021 lights up.

The medal insertion slot 1041 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals at the start of the game. That is, the medal can be inserted electronically by pressing the medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032, or the actual medal can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion port 1041. Is. The stored number display 1025 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) numerically. The payout number display 1027 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning some winning combination. In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 84, the stored number display 1025, the game information display 1026, and the payout number display 1027 are composed of a 7-segment (SEG) display.

The start lever 1035 is a lever-type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 1010 to 1012. That is, when a desired number of medals are inserted into the medal insertion port 1041 or the medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032 are operated to operate the start lever 1035, the reels 1010 to 1012 start rotating. The operation on the start lever 1035 is called the game start operation.

The stop button unit 1036 is provided with stop buttons 1037 to 1039 as an example of the operating means. The stop buttons 1037 to 1039 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 1010 to 1012 that have started to rotate by operating the start lever 1035, and are associated with each reel 1010 to 1012. Hereinafter, the operation for the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the final stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. The reel that is the target of the first stop operation is called the first stop reel, the reel that is the target of the second stop operation is called the second stop reel, and the reel that is the target of the third stop operation is called the third stop reel. A light emitting body may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 1037 to 1039, and when the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 can be operated, the light emitting body can be turned on to notify the player.

The medal return button 1033 is a button for removing medals by pressing the button when the inserted medals are jammed. The checkout button 1034 is a button for settling medals and bet medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000 and discharging them from the medal payout outlet 1055. The door key hole 1040 is a hole for inserting a key for unlocking the front door 1002 of the slot machine 1000. The medal payout outlet 1055 is a payout exit for paying out medals.

On the right side of the medal insertion button 1032, a chance button 1100 is provided as an example of the operating means. The chance button 1100 can be operated in relation to the operation of the reels 1010 to 1012, or can be operated in relation to the display of the liquid crystal display device 1057. Further, the chance button 1100 can take a plurality of states like the pachinko machine 100 according to the above embodiment, and the state may be changed during the operation valid period of the chance button 1100.

The information display button unit 1050 is provided with an information display button 1046. The information display button 1046 is, for example, an operation button for calling a user menu (for example, a menu for setting game history information of an individual player), and is composed of a plurality of buttons. The information display button 1046 corresponds to an operating means.

A title panel 1062 for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps is provided at the lower part of the stop button unit 1036, and the title panel lamp 1064 is a lamp for lighting the title panel 1062. At the bottom of the title panel 1062, a medal payout outlet 1055 and a medal tray 1061 are provided.

The sound hole 1081 is a hole for outputting the sound of the speaker provided inside the slot machine 1000 to the outside. The side lamps 1044 provided on the left and right parts of the front door 1002 are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. An effect device 1060 is arranged on the upper part of the front door 1002, and a sound hole 1043 is provided on the upper part of the effect device 1060. The effect device 1060 includes a shutter (shielding device) 1063 composed of two right shutters 1063a and a left shutter 1063b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) arranged behind the shutter 1063. When the right shutter 1063a and the left shutter 1063b are opened horizontally in front of the liquid crystal display device 1057, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) is displayed in front of the slot machine 1000 (game). It has a structure that appears on the person's side).

Even if it is not a liquid crystal display device, it may be configured to be able to display various production images and various game information. For example, a multi-segment display (7-segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, and a plasma display. , A reel (drum), or a display device including a projector and a screen. Further, the display screen has a square shape, and the entire display screen is configured to be visible to the player. In the case of the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 84, the display screen is rectangular, but it may be square. Further, it is also possible to provide an ornament (not shown) on the periphery of the display screen so that the display screen looks irregular as a result of a part of the periphery of the display screen being hidden by the ornament. Further, although the display screen is a flat surface, it may have a curved surface.

Further, the present invention has given an example of a pachinko machine and a slot machine as a game table, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be applied to an arrange ball game machine, a rock game machine, a smart ball, and the like.

It should be noted that the predetermined conditions for selecting music are that if the slot machine 1000 is shown in FIG. 84, the bonus of the n consecutive villas is won, and that specific symbols (for example, 7 red symbols) are aligned and won the bonus. Winning a bonus with all the symbols on the winning line (for example, the horizontal winning line in the middle row), winning the AT of the 10th consecutive villa, winning a predetermined number of sets or an additional number of games, predetermined Winning an AT that has the same role as.

Further, the jackpot gaming states in the examples shown in FIGS. 73 to 83 are the bonus gaming state, the ART state, the AT state, and the like in the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 84. In addition, the time-saving game state becomes the ART state, the AT state, etc. when the jackpot game state is set to the bonus game state, and becomes the AT state, the RT state, etc. when the jackpot game state is set to the ART state. ..

Further, the reset timing of the music release information was when the RAM was cleared, but it may be reset when the power failure recovery is performed across the dates, or even if the dates are crossed, a certain specific time (for example, for example). It may not be reset if the power is restored by 6 am).

Further, when the music is restored from the power failure, the preset initial music is selected as the selected music.

In the above description,
"A game console equipped with a sound output means [for example, a speaker 120] capable of outputting music.
The sound output means can output a musical piece in a first advantageous state [for example, a jackpot game state, a bonus game state, an ART state].
The first advantageous state is a state that is advantageous to the player.
Predetermined conditions [For example, winning a big hit in the symbol variation display of special figure 2 performed as a result of the remaining hold of special figure 2 being digested in the non-time saving game state, and as a result of pre-reading during the hold during the big hit game, the big hit again. There is a hold to become (so-called hold consecutive villa), winning the most advantageous jackpot for the player (for example, the jackpot with the largest number of rounds or the jackpot with the largest number of time reductions), the most for the player Winning a disadvantageous jackpot (for example, a jackpot with the smallest number of rounds or a jackpot with the smallest number of time reductions), winning a jackpot at the nth consecutive villa, winning a bonus at the nth consecutive villa, specifying To win a bonus with all the symbols (for example, 7 red symbols), to win a bonus with all the symbols on a specific winning line (for example, the horizontal winning line in the middle row), and to win the AT of the 10th consecutive villa. , Satisfaction of the predetermined AT start condition (for example, winning in addition to a predetermined number of sets or a predetermined number of games, winning an AT having a predetermined combination, etc.)] is not satisfied. The number of first songs that can be output by the sound output means in an advantageous state [for example, "5" in FIG. 78 (a), "5 or more and 8 or less" if the predetermined condition is satisfied even once (FIG. 79). (See)] and the number of second songs that the sound output means can output in the first advantageous state when the predetermined condition is satisfied [for example, determined by lottery as shown in FIG. 78 (b). Different from one song "1"],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

According to this game table, when the predetermined condition is achieved, the number of songs is different from that when the predetermined condition is not achieved, so that the special feeling in the first advantageous state when the predetermined condition is achieved is enhanced, and the game can be played. You can improve your interest.

also,
"The number of the second music [for example, 1] is smaller than the number of the first music [for example, 5 or more and 8 or less].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

By reducing the number of songs that can be output in the first advantageous state when the predetermined condition is achieved, the special feeling in the first advantageous state when the predetermined condition is achieved is enhanced, and the interest of the game is improved. Can be done.

also,
"A display means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208] is provided.
The sound output means can output a musical piece even in the second advantageous state.
The second advantageous state is a state advantageous for the player, which is different from the first advantageous state [for example, when the time-saving gaming state and the first advantageous state are the bonus gaming states. ART state or AT state, AT state or RT state when the first advantageous state is ART state],
In the second advantageous state, the display means does not display a moving image corresponding to the music output by the sound output means [for example, FIGS. 73 (a) to 73 (i) and 81 (k)). ~ Figure (o)],
In the first advantageous state, the display means displays a moving image corresponding to the music output by the sound output means [for example, FIGS. 81 (g) to 83 (h) and 83 (g)). ~ Figure (k)],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, in the first advantageous state, the game can be excited by displaying a moving image together with the output of the music, and in the second advantageous state, the game can be excited by the output of the music, for example. It is possible to prevent the fluctuation effect of notifying whether or not to win the prize from being hindered.

also,
"The game information by the music output by the sound output means in the first advantageous state when the predetermined condition is satisfied [for example, the set value, the jackpot as a result of pre-reading during the hold during the jackpot game, the jackpot again. It is possible to suggest that there is a hold (so-called hold consecutive villas), the type of hit (whether or not there is a probability change), and the number of consecutive villas].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, by suggesting game information when the predetermined condition is achieved, it is possible to increase the motivation to play the game to achieve the predetermined condition.

The game information may be information about a game that the player cannot normally know.

also,
"The operation means [for example, the operation key unit 190] is provided.
In the first advantageous state when the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the music output by the sound output means can be selected by using the operation means [for example, FIG. 83 (h) and FIG. j)], in the first advantageous state when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the music output by the sound output means cannot be selected by using the operation means [for example, FIG. 82 (h)). The music selection decision display MD shown in the above is displayed and cannot be selected].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, the music cannot be selected in the first advantageous state when the predetermined condition is achieved, so that the music is a special music (a music suggesting information). It is possible to suggest that, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It should be noted that the display means may be provided, and the display means may be capable of displaying a music selection display representing a music that can be selected by the player.

Further, the display means does not display the music selection display in the first advantageous state when the predetermined condition is satisfied.
The display means may be capable of displaying the music selection display in the first advantageous state when the predetermined condition is not satisfied.

Further, the display means does not display the lyrics of the music output from the sound output means in the second advantageous state.
The display means may display the lyrics of the music output from the sound output means in the first advantageous state.

When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the first music [for example, music 7 or music 7 or Music 8] is added, and the first music can be selected in the first advantageous state, but the first music cannot be selected in the normal gaming state [for example, non-time saving gaming state]. It may be [for example, FIG. 79].

In a part of the period [for example, the round in which the V prize can be obtained (final round)] in the first advantageous state [for example, the jackpot game state], the music cannot be selected by using the operation means. You may.

In a part of the period in the second advantageous state [for example, the time saving game state] [for example, in the period of super reach, the period in which the symbol of the special figure is stopped and displayed, the period in which the demo display is executed, or the demo display The period during which the menu display is executed] may also be in a mode in which music cannot be selected using the operation means.

Alternatively, in a part of the period in the normal gaming state [for example, the non-time saving gaming state], the music may not be selected by using the operating means.

Further, when the power is cut off while the music is selected and then the power is restored, the preset initial music may be treated as the selected music.

The following will be added, including what has been explained so far.

(Appendix 1)
Music can be output during a special game (for example, a big hit game).
The number of songs that can be output during the special game when the predetermined condition is not satisfied is a predetermined number, but the number of songs that can be output during the special game when the predetermined condition is satisfied is a specific number.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 2)
The game console described in Appendix 1.
The specific number is less than the predetermined number,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 3)
The game console described in Appendix 1 or 2.
It is possible to output a predetermined number of songs even during an advantageous game (for example, a time-saving game).
During the special game, the video according to the type of the music being output is displayed, but during the advantageous game, the video according to the type of the music being output is not displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 4)
The game console described in any one of Supplementary notes 1 to 3.
The music output during the special game when the predetermined conditions are satisfied may suggest the predetermined information related to the game.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 5)
The game console described in any one of Appendix 1 to 4.
The player can select the music to be output using the operating means during the special game when the predetermined condition is not satisfied, but the player outputs the music using the operating means during the special game when the predetermined condition is satisfied. Music cannot be selected,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 6)
The non-time saving game state is
It is a gaming state in which a gaming ball should be launched toward the first gaming area (left area).
The time saving game state is
It is a gaming state in which a gaming ball should be launched toward the second gaming area (right area).
If the first condition is met when transitioning from the time-saving game state to the non-time-saving game state,
Regulates the execution of the first hitting method notification (left-handed hitting notification) that notifies that the first game area should be fired in the first period after the transition from the time-saving gaming state to the non-time-saving gaming state.
After the end of the first period, the first hitting method notification is executed over the third period.
A game table that features that.

(Appendix 7)
The game console described in Appendix 6
When the second condition different from the first condition is satisfied when shifting from the time-saving game state to the non-time-saving game state,
In the second period, which is shorter than the first period after the transition from the time-saving game state to the non-time-saving game state, the execution of the first striking method notification is regulated.
After the end of the second period, the first hitting method notification is executed over the third period.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 8)
The game console according to Appendix 6 or 7.
If the first and second conditions are not met when transitioning from the time-saving game state to the non-time-saving game state,
After shifting from the time-saving gaming state to the non-time-saving gaming state, the first hitting method notification may be executed over the third period.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 9)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary notes 6 to 8.
The first condition is to memorize the first number of special hold.
The second condition is to memorize the special second hold of the second number, which is less than the first number.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 10)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary notes 6 to 9.
When shifting from the non-time-saving game state to the time-saving game state, the second hitting method notification (right-handed hitting notification) is executed to notify that the second game area should be fired.
In the final fluctuation in the time-saving game state,
A third hitting method notification (hold storage notification) that notifies that the second game area should be fired in a mode different from the second hitting method notification that was executed in the fluctuation before the final change. While executing, the number hold is displayed in the same manner as the number hold displayed in the change before the final change.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 11)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 6 to 10.
In the special game judgment based on the special one in the non-time saving game state, the special symbol (time saving symbol) is not won, while in the special game judgment based on the special two (special figure 2 remaining hold) in the non-time saving game state, the said You may win a special design,
If the special symbol is won, the game shifts to the time-saving game state without going through the special game.
A game table characterized by that.

In addition, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention merely list the most suitable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what has been done. In addition, even if the constituent requirements are included only in the description of the embodiment, the embodiment, the modified example, the various examples, the appendices, etc. described above, the constituent requirement may be the other embodiment or the embodiment. It may be applied to a modified example, various examples, an appendix, and the like. That is, unless there is a factor that hinders the application, the constituent requirements contained only in the description of the embodiment, the embodiment, the modification, the various examples, the appendix, etc. are applied to other embodiments, the embodiment, and the modification. Even if it is applied to examples, various examples, and appendices, it holds as one cohesive technical idea.

100 Pachinko machine 106 Front frame door 124 Game area 126 Ball storage plate 136 Effect button 190 Operation key unit 191 Up button 192 Down button 200 Game board 201 Game board 206 Effect lamp 207 Sub liquid crystal display device 208 Decorative pattern display device 210 Ordinary pattern display Device 212 1st special figure display device 214 2nd special figure display device 228 Normal drawing start port 23 Attacker unit 234 1st variable winning opening, variable winning opening 2341 Door member 235 2nd variable winning opening 2351 Door member 300 Main control unit 304 CPU
306 ROM
308 RAM
400 1st sub-control unit 404 CPU
406 ROM
408 RAM
500 2nd sub control unit 504 CPU
506 ROM
508 Memory 7 1st effect movable body 71 Light emitting part 8 2nd effect movable body 81 Upper arm part 82 Forearm part 821 1st finger (thumb)
822 Second finger (index finger)
823 3rd finger (middle finger)
824 4th finger (ring finger)
825 5th finger (pinkie)
h11, h12 Hold icon h0 Variable icon LT1 to LT5 Reach title ZT Zone title MC Music selection display MD Music selection decision display LH1 Left-handed first display LH2 Left-handed second display RH1 Right-handed first display RH2 Right-handed second display

Claims (12)

A symbol display means that can execute variable display of special symbols,
A game control means that can control the game state,
A production means that can perform multiple productions,
It is a game table equipped with
The game control means is a means that can be controlled into a low probability state and a high probability state.
The high-probability state is a state in which the probability that the result of the variation display of the special symbol becomes a big hit is higher than that of the low-probability state.
The game control means is a means capable of starting the first time saving state.
The game control means is a means capable of starting a second time saving state.
The first time saving state is a time saving state that may be started when the jackpot game ends and shifts to the low probability state.
When the result of the variation display of the special symbol of the fourth number of times off is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit after the first time saving state is started, the first time saving state ends.
The second time-saving state is the number of times that the result of the variation display of the special symbol that is out of the way is continuously displayed without becoming a big hit after the big hit game is completed and the state shifts to the low probability state (hereinafter, "fitting"). It is a time-saving state that may shift when the number of times is the first number.
When the result of the variation display of the special symbol of the second number of times off is displayed continuously without becoming a big hit after the start of the second time saving state, the second time saving state ends.
From the end of the second time saving state to the big hit, the second time saving state is not started.
The effect executed in the first time saving state and the effect executed in the second time saving state are different.
A game table characterized by that. The game console according to claim 1.
One of the plurality of effects is the first suggestive effect.
One of the plurality of effects is a second suggestive effect.
One of the plurality of effects is a third suggestive effect.
The first suggestion effect is an effect of suggesting the number of times of variable display of the special symbol in the first time saving state.
The second suggestion effect is an effect of suggesting the number of times of fitting.
The third suggestion effect is an effect of suggesting the number of times of variable display of the special symbol in the second time saving state.
In the first time saving state, the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect are executed.
In the second time saving state, the third suggestion effect is executed.
A game table characterized by that. The game console according to claim 1.
One of the plurality of effects is a second suggestive effect.
The second suggestion effect is an effect of suggesting the number of times of fitting.
The second suggestion effect may be executed in the normal game state, and the second suggestion effect may be executed.
The second suggestion effect is executed in the normal gaming state shifted after the first time saving state is completed.
The second suggestion effect is not executed in the normal gaming state shifted after the second time saving state ends.
A game table characterized by that. The game console according to any one of claims 1 to 3.
One of the plurality of productions is the fifth production,
The fifth effect is an effect that includes at least a display indicating the cumulative number of acquired balls acquired in a series of advantageous states from the start of a certain jackpot game to the end of the first time saving state.
The fifth effect is executed in relation to the number of times of variation display of the special symbol, which is shifted in the first time saving state, becomes the fourth number.
The fifth effect is not executed in relation to the number of times of variation display of the special symbol that is shifted in the second time saving state becomes the second number of times.
A game table characterized by that. The game console according to any one of claims 1 to 4.
In the first time saving state, the effect is executed in the first effect mode.
In the second time saving state, the effect is executed in the second effect mode, and the effect is executed.
The production mode in the first production mode and the production mode in the second production mode are different production modes.
A game table characterized by that. The game console according to any one of claims 1 to 5.
A fluctuation time determination means that can determine one fluctuation time from a plurality of fluctuation times,
With multiple variable time tables,
With
The fluctuation time determining means of the plurality of fluctuation time tables is used from the start of the normal gaming state shifted after the end of the first time saving state to the execution of the fluctuation display of the fifth special symbol. Select one variation time from our first variation time table,
The fluctuation time determining means selects one fluctuation time from the second fluctuation time table among the plurality of fluctuation time tables in the normal gaming state shifted after the second time reduction state ends.
The first fluctuation time table is a fluctuation time table that is not selected when the power is turned on.
The first fluctuation time table and the second fluctuation time table are different fluctuation time tables.
A game table characterized by that. The game console according to any one of claims 1 to 6.
One of the plurality of effects is the second effect,
The second effect is an effect that at least suggests information about the second time saving state.
A game table characterized by that. The game console according to claim 7.
The second effect is an effect that includes information that suggests at least the number of fits.
A game table characterized by that. The game console according to claim 7 or 8.
The second effect is a notification including information that at least suggests the number of times of variation display of the special symbol until the number of times of fitting becomes the first number of times.
A game table characterized by that. The game console according to any one of claims 7 to 9.
The second effect is an effect that can be performed in one of a plurality of aspects.
One of the plurality of aspects is the first aspect.
One of the plurality of aspects is the second aspect.
The first aspect and the second aspect are different aspects.
After the power is turned on, the second effect may be executed in the first aspect.
When the second condition is satisfied after the execution of the second effect is started in the first aspect, the second effect changes from the first aspect to the second aspect.
A game table characterized by that. The game console according to any one of claims 1 to 10.
The game control means is a means capable of starting a third time saving state.
The third time saving state is a time saving state that may be started when the time saving symbol is displayed as a result of the variable display of the special symbol.
The time saving symbol is a symbol different from the jackpot symbol,
A game table characterized by that. The game console according to any one of claims 1 to 11.
The game console is a pachinko machine.
A game table characterized by that.

Images